Manual 82560 XXXX en US 6

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540 Series

Service Manual
www.hp.com/videos/A3
www.hp.com/support/lje82500mfp
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540,
E82550, E82560 -Service Manual
SUMMARY
Learn about theory of operation, remove and replace, troubleshooting on the printer. Parts are either customer-
self repair (CSR) replaceable, or field replaceable units (FRUs) which require installation by a trained field-service
technician. Use the provided parts diagrams and tables to identify the required part.
Legal information
Copyright and License
© Copyright 2022 HP Development

Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation

without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject

to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.
Edition 21.3, 9/2023

Revision History
View a list of document revisions.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP
products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be
liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Table Revision History
Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number
21.3 September, 2023 Add footnote to Booklet Maker speed.
21.2 June, 2023 Added JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED to image scanner PN list as per HPPK PR 362.
21.1 May, 2023 Updated the reservoir assembly part number JC63-01088E to X3A79-60003 per HPPK
PR345.
Updated the DCF PCA part number JC92-02738A to V1F98-67001 per HPPK PR324.
Updated the 3K sHCI PCA part number JC92-02738C to Y1G20-67001 per HPPK PR324.
21 April, 2023 Updated the 2K HCI PCA part number JC92-02738B to Y1G21-67001 per HPPK PR315.
20.1 October, 2022 Minor graphic change in the "Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA" diagram
20.0 July, 2022 Changed the part number for the "Bridge unit" from JC90-01401B to JC90-01772B.
19.0 June, 2022 Changed the consumable life of the Z8W51A Flow ADF rollers from 100,000 to 200,000
pages in the Maintenance Parts table.
18.0 April, 2022 Corrected Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock) part number on the graphic.
17.0 March, 2022 Corrected a part number for a wire harness in the "Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST
Lock)" and the "Front unit" diagram.
16.0 February, 2022 Removed the Automatically Straighten menu item from the Scan menu table in the "Control
panel menus" section, as that option is not available.
15.0 January, 2022 Updated the exploded view diagram for the 3K sHCI frame to indicate that part #14 (Assy -
frame latch sensor front) is orderable.
Updated the exploded view diagram for the 3K sHCI main 1 to include a new part (callout
#17), and updated the 3K sHCI main 1 parts list (table) to include the new item #17 (Latch
bracket frame) and an accompanying footnote.
14.0 October, 2021 Added toner cartridge mount design change content in the toner cartridge topic (portal
request 5435). See Toner cartridge on page 61.
13.0 April, 2021 Part number updates and general edits.
12.0 May, 2020 Part number updates and general edits.
11.0 April, 2020 SRM migration to SDL Tridion Docs.
Part number updates and general edits.
Updated SSBM sections to current HPPK content. See Stapler/stacker and booklet maker
(SSBM) on page 1231.
iii
Table Revision History (continued)

Number
10.0 January, 2020 Updated Setting standard tone in image quality problems and solutions. See Setting
standard tone on page 1156.
Added Jagged characters, unclear characters, or blurred text to image quality problems and
solutions. See Jagged characters, unclear characters, or blurred text on page 1157.
Added electrical-mechanical diagrams content. See Electrical-mechanical relationships

diagrams on page 1174
9.0 June, 2019 Updated all inner finisher content. See Inner finisher on page 2458.
Updated the developer unit remove and replace procedure. See Removal and replacement:
Developer unit on page 201.
Added the right door dampener kit remove and replace procedure. See Removal and
replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit on page 543.
5.0 September, 2018 Added/updated E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series content.
Added or updated repair topics for the E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series:
● Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX) on page 688
● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX) on page 693
● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX) on page 697
● Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS) on page 701
● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX) on page 711
● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX) on
page 723
● Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner (LX) on page 719
● Removal and replacement: Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX) on page
731
● Removal and replacement: Document feeder feed motor (LX) on page 738
● Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX) on page 223
● Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD) on page 426
● HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540du-E82560du - Removal and replacement:

Formatter (du models) on page 418
● Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD; du models) on page 434
● Removal and replacement: Accelerator board (GX ADF only) on page 431
4.0 July, 2018 Updated parts numbers throughout document to remove "SAM-" prefix and updated new
part numbers as identified.
Minor content edits (including graphics)
iv Revision History
Table Revision History (continued)

Number
3.0 November, 2017 Added formatter cabling content
Added Scan in Low remove and replace procedure
Updated code data for Diagnostics and Service Functions
Replaced Product Overview with the UG-style Printer Views and removed the previous
"Machine external view" section.
Updated R&R TOC level to 1.
Replaced references to SAW with WISE and removed QR codes.
Replaced Samsung Paper Jam content with the UG content
Moved specifications out of the appendix to the Product Specifications chapter
Added additional specification content to the Product Specifications chapter from the UG
Removed the lists of tables and figures and the alphabetical and numerical lists of parts
Replaced the glossary with the updated glossary from Topaz
Placed ESD cautions at the beginning of the R&R sections for the main printer and both
finishers
Removed the Samsung precaution sections
Updated variable list items to refer only to Diamond
Updated part numbers, part descriptions, diagrams, and photos
Reorganized remove and replace chapter (blended into parts and diagrams)
Integrated over 250 new edits into existing content, including updated video links and
part numbers. Reformatted tables and resource pages, added xrefs, and changed critical
terminology.
2.0 July, 2017 Updated TOC to only consist of 3 levels
Add error code and CPMD overview
Added “How to search for documentation” section.
Updated toner average yield data
Remove all occurrences of ITB
Changed all occurrences of #2 Phillips to #2 JIS
1.0 April, 2017 Service manual initial release
v
Conventions used in this guide
Learn about the conventions used in this publication.
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the
product.
WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.
vi Conventions used in this guide

Table of contents
1 Product specifications and description............................................................................................................................................................................... 1

Printer views ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Printer front view................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Printer back view................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
Interface ports..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Control-panel view............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3
Inner finisher view ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
Stapler/stacker finisher view .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Booklet finisher view....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Technical specifications............................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Supported operating systems ................................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Mobile printing solutions............................................................................................................................................................................................ 13
Printer dimensions.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ............................................................................... 15
Operating-environment range ............................................................................................................................................................................... 15
General specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
Print specifications ........................................................................................................................................................................................................18
Scan specifications....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Copy specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Supplies................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
Maintenance parts ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
Paper handling specifications .............................................................................................................................................................................. 29
Network and software specifications............................................................................................................................................................. 33
Options....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................37
Feeding system ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Feeding system overview ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Main components and functions........................................................................................................................................................................ 45
Cassette................................................................................................................................................................................................................................50
Pickup Assembly.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 51
Registration unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Tray 1 feed assembly .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Fuser unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Fuser unit overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Fuser unit drive................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 55
Fuser unit temperature control ............................................................................................................................................................................ 55
Loop control........................................................................................................................................................................................................................56
Image creation..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................57
Printing process overview.........................................................................................................................................................................................57
Imaging unit ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................58
Toner cartridge.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 61
Dynamic security............................................................................................................................................................................................................63
vii
Paper transfer belt unit...............................................................................................................................................................................................63
Laser scanner unit ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................66
Laser scanner unit overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................66
Laser scanning optical path ....................................................................................................................................................................................67
Laser synchronizing detectors.............................................................................................................................................................................68
Drive system..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................69
Pickup and cassette lift drive.................................................................................................................................................................................69
Feed drive..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................70
Registration drive .............................................................................................................................................................................................................71
Fuser release/exit drive...............................................................................................................................................................................................72
Drive motors........................................................................................................................................................................................................................73
Main drive unit motors .................................................................................................................................................................................................75
Toner supply drive ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................76
Toner reservoir drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................................76
Flatbed Scanner System.......................................................................................................................................................................................................76
Flatbed scanner system overview......................................................................................................................................................................77
Scanning system components............................................................................................................................................................................. 79
Caution for moving the scanner..........................................................................................................................................................................85
Document feeder LX (du models) ..................................................................................................................................................................................86
Document feeder LX overview .............................................................................................................................................................................86
Document feeder LX electrical parts ...............................................................................................................................................................87
Document feeder LX registration.......................................................................................................................................................................88
Document feeder LX drive system ....................................................................................................................................................................88
Document feeder LX scanning position ......................................................................................................................................................... 91
Document feeder LX specifications................................................................................................................................................................. 92
Flow document feeder dn/z models (GX and sGX)............................................................................................................................................. 92
Flow document feeder overview......................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Flow document feeder sensors...........................................................................................................................................................................93
Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor ..........................................................................................................95
Flow document feeder drive system................................................................................................................................................................ 95
Flow document feeder specifications .............................................................................................................................................................97
Flow document feeder registration...................................................................................................................................................................98
Flow document feeder scanning position....................................................................................................................................................98
Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor.................................................................................................................99
Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method.......................................................................................................................100
Flow ADF z bundles (GX)............................................................................................................................................................................................101
Hardware configuration.......................................................................................................................................................................................................101
Main controller................................................................................................................................................................................................................103
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H) .................................................................................................................................... 114
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3R) for GX/sGX only..............................................................................................116
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) ........................................................................................................................................118
Fuser drive assembly ................................................................................................................................................................................................120
High voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA ........................................................................................................................................................ 121
Eraser PCA ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 123
Fuser PCA............................................................................................................................................................................................................................124
Waste Sensor PCA .......................................................................................................................................................................................................124
Paper Size sensor PCA............................................................................................................................................................................................. 125
viii
Flow document feeder PCA .................................................................................................................................................................................. 125
Scan joint PCA ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 126
CCDM PCA .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................127
WLED IF PCA......................................................................................................................................................................................................................127
WLED PCA.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Dual cassette feeder (DCF).............................................................................................................................................................................................. 128
High capacity input tray (HCI) .........................................................................................................................................................................................133
Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)............................................................................................................................................................................137
2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement................................................................................................................................................................. 141

HP service and support ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 141
Order parts by authorized service providers...................................................................................................................................................... 142
Ordering............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 142
Orderable parts .............................................................................................................................................................................................................143
How to use parts lists and diagrams.........................................................................................................................................................................143
ESD precautions.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................143
Service approach....................................................................................................................................................................................................................143
Precautions when replacing parts...................................................................................................................................................................143
Before performing service .................................................................................................................................................................................... 145
After performing service ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 145
Post-service test ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 145
Maintenance ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................146
Cleaning the paper dust stick .............................................................................................................................................................................146
Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX)..................................................................................................................... 149
Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX).........................................................................................................150
Cleaning the scanner glass................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Main parts ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Covers................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Alphabetical parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................................................186
Numerical parts list......................................................................................................................................................................................................187
Main assembly 1 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................187
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................393
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................395
Main assembly 2...........................................................................................................................................................................................................396
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 493
Exit assemblies ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 495
Numerical parts list.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 507
Cassettes tray 2/3 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 507
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 510
Main frame assembly................................................................................................................................................................................................ 510
Drive system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................569
ix
Alphabetical parts list ................................................................................................................................................................................................571
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................572
Main frame pickup 1 and 2......................................................................................................................................................................................572
Alphabetical parts list ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 591
Main (sub) frame pickup.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 592
Right door..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................600
Tray 1...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 652
Right door guide ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 667
Right door exit and takeaway.............................................................................................................................................................................. 670
PTB Transfer .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................673
Reservoir............................................................................................................................................................................................................................680
ADF (LX models)............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 687
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 718
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models).................................................................................................................................................. 718
ADF main frame assembly (LX models) .......................................................................................................................................................729
Flow ADF (GX/sGX) .......................................................................................................................................................................................................743
Numerical parts list......................................................................................................................................................................................................761
Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) ............................................................................................................................................................................761
Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX).......................................................................................................................................................................770
Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) ....................................................................................................................................................................................778
Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX).......................................................................................................................................................................... 788
x
Image scanner...............................................................................................................................................................................................................840
Image scanner, lower................................................................................................................................................................................................855
Dual cassette feeder (DCF)..............................................................................................................................................................................................873
DCF main ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................873
DCF frame......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 897
DCF rear frame..............................................................................................................................................................................................................903
Opt feed drive.................................................................................................................................................................................................................909
DCF second pickup .....................................................................................................................................................................................................910
2000-sheet HCI (department) .........................................................................................................................................................................................911
2K HCI main........................................................................................................................................................................................................................911
2K HCI drive....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 912
2K HCI cassette .............................................................................................................................................................................................................927
2K HCI frame ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................928
2K HCI main pickup.....................................................................................................................................................................................................934
3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and E87640/50/60 only) ......................................................................................935
3K sHCI main 1................................................................................................................................................................................................................935
3K sHCI main 3...............................................................................................................................................................................................................944
3K sHCI main 5...............................................................................................................................................................................................................960
3K sHCI main 6................................................................................................................................................................................................................961
Pickup cover unit..........................................................................................................................................................................................................962
3K sHCI frame ................................................................................................................................................................................................................964
3 Problem solving..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................966
Control panel messages document (CPMD) ......................................................................................................................................................966
Error codes (types and structure) ...................................................................................................................................................................966
How to search for printer documentation.................................................................................................................................................968
Troubleshooting process ....................................................................................................................................................................................................971
Determine the problem source ...........................................................................................................................................................................971
xi
Tools for troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................................................................................982
Problem-solving checklist .....................................................................................................................................................................................982
Print menu map.............................................................................................................................................................................................................984
Print current settings pages................................................................................................................................................................................984
Print event log.................................................................................................................................................................................................................985
Pre-boot menu options ............................................................................................................................................................................................985
Control panel menus...............................................................................................................................................................................................1003
Clear paper jams...................................................................................................................................................................................................................1094
Paper jam locations.................................................................................................................................................................................................1094
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam..............................................................................................................................................................................................1095
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam..............................................................................................................................................................1096
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI............................................................................................................................................................1099
Service mode (tech mode; du models)...................................................................................................................................................................1100
Entering service mode............................................................................................................................................................................................1100
Service mode menu tree........................................................................................................................................................................................1101
Information......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1105
Maintenance counts ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1107
Diagnostics .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1108
Service functions ........................................................................................................................................................................................................1137
Print quality troubleshooting guide...........................................................................................................................................................................1140
Image quality problems and solutions........................................................................................................................................................1140
Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models).....................................................................................................................................................1158
Adjusting the Flow ADF skew .........................................................................................................................................................................................1161
4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams........................................................................................................................................................................................1167
Connection diagrams..........................................................................................................................................................................................................1167
Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER)........................................................................................................................1167
Connection Diagram (Scanner) .......................................................................................................................................................................1168
Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB) .......................................................................................................1169
Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup)......................................................................................................... 1170
Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock).............................................................................................................................................1172
Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB) .....................................................................................................................................................1174
Electrical-mechanical relationships diagrams .................................................................................................................................................1174
Toner supply drive (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific) ...................................................................................................................1174
Registration unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)........................................................................................................................1176
Pickup unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific).....................................................................................................................................1176
Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific) ......................................................................................................................................... 1178
Rear unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific) ........................................................................................................................................1180
CTD unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)..........................................................................................................................................1180
Exit unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) ..................................................................................1181
Fuser exit drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)................................................................1183
Registration drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)..........................................................1183
Feed drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)...........................................................................1184
Pickup drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) .......................................................................1185
MP unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) ..................................................................................1186
Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) ...............................................................................1188
Right door guide (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared).............................................................1190
xii
Right door output takeaway (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared).................................. 1192
Front unit (E82540, E82550, E82560)............................................................................................................................................................1194
Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor (DCF/HCI) .........................................................................................1196
Paper empty and limit-2 sensors (DCF/HCI)............................................................................................................................................1198
Paper empty, path, limit-1, and path sensors (DCF/HCI)..................................................................................................................1199
Paper size sensors (DCF/HCI)...........................................................................................................................................................................1199
HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)......................................................................................................................................................................1200
Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and shift
motor (DCF/HCI).......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1202
Limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor, main limit and empty sensors (DCF/HCI)..............................................1204
Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI)..............................................................1205
Home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty sensor (DCF/HCI)..................................................................................................1206
Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI) .....................................1207
Pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and feed motor (DCF/HCI) ..................................................................................................................1207
Upper/lower paper low sensors (DCF/HCI).............................................................................................................................................1208
Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor (DCF/HCI) .......................................................................................................1209
Main PCAs (SSBM).....................................................................................................................................................................................................1210
Paper detection sensor (SSBM)........................................................................................................................................................................ 1211
Entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter close sensor (SSBM)....... 1212
Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor (SSBM)........................................................................................................ 1213
Curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home sensor, and guide home sensor (SSBM) ................................................... 1214
Feed entrance sensor (SSBM).......................................................................................................................................................................... 1215
Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor, and feed
motor (SSBM)..................................................................................................................................................................................................................1217
Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors (SSBM) ......................................................................................................................1219
Knife motor, stopper home sensor, and stopper solenoid and motor (SSBM).............................................................. 1220
Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor (SSBM) ................................................................................ 1221
Operational panel button PCA and entrance path sensor (SSBM)....................................................................................... 1222
Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor (SSBM).................................. 1223
Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor (SSBM) .......... 1225
Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors (SSBM) .............1227
Bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and bridge guide sensor (SSBM) ............................................................................. 1228
Bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM)......................................................................................................................................................... 1229
5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) ............................................................................................................................................................. 1231

Product specification and description................................................................................................................................................................... 1231
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view ........................................................................................................................... 1231
Detailed Specifications......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1233
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system..................................................................................................................... 1239
Service approach..................................................................................................................................................................................................................1314
Precautions when replacing parts.................................................................................................................................................................1314
Before performing service .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1317
ESD precautions ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1317
After performing service ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1317
Post-service test .........................................................................................................................................................................................................1318
Order parts by authorized service providers ........................................................................................................................................1318
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers)..........................................................1318
Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)....................................................................................................................................................................1319
Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher) .................................................................................................................................................................1353
xiii
Bridge unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1373
Covers................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1396
Entrance unit.................................................................................................................................................................................................................1463
Punch unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1468
Tray diverter unit..........................................................................................................................................................................................................1474
Top exit unit......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1501
Top output tray unit....................................................................................................................................................................................................1527
Main exit unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................................1540
Paddle unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1566
End fence unit...............................................................................................................................................................................................................1598
Tamper unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1632
Stapler unit..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1785
Ejector unit......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1865
Main output tray unit ...............................................................................................................................................................................................2018
Paper holding unit......................................................................................................................................................................................................2076
Buffer unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2132
Booklet maker .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2145
Booklet entrance unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2155
Booklet paddle unit....................................................................................................................................................................................................2172
Booklet end fence unit ...........................................................................................................................................................................................2185
Booklet presser unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 2205
Booklet tamper unit................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2226
Booklet stapler unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2281
Booklet fold unit .........................................................................................................................................................................................................2299
Booklet diverter unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2381
Booklet exit unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2404
Booklet output tray unit.........................................................................................................................................................................................2422
PCA.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2425
Problem solving..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2443
Control panel message document (CPMD)........................................................................................................................................... 2443
Clear paper jams ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2443
Finisher system diagram................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2456
6 Inner finisher ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2458

Product specification and description................................................................................................................................................................. 2458
Inner finisher view .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2458
Detailed specifications ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2459
Inner finisher system ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2463
Service approach................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2502
Precautions when replacing parts............................................................................................................................................................... 2502
Before performing service ................................................................................................................................................................................2504
ESD precautions .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2505
After performing service ....................................................................................................................................................................................2505
Post-service test .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2505
Order parts by authorized service providers ......................................................................................................................................2505
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)..................................................................................................................2506
Parts and diagrams (inner finisher)..............................................................................................................................................................2507
Covers.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2517
xiv
Entrance unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2539
Exit unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2554
Paper support unit ....................................................................................................................................................................................................2573
Paddle unit ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2661
Tamper unit.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2682
Stapler unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................2792
Ejector unit......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2818
End fence unit..............................................................................................................................................................................................................2885
Output tray unit ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................2895
Paper holding unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................2956
Punch unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3001
Problem solving......................................................................................................................................................................................................................3014
Control panel message document (CPMD)............................................................................................................................................3014
Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher)............................................................................................................................................3015
Punch waste full sensor........................................................................................................................................................................................3016
Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor .................................................................................................................. 3017
Entrance motor ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3018
Exit sensor ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................3019
Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and paper holding
solenoid ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3020
Paper support motor & home sensor.........................................................................................................................................................3021
Front tamper motor and home sensor...................................................................................................................................................... 3022
Rear tamper motor and home sensor.......................................................................................................................................................3023
End fence sensor...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3024
Stapler position motor and sensor..............................................................................................................................................................3025
Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor............................................3026
Output tray motor and sensor ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3027
Output tray top of stack sensor.....................................................................................................................................................................3028
Top cover switch........................................................................................................................................................................................................3029
Front cover switch....................................................................................................................................................................................................3030
Appendix A Certificate of Volatility....................................................................................................................................................................................3031

Certificate of Volatility ......................................................................................................................................................................................................3031
Glossary of terms ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0
Index..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3035
xv
1 Product specifications and description
You will learn more about the following sub sections:
Printer views
Learn more specifically about the different views of the printer.
Printer front view

Learn about the printer components (front view).
Figure 1-1 Printer front view

1 2
3
17 4
16 5
6
7
15 8
9 10
12
13
14 11
Item Description
1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)
2 Automatic document feeder width guides
3 Automatic document feeder input tray
4 Automatic document feeder output tray
5 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)
Product specifications and description 1

Item Description
6 Physical keyboard (Flow models only). Pull the keyboard straight out to use it. (NOTE: Close the keyboard
when it is not in use.)
7 Right door (access for clearing jams)
8 On/off button
9 Tray 1
10 Power switch
11 Power connection
12 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)
13 Tray 2
14 Tray 3
15 Output bin
16 Easy-access USB port. Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer, or to update
the printer firmware. (NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.)
17 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-party devices)
Printer back view

Learn about the printer components (back view).
Figure 1-2 Printer rear view
Item Description
1 Formatter cover
2 Interface ports
3 Serial number and product number label
2 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Interface ports
Learn about the printer components (interface ports).
Figure 1-3 Interface ports
Item Description
1 USB port for connecting external USB devices (NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port
near the control panel.)
2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet network port
3 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port
Control-panel view
Learn about the printer components (control-panel).
NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.
The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.
Return to the Home screen at any time by touching the Home button on the printer control panel.
NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer
configuration.
Interface ports 3
Figure 1-4 Printer control panel
2 3 4 5
6
1
Item Button Description
1 Home button Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.
2 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings and is always present
if users are not logged in. The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out
button is present. Touch the Reset button to resume and release jobs from the
previous pause state and interrupt mode, reset the quick copy count in the copy
count field, exit special modes, reset the display language and the keyboard
layout.
3 Sign In or Sign Out Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.
button
Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The printer restores all
options to the default settings.
NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has configured the printer
to require permission for access to features.
4 Information button Touch the information button to access a screen that provides access to several
types of printer information. Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for
the following information:
● Display Language: Change the language setting for the current user
session.
● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.
● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect directly to the printer
using a phone, tablet, or other device with Wi-Fi.
● Wireless: View or change wireless connection settings (only when an

optional wireless accessory is installed).
● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection settings.
● HP Web Services: View information to connect and print to the printer using
HP Web Services (ePrint).

Item Button Description
5 Help button Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.
The status line provides information about the overall printer status.
6 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the screen sideways to
access more applications.
NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The administrator can

configure which applications appear and the order in which they appear.
7 Start Copy button Touch the Start Copy button to start a copy job.
8 Home-screen page Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in an application. The
indicator current page is highlighted. Swipe the screen sideways to scroll between pages.
Inner finisher view

Learn about the printer components (inner finisher).
Stapler/stacker finisher view

Learn about the printer components (stapler/stacker finisher).
Booklet finisher view

Learn about the printer components (booklet finisher).
Inner finisher view 5

Specifications
Learn about the specifications.
Technical specifications
Learn technical specifications for model bundles.
NOTE: Hole punch accessories are optional for the stapler/stacker, inner finisher, and booklet maker
accessories.
Table 1-1 E82540dn, E82540z, E82550dn, E82550z, E82560dn. E82560z
Model number Item E82540dn E82540z E82550dn E82550z E82560dn E82560z
Product number X3A69A X3A68A X3A72A X3A71A X3A75A X3A74A
Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
capacity)
Tray 2 (520-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

capacity)
Tray 3 (520-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

capacity)
2 x 520-sheet dual Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

cassette feeder
2,000-sheet high- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

capacity input tray
3,000-sheet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

side-mount high-
capacity input tray
Printer cabinet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Stapler/stacker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finishing
accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)

Table 1-1 E82540dn, E82540z, E82550dn, E82550z, E82560dn. E82560z (continued)
Booklet maker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finishing
accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)
Inner finisher Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)
2/3 hole Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

punch accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)
2/4 hole Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

punch accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)
Swedish hole Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

punch accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)
HP Job separator Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Automatic duplex Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

printing
Connectivity 10/100/1000 Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Ethernet LAN
connection with
IPv4 and IPv6
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Easy-access USB Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

port for printing
without a
computer and
upgrading the
firmware
Hardware Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Integration Pocket
for connecting
accessory and
third-party devices
Memory 7 GB base memory Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Mass storage 2 x 320 GB Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

HP Secure High-
Performance Hard
Disk
Technical specifications 7
Security HP Trusted Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Platform Module
Control-panel Color touchscreen Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

display control panel
Retractable Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

keyboard supported supported supported
Print Prints 40 pages Supported Supported Not Not Not Not

per minute (ppm) supported supported supported supported
on A4 and on
letter-size paper.
Prints 50 pages Not Not Supported Supported Not Not

on A4 and on
letter-size paper
Prints 60 pages Not Not Not Not Supported Supported

on A4 and on
letter-size paper
Easy-access Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

USB printing
(no computer
required)
Fax Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Copy and Scan Scans 90 pages Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not
per minute (ppm) supported supported supported
on A4 and letter-
size paper
Scans 120 pages Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

per minute (ppm) supported supported supported
on A4 and letter-
size paper
250-page Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

document feeder
with dual-head
scanning for
single-pass duplex
copying and
scanning
HP EveryPage Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

Technologies supported supported supported
including
ultrasonic multi-
feed detection

Embedded Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

optical character supported supported supported
recognition (OCR)
provides the ability
to convert printed
pages into text
that can be edited
or searched using
a computer
SMART Label Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

feature provides supported supported supported
paper-edge
detection for
automatic page
cropping
Automatic page Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

orientation for supported supported supported
pages that have
at least 100
characters of text
Automatic tone Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

adjustment supported supported supported
sets contrast,
brightness, and
background
removal for each
page
Digital Send Send documents Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
to E-mail, USB, and
shared folders on
a network
Send documents Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

to SharePoint® supported supported supported
Table 1-2 E82540du, E82550du, E82560du
Model number Item E82540du E82550du E82560du
Product number 5CM59A 5CM60A 5CM61A
Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity) Supported Supported Supported
Tray 2 (520-sheet capacity) Supported Supported Supported
Tray 3 (520-sheet capacity) Supported Supported Supported
2 x 520-sheet dual cassette Optional Optional Optional

feeder
2,000-sheet high-capacity Optional Optional Optional

input tray
3,000-sheet side-mount high- Optional Optional Optional

capacity input tray
Printer cabinet Optional Optional Optional
Technical specifications 9
Table 1-2 E82540du, E82550du, E82560du (continued)
Stapler/stacker finishing Optional Optional Optional

accessory (hole punch
accessories are optional)
Booklet maker finishing Optional Optional Optional

Inner finisher accessory Optional Optional Optional

(hole punch accessories are
optional)
2/3 hole punch accessory Optional Optional Optional

optional)
2/4 hole punch accessory Optional Optional Optional

optional)
Swedish hole punch Optional Optional Optional

HP Job separator Optional Optional Optional
Automatic duplex printing Supported Supported Supported
Connectivity 10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN Supported Supported Supported

connection with IPv4 and IPv6
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Supported Supported Supported
Easy-access USB port for Supported Supported Supported

printing without a computer
and upgrading the firmware
Hardware Integration Pocket Supported Supported Supported

for connecting accessory
and third-party devices
Memory 7 GB base memory Supported Supported Supported
Mass storage 2 x 320 GB HP Secure High- Supported Supported Supported

Performance Hard Disk
Security HP Trusted Platform Module Supported Supported Supported
Control-panel display Color touchscreen control Supported Supported Supported

panel
Retractable keyboard Not supported Not supported Not supported
Print Prints 40 pages per minute Supported Not supported Not supported
(ppm) on A4 and on letter-size
paper.
Prints 50 pages per minute Not supported Supported Not supported

paper
Prints 60 pages per minute Not supported Not supported Supported

paper

Table 1-2 E82540du, E82550du, E82560du (continued)
Easy-access USB printing (no Supported Supported Supported

computer required)
Fax Optional Optional Optional
Copy and Scan Scans 90 pages per minute Supported Supported Supported
(ppm) on A4 and letter-size
paper
Scans 80-simplex/160-duplex Supported Supported Supported

images per minute (ipm) on
A4 and letter-size paper (LX
du models only)
100-page document feeder Supported Supported Supported

with dual-head scanning for
single-pass duplex copying
and scanning
HP EveryPage Technologies Not supported Not supported Not supported

including ultrasonic multi-
feed detection
Embedded optical character Not supported Not supported Not supported

recognition (OCR) provides
the ability to convert printed
pages into text that can be
edited or searched using a
computer
SMART Label feature Not supported Not supported Not supported

provides paper-edge
detection for automatic page
cropping
Automatic page orientation Not supported Not supported Not supported

for pages that have at least
100 characters of text
Automatic tone adjustment Not supported Not supported Not supported

sets contrast, brightness, and
background removal for each
page
Digital Send Send documents to E-mail, Supported Supported Supported

USB, and shared folders on a
network
Send documents to Not supported Not supported Not supported

SharePoint®
Supported operating systems

Learn about supported operating systems.
The following information applies to the Printer-Specific Windows PCL 6 and HP print drivers for OS X
and to the software installer.
Windows: The HP Software Installer can be downloaded from the printer support website for this printer
and installs the “HP PCL.6” version 3 print driver, the “HP PCL 6” version 3 print driver, or the “HP PCL-6”
Supported operating systems 11

version 4 print driver, depending on the Windows operating system, along with optional software when
using the software installer. Download the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3
print driver, and the "HP PCL-6" version 4 print driver from the printer-support website for this printer:
www.hp.com/support/ljE82500mfp, or www.hp.com/support/ljE82540mfp.
OS X: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com/
LaserJet or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver.
HP Easy Start is not included in the HP Software Installer.
1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.
2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.
Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.
UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.
Table 1-3 Supported operating systems and print drivers
Operating system Print driver installed (from the software Notes

on the web)
Windows® XP SP3, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print Microsoft retired mainstream support
driver is installed for this operating for Windows XP in April 2009. HP will
system as part of the software continue to provide best effort support
installation. for the discontinued XP operating
system. Some features and page sizes
in the print driver are not supported.
Windows Vista®, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print Microsoft retired mainstream support
driver is installed for this operating for Windows Vista in April 2012. HP will
system as part of the software continue to provide best effort support
installation. for the discontinued Vista operating
system. Some features and page sizes
in the print driver are not supported.
Windows Server 2003 SP2, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print Microsoft retired mainstream support
driver is available for download from the for Windows Server 2003 in July 2010.
printer-support website. Download the HP will continue to provide best effort
driver, and then use the Microsoft Add support for the discontinued Server
Printer tool to install it. 2003 operating system. Some features
and page sizes in the print driver are not
supported.
Windows 7 SP1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print
driver is installed for this operating
system as part of the software
installation.
Windows 8, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print Windows 8 RT support is provided
driver is installed for this operating through Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32-
system as part of the software bit driver.
installation.
Windows 8.1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specific print Windows 8.1 RT support is provided
driver is installed for this operating through Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32-
system as part of the software bit driver.
installation.
Windows 10, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specific print
driver is installed for this operating
system as part of the software
installation.

Table 1-3 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)
Operating system Print driver installed (from the software Notes

on the web)
Windows Server 2008 SP2, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print Microsoft retired mainstream support
driver is available for download from the for Windows Server 2008 in January
printer-support website. Download the 2015. HP will continue to provide best
driver, and then use the Microsoft Add effort support for the discontinued
Printer tool to install it. Server 2008 operating system. Some
features and page sizes in the print
driver are not supported.
Windows Server 2008 SP2, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print
driver is available for download from the
printer-support website. Download the
driver, and then use the Microsoft Add
Printer tool to install it.
Windows Server 2008 R2, SP 1, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print
driver is available for download from the
printer-support website. Download the
driver, and then use the Microsoft Add
Printer tool to install it.
Windows Server 2012, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is

available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver,
and then use the Microsoft Add Printer
tool to install it.
Windows Server 2012 R2, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is
available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver,
and then use the Microsoft Add Printer
tool to install it.
OS X 10.10 Yosemite, OS X 10.11 El To install the print driver, download

Capitan, and OS X 10.12 Sierra HP Easy Start from 123.hp.com/LaserJet.
Follow the steps provided to install the
printer software and print driver.
NOTE: Supported operating systems can change. For a current list of supported operating systems,
go to www.hp.com/support/ljE82500mfp, or www.hp.com/support/ljE82540mfp for HP's all-inclusive
help for the printer.
NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP UPD driver support for this
printer, go to www.hp.com/go/upd. Under Additional information, click the links.
Table 1-4 Minimum system requirements
Windows OS X
● An Internet connection ● Internet connection
● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network ● 1 GB of available hard-disk space

connection
● 2 GB of available hard-disk space
Mobile printing solutions

Learn what HP offers for mobile printing solutions.
Mobile printing solutions 13

HP offers multiple mobile and ePrint solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop,
tablet, smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to HP
Customer Support - Knowledge Base.
● Wi-Fi Direct
● HP ePrint via email (Requires HP Web Services to be enabled and the printer to be registered with
HP Connected)
● HP ePrint app (Available for Android, iOS, and Blackberry)
● HP All-in-One Remote app for iOS and Android devices
● HP ePrint software
● Google Cloud Print
● AirPrint
● Android Printing
Printer dimensions
Learn about printer dimensions.
NOTE: A color printer model is shown in the figure below. However, the dimension information applies
to mono and color printers.
2
3 2
3
Table 1-5 Printer dimensions
Item Normal operating dimensions Maximum operating dimensions
Height 932.2 mm (36.7 in) 1389.4 mm (54.7 in)
Depth 771.1 mm (30.3 in) 1676 mm (66 in)
Width 585 mm (23 in) 1134 mm (47 in)

Table 1-5 Printer dimensions (continued)
Item Normal operating dimensions Maximum operating dimensions
Weight Mono models (82XXX series): 95.6 kg

(210.8 lb)
Color models (87XXX series): 113.1 kg

(249.3 lb)
NOTE: HP recommends that 30 mm (1.81 in) be added to the printer dimensions provided in this
chapter to make sure there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper
ventilation.
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain power
specifications.
See www.hp.com/support/ljE82500mfp, or www.hp.com/support/ljE82540mfp for current information.
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.
Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specifications.
Table 1-6 Operating-environment specifications
Environment Recommended Storage
Temperature 15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F) Not available
Relative humidity 20% to 80% relative humidity (RH) Not available
General specifications
Learn about the general specifications.
Table 1-7 General specifications
Item Description Specification
Processor CPU 1.5 GHz (Quad Core)
User Interface Operational Panel 8 inch touch screen
LED 2 (Power/Status)
Key/Button 1 (Power)
Memory Total 7 GB (3 GB Formatter + 4 GB)
Storage Standard 320 GB HDD
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions 15

Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)
Interface USB (Host) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)
USB (Device) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)
USB (EDI) N/A
Wired LAN Standard (Ethernet 10/100/1G Base TX)
Additional Wired LAN Support Yes (optional)
Wireless LAN/NFC ● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC

Active Type)
● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ac + BLE

+ NFC Active Type)
Warmup Time From Power off (power on to ready) 23 sec
From Sleep 12 sec
Power Consumption Ready Less than 60 W
Normal operation Less than 900 W
Max/Peak Less than 1300 W
Sleep/Low Power Mode Less than 1.07 W
TEC (Default Mode) ● E82540: 2.1 kWh
● E82550: 2.717 kWh
● E82560: 3.1 kWh
Power Requirement ● Input Voltage (Europe): AC 220–240 V (+-6%)
● Input voltage (USA): AC 110–127 V (+-10%)
● Input Voltage (AP): AC 220–240 V (+-6%)
● Rated Frequency: 50/60 Hz (+-2Hz)

Acoustic Noise Level (Sound Power/ Printing Mode

Pressure)
Simplex
● E82540, E82550
– Tray 2: Less than 54 dBA
– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less

than 56 dBA
● E82560

than 58 dBA
Duplex
● E82540, E82550

than 59 dBA
● E82560

than 61 dBA
Copying Mode
Simplex
● E82540
– Tray 1 (MP)/Optional trays:

Less than 60 dBA
● E82550, E82560
– Tray 1 (MP)/Optional trays:

Less than 61 dBA
Duplex
● E82540

than 62 dBA
● E82550

than 63 dBA
General specifications 17
● E82560

Dimensions (W x D x H) Set (without stand) ● 585 x 771.1 x 932.2 mm (23 x 30.3 x

36.7 in)
Weight Set (with supplies) ● 95.6 kg (210.8 lb)
Recommended Monthly Print Volume ● E82540: 80,000 pages
● E82550: 90,000 pages
● E82560: 100,000 pages
Max Monthly Duty Cycle ● E82540: 200,000 pages
● E82550: 250,000 pages
● E82560: 300,000 pages
Print specifications
Learn about the print specifications.

Table 1-8 Print specifications
Item Specification
Print speed Simplex ● E82540
– Up to 40 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in

Letter)

11x17)
● E82550

Letter)

11x17)
● E82560

Letter)

11x17)
Duplex (Simplex to Duplex) ● E82540
– Up to 40 ipm in A4 (40 ipm in

Letter)

11x17)
● E82550

Letter)

11x17)
● E82560

Letter)

11x17)
FPOT From Ready ● E82540: as fast as 8.4 s
● E82550: as fast as 7.5 s
● E82560: as fast as 6.9 s
From Sleep ● E82540: as fast as 20.4 s
● E82550: as fast as 19.5 s
● E82560: as fast as 18.9 s
Resolution 1200 x 1200 dpi (Full Speed)
Printer Language PCL5/PCL6(XL)/PostScript Level 3/PDF

v1.7
Print specifications 19
Table 1-8 Print specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Font PCL 95 scalable fonts (including OCR-A/OCR-

B)/1 Bitmap
PostScript 3 136 scalable fonts
Supporting Operating Systems Windows ● Windows XP (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 2003 Server (32–bit, 64–

bit)
● Windows Vista (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 2008 Server (32–bit, 64–

bit)
● Windows 7 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 2008 Server R2 (64–bit)
● Windows 8 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 8.1 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows Server 2012 (64–bit)
● Windows Server 2012 R2 (64–bit)
Linux ● Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6 (32–

bit, 64–bit)
● Fedora 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20

(32–bit, 64–bit)
● OpenSuSE 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2,

12.3, 13.1 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Ubuntu 10.04, 11.04, 11.10, 12.04, 12.10,

13.04, 13.10, 14.04 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10,

11 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Debian 6, 7 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Mint 13, 14, 15, 16 (32–bit, 64–bit)
Mac OS Mac OS X 10.6–10.10
Direct Print PRN/PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS

Table 1-8 Print specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Print Features ● WSD print
● Secure print
● Stored print
● Booklet
● N-up
● Cover page
● Barcode
● Eco
● Poster
● Glossy
● Watermark
● Tray priority setting
● Auto tray setting
● Tray protection
● USB print
● Secure PDF print
● Google Cloud print
Scan specifications
Learn about the scan specifications.
Table 1-9 Scan specifications
Item Specification
Scan Speed Scan to folder speeds DN bundles (black and

(hardware) white, gray scale, and color)
● Simplex: 90 ipm @ 300

DPI
● 80/160 ipm (du models

only)
● Duplex: 180 ipm @ 300

DPI
Z bundles (black and white,

gray scale, and color)
● Simplex: 120 ipm @

300 DPI
● Duplex: 240 ipm @ 300

DPI
Scan specifications 21
Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Color Mode Mono/Gray/Color
Compatibility Network TWAIN/Network

SANE
Scan Method MMT
File Formats ● PDF
● Searchable PDF
● Compact PDF
● PDF Encryption
● Digital Signature in
PDF
● PDF/A
● Single-Page PDF
● Multi-page PDF
● TIFF
● Single-Page TIFF
● Multi-page TIFF
● XPS
● Single-Page XPS
● Multi-page XPS
● JPEG
Resolution Optical (ADF) Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Optical (Image Scanner) Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Enhanced (ADF) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi
Enhanced (Image Scanner) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi
Scan Destinations ● Email
● FTP
● SMB
● HDD
● USB
● WSD
● PC
● Internet FAX
Multi-destinations Yes

Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Communication Protocol ● SMTP (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/

TLS)
● POP3 (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/

TLS)
● FTP (IPv4, IPv6)
● SMB (IPv4, IPv6)
● WSD
● T4Net
Scan ADF ● Min. A6 SEF 105 mm x

Size 148 mm (4.13 in x 5.83)
● Max. 297 mm x 437

mm (11.7 in x 17.2 in)
Image Scanner Max. 297 mm x 437 mm (11.7

in x 17.2 in)
Scan Original Types Text/Text & Photo/Photo
Copy specifications
Learn about the copy specifications.
Copy specifications 23
Table 1-10 Copy specifications
Item Specification
Copy Speed Single Document Multiple Copy (SDMC) ● E82540
– Up to 40 cpm in A4
● E82550
● E82560
Multiple Document Multiple Copy ● E82540

(MDMC)
– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 40
cpm in A4/Letter
– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 40
ipm in A4/Letter
● E82550
cpm in A4/Letter
ipm in A4/Letter
● E82560
cpm in A4/Letter
ipm in A4/Letter
FCOT From Ready ● E82540: 4.6 s
● E82550: 3.7 s
● E82560: 3.1 s
Resolution Flow ADF ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi
● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi
Image Scanner ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi
● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi
Reduce/Enlarge Flow ADF 25–400% in 1% increments
Image Scanner 25–400% in 1% increments
Preset 25% / 50% A3→A5 / 61% A3→B5 /

64% Ledger→Letter / 70% A3→A4 |
B4→B5 | A4→A5 / 77% Ledger→Legal /
78% Legal→Letter / 81% B4→A4 |
B5→A5 / 86% A3→B4 | A4→B5 / 104%
Executive→Letter / 115% B4→A3 / 121%
Legal→Ledger / 122% A4→B4 / 129%
Letter→Ledger / 141% A4→A3 | A5→A4 /
150% / 200% A5→A3 / 400%
Darkness Control 11 levels

Table 1-10 Copy specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Contrast Control 11 levels
Multi Copy 1–9,999
Duplex Copy Built-in
Copy Original Type ● Text
● Text and Printed Photo
● Text and Glossy Photo
● Newspaper
● Printed Photo
● Glossy Photo
● Copied Original
● Map
● Light Original
Copy Features ● ID Copy
● N-up
● Booklet
● Image Repeat
● Auto Fit
● Book Copy
● Watermark
● Image Overlay
● Stamp
● Covers
● Job Build
● Preview
● Erase Edge
● Image Shift
● Image Adjustment
● Background Adjustment
Supplies
Learn about the required toner cartridge, OPC drum unit, and TCU.
Supplies 25
Table 1-11 Supplies
Item Part number Average yield
Toner Cartridge1 W9037-67902 Approx. 58,000 pages
Standard
Toner cartridge2 W9037MS Approx. 9,000 pages
Introductory
OPC Drum Unit X3A74-67902 Approx. 396,000 pages
TCU X3A74-67926 Approx. 300,000 pages
1Print cartridge life is approximate, based on average A4 /Letter-size page count with ISO coverage.
Declared cartridge yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Actual yields vary considerably based
on images printed and other factors. For more information, visit www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
2Available in APJ countries/regions only.
NOTE: Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the lifespan of the consumable can vary.
IMPORTANT: Toner cartridges or other supplies must be purchased in the same country/region as
the printer being used. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with the
printer. This is due to differing configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the
conditions of a specific country/region.
Maintenance parts
Learn about the printer maintenance parts.
HP recommends replacing the following maintenance parts at specific intervals to make sure the printer
produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer.
Some of the printer parts have a shorter lifespan than the life of the printer.
Table 1-12 Maintenance parts
Item Product number Life Remark
Developer unit Z8W52A 1,200,000 pages
Fuser unit Z7Y76A 360,000 pages 220 V
Z7Y75A 110 V
Paper transfer belt (PTB) Z7Y85A 300,000 pages
Pick/Feed/Reverse Z9M01A 360,000 pages

(separation) roller (for Tray 2-
X)
Tray 1 (MP) Pick/Feed/Reverse Z7Y88A 200,000 pages

(separation) Roller
Flow ADF pick roller assembly Z8W50A 200,000 pages

(GX and sGX z/dn models)

Table 1-12 Maintenance parts (continued)
Item Product number Life Remark
Flow ADF reverse (separation) Z8W51A 200,000 pages

roller assembly (GX and sGX
z/dn models)
ADF pick roller assy (LX du Z7Y64A 200,000

models)
ADF reverse (separation) Z7Y65A 100,000

roller assy (LX du models)
NOTE: Depending on print patterns and the job mode used, maintenance part lifespans vary. See
Replacing the maintenance part for further instructions.
Table 1-13 Maintenance intervals
Device Item 100K 120K 200K 360K PM Note
Paper Path—Set Pickup Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) (Tray1(MP)) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.
Paper Path—Set Forward Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
maintenance parts.
Paper Path—Set Retard Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
maintenance parts.
Paper Path—Set Pickup Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) (Tray2,3) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.
Paper Path—Set Forward Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
maintenance parts.
Paper Path—Set Retard Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
maintenance parts.
Paper Path—Set Feed Roller (1,2,3) Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.
Paper Path—Set Regi Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

maintenance parts.
Paper Path—Set Duplex (1,2,3) Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

maintenance parts.
Paper Path—Set EXIT Roller (1,2) Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
maintenance parts.
Paper Path—Set Pre-Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) (Tray 2,3) dust.
Paper Path—Set Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) dust.
Maintenance parts 27
Table 1-13 Maintenance intervals (continued)
Paper Path—Set Regi Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) dust.
Paper Path—Set Paper dust brush Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) dust.
Paper Path— Pickup Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
DCF/HCI/sHCI (Tray4,5,6) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.
Paper Path— Forward Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
maintenance parts.
Paper Path— Retard Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
maintenance parts.
Paper Path— Pre-Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
DCF/HCI/sHCI (Tray 4,5,6) dust.
Paper Path— Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
DCF/HCI/sHCI dust.
Paper Path— Finisher Paddle Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

Finisher Roller paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.
Paper Path— Booklet Paddle Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

maintenance parts.
Paper Path— Ejector Reverse Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

maintenance parts.
Paper Path— Tamper Base Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

Finisher paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.
Paper Path— Ejector Base Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

maintenance parts.
Paper Path— Feeding Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

maintenance parts.
Paper Path— Punch Chad Bin Clean Empty the chad bin.
Finisher
Paper Path— Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
Finisher dust.
Paper Path— Ejector Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
Finisher (2K/3K Finisher) dust.
Paper Path— End fence Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
Finisher (Inner Finisher) dust.
Scanner—ADF ADF Pick-Up roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
Assembly paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Table 1-13 Maintenance intervals (continued)
Scanner—ADF ADF Separation Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

roller Assembly (Gx paper moistened with water to clean
- z bundle) maintenance parts.
Scanner—ADF ADF Separation Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

roller Assembly (Lx paper moistened with water to clean
- dn, du) maintenance parts.
Scanner—ADF White sheet / White Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

sponge / Feed paper moistened with water to clean
roller maintenance parts.
Perform maintenance tasks as needed during a service visit for parts replacement.
Paper handling specifications

Learn about the paper handling specifications.
Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications
Item Specification
Input Capacity Standard 1040 sheets
Multipurpose 100 sheets
Maximum 6140 sheets
NOTE: Tray 1 (MP) (100) + 2 Tray (1040) + HCI bottom (2000) + sHCI (3000)
Paper handling specifications 29

Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Standard Cassette Capacity ● 520 sheets x 2 (Based on Xerox Premier 80g/m2)

Tray
● Envelope: 50 sheets (only Tray 2 support)
NOTE: Supported Envelopes: Monarch, DL, C4, C5, C6, No.10, No. 9
Media Sizes ● Tray2 : 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 297 mm x 390 mm (3.86 in x 5.5 in — 11.69 in x

15.35 in)
● Tray3 : 139.7 mm x 182 mm — 320 mm x 457.2 mm (5.5 in x 7.17 in — 12.59 in

x 18 in)
Media Types ● Plain
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Thick Cardstock
● Heavy Cardstock
● Extra Heavy Cardstock 1
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Thick Glossy
● Heavy Glossy
● Heavy Weight
● Extra Heavy Weight 1 ,2 ,3 4
● Label
● Transparency
● Envelope (Cassette 1 Only)
Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 70-90 g/m² (18.5-24 lb/ Duplex)
● Thick Paper: 91-105 g/m² (25-28 lb/ Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper : 106-176 g/m² (Duplex)
● Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 177-220 g/m²
● Extra Heavy Weight 2: 221–256 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Extra Heavy Weight 3: 257–300 g/m2

● Thick Cardstock: 164–216 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Heavy Cardstock: 217–256 g/m2 (Duplex)

Item Specification
Tray 1 Capacity ● Plain Paper: 100 sheets at 80 g/m2
● Envelopes: 10 sheets at 75 g/m2
NOTE: Supported Envelopes: Monarch, DL, C4, C5, C6, No. 10, No. 9
● Labels: 20 sheets at 120–159 g/m2
● Thick Paper: 10 sheets at 176 g/m2
Media Sizes 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 320 mm x 457.2 mm (3.86 in x 5.5 in — 12.59 in x 18 in)
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Thick Glossy
● Heavy Glossy
● Heavy Weight
● Extra Heavy Weight 1, 2 ,3 ,4
● Envelope
● Transparency
● Label
Media Weight ● 60 to 256 g/m2: Simplex, Duplex
● 257 to 325 g/m2: Simplex
● Envelope: 75–90 g/m2, Simplex
● Label: 120–150 g/m2, Simplex
Sensing Paper Empty Detect: Yes
Paper Size Detect: Yes
Paper handling specifications 31

Item Specification
ADF Capacity 250 sheets (GX/sGX)
100 sheets (LX)
Document Size ● Width: 105 mm — 297 mm (5 in — 11.7 in)
● Length: 140 mm — 432 mm (5.5in — 17 in)
Document Weight ● Simplex: 60–163 g/m2 (11.25–43.24 lb) (Guarantee) 42–60 g/m2 and 163–
220 g/m2 (Support)
● Duplex: 60–163 g/m2 (13.25–43.25 lb) (Guarantee) 50–60 g/m2 and 163–
220 g/m2 (Support)
Auto Detected Size A3/A4/A5/A6 SEF/B4/B5/Letter/Legal/Statement/Folio/Executive
Image Scanner Document Size ● Width: 140 mm — 297 mm (5.5 in — 11.7 in)
● Length: 140 mm — 432 mm (5.5 in — 17 in)
Output Capacity Standard 500 sheets, face down
Maximum 615 sheets [500 sheets (Standard) + 125 sheets (Job Separator)]
Printing Size Maximum Size 320 mm x 457 mm (12.6 in x 18 in)
Minimum Size 98 mm x 139.7 mm (3.8 in x 5.5 in)
Maximum Printing Area Simplex Top: 4.2 +/- 1.5 mm / Left: 4.2 +/- 1.5 mm
Duplex Top: 4.2 +/- 2 mm / Left: 4.2 +/- 2 mm

Item Specification
Duplex Printing Support Built-in
Media Sizes 139.7 mm x 182 mm — 320 mm x 457 mm (5.5 in x 7.2 in — 12.6 in x 18 in)
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Thick Glossy
● Heavy Glossy
● Heavy Weight
● Extra Heavy Weight 1, 2
Media weight 16–17 lb (60 to 256 g/m2)
Network and software specifications

Learn about the network and software specifications.
Network interface
Learn about the network interface.
Network and software specifications 33

Table 1-15 Network interface
Item Specifications
Network OS
Windows
● XP (32/64 bit)
● 2003 (32/64 bit)
● Vista (32/64 bit)
● Windows 7
● Windows 8
Mac
● Mac OS 10.5 –10.8
Linux
● RedHat 8–9
● Fedora Core 1–4
● Mandrake 9.2–10.1
● SuSE 8.2–9.2
Novell
● Netware 5.x, 6.x (TCP/IP Only)
Others
● Unix (HP-UX, Solaris, SumOS, SCO)
Network Protocols TCP/IP TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, LDAP,

SMTP, SSL/TLS, IPSec, DNS, WINS, SLP,
Bonjour, SSDP, DDNS, DHCP/BOOTP,
IPv6
IPX/SPX No
Ether Talk No
NetBIOS over TCP/IP Yes
Others HTTPS, IPSec, 802.1x
IP Addressing Static IP Yes
Auto IP Yes
BOOTP Yes
DHCP Yes

Table 1-15 Network interface (continued)
Item Specifications
SNMP/MIB Access MIB-2 (RFC 1213) Yes
Host Resource MIB (RFC 2790) Yes
Printer MIB (RFC 3805) Yes
Finisher MIB (RFC 3806) Yes
Private MIB Yes
HP Compatibility Yes — Partially
SNMP Trap Yes
Printing Protocols Windows Printing (SMB) No
LPR/LPD Yes
IPP Yes
Netware I-Print No
Netware NDPS No
Ether Talk No
Port 9100 Yes
Device Discovery DNS Yes
Dynamic DNS Yes
Multicast DNS (Bonjoure) Yes
WSD (including Print and Scan) Yes (Print and Scan)
SLP Yes
uPNP (SSDP) Yes
Software and solutions

Learn about the software and solutions.
Software and solutions 35

Table 1-16 Software and solutions
Item Specifications
Application Anyweb Print N/A
Easy Printer Manager Windows/Mac
Easy Color Manager Windows/Mac
Easy Document Creator Windows
Net PC Fax Windows/Mac
Direct Printing Utility Windows
Easy Deployment Manager Windows
Easy Eco Driver Windows
Universal Printer Driver Windows
Universal Scan Driver Windows
Mobile Printing Google Cloud Print (GCP) Yes
Airprint Yes
Smart App Smart Workspace Yes
Workbook Composer Yes
Smart Color Manager Yes
Smart Service App Yes
Hancom Office Yes
Solution Device Management Fleet Admin Pro (UniThru)
Output Management CounThru Enterprise/Pro
Document Management and SmarThru Workflow 3.0

Distribution
Security SecuThur Pro 1.0
Mobility SCP 1.0 (14.09)
Security Authentication (Local) Yes
Authentication (Network) Yes (SMB/Kerberos/LDAP/IPSec/EAP)
IP Address Filtering Yes (IPv4 Filtering/IPv6 Filtering/MAC

Filtering)
HDD Overwrite (Standard) 9
HDD Overwrite (Maximum Overwrites) Yes
Secure Print Yes
Encrypted Secure Print Yes
Encrypted PDF Mode (Encrypted Yes

Scanning)
IP Sec Yes
Smart Card Authentication Yes

Options
Learn about printer options and accessories.
Optional configurations
Learn about optional configurations.
Figure 1-5 Options
1 2
9
3
8 5
7 6 4
Table 1-17 Printer options and configurations
Item Description Product number
1 HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82540

E82560
● dn model: X3A69A
● du model: 5CM59A
● z model: X3A68A
E82550
● z model: X3A71A
E82560
● z model: X3A74A
2 HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Y1G16A
3 HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Y1G21A

Tray Department
4 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Y1F98A

Feeder
5 HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Y1G20A
Options 37
Table 1-17 Printer options and configurations (continued)
Item Description Product number
6 HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G18A
The following punch kits are available:
● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

2/3 accessory

2/4 accessory

Swedish accessory
7 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Y1G07A

2/3 accessory

2/4 accessory

Swedish accessory
8 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G00A
● Y1G02A — HP LaserJet Inner

Finisher Hole 2/3 punch

Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch

Finisher Swedish Punch
9 HP LaserJet Department Job Separator Y1G15A
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A

Department
NOTE: Not shown in configuration.
The following accessories are also

available:
● Y1G22A#BGJ — HP LaserJet
Paper Tray Heaters Accessory
Department (110V)
● Y1G22A#B19 — HP LaserJet
Paper Tray Heaters Accessory
Department (220V)
Options list
Learn about the options list.

Table 1-18 Options list
Item Product numbers Remark
HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Y1G168
HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Y1F98A

Feeder
HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Y1F21A

Tray Department
HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Y1F20A
Fax Kit
Fax Multiline Kit
Foreign interface harness (FIH) Kit B5L31A Service part: B5L31-67902
HP LaserJet Job Separator Department Y1G01A
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A For dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Department
For HCI/sHCI
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A#BGJ For dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Accessory Department (110V)
For HCI/sHCI
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A#B19 For dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Accessory Department (220V)
For HCI/sHCI
Wireless/NFC Kit 3JN69A HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless

accessory
Wireless/NFC/BLE Kit
Additional Network Kit (Dual Network Kit)
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G00A
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G18A
HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Y1G07A
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Y1G02A Two and three hole punch (for America,
Punch Asia, and Africa)
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4 Y1G03A Two and four hole punch (for Europe)
Punch
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Y1G04A Swedish four hole punch (for Sweden)
Punch
HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory Y1G10A Two and three hole punch (for America,
Asia, and Africa)
HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory Y1G11A Two and four hole punch (for Europe)
HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Y1G12A Swedish four hole punch (for Sweden)
Accessory
HP LaserJet Inner/Booklet Finisher Y1G13A ● Regular staples for the HP LaserJet

Staples Inner Finisher
NOTE: The HP LaserJet Booklet ● Regular saddle staples for the

Finisher and HP LaserJet Stapler/ HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher
Stacker Finisher have two staple slots.
Options list 39
Table 1-18 Options list (continued)
Item Product numbers Remark
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G14A ● Regular staples for HP LaserJet

Staples Stapler/Stacker Finisher
NOTE: The HP LaserJet Booklet

Finisher and HP LaserJet Stapler/
Stacker Finisher have two staple slots.
Option specifications
Learn about option specifications.

Table 1-19 Option specifications
Item Specification
HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Part number Y1F98A

Feeder
Capacity 520 x 2 sheets
Media Sizes ● Tray4 : 139.7mm x 182mm – 320mm

x 457.2mm (5.5inx7.17in – 12.59in x 18
in)
● Tray5 : 139.7mm x 182mm – 320mm

x 457.2mm (5.5inx7.17in – 12.59in x 18
in)
Media Types Plain/Thin/Bond/Hole Punched/

Preprinted/Recycled/Thin
Cardstock/Letterhead/Thick/Cotton/
Colored/Archive/Thin Glossy/Heavy
Weight/Extra Heavy Weight
Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 71–90 g/m2 (18.5–24 lb/

Duplex)
● Thick Paper: 91–105 g/m2 (25–28 lb/

Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper: 106–176 g/m2

(Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper 1: 177–216 g/m2

(Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper 2: 217–256

g/m2 (Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper 3: 257–300

g/m2
● Thin Paper: 60–69 g/m2 (16–19 lb/

Duplex)
● Cotton Paper: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Colored: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Preprinted: 71–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Recycled: 60–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Bond Paper: 105–120 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Letterhead: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Hole Punched Paper: 75–90 g/m2

(Duplex)
● Thin Cardstock: 105–163 g/m2

(Duplex)
● Thin Glossy: 106–163 g/m2 (Duplex)
Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes
● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:

Yes
● Paper Type Detect: No
● Paper Size Detect: Yes

Option specifications 41
Dimensions 556 mm x 610 mm x 265 mm (22.3 in x 24
in x 10 in)
Weight Net 20 kg, Packing 23.5 kg

Table 1-19 Option specifications (continued)
Item Specification
HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Part number Y1G21A

Tray Department
Capacity 2000 sheets at 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Media Sizes A4, Letter
Media Types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,

Punched Paper
Media Weight 60 to 300 gsm

Yes
● Paper Size Detect: No
HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Part number Y1F20A
Capacity 3000 sheets at 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Media Sizes A4, Letter
Media Types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,

Punched Paper
Media weight 60 to 300 gsm

Yes
● Paper Size Detect: No
HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Part number Y1G16A
Dimensions 585 mm x 670 mm x 257 mm
Weight (Net) 18 kg
HP LaserJet Job Separator Department Part number Y1G01A
Capacity 125 sheets at (80 g/m2)

Item Specification
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Part number Y1G00A
Capacity 500 sheets stacking, internal
Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge
Stacking ● Top Tray: 50 sheets (A4/LT at 80

gsm)
● Finishing Tray: 500 sheets (A4/LT at

80 gsm)
Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 50

sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet
● Stapling Positions: Front flat and

corner (45), Dual, Rear flat and
corner (45)
Saddle Stapling N/A
Offline Stapling N/A
Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes
Offset at Staple Job N/A
Output Stacking Face Down
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Part number Y1G18A
Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 3,250 sheets

stacking

gsm)
● Finishing Tray: 3000 sheets (A4/LT

at 80 gsm)

● Stapling Positions: 2 Corners

(Single , 45 degree), Center (Double)
Offline Stapling Yes
Offset at Staple Job Yes
Option specifications 43
Item Specification
HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Part number Y1G07A
Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 2000 sheets stacking

gsm)
● Finishing Tray: 2000 sheets (A4/LT

at 80 gsm)

● Stapling Positions: 2 Corners

(Single), Center (Double)
Saddle Stapling Maximum Number of Sheets: 25 sheets

stapling with 80 g/m2 sheet
Offline Stapling Yes
Offset at Staple Job Yes
1. HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Part numbers 1. Y1G10A

Accessory
2. Y1G11A
2. HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4
Accessory 3. Y1G12A
3. HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Available Unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4
Accessory hole, Swedish 4
Paper Wight 52–300 g/m2
1. HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Part numbers 1. Y1G02A

Punch
2. Y1G03A
2. P LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4
Punch 3. Y1G04A
3. HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Available Unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4
Punch hole, Swedish 4
Paper Wight 52–256 g/m2
Feeding system
Learn about the feeding system.
Feeding system overview

Learn about the feeding system overview.

The feeding system picks up paper from the cassette or Tray 1 and moves it to the printing mechanism
inside the printer. The feeding system consists of the pickup unit, registration unit, transfer roller
assembly, and exit unit.
Figure 1-6 Feeding system overview
Main components and functions

Learn about main components and their functions.
Rollers
Learn about the rollers.
Main components and functions 45

Figure 1-7 Rollers
1 Tray 2 13 Tray 4 feed roller (optional)
2 Tray 3 14 Tray 4 trans roller (optional)
3 Tray 4 (optional) 15 Tray 5 feed roller (optional)
4 Tray 5 (optional) 16 Registration sensor
5 Tray 2 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 17 Registration roller
6 Tray 3 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 18 PTB unit
7 Tray 4 pickup/reverse/feed rollers (optional) 19 Output roller (1st)
8 Tray 5 pickup/reverse/feed rollers (optional) 20 Output roller (2nd)

9 Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 21 Output roller (trans)
10 Tray 2 feed roller 22 Duplex 1 roller
11 Tray 3 feed roller 23 Duplex 2 roller
12 Tray 3 trans roller 23 Duplex 3 roller
● Pickup roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
– This roller picks up the paper from the tray.
● Feed roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
– This roller is placed against the reverse roller. It transfers the paper from the pickup roller to the
feed roller.
● Reverse roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
– This roller is placed against the feed roller and transfers only one sheet of paper to the feed
roller. When two or more sheets of paper are being transferred from the pickup roller, the load of
the torque limiter of the reverse roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets of
paper. As a result, the reverse roller is stopped and the lower sheet of paper is not transferred.
● Feed roller
– This roller transfers the paper sent from the feed/reverse roller to the registration roller.
● Registration roller
– This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transfers the paper to the transfer roller
assembly.
Table 1-20 Roller period table
Roller Periodic
OPC/Drum 188.5 mm (7.4 in)
Charge Roller (CR) 37.7 mm (1.5 in)
Magnetic roller (MR) 36.9 mm (1.45 in)
PTB D/R 65.7 mm (2.6 in)
PTB BELT 157.1 mm (6.2 in)
Fuser Belt (HR) 110 mm (4.3 in)
Fuser Pressure Roller (PR) 114.7 mm (4.5 in)
Sensor, motor, and solenoid

Learn about the sensor, motor, and solenoid.
Sensor, motor, and solenoid 47

Figure 1-8 Sensor, motor, solenoid
Item Function
Tray 2 paper size detection Detects Tray 2 paper size

sensor
Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects Tray 2 paper empty

sensor
Tray 2 upper limit detection Detects Tray 2 upper limit

sensor
Tray 2 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 2 paper Lead Edge
sensor

Item Function

sensor

sensor

sensor
sensor
Tray 3 paper feed jam detection Detects Tray 3 paper feed jam
sensor

(option) sensor

(option) sensor

(option) sensor
(option) sensor
Tray 4/4 paper feed jam detection Detects Tray 4/4 paper feed jam
(option) sensor
Tray 5 paper size detection Detects Tray 5 paper size detection

(option) sensor

(option) sensor

(option) sensor
(option) sensor
Paper registration jam detection Detects Paper registration jam

sensor
Paper fuser-out jam detection Detects Paper fuser-out jam

sensor
Output Tray 2 paper full detection Detects output Tray 2 paper full
sensor
Output 2 tray path and Return Changes paper path

path solenoid
Return motor Controls 2nd output tray and duplex printing
Output Tray 3 paper full detection Detects output Tray 3 paper full
sensor
Output 2 paper return detection Detects Duplex Return position

sensor
1st Duplex motor Controls duplex printing
2nd Duplex motor Controls duplex printing
Duplex 1 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 1 jam
Sensor, motor, and solenoid 49

Item Function
Duplex 2 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 2 jam
Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly paper Detects Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly: paper empty
empty detection sensor
NOTE: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, that tray takes priority over trays 2,3,4, or 5.
Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly Controls Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly pickup roller
Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly paper Detects Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly paper width
width detection sensor
Tray 2 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate
Paper Loop Detection sensor Detects paper loop between transfer Nip and fusing Nip
At warm-up, Detects the fuser jam
Cassette
Learn about the cassette.
The tray stores paper. The paper size is set using the guides in each tray.
Figure 1-9 Basic cassette
Table 1-21
Item Description
1 Structure: Drawer Type
2 Capacity: 520 sheets (80 g/m² paper standard)

Table 1-21 (continued)
Item Description
3 Paper type
NOTE: Tray 2 does not support A3 or 11 x 17 paper.
4 Paper weight
● Plain paper: 60–220 g/m²
5 Plate knock up lift type: Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor
Pickup Assembly
Learn about the pickup assembly.
When paper pickup occurs, the pickup roller moves down in order to come in contact with the surface of
the paper. If the cassette is installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and the pickup roller moves down.
The feed and separation rollers make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved into the paper path, and
that the feed roller moves the paper as far as the registration (REGI) roller.
NOTE: The pickup unit 1 and pickup unit 2 are not interchangeable.
Figure 1-10 Pickup unit 1
Figure 1-11 Pickup unit 2
Registration unit
Learn about the registration unit.
The registration roller is driven by the registration/multipurpose motor.
Pickup Assembly 51
The registration roller clutch is located between the registration/Tray 1 motor and registration roller, or on
the transfer belt (for color), and it controls power to the registration roller in order to match paper and an
image on the drum at the predetermined registration point.
Figure 1-12 Registration roller
Tray 1 feed assembly

Learn about the Tray 1 feed assembly.
The Tray 1 feed assembly allows feeding of special media cardstock and custom size paper.
Figure 1-13 Tray 1 (MP) feeder assembly
Specification
● Capacity: 100 sheets (80g/m² / 21 lb paper standard)
● Media size: 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 320 mm x 457.2 mm (3.86 in x 5.5 in — 12.59 in x 18 in)
● Media weight: Plain paper 60 – 320 g/m²
● Feeding speed: 32 ppm, 40 ppm, 48 ppm Letter/A4 LEF (Long Edge Feeding)

Paper separation
Figure 1-14 Paper separation
When the Tray 1 (MP) paper detection [A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a Tray 1 (MP)
printing job, the Tray 1 (MP) solenoid [B] drops the pickup roller [C] onto the top of the paper stack in Tray 1.
This machine uses a Feed and Reverse Roller (FRR) system for feeding paper. The friction between the
reverse roller [D] and feed roller [E] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.
Fuser unit
Learn about the fuser unit.
Fuser unit overview

Learn about the fuser unit.
This section describes the image fusing process used by the printer.
This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper, by applying a
combination of heat and pressure to complete the fusing process. This printer uses an instant fusing
system (NIF type). The fuser unit design for this model has improved. The fuser belt has been changed
to require less heat capacity and still fuse the toner properly. Additionally, the life has been improved by
incorporating a sub-bush system with a lubricant storage design.
Fuser unit 53
Figure 1-15 Fuser unit
● Lamp halogen
The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One heats the center of the fusing belt, the other heats the
end of axial direction. These halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the fusing belt. Each lamp has
its coil in a different location. The coil of the center heater lamp is in the center, the coils on the side
heater lamp are on both sides. The lamps are fixed inside of the fusing belt. When the fusing belt
rotates, the lamps do not rotate.
● Belt fuser
The belt fuser gets heat from the halogen lamp and transfers it to the toner and paper. The belt
fuser consists of three thin-layers. The thin fusing belt reduces warm up and mode changing time. To
prevent the fusing belt from adhering to the toner, the surface of the fuser belt is fluorinated. There
is a nip inside the fusing belt. Tension springs are used to keep a constant nip area where the fusing
belt contacts the pressure roller.
● Roller fuser pressure
The pressure roller makes sure there is a proper nip width between the pressure roller and fusing
belt. It is made up of the soft silicone sponge rubber. The pressure roller is driven by the driving
system and drives the fusing belt.
● Thermistor (NC sensor)
The temperature of the fusing belt is maintained by NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors)
located near the center and the end of the fusing belt.
● Thermostats
The thermostat cuts off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the
fusing belt becomes abnormally hot as a result of a problem, such as a NC sensor malfunction.
The thermostat is used to prevent abnormal operation. When a thermostat is triggered, it must be
replaced as well as the other damaged parts in the fuser unit.

Fuser unit drive
Learn about the fuser unit drive.
The fuser motor (A) drives the pressure roller (B) through the gear train. The fuser belt is driven by the
pressure roller.
Figure 1-16 Fuser drive
Fuser unit temperature control

Learn about fuser temperature control.
When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC
sensors detect the standby temperature. The CPU then raises the temperature up to the printing
temperature.
Fuser unit drive 55

Figure 1-17 Fuser unit temperature control
Overheat protection
● The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases:
– The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 220°C for 20 seconds.
– The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 230°C for 3 seconds.
– The relay off works when the belt temperature detected by the NC sensors is higher than 230°C.
● The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails:
– Two thermostats get into line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.
– If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C, it opens and cuts power to
the fusing lamp. If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C, it also opens
and cuts power to the fusing lamp.
Loop control
Learn about fuser loop control.
The tension of the paper between the OPC nip and the fuser nip is known as the paper loop level.

Figure 1-18 Loop control
The paper loop level is controlled by monitoring photo sensors 1 and 2. The fuser unit controls the motor
speed for the paper loop level.
Image creation
Learn about image creation.
Printing process overview

Learn about the printing process overview.
The printer uses one drum unit, one development unit, and a laser beam for mono printing. The drum
unit consists of an OPC drum, charge roller, and a cleaning blade. The development unit consists of a
magnetic roller and mixing auger.
Figure 1-19 Printing process overview
The OPC drum (A) is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed to light from the laser scanner
assembly (B). The light produced by a laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the
Image creation 57
OPC drum. The negatively charged toners are attracted to the latent drum image by an electric field. The
toners (mono image) on the OPC drum are transferred to the paper by the positive bias.
1. OPC drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.
2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.
3. Development: The magnetic roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum
surface.
4. Transfer: The Paper Transfer Belt (PTB) transfers the toner from the OPC drum to the paper.
5. Cleaning the OPC drum: The cleaning blade removes remaining toner on the drum surface after
image transfer to the paper.
6. Quenching for OPC drum: Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the
laser at the end of every job.
Imaging unit
Learn about the imaging unit.
Drum unit overview

Learn about the drum unit.
This printer has one drum unit and one development unit.
The diameter of the drum is 60 mm (2.4 in) with a circumference of approximately 188.5 mm (7.4 in).
The drum unit has a charge roller to charge the drum surface and a cleaning roller to clean the charge
roller.
The e-label is the sub part of the Drum unit and stores the count information and other data. If the Drum
unit is replaced, the count information stored by the old drum unit will not be kept.

Figure 1-20 Drum unit
Drum drive
Learn about the drum drive unit.
The OPC drum and magnetic roller are driven by one BLDC motor and supplied with power from the
coupling.
The drive shaft is directly inserted into the OPC drum to fix the drum unit. This structure provides stable
printing quality.
Figure 1-21 Drum drive
Drum drive 59
Developer unit
Learn about the developer unit.
This printer uses a dual-component development system. The development unit contains 340 g (12 oz) of
magnetic toner carrier (development powder).
The developer powder is supplied to the magnetic (development) roller [A] by the two mixing augers [B].
The diameter of the magnetic roller is 18 mm (0.71 in).
The development unit has a toner carrier (TC) sensor [C]. It is used for controlling the operating range of
the toner density.
Figure 1-22 Developer unit
Developer agitation
Two mixing augers (A) circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer in
order to sufficiently mix the toner and developer.

Figure 1-23 Developer auger
Agitation occurs at the following times:
● During the process control self-checking (warm up)
● During toner supply job
● During development job
If the developer unit is stored above 45°C (113°F), the toner might harden and will not work properly. If the
toner in the development unit has hardened, an installation error occurs.
Toner cartridge
Learn about the toner cartridge.
When the toner and carrier in the toner cartridge is mixing:
● The toner cartridge contains 940 g of toner and 90 g of carrier.
● The toner in the cartridge is transferred from Wheel-Paddle Toner [A] to Wheel-Auger Toner [B] and
transferred from Wheel-Auger Toner [B] to the reservoir.
● The toner cartridge has an e-label that stores the count information.
● The toner in toner cartridge when stored at temperatures above 45°C (113°F) might harden.
Toner cartridge 61
Figure 1-24 Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge mount

A design change was made to toner cartridges manufactured after 2019. This change provides
improved fastening between the cartridge and the printer frame when the cartridge is installed.
NOTE: This change does not impact any printer functions. It only improves toner cartridge
installation.
One hook (callout 1) was removed from the left side of the cartridge, and a second hook (callout 2) was
added at the top of the cartridge.
Figure 1-25 Toner cartridge design change
The figure below provides a comparison of the design change made to the toner cartridge end cap.

Figure 1-26 Toner cartridge design change comparison
1 2
4
3 3
Item Description
Callout 1 Pre design change cartridge end cap.
Callout 2 Post design change cartridge end cap.
Callout 3 Left side hook removed.
Callout 4 Top side hook added.
Dynamic security
Learn about dynamic-security-enabled printers.
Certain HP printers use cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a
non-HP chip or modified or non-HP circuitry* might not work. And, those that work today might not work
in the future.
As is standard in the printing business, HP has a process for authenticating cartridges. HP continues
to use security measures to protect the quality of our customer experience, maintain the integrity
of our printing systems, and protect our intellectual property. These measures include authentication
methods that change periodically and might prevent some third-party supplies from working now or in
the future. HP printers and original HP cartridges deliver the best quality, security and reliability. When
cartridges are cloned or counterfeited, the customer is exposed to quality and potential security risks,
compromising the printing experience.
*Non-HP Chips and modified or non-HP electronic circuitry are not produced or validated by HP. HP
cannot guarantee that these chips or circuitry will work in your printer now or in the future. If you are
using a non-original HP cartridge, please check with your supplier to ensure your cartridge has an
original HP security chip or unmodified HP electronic circuitry.
Paper transfer belt unit

Learn about the paper transfer belt unit.
Paper transfer belt overview

Learn about the paper transfer belt (PTB).
The paper transfer belt (PTB) moves the paper.
Dynamic security 63
The charged toner on the drum is moved to the paper by the transfer roller in PTB unit (1). The rubber belt
in PTB unit removes the static of the paper then separates the paper from the drum so the paper can
move into the paper path.
This process is done with rotation of the PTB. The rotation is made by the friction between the drive roller
(3) and PTB (1). For this process, the drive roller (3) and guide roller (4) provides proper tension to block
slip.
There is one actuator (8) and two photo sensors (5). The actuator recognizes the paper path and controls
the paper speed for stable image quality.
Figure 1-27 Paper transfer belt unit
5
6
3
1
Table 1-22 Paper transfer belt components
Item Description
1 Paper transfer belt (PTB)
2 Transfer roller
3 Drive roller
4 Guide roller
5 Photo interrupter

Table 1-22 Paper transfer belt components (continued)
Item Description
6 Actuator
Transfer belt drive

learn about the paper transfer belt drive.
The drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] by using gears and the PTB drive roller [C].
Figure 1-28 Transfer belt drive
Cleaning blade
Learn about the transfer belt cleaning blade.
The cleaning blade in the PTB unit removes toner (during printing). Belt cleaning is completed while the
transfer belt makes one rotation.
The cleaning blade [A] always contacts the transfer belt [B], and removes the used toner from the belt.
The film [C] on the cleaning unit protects against toner contamination. The lens [D] always detects waste
toner level. If the light is blocked by waste toner, the machine displays an error message to inform the
PTB unit needs replacement.
Transfer belt drive 65

Figure 1-29 Cleaning blade
Laser scanner unit

Learn about the laser scanner unit.
Laser scanner unit overview

Learn about the laser scanner unit general information.
The laser scanner unit consists of one polygon motor and one laser diodes (LD) unit. The laser scanner
assembly forms a latent image on the surface of the OPC drum. For this process, the laser scanner
assembly has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, and an F-Theta lens on an optical path for each color.
The laser scanner assembly has cover glass to protect the glass on the optical path from
contamination. The LD PCA interfaces with the printer.

Figure 1-30 Laser scanner unit overview
Table 1-23 Laser scanner unit overview
Callout Description
1 LD PBA
2 P/Mirror Motor
3 F1 Lens
4 F2 Lens
5 Cover glass
Laser scanning optical path

Learn about the laser scanner optical path.
The laser moves from the polygon motor (A) to the OPC drum (D). The F1 lens (B) and F2 lens (C)
determine the scanning line and the image position. This setting is adjusted by the manufacturer.
Laser scanning optical path 67

The laser scanner assembly has three types depending on printing speed. The difference between the
three models is shown in the following table.
Figure 1-31 Laser scanning optical path
Item Specification Remark
LD Unit Laser Diode: Quad Beam
Driving IC: Dual LD X 2
P/Motor Speed ● E82540: 22,087 rpm
● E82550: 27,520 rpm
● E82560: 33,071 rpm
Speed ● E82540: 187 mm/s
● E82550: 233 mm/s
● E82560: 280 mm/s
H/W interface Interface with printer: 40 pin FFC
Laser synchronizing detectors

Learn about laser synchronizing detectors.
The laser scanner assembly has a beam detector sensor board (PD PCA). The PD PCA (A) detects the
scanning start point.
Main Scan Start Detection
The beam is detected by the PD PCA at the scanning start point and creates the horizontal sync signal
(Hsync).
The following diagram shows the data scanning direction.

Figure 1-32 Laser synchronizing detectors
Drive system
Learn about the drive system.
Pickup and cassette lift drive

Learn about the pickup and cassette lift drive.
Drive system 69
Figure 1-33 Pickup and cassette lift drive
Power train
Pickup: normal rotation (pickup input) counter rotation (cassette lift input)
● 1 PM STEP → normal rotation → 2 Gear (pickup driving)
● 1 PM STEP → counter rotation → 3 Gear → 4 5 Gear → 6 Gear & Coupler (cassette lift driving)
Feed drive
Learn about the feed drive.

Figure 1-34 Feed drive
Power Train
HP STEP → Feed & Tray 1 drive
● 1 HP STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 3 Gear → 4 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller driving) → 5 E-Clutch &
Gear (Tray 1 driving)
● 1 HP STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 6 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller driving) → 7 Pulley & Coupler (Feed
Roller driving)
Registration drive
Learn about the registration drive.
Registration drive 71
Figure 1-35 Registration drive
Power Train
HP STEP → Registration driving
● 1 HP STEP → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Registration Roller driving)
Fuser release/exit drive

Learn about the fuser release/exit drive.

Figure 1-36 Fuser release/exit drive
Power Train
BLDC → Fuser and exit driving
PM Step → Fuser release driving
● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear (Fuser P/R driving)
● 1 BLDC → 3 Gear & Pulley → 4 Gear (exit driving)
● 5 PM Step → 6 Gear → 7 Gear → 8 Gear (Fuser Release driving)
Drive motors
Learn about the drive motors.
The following diagram shows the location of the printer drive motors.
Drive motors 73
Figure 1-37 Drive motor
Number Motor Motor type Qty Function
1 Fuser Release PM-STEP 1 Fuser Release driving
2 Fuser and output BLDC 1 Fuser and output driving
3 Main OPC, BLDC 4 OPC and PTB Belt driving

development, and
PTB
4 Registration HP-STEP 1 Registration assembly

assembly driving
5 Feed/Tray 1 (MP) HP-STEP 1 Feed roller 1, 2, 3 driving
E-CLT 1 Feed/Tray 1 (MP) driving

control

Number Motor Motor type Qty Function
6 Pickup PM-STEP 2 Pickup roller/Cassette lift

driving
(reverse driving at cassette

lift driving)
7 Toner supply PM-STEP 1 Toner transfer (toner

cartridge to reservoir)
8 Toner reservoir PM-STEP 1 Toner transfer (reservoir to

development unit)
Main drive unit motors

Learn about the main drive unit motors.
Figure 1-38 Main drive unit motors
Power Train
BLDC → OPC, Development and PTB driving
● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear & Coupler (OPC driving)
● 1 BLDC → 3 Gear & Pulley → 4 Coupler (Development driving)
● 1 BLDC → 5 Gear (PTB driving)
Main drive unit motors 75

Toner supply drive
Learn about the toner supply drive.
Figure 1-39 Toner supply drive
Power Train
PM Step → Toner Supply driving
● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Toner Supply driving)
Toner reservoir drive

Learn about the toner reservoir drive.
Figure 1-40 Toner reservoir drive
Power Train
PM STEP Motor → Toner Reservoir Auger & Paddle d
● 1 PM STEP Motor → 2 Gear → 4 Gear & Latch → 5 Pulley & Gear (Paddle driving)
● 1 PM STEP Motor → 2 Gear → 3 Gear & Latch (Auger driving)
Flatbed Scanner System

Learn about the flatbed scanner system.

Flatbed scanner system overview
Learn about the flatbed scanner system.
The scanner converts a hard copy original into data. To scan an original, the scanner uses the lens and
Charge Coupled Device (CCD). The scanner stores and transfers the converted image to the storage
space or transfers the scanned data to the printer engine for copy.
For scan operation, the scanner uses a full rate (FR) carriage and a half rate (HR) carriage that is moved
by a wire. It scans the original document on the scanner glass or from the ADF.
The scanner system consists of the three following modules:
● Full Rate (FR) carriage: Illuminates the original and reflects the light at a 90 degree angle.
● Half Rate (HR) carriage: Transfers the reflected light from the FR carriage to the lens.
● Imaging lens: Makes an image on the CCD.
The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage. This keeps a regular gap
between the original and the imaging lens.
Figure 1-41 Scanner system overview
Scan process description

Learn about the scan process description.
Flatbed scanner system overview 77

1. The FR carriage lamp illuminates the original. The reflected light is moved to Mirror #1.
2. The reflected light from Mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through Mirror #2 and #3.
3. The light becomes smaller and makes an optical image.
4. The optical image is generated to the electrical signal by the CCD sensor.
To make a stable image, a gap must be maintained between the original and the lens. To maintain this
gap, the HR carriage moves half the distance and half the speed of the FR carriage.
Figure 1-42 Scan process
The optical image made by the CCD sensor is changed to an electrical-analog signal.
Each color element signal in the optical image is separated by the CCD sensor into red, green, and blue.
The red CCD sensor extracts the red color from the optical image, the green CCD sensor extracts the
green color from the optical image, and the blue CCD sensor extracts the blue color from the optical
image.

The analog image signal is changed to a digital image signal by the A/D converter and is transferred to
the processor.
The image scan of the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD sensor. The CCD sensor
consists of approximately 7500 pixels. The image scan of the sub scanning direction is performed by the
FR carriage and HR carriage. The carriage is moved by a wire driven by the scan motor.
Scan resolution is 600 dpi.
Figure 1-43 Image processing
Scanning system components

The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system.
To scan the original on the scanner glass, two carriages driven by the motor move at a regular speed.
The motor drives the timing belt, pulley, and wire. The wire pulley rolls and releases the wire to move the
carriage.
The scanner consists of the scanner glass, FR carriage, HR carriage, imaging unit, and driving unit.
Scanning system components 79

Figure 1-44 Scanning system components
● FR Carriage

Figure 1-45 FR carriage
– LED lamp module
This module illuminates the original. Two white LEDs are assembled on the side of the module.
The original is illuminated by the light-guide. The heat sink is attached to the LED PCB. When the
heat sink is broken or expired, an engineer needs to replace it.
○ Light-guide
The light-guide changes the light from point type to line type. The light-guide is made by
transparent resin and controls the amount of light in the scan area uniformly.
○ White LED
The white LED emits white light. The heat sink attached to the PCA prevents heat
deterioration.
○ Reflection holder
The reflection holder reflects the light that has passed through the light-guide.
– Mirror #1
Mirror #1 reflects light at a 90 degree angle.

HR Carriage (mirror unit)
Figure 1-46 HR carriage
● Mirror #2 and #3
Mirrors #2 and #3 are positioned at a 45 degree angle in order to change the direction of the light.
The reflected light from mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through mirrors #2 and #3.
● Pulley
The pulley is a ball bearing type. The pulley rolls and releases the wire which makes the HR carriage
move. The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage.
Imaging unit
The imaging unit changes the optical image to an electrical signal.
Figure 1-47 Imaging unit
● Imaging lens
The reflected light from the imaging lens is focused on the CCD. The image is reduced to the fixed
CCD sensor and pixel size.
● CCD PCA

The image made by the imaging lens is changed to an electrical signal by the CCD. The CCD
consists of three channel line sensors for image creation. The brightness and darkness of the
image depends on the voltage level from the CCD. The output voltage is changed to a digital signal.
The digital signal makes the scanned image.
Wire driving
To move the carriages, the wire is assembled in the front and rear of the scanner. The pulley rolls and
releases the wire which moves the FR carriage and the HR carriage.
Figure 1-48 Wire driving

Scanner glass (flatbed glass)
The original is placed on the scanner glass for scan or copy jobs. The scanner glass is made of
tempered glass and is held in place by the frame to prevent distortion.
Drive motor
The scanner drive system uses the step motor to move the carriage. The step motor controls the
position and maintains constant speed. The motor power is transferred to the wire through the timing
belt and pulley.
Timing belt
The timing belt has a regular saw tooth gear and transfers the motor power to the pulley.
Figure 1-49 Timing belt
Paper size sensor
The paper size sensor automatically detects the size of the original on the scanner glass. The paper size
sensor uses two sensors. An infrared LED is used to detect the dark original.
Home sensor
The home sensor detects the FR carriage position. The home sensor is a transmission photo sensor.
Cover open sensor #1
When the ADF unit opens and closes, a function is triggered which detects whether the paper size
sensor is on or off.
Cover open sensor #2
The cover open sensor #2 detects when the ADF unit is closed using magnetic force.

ADF glass
Scanner read the original feed from ADF unit through ADF glass. The FR carriage read the original as it
passes on ADF glass. If ADF glass is contaminated.
Shading sheet
The shading sheet is attached under flat-bed glass. Before every scan job, scanner read the shading
sheet to get reference image with same optical conditions. If shading sheet is contaminated, a vertical
line might occur on scan image.
Figure 1-50 Shading sheet
Caution for moving the scanner

Learn about cautions when moving the scanner.
When shipping or moving the printer, the FR and HR carriages in the scanner must be secured with a
scan locking screw to prevent movement of these parts and possible damage to the scanner
This screw must be installed before moving the printer and then removed once the printer is positioned
in place.
When installing
After unpacking, before turning on the printer, the scan locking screw must be removed. If the locking
screw is not removed scanner failure will occur.
1. When installing the printer, remove the scan locking screw.
2. After removing the screw, assemble the screw cap from the accessory package.
Caution for moving the scanner 85

Figure 1-51 Remove scan locking screw
When moving the printer
When moving the printer, tighten the scan locking screw to prevent damage to the carriages.
1. Make sure the FR carriage is located in the end of scanner side wall which is screw locked.
2. Remove the screw cap.
3. Tighten the M3x8 screw to secure the FR carriage.
Figure 1-52 Tighten scan locking screw
Document feeder LX (du models)

Learn about the document feeder LX (du models).
Document feeder LX overview

Learn about the document feeder LX.

Figure 1-53 Document feeder LX overview
R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1
R7 R8 R9 R10 R11
Table 1-24 Document feeder LX overview
Part Description Function
R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray
R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)
R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray
R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller
R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller
R6 REGISTRATION (REGI) ROLLER Original paper alignment roller
R7 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning
R8 SIMPLEX WHITE-BAR Support of scanning unit
R9 SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the

exit roller
R10 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit
R11 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray
Document feeder LX electrical parts

Learn about the document feeder LX electrical parts.
Figure 1-54 Document feeder LX electrical parts electrical parts locations

Pick~ Roller
4. Paper Length
3.Detect Pickup
2, Registra on Feed Out
Registra on 5. Paper Width

1. Cover Open
Roller
Exit Roller
6. Exit Idle
Scan In
Scan Out
Scan Scan CCD
Document feeder LX electrical parts 87

Table 1-25 Document feeder LX electrical parts
Callout Item Function
1 Cover Open Detects if cover is open or closed
2 Registration (Regi) Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the registration path
3 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty
4 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length
5 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width
Document feeder LX registration

Learn about the document feeder LX registration.
Figure 1-55 Document feeder LX registration

Registra on Sensor
Registra on Roller
Item Document feeder LX
Registration 1 times registration
Document feeder LX drive system

Learn about the document feeder LX drive system.
The drive system consists of one motor and two clutches to transfer the paper.

Figure 1-56 Document feeder LX drive system
Pickup Drive sec•on
Registra•on Motor sec•on
Feed Drive sec•on
The document feeder LX drive system consists of two motors (BLDC and STEP) and one clutch that
moves the paper.
● BLDC Motor > Feed and pickup
● STEP Motor > Regi
● Clutch > Pickup
There are three sections: pickup drive section, registration (regi) motor section, and feed drive section.
The pickup drive section has three assemblies: pickup drive assembly, pickup assembly, and guide
pickup assembly.
The registration motor section has the regi motor, trans gear, regi roller, regi-idle roller, regi sensor, and
actuator.
LX ADF original pickup assembly

Learn about the LX ADF original pickup assembly.
LX ADF original pickup assembly 89

Figure 1-57 LX ADF pickup assembly
Pickup Drive sec•on
Pickup Drive Assy
Pickup Assy
Guide pickup Assy
After detecting the paper, one motor controls the drive system.
The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC provides the power to pick up the paper.
The CLUTCH cannot rotate inversely. The spring that is included in the ADF GUIDE PICKUP ASSEMBLY
is connected to COVER-OPEN. When the CLUTCH does not drive, stand-by status occurs and stops the
operation.
The ADF roller and pick roller are connected by the belt.
The ADF roller is provided with power while the paper is picked up and transferred to the registration
roller. When the pickup drive is stopped and the registration roller is driven, the ADF roller becomes idle.
The normal process is:
● When the original is setting up, the detect-sensor is activated and the printing job starts. The motor
and pickup clutch begin working. The pick roller then moves down and contacts the original in the
tray.
● When the registration sensor detects paper, the pickup clutch stops.
● When the detect-sensor detects that the tray is empty, the motor stops and the printer enters
stand-by status.
LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly

Learn about the LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly.

Figure 1-58 LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly
Registra•on Motor sec•on
istra•on(V)$)/(+'-$%)"
The registration drive uses the CLUTCH-ELECTRIC to drive the registration roller and transfer the paper
to the ROLLER FEED.
The registration roller aligns the leading edge of the original. When the original is placed in the nip, the
roller is rotated for alignment.
The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC repeats on/off to align each original.
Document feeder LX scanning position

Learn about the document feeder LX scanning position.
Document feeder LX scanning position 91

Figure 1-59 Document feeder LX scanning position
Item Simplex Duplex
Scanning White Bar White Bar
Document feeder LX specifications

Learn about the document feeder LX specifications.
Table 1-26 Document feeder LX specification
Item Specification
Capacity 100 pages
Scan Speed 80/160 ipm
Pickup Semi-Retard
Motor 2 each
Stacker Not applicable
Scanning White Bar
MSO Not applicable
Flow document feeder dn/z models (GX and sGX)

Learn about the flow document feeder dn/z models (GX and sGX).
Flow document feeder overview

Learn about the flow document feeder.

Figure 1-60 Flow document feeder overview
R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1
R8 R9 R1 R11 R1 R1 R1
0 2 3 4
Table 1-27 Flow document feeder overview
Part Description Function
R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray
R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)
R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray
R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller
R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller
R6 FEED ROLLER Original paper transfer roller (A6 size)
R7 PRE REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (1 round)
R8 REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (2 round)
R9 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning
R10 SIMPLEX WHITE-ROLLER Support of simplex scanning unit
R11 SIMPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the
duplex white-roller
R12 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit
R13 DUPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the
exit roller
R14 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray
Flow document feeder sensors

Learn about the flow document feeder sensors.
Flow document feeder sensors 93

Figure 1-61 Flow document feeder sensors
10. MSO 8.Cover Open 7. Pickup Position 5. Detect Sensor 2. Paper Width
9.Pickup 1. Paper Length

Pickup Roller
11. Pre Registration
12. Registration
3.LIFT
PRE REGI PICK UP FEED separation 4.CAM RELEASE

6. POSITION
REGI
DUPLEX-SCAN OUT EXIT
Scan CIS
13. SIM Scan Idle
SIMPLEX
Scan In WHITE-R
OLLER
16. Exit
14. SIM Scan
Scan CCD
MSO Sensors 15. DUP Scan
11. Pre Registration

10. MSO
Table 1-28 Flow document feeder sensors
Callout Item Function
1 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length
2 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width
3 Stacker Lift Sensor Detects Stacker Position
4 Cam Release Sensor Sensing ‘Separation Roller’ rotation
5 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty
6 Position Sensor Detects Stacker Position
7 Pickup Position Sensor Sensing ‘Pickup Roller’ rotation
8 Cover Open Sensor Detects if cover is open or closed
9 Pickup Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the feed path
10 MSO Sensor Detects mix size
11 Pre-Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the pre-regi path
12 Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Regi path
13 SIM Scan Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Scan In Roller’ rotation
14 SIM Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan In path
15 DUP Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan Out path
16 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing

Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor
Learn about the flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor.
Figure 1-62 Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor
Tx Sensor
Rx Sensor
This sensor detects multi-feeds.
● Component: Ultrasonic Sensor Tx Board, Rx Board , HIC Board (Amp and Filter)
● The Rx Sensor has a different level on each paper status: no paper, one paper, multiple papers.
● Detect the multi-feeding through the level change of Rx Sensor.
● Transmit and receive operation of 300 khz frequency.
Flow document feeder drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder drive system.
The flow document feeder drive system drive system includes eight motors.
The Flow ADF drive system consists for the following sections:
● Pickup release drive
● Pickup drive
● Pre-regi drive
● Regi drive
● Scan-in roller release drive
● Scan drive
● Exit drive
● Lift drive
Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor 95

Figure 1-63 Flow document feeder drive system
Pre-Registration Drive section
Registration Drive section

Pickup Drive section Pickup Release Drive section
Scan Drive section
Lift Drive section

Scan in Roller Release Drive section
Exit Drive section
Flow document feeder lifting drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder lifting drive system.
Figure 1-64 Flow document feeder lifting drive system
● Component: LIFT MOTOR, LIFT SHAFT, LIFT BAR, PAPER SENSOR
● LIFT MOTOR Starts > LIFT SHAFT and LIFT BAR lift Tray
● PAPER SENSOR detects paper in the Tray

● Paper contacts PICKUP ROLLER and stops movement
● Document is passed through SCAN OUT SENSOR. Duplex scanning starts.
Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system.
Figure 1-65 Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system
● Holds the rear of the paper using cam motion for improved scan quality
● Component: RELEASE MOTOR, RELEASE CAM, SCAN-IN IDLE ROLLER
● Motor and cam operation repeats for every piece of paper
Flow document feeder specifications

Learn about the flow document feeder specifications.
Table 1-29 Flow document feeder specification
Item Specification
Capacity 250 pages (stacker lifting)
Scan Speed 120/240 ipm
Pickup Semi-Retard
Motor 8 each
Stacker Lifting
Scanning White Roller/White Bar
MSO Support
Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system 97

Flow document feeder registration
Learn about the flow document feeder registration.
The flow document feeder registration uses a two-times registration process.
Figure 1-66 Flow document feeder registration

Pre Registration Roller
Registration Sensor Pre Registration Sensor
Registration
Roller
Flow document feeder scanning position

Learn about the flow document feeder scanning position.
Figure 1-67 Flow document feeder scanning position
6LPSOH[
'XSOH[
Table 1-30 Flow document feeder scanning position
Item Simplex Duplex
Scanning White Roller White Bar

Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor
Learn about the flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor.
The MSO sensor detects the size of mixed size papers and sets the alignment of the papers to the rear.
Figure 1-68 Flow document feeder MSO 1
Figure 1-69 Flow document feeder MSO 2

Pre-Registration
MSO Sensor
Sensor
Table 1-31 Flow document feeder MSO3 (length x max width)
Length A3 SEF A4 LEF B4 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF A5 LEF A5 SEF
(297 mm) (297 mm) (257 mm) (257 mm) (210 mm) (210 mm) (182 mm) (148 mm)
(11.7 in) (11.7 in) (10.1 in) (10.1 in) (8.3 in) (8.3 in) (7.2 in) (5.8 in)
A3 SEF X
(420 mm)
(16.5 in)
A4 LEF X
(210 mm)
(8.3 in)
Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor 99

Table 1-31 Flow document feeder MSO3 (length x max width) (continued)
Length A3 SEF A4 LEF B4 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF A5 LEF A5 SEF
(297 mm) (297 mm) (257 mm) (257 mm) (210 mm) (210 mm) (182 mm) (148 mm)
(11.7 in) (11.7 in) (10.1 in) (10.1 in) (8.3 in) (8.3 in) (7.2 in) (5.8 in)
B4 SEF X X X
(363 mm)
(14.3 in)
B5 LEF X X X
(182 mm)
(7.2 in)
A4 SEF X X X X X
(297 mm)
(11.7 in)
A5 LEF X X X X X
(148 mm)
(5.8 in)
B5 SEF X X X X
(257 mm)
(10.1 in)
A5 SEF X X
(210 mm)
(8.3 in)
Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method

Learn about the flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method.
● Component: LEVER GUIDE EXIT F, GUIDE-EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.
● Open LEVER GUIDE EXIT F.
● Cleans with a D-CIS GLASS in the direction indicated.
● Cleans the GUIDE EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated.
Figure 1-70 Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method (1 of 2)
3XOOWKHOHYHU

Figure 1-71 Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method (2 of 2)
Flow ADF z bundles (GX)

Learn about the flow ADF z bundles (GX).
Model Engine Scanner
Platen DN-sGX Z-GX
Color 40 ppm Same at Scan USM Capacity Scan USM Capacity

whole Speed Speed
model
50 ppm 80/160 ipm X 100 sheet 120/240 O 250 sheet
ipm
60 ppm
Mono 40 ppm
50 ppm
60 ppm
Hardware configuration
Learn the functions and specifications of the hardware configuration.
The electronic circuit system consists of the following:
● Main controller (main board)
● OPE unit
● Document feeder (Flow/LX) controller
● HVPS board
Flow ADF z bundles (GX) 101

● LVPS board
● Fuser drive assembly
Figure 1-72 Electronic circuit diagram
The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller, and scan controller.
The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port and receives
copy data from the scan controller. The main controller uses this information to generate printable video
bitmap data. It controls all modulesrequired to print, including the laser scanner assembly, HVPS, FAN,
fuser, and so on.
The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through Universal
Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (UART). The main controller communicates with and checks the
life of the toner cartridge, drum, and developer units through I2C.
The main controller uses Quad Core CPU 1.5 GHz, DDR3 4 GB memory, Micro SD 4 GB, and a 500 GB
SATA HDD to control the engine driving, video signal processing, and user interface.
A MICOM controls power to the fuser lamp and power to the system according to an optimized energy
saving algorithm. The MICOM communicates with the OPE controller through the USB 3.0 protocol to
display the system information on the control panel.
The OPE unit displays the status of the system using the control panel TFT LCD in response to user
actions or the main controller.
The soft power switch in the OPE unit is used to safely shut down the system.
The ADF controller controls some mechanisms required to scan continuously from the ADF. The ADF
controller communicates with the main controller to synchronize scan timing.
The HVPS board generates and controls high-voltage channels. The fuser drive assembly controls
power to the fuser lamp. The LVPS board generates 5 V and 24 V power for the system.
The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:

Figure 1-73 Circuit board locations
HP Formatter
(Not shown)
LVPS (2)
Main controller
Learn about the main controller.
CAUTION: The main controller for the previous model is not compatible with the new model (IR/UI). Do
not use the previous model main controller during replacement.
Main controller (previous model)

Learn about the main controller (previous model).
The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 4 GB), Micro SD (4 GB),
1 G Ethernet PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal
interface connection, motor driving IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.
Main controller 103

The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with
the various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the
other device (such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, Modem) by UART.
Figure 1-74 Main controller block diagram
Figure 1-75 Main controller clock diagram

M 41T81
RTC with IRQ
32.768Khz
CrystalInput
RTS5401
U SB3.0 H U B
12M hz
Crystal
Input
A TSA M D A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)

20E15 D D R3 8G b
D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
12M hz K4B8G 1646B
Crystal
Input
RTC D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz)
N .C
D D R3 8G b
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N K4B8G 1646B
12M hz CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B
M AC0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) Crystal
Input Clk1 RTL8211 Input
M AC1 NETWORK OPTION PBA

PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) Crystal
Input Clk1
PCI_REFCLK_N RTL8211 Input
CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)

U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input Clk1 SC AN0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_CCD M _N
U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)

D CIS
U SB3H _REFCLK_N SC AN1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_D CIS_N

Figure 1-76 Main controller connection information
Table 1-32 Main controller connections
Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description
1 OUTPUT 12 OPC BLDC 23 FIH JOINT 34 FAX JOINT

MONO
2 FUSER 13 LVPS TYPE5 24 UI IF 35 2ND

DRIVE NETWORK
3 FUSER 14 LVPS 25 USB 36 EFI SIGNAL

DRAWER TYPE3R HOST/HUB
4 TB/DEVE/E- 15 FRONT IF 26 DCIS 37 CPU FAN

Label MONO
5 TONER 16 Fuser drive 27 CCDM

SUP/RES assembly IF
6 CTD/ 17 Laser 28 Flow ADF

Registration scanner
assembly assembly
SENS MONO
7 PICKUP 1/2 18 HVPS 29 HDD

MONO POWER
Main controller (previous model) 105

Table 1-32 Main controller connections (continued)
8 FEED/ 19 USB HOST 30 HDD

Registration 1/2 SIGNAL
assembly
MOT
9 SIDE 20 USB 31 SIDE FAN

DEVICE
10 dual 21 NETWORK 32 MSOK

cassette
feeder
(DCF) IF
11 FINISHER 22 EFI POWER 33 SD CARD
CAUTION: The main controller for the previous model is not compatible with the new model (IR/UI). Do
not use the previous model main controller during replacement.
Main controller
Learn about the printer main controller.
The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 6 GB), eMMC (4 GB)1
G Ethernet PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal
interface connection, motor driving IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.
The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with
the various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the
other device (such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, and Modem) by UART.

Figure 1-77 Main controller block diagram
O P E IR
IR P B A
C h3
FU S E R
10.1" C h2 PTB SC A N N ER
T FT LC D
TO N ER C R U M
C h1 O PC C R U M D SD F
U S B 3.0 H U B P B A
R TC
W IFI/N FC M O D U LE C h0
D E B U G _M C B
FR O N T 2 nd N W
R T S 5411 C h0 P LA T E N
C A R D R EA D ER U SB D IM M C h1
D E B U G _S C B
4Port H U B H O ST
M S O K /T P M C h2
D E B U G _U I
C h3
E N G IN E P A N E L
LC D C h4
A T S A M D 2E 15
C on. I2C SPI S C A N IF S C A N IF
C h5
CH0 CH1 D SD F
R EA R U SB
U SB H O ST
R T S 5401 3.0
C h6
DCF
1/2 4Port H U B H O ST C h7
FIN IS H E R
C h9
R EA R U SB UART E FI
U SB 3.0 C h10
M O D EM 0
D EVIC E D E V IC E C h11
M O D EM 1
D D R 3 6G B DDRC
FU S E R FU S E R U N IT
O n-board 4G B 800M hz
D IM M 2G B 32bit
N C TH 1 C /D N C TH 2 C /D
M A G IC 12B it AD C A T S A M D 2E 15
IO ExternalAD C 12b A N A LO G M U X
A N A LO G M U X READ M H V YM C K, TH V YM C K
M P SIZE / PAPER SIZE1,2 / ADC TC YM C K / C TD ,AC R / FU SER / W TB
IN N ER, O U TTER, EXIT, LSU TEM P 1.8V
H U M ID ITY, M O D EL SEL, AC Level E FI V ID E O
P C Iex C O N T R O LLE R
Step M otor FB / 24V FB
* C olor m odel
EN G IN E
STEP M O T
PIC KU P1/2, FEED , REG I, T1 EN G AG E,
D R V 8825
X15
A 3000 M AC0 R T L8211E
G igabit phy
R J45
B ASE
D U PLEX_RET/1/2, SKEW Y/M /C , S I-7321M CTRL.

W TB , FU SER RELEASE, TO N ER SU PPLY X2 R T L8211E R J45
YM /C K, TO N ER RESERVO IR YM /C K, M AC1
A N 44061A G igabit phy EXTEN D
C ST LO C K, X1 O PTIO N KIT
FA N SA TA
SEN SO R EXIT1/2/3/4,SM PS(LX/G X), SA TA
2.5", 320G B
EM PTY 1/2, LIFT1/2, PRE FEED 1/2, FEED C PU , LSU , D EVE,SID E,
REG I, M P_EM PTY/SIZEL/W , C U RL2, FU SER O U T CTRL. G P IO
FU SER IN /O U T, B IN _FU LL_EXIT1/2, PW M
D U PLEX_JAM 1/2, D U PLEX_RETU RN , B LD C 4B E A M LS U
PAPER_SIZE1/2, W ASTE_IN STALL, O PC Y,M ,C ,K/ITB , YM CK
O PC _PH ASE Y/M /C /K, RESERVO IR Y/M /C /K, FU SER LS U C CTRL. LD 1,2,3,4
TO N ER SU P YM /C K, ITB H O M E, FU SER PO S, LSU _M O T1
C O VER O PEN FRO N T/SID E, H V PS VD O 1B _YM C K
SC AN H O M E / APS 1,2 SH U TTER AC R, M H V YM C K
VD O 2B _YM C K
PLATEN C O VER O PEN 1,2 D EV D C YM C K H PV C VD O D ATA VD O 3B _YM C K
D EV AC VPP YM C K
VD O 4B _YM C K
S O LE N O ID / C LT D EV AC
C LT : M P D EV AC EN YM C K
SO L : M P / EXIT TH V1 YM C K
TH V2(C V/C C ) / TH V eM M C
DC M OT C LEAN MMC CTRL. 4G B
AC R SH U TTER, C ST LO C K 1/2 SAW / FU SER B IAS B oot D evice
Main controller 107

Figure 1-78 Main controller clock diagram
32.768Khz
M 41T81
Crystal Input RTC w ith IRQ
12M hz
RTS5401 A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)
Crystal
U SB3.0 H U B D D R3 2G B
Input D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
(4G b*8*4ea)
RTC D D R3 2G B
(4G b*8*4ea)
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz) D D R3 2G B
N .C
12M hz
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N (4G b*8*4ea)
CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 2G b_tem p
(4G b*8*4ea)
M AC 0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input
PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz)
M AC 1 N ETW O RK O PTIO N PBA
D IF_CLK_P M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
PCI_REFCLK_N N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
D IF_CLK_N M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input
CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)

U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N SC AN 0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_CCD M _N
U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)

D IF_CLK_P
U SB3H _REFCLK_N D CIS
D IF_CLK_N SC AN 1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_D CIS_N

Figure 1-79 Main controller connection information
Table 1-33 Main controller connections
1 OUTPUT 12 OPC BLDC 23 FIH JOINT 34 FAX JOINT

MONO
2 FUSER 13 LVPS TYPE5 24 HUB IF 35 2ND

DRIVE NETWORK
3 FUSER 14 LVPS 25 USB 36 EFI SIGNAL

DRAWER TYPE3R HOST/HUB
4 TB/DEVE/E- 15 FRONT IF 26 UI IF 37 CPU FAN

Label MONO
5 TONER 16 Fuser drive 27 DCIS

SUP_/RES assembly IF
6 CTD/ 17 Laser 28 CCDM

Registration scanner
assembly assembly
SENS MONO
7 PICKUP 1/2 18 HVPS 29 Flow ADF

MONO
Main controller 109

Table 1-33 Main controller connections (continued)
8 FEED/ 19 USB HOST 30 HDD

Registration 1/2 POWER
assembly
MOT
9 SIDE 20 USB 31 HDD

DEVICE SIGNAL
10 dual 21 NETWORK 32 SIDE FAN

cassette
feeder
(DCF) IF
11 FINISHER 22 EFI POWER 33 MSOK
Information
● Part Number
– E825z, E825dn series: JC82-00542A
– E825du series: 5CM58-67001
● Part Name: MainPCA
NOTE: This main board is for all HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 models.
Master system operation key (MSOK)

Learn about the master system operation key (MSOK).
MSOK PCA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, an EEPROM, and
a X-E-Label. The flash memory (4 MB), EEPROM (256 KB) and X-E-Label are used for all system operations
such as system parameter, device status, tech information, and service information.
NOTE: When a main board needs to be exchanged, reinstall the MSOK PCA to the new main board to
retain the system information.
IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main
board in the same orientation as when it was removed in order for the printer to function.
Figure 1-80 MSOK
1 Main PCA I/F connector

Formatter cabling
Learn about the formatter cabling.
Figure 1-81 Formatter cabling (sGX/GX)

sGX/GX ADF Only Cable Rev A CPS (J28)
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown Card insGX/GX
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A

Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A
Controller Board Engine
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)
8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

w/ Keyboard “Z” bundle Accelerator Card
CP HDMI (J30) Std sGX/GX
CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Fan (J47)
Gigabit
RJ45
Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt
2x Host Ports Device
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card

a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS(Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)
Figure 1-82 Formatter cabling (LX)

LX ADF Only Cable Rev A
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown
Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
CP HDMI (J30)
CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
Inside Formatter Cage Fan (J47)
Gigabit
RJ45

Opt
2x Host Ports Device

a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS (Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)
Formatter cabling 111

112
Cable Rev A
sGX/GX ADF Only CPS (J28)
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown Card insGX/GX

Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)

w/ Keyboard “Z” bundle Accelerator Card
CP HDMI (J30) StdsGX/GX
CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02557A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
Inside Formatter Cage Gigabit
Figure 1-83 Formatter cabling (sGX/GX)
Fan (J47) RJ45

Opt Device
Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

2x Host Ports
a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) SAM
- -JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS(Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)
Cable Rev A
LX ADF Only
Cable
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown
Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A
Formatter cabling
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
NA
Jxx
Table 1-34 Formatter cabling

CP HDMI (J30)
Figure 1-84 Formatter cabling (LX)
CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
LVPS
From
Expansion (J18)
Inside Formatter Cage Gigabit
Fan (J47) RJ45

Opt Device
2x Host Ports
a
To
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS (Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)
Accelerator
Purpose
Formatter cabling
Power for accelerator
113
Table 1-34 Formatter cabling (continued)
Cable Jxx From To Purpose
Engine HDMI J29 Main board Formatter High speed print data
(JC39-02584A)
Engine LAN J8 Main board Formatter High speed print data

(JC39-02584A)
Engine control J36 Main board Formatter Low level engine

control (JC39-02553A)
HIP2 USB J12 Formatter HIP USB for HIP
NOTE: Cable bundled.
Front walk-up USB J20 Formatter Front of printer USB for walk u
CP HDMI J30 Formatter CP Data to CP
CP side band J16 Formatter CP Power, reset, wake

lines, display
power, keyboard
(JC39-02557A)
Power button J16 Formatter Power button Power ON/OFF
IOD J16 Formatter IOD Data to/from Island of

Data
Internal USB/AA J21 Formatter Accessory Accessory
Engine power J6 LVPS Formatter 5V supply to formatter
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H)

Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H).
NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)
The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards.
The voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection
modes for over current and overload.

Figure 1-85 LVPS PCA (Type 5H)
1 INPUT_AC
2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3/4 (to Main PCA)
3 24 V on/off
4 OUTPUT_DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)
Specification
● General input/output voltage
– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)
– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)
– Input current: 8.0 A (110 V)/5.0 A (220 V)
– Output power: 275 W
○ DC 5 V: 35 W
○ DC 24 V: 240 W
Information
110 V 220 V
Part number JC44-00249A JC44-00250A
Part name LVPS 110V Type 5H LVPS 220V Type 5H
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H) 115

Input/output connector
● AC input connector (CN1)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 AC_L AC input
2 AC_N
● DC output connector (CN2)
1 +5V1 Power
2 GND 5 V ground
3 +5V2 Power
4 GND 5 V ground
1 +24V1 Power
2 GND 24 V ground
3 +24V2 Power
4 GND 24 V ground
5 +24V3 Power
6 GND 24 V ground
7 +24V4 Power
8 GND 24 V ground
● Signal Connector (CN4)
1 GND Active Low
2 24 V On/Off
3 GND
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3R) for GX/sGX only
Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3R) for GX/sGX only.
NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 1 each, Type3 x 1 each)

Figure 1-86 LVPS PCA (Type 3R)
1 INPUT_AC Power (CON1)
2 Fuser AC Power (CON2)
3 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3 and +5V1 (CON3)
4 Signal_24 V on/off, Relay on, Fuser on (CON4)
Specification
– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)
– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)
– Input current: 10.0 A (110 V)/8.0 A (220 V)
○ DC 5 V: 20 W
○ DC 24 V: 144 W
Information
110 V 220 V
Part number JC44-00222E JC39-01202A
Part name LVPS 110V Type 3R LVPS 220V Type 3R
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3R) for GX/sGX only 117
1 AC_L AC input
2 AC_N
● Fuser AC Power Connector (CN2)
1 AC_L AC input for fuser
2 AC_N
1 +5V1 DC 5 V
2 GND Ground
3 +24V1 DC 24 V
4 GND Ground
5 +24V2 DC 24 V
6 GND Ground
7 +24V3 DC 24 V
1 GND Ground
2 24 V On/Off Active Low
3 Relay on Active High
4 24 V Bias for photo triac, relay
5 Fuser on Active High
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4)

Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4).
NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)

Figure 1-87 LVPS PCA (Type 4)
1 INPUT_AC
2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V1/2/3 and DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)
3 24 V on/off
Specification
– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)
– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)
– Input current: 6.3 A (110 V)/5 A (220 V)
○ DC 5 V: 25 W
○ DC 24 V: 180 W
Information
110 V 220 V
Part number JC44-00091D JC44-00092D
Part name LVPS 110V Type 4 LVPS 220V Type 4
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) 119

1 AC_L AC input
2 AC_N
1 +5V1 Power
2 GND 5 V ground
3 +5V2 Power
4 GND 5 V ground
5 +24V1 Power
6 GND 24 V ground
7 +24V2 Power
8 GND 24 V ground
9 +24V3 Power
1 GND Active Low
2 24 V On/Off
3 GND
Fuser drive assembly

Learn about the fuser drive assembly.
This board supplies voltage to the fuser AC, heater, and main board.

Figure 1-88 Fuser drive board
1 Option Heater
2 Fuser Lamp
3 Fuser drive assembly I/F
4 LVPS (Type 5H)
5 Main Switch
6 AC Inlet
7 Option Heater Switch
8 LVPS (Type 4)
9/10 Reactor
Information
110 V 220 V
Part number JC44-00235B JC44-00236B
Part name Fuser Drive Board 110V Fuser Drive Board 220V
High voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA

Learn about the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).
The HVPS generates five high-voltage channels including FUSER, SAW, DEV, AC/DC, THV+/-, and MHV.
High voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA 121

Figure 1-89 HVPS PCA
1 DETECT
2 24 V Input voltage
4 ADC_HVPS_24 Signal
6 GND GND
7 GND GND
8 3.3 V Input voltage
9 GND GND
10 OPEN
11 READ_THV+_CV Output voltage
12 PWM_THV+_CV PWM signal
13 PWM_MHV PWM signal
14 THV+_CV_SELECT Input voltage
15 PWM_SAW PWM signal
16 READ_THV Output voltage
17 PWM_THV- PWM signal
18 nEN_DEVE nEN signal
19 PWM_FUSER_BIAS PWM signal
20 PWM_DEV_DC PWM signal

21 PWM_THV+_CC PWM signal
22 PWM_DEV_Vpp PWM signal
23 PWM_DEV_AC PWM signal
24 DETECT
Connections
CN2 MHV/SAW Output voltage
CN3 THV +/- Output voltage
CN4 DEV AC/DC Output voltage
CN5 FUSER Output voltage
Specification
● Input voltage: DC 24 V, 3.3 V
● Output voltage:
– MHV: –1387 V
– DEV DC: –603 V, AC: Vpp 960 V
– THV+(CC/CV): 25.6 uA/2045 V, THV-: –1295 V
– SAW: –990 V
– FUSER: 400 V
Information
● JC44-00241B
● Part name: HVPS
Eraser PCA
Learn about the eraser PCA.
The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the
drum after printing.
Figure 1-90 Eraser PCA
Eraser PCA 123

Part number/name
● JC92–02747A
● PCA-ERASER
Fuser PCA
Learn about the fuser PCA.
The Fuser PCA includes a CRU memory for Fuser Unit Life Cycle counting. The Fuser PCA provides a
connection interface for the pressure sensor.
Figure 1-91 Fuser PCA
1 Fuser EEPROM, Pressure Sensor I/F
2 Pressure Sensor (Not used)
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-FUSER
Waste Sensor PCA

Learn about the waste sensor PCA.
The waste sensor PCA detects the waste toner level inside the toner collection unit.
Figure 1-92 Waste sensor PCA

Information
● Part name: WASTE SENSOR RX
Paper Size sensor PCA

The paper size sensor PCA is used for detecting the size of the paper in the tray.
Figure 1-93 Paper size sensor PCA
Flow document feeder PCA

Learn about the flow document feeder PCA.
The flow document feeder PCA uses the R5F562TAEDFP (100 MHz Main Clock) for controlling the flow
document feeder and interfaces with the main board through UART.
The flow document feeder PCA has three motor driver ICs to control the BLDC/step motor and controls
one BLDC motor, two step motors, one clutch, one fan, and 11 sensors.
Figure 1-94 Flow document feeder PCA
1 Scan Position 1/2, Registration, Feed Sensor
2 Pickup, Paper Detect, Cover Open Sensor
Paper Size sensor PCA 125

3 BLDC Motor, Registration Motor, Pickup Clutch
4 Output Sensor, Fan
5 Paper Length 1/2, Width Sensor
6 Scan Joint PCA
Information
● Part number: JC92-02964A
● Part name: Flow PCA - ADF HIC (GX only)
● Part number: JC92-02964B
● Part name: Flow ADF-PCA (sGX)
● Part name: LX (du models) ADF PCA
Scan joint PCA

The scan joint PCA has a Bipolar Step Motor driving IC and interfaces with the WLED, APS sensor (1, 2),
cover open sensor (1, 2), home position sensor, and main board.
The scan joint PCA also functions as the relay board to interface with the ADF I/F and power board.
Figure 1-95 Scan joint PCA
1 WLED IF PCA
2 MAIN PCA
3 Cover Open 2, Home Sensor
4 ADF/flow ADF PCA
5 Image Scanner Motor
Information

● Part name: PCA-SCAN JOINT
CCDM PCA
The CCDM PCA is used in the scanner unit and converts the reflected light from an original document
to electrical signals. The reflected light from an original document is converted to three-color analog
signals: red, green, and blue. The ADC converts each analog signal to digital. For a high speed data
transmission, the digital data signal is converted to a LVDS format with serialization. The CCDM PCA
includes the CCD, ADC, Logic IC, and so on.
Figure 1-96 CCDM PCA
1 MAIN PCA
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-CCDM
WLED IF PCA
The WLED IF PCA interfaces with the WLED and sensors inside the Image Scanner unit.
Figure 1-97 WLED IF PCA
1 APS1, APS2 Sensor
2 Cover Open1 Sensor
3 SCAN JOINT PCA
4 WLED PCA
Information
● Part number:
CCDM PCA 127

● Part name: PBA-WLED IF
WLED PCA
The WLED PCA consists of two WLEDs used as scanner light.
Figure 1-98 WLED PCA
1 WLED PCA
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-WLED
Dual cassette feeder (DCF)

Learn about the dual cassette feeder.
The DCF is an optional device that stores additional paper.

Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)
Figure 1-99 Paper feeding system
Tray number Roller number Roller name Function
4 R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.
4 R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the

prefeed roller.
4 R3 Reverse Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

(separation) roller
4 R4 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.
4 R5 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.
4/5 R6 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic

machine.
4/5 R7 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

prefeed roller.

(separation) roller
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 129

Paper path
Figure 1-100 Paper path
Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Figure 1-101 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Tray number Callouts Description Function
4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 3.

4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of

Tray 3.
4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and

R4-5.
4/5 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-

R7.
5 S5 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 4.
5 S6 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of

Tray 4.
5 S7 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R9-R10 and

R11-12.
4 S8 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper

size in Tray 3.
5 S9 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper

size in Tray 4.
4/5 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of right cover.
4 M1 Tray 3 pickup motor
5 M2 Tray 4 pickup motor
4/5 M3 Tray feed motor

PCA connection
Figure 1-102 PCA connection and DCF
Connector number Item number Connection
CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F
CN801 2 PICK/LIFT4 MOTOR I/F
CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F
CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/LCT HOME I/F
CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK
CN301 6 MAIN I/F
CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F
CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F
CN802 9 SENSOR PAPER SIZE
CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER
CN302 11 SUB I/F
CN1101 12 BBP I/F
CN501 13 T4 SENSOR
CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

High capacity input tray (HCI)
Learn the functions and specifications of the high capacity input tray.
Tray number Roller number Roller name Function

prefeed roller.

(separation) roller
4 R6 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic

machine.
High capacity input tray (HCI) 133

Paper path
Figure 1-104 HCI paper path
Figure 1-105 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
3/4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in main tray.
3/4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of

main tray.
3/4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and

R4-5.
3/4 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-

R7.
3/4 S5 Tray insertion sensor Detects tray insertion.
3/4 S6 Knockup home sensor Detects home position of knock-

plate.

3/4 S7 Main tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper

quantity in main tray.
3/4 S8 Main tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper

quantity in main tray.
3/4 S9 Shift tray no paper sensor Detects paper empty in sub tray.
3/4 S10 Shift tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual quantity in
sub tray.
3/4 S11 Shift tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual quantity in
sub tray.
3/4 S12 Shift plate home sensor Detects home position of shift
plate.
3/4 S13 Shift plate end sensor Detects end position of shift plate.
3/4 S14 Solenoid home sensor Detects home position of solenoid.
3/4 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of solenoid.
3 M1 Tray pickup motor
3 M2 Tray feed motor
3 M3 Tray lift up motor
3 M4 Paper shift motor
3 A1 Solenoid
High capacity input tray (HCI) 135

PCA connection
Figure 1-106 HCI PCA connection
CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F
CN301 6 MAIN I/F
CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER
CN302 11 SUB I/F
CN1101 12 BBP I/F
CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)
Learn the functions and specifications of the side high capacity input tray.
Roller number Roller name Function
R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.
R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed roller.
R3 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

roller
R4 Idle roller Transports paper to the feed roller.
R5 Feed roller Makes paper transportation smooth.
Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) 137

Paper path
Figure 1-108 sHCI paper path

Figure 1-109 sHCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Callouts Description Function
S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in tray.
S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of main tray.
S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.
S4 Paper level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper quantity in

tray.
S5 Paper level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper quantity in

tray.
S6 Install sensor 1 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the

basic machine.
S7 Install sensor 2 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the

basic machine.
SW1 Top door open switch Detects opening of the top door.
M1 Tray pickup motor Drives the pickup roller.
M2 Tray feed motor Drives the feed roller
Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) 139

Callouts Description Function
M3 Tray lift up motor Lifts up the tray.
PCA connection
Figure 1-110 sHCI PCA connection
CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/sHCI HOME I/F
CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK
CN301 6 MAIN I/F
CN1101 12 BBP I/F
CN501 13 T4 SENSOR
CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement
Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement.
HP service and support

Learn about access to additional service and support information.
Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to
access the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).
Find information about the following topics.
● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories
● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information
● Remove and replace part instructions and videos
● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues
● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information
● Install, configure, and how to information
View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.
Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)
1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).
2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).
3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.
4. Select the Technical Documentation item.
5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.
Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)
1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).
2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.
3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.
4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.
Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement 141

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.
Americas (AMS)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Spanish
● WISE - Portuguese
● WISE - French
Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Japanese
● WISE - Korean
● WISE - Chinese (simplified)
● WISE - Chinese (traditional)
● WISE - Thai
Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)
● WISE - English
Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.
View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).
View a video of ow to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).
Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.
Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.
Table 2-1 Ordering
Item or provider Description
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply
Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
142 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-1 Ordering (continued)
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.
Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.
Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.
How to use parts lists and diagrams

Learn how to use the parts lists and diagrams.
The figures in this chapter show the major sub-assemblies in the printer and their component parts.
A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. The table lists the item number, the
associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a
field replacement unit (FRU).
NOTE: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical parts, pay
careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the part description. Doing so will make sure that the
selected part number is for the correct printer model.
NOTE: The abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as
a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and
sensors.
ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If
an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground
before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
Service approach
Learn more about the service approach.
Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.
Orderable parts 143

Precautions when assembling and disassembling
● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage,
and current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the
machine, circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.
● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause
the printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.
● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This
printer contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short
circuit or electric shock.
● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is
disassembled, dust might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There
are no serviceable parts inside the laser scanner assembly.
● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.
Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.
● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA
– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.
– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.
● Precautions when replacing a PCA
– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.
– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.
● Precautions when checking a PCA
– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.
– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.
– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.
– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when
releasing them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is
latched.
Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.
● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.
● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.
● Remove any finishing devices and the side HCI, if they are installed.
● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an
ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
● Remove the toner cartridges, if needed.
After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new
issues.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:
Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.
2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.
3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.
4. Print a configuration page.
5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print
quality defects.
6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.
Before performing service 145

Copy-quality test
Learn about the copy-quality test.
1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder, print a copy job, and then verify the results.
2. Place the configuration page on the flatbed glass, print a copy job, and then verify the results
Fax-quality test
Learn about the fax-quality test.
1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.
2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.
3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.
Parts removal order

For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the
front of the printer for correct orientation.
Maintenance
Learn about preventive maintenance and printer cleaning procedures.
Cleaning the paper dust stick

Learn about cleaning the paper dust stick.
The paper dust stick needs to be cleaned after a specified number of pages are printed. A clean the
paper dust stick message will appear. This is when the paper dust stick must be cleaned. Use the
following procedure to complete this task.
1. Open the front door.
Figure 2-1 Open the front door

2. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
Figure 2-2 Remove the TCU
3. Pull out the paper dust stick.
Figure 2-3 Remove paper dust stick
4. Remove the paper dust.
Figure 2-4 Remove the paper dust
Cleaning the paper dust stick 147

5. Insert the paper dust stick back into the slot.
Figure 2-5 Install the paper dust stick
6. Insert the toner collection unit (TCU) until it locks in place on each side.
Figure 2-6 Install the TCU

7. Close the front door. Make sure the cover is securely closed. If the message still appears, repeat
Steps 3 and 4.
Figure 2-7 Close the front door
Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX)

Learn about cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX).
1. Open the document feeder unit.
Figure 2-8 Open document feeder unit
Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX) 149
2. Clean the document feeder white bar and CIS using a lint-free cloth.
Figure 2-9 Clean document feeder white bar

CIS
Simplex
White bar
Duplex
White bar
Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX)
Learn about cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX).
1. Open the document feeder, peel back the white backing , and then release the green tab.
Figure 2-10 Peel back the white backing and release one tab

2. Open the access door. Clean the simplex white bar (callout 1), the CIS (callout 2), and the duplex
white bar (callout 3) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.
Figure 2-11 Clean flow document feeder white bar
Cleaning the scanner glass

Learn about cleaning the scan glass.
■ Open the document feeder. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.
Figure 2-12 Clean the scanner glass
Cleaning the scanner glass 151

Main parts
Learn about the printer main parts.
Covers
View covers exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Covers
Parts diagram and parts list for the covers.

Figure 2-13 Covers
Table 2-2 Covers
Ref Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure
No
2 JC63-02105A Right cover, middle (front power) 1 Removal and replacement:

Removal and replacement:
Front power switch on page
154
3 JC95-02103A Front cover (front power) 1 Removal and replacement:

Front cover on page 158
4 JC95-02104A Inner cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Inner cover on page 160
5 JC63-04861B Front cover, lower 1 Not applicable
8 JC63-04847 Right cover, front 1 Not applicable

C
9 JC95-02102A Right cover, rear 1 Removal and replacement:

Right rear cover on page 166
10 JC63-04846 Right cover, upper 1 Not applicable

B
11 JC63-05571A Scan cover, right 1 Not applicable
13 JC95-02117A Rear cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Lower rear cover on page 169
14 JC63-05633 Rear cover, upper 1 Removal and replacement:

A Upper rear cover on page 171
Covers 153
Table 2-2 Covers (continued)
Ref Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure
No
16 JC63-04840 Cover, exit rear 1 Not applicable

B
17 JC63-04859 Scan cover, rear 1 Not applicable

C
17 JC63-04859 Scan cover, rear (du model only) 1 Not applicable

D
18 JC63-04863 Rear cover, dummy 1 Not applicable

B
20 JC95-02101A Exit cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Exit cover on page 175
21 JC63-05638 Left cover, upper 1 Removal and replacement:

A Upper left cover on page 178
22 JC95-02100A Left cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Left cover on page 181
23 JC63-04862 Left cover, top 1 Not applicable

B
24 JC63-05587A Scan cover, left 1 Not applicable
25 JC63-05640 Cover, control panel top 1 Not applicable

A
26 JC63-05639 Cover, control-panel bottom 1 Not applicable

A
Not shown JC63-05635 Front top inner cover 1 Removal and replacement:
A Left cover on page 181
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Front power switch

Learn how to remove and replace the front power cover.
To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.
View a video of how to remove and replace the front power cover.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.
Mean time to repair:
Service level:

Turn the printer power off
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.
● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Table 2-3 Part information
Part number Part description
JC63-02105A Cover, middle right
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.
Remove the front top inner cover 155

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.
Figure 2-14 Remove the front top inner cover
2. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
Figure 2-15 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-16 Remove the front power cover
3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
Unpack the replacement assembly 157

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Front cover
Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the front cover.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC95-02103A Cover, front
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.
■ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.
Figure 2-17 Remove the front cover

printer.
pads.
Remove the front cover 159

Removal and replacement: Inner cover

Learn how to remove and replace the inner cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the inner cover.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC95-02104A Cover, inner
Required tools


the printer.
Post service test


remove it.


3. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.
1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
4. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.
■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove
it.
Figure 2-22 Remove the exit cover
5. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.
Remove the exit cover 163

■ Pull the paper dust brush straight out to remove it.
Figure 2-23 Remove the paper dust brush

7. Remove the inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner cover.
1. Remove the toner cartridge.
2. If not already open, open the right door.

3. Remove nine screws.
Figure 2-25 Screw locations
4. Remove the inner cover.
Figure 2-26 Remove the inner cover


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Right rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the right rear cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the right rear cover.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).

JC95-02102A Cover, Right Rear
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-27 Remove four screws
Remove the right rear cover 167

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-28 Remove the right rear cover

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Lower rear cover
Learn how to remove and replace the lower rear cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the lower rear cover.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC95-02117A Cover, lower rear
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Lower rear cover 169

Post service test
1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.
Figure 2-29 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.
■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
Figure 2-30 Remove the lower rear cover

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Upper rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the upper rear cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the upper rear cover.
Service level:

power cable.

display is blank).
JC63-05633A Cover, rear upper
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test




3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.
Remove the lower rear cover 173

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.
Figure 2-33 Remove the upper rear cover

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Exit cover
Learn how to remove and replace the exit cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the exit cover
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC95-02101A Cover, exit
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Exit cover 175

Post service test

remove it.


it.

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Upper left cover
Learn how to remove and replace the upper left cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the upper left cover.
Mean time to repair: 5 minutes
Service level: Basic

power cable.
display is blank).
JC63-05638A Cover, upper left
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test

2. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.
Remove the formatter cover 179

■ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the
printer to remove it.
Figure 2-37 Remove the left rear corner cover

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Left cover
Learn how to remove and replace the left cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the left cover.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC95-02100A Cover, left
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Left cover 181

Post service test
1. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
1. Remove the top left cover.
Figure 2-38 Top left cover
2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.
Figure 2-39 Remove the left cover


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Front top inner cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front top inner cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the front top inner cover.

power cable.
Removal and replacement: Front top inner cover 183

display is blank).
JC63-05635A Cover, front top inner
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



remove it.

printer.
pads.

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list
Description Part number Table and page
Cover, control panel top JC63-05640A Covers on page 153
Cover, control-panel bottom JC63-05639A Covers on page 153
Cover, exit rear JC63-04840B Covers on page 153
Exit cover JC95-02101A Covers on page 153
Front cover (front power) JC95-02103A Covers on page 153
Front cover, lower JC63-04861B Covers on page 153
Front top inner cover JC63-05635A Covers on page 153
Inner cover JC95-02104A Covers on page 153
Left cover JC95-02100A Covers on page 153
Left cover, top JC63-04862B Covers on page 153
Left cover, upper JC63-05638A Covers on page 153
Rear cover JC95-02117A Covers on page 153
Rear cover, dummy JC63-04863B Covers on page 153
Rear cover, upper JC63-05633A Covers on page 153
Right cover, front JC63-04847C Covers on page 153
Right cover, middle (front power) JC63-02105A Covers on page 153
Right cover, rear JC95-02102A Covers on page 153
Right cover, upper JC63-04846B Covers on page 153
Scan cover, left JC63-05587A Covers on page 153
Scan cover, rear JC63-04859C Covers on page 153
Scan cover, rear (du model only) JC63-04859D Covers on page 153
Scan cover, right JC63-05571A Covers on page 153

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list
Part number Description Table and page
JC63-02105A Right cover, middle (front power) Covers on page 153
JC63-04840B Cover, exit rear Covers on page 153
JC63-04846B Right cover, upper Covers on page 153
JC63-04847C Right cover, front Covers on page 153
JC63-04859C Scan cover, rear Covers on page 153
JC63-04859D Scan cover, rear (du model only) Covers on page 153
JC63-04861B Front cover, lower Covers on page 153
JC63-04862B Left cover, top Covers on page 153
JC63-04863B Rear cover, dummy Covers on page 153
JC63-05571A Scan cover, right Covers on page 153
JC63-05587A Scan cover, left Covers on page 153
JC63-05633A Rear cover, upper Covers on page 153
JC63-05635A Front top inner cover Covers on page 153
JC63-05638A Left cover, upper Covers on page 153
JC63-05639A Cover, control-panel bottom Covers on page 153
JC63-05640A Cover, control panel top Covers on page 153
JC95-02100A Left cover Covers on page 153
JC95-02101A Exit cover Covers on page 153
JC95-02102A Right cover, rear Covers on page 153
JC95-02103A Front cover (front power) Covers on page 153
JC95-02104A Inner cover Covers on page 153
JC95-02117A Rear cover Covers on page 153
Main assembly 1
View main assembly 1 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Main assembly 1
Parts diagram and parts list for the main assembly 1.
Numerical parts list 187

Figure 2-41 Main assembly 1
34
31
Table 2-13 Main assembly 1
Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure
No
1 JC90-01610A Tray 2 1 Not applicable
2 JC90-01611A Tray 3 1 Not applicable
3 JC95-02098 Cover, Right side upper 1 Not applicable

A
5 JC44-00241B High voltage power supply (HVPS) 1 Removal and replacement:

High voltage power supply
(HVPS) board on page 191
6 JC97-04574A Laser scanner assemblyJC97 1 Removal and replacement:

Laser scanner assembly on
page 194
7 L41606-011 Main PCA HDD 500 GB 1 Removal and replacement:

Internal hard disk drive (HDD)
on page 198
8 JC97-02276A Main PCA HDD bracket 1 Not applicable

Table 2-13 Main assembly 1 (continued)
No
9 JC81-07088A Guide, return 1 Not applicable
10 JC96-11643A HP LaserJet black developerJC96 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer unit on page 201
11 X3A74-67926 HP managed LJ toner collection unitX3A74 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner collection unit (TCU) on
page 205
12 JC93-01026B Paper dust brushJC93 1 Removal and replacement:

Paper dust brush on page
207
15 JC97-04907A Image scanner 1 Removal and replacement:

Image scanner assembly
(flatbed) on page 210
16 JC63-05410A White backing (LX) 1 Removal and replacement:

ADF white backing (LX) on
page 223
16 JC63-05795A White backing (GX) 1 Removal and replacement:

ADF white backing (GX) on
page 226
17 JC97-05074A ADF LX whole unit (du bundles) 1 Removal and replacement:

ADF whole unit (LX) on page
688
17 JC97-04955A GX - Flow ADF (dn/z bundles) 1 Not applicable
17 JC97-04956A sGX - Flow ADF 1 Not applicable
18 JC90-01369A Exit 1 Removal and replacement:

Exit unit on page 229
18-1 JC90-01373A Exit 2 1 Not applicable
18-2 JC90-01370A Exit 1 1 Not applicable
19 JC82-00483 HP LaserJet fuser 220V assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

C Fuser unit on page 237
19 JC82-00477C HP LaserJet fuser 110V assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser unit on page 237
20 JC93-01364A Frame main pickup 1 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup unit 1 on page 245
21 JC93-01365A Frame main pickup 2 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup unit 2 on page 254
22 JC95-02091A Right door mono 1 Removal and replacement:

Right door on page 262
23 JC93-01063C Drive pickup 1 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive unit 1 (Tray 2) on
page 266
23 JC93-01063C Drive pickup 2 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor
on page 270
Main assembly 1 189

No
24 JC93-01060A Drive main, mono 1 Removal and replacement:

Main drive unit on page 273
25 JC93-01066B Drive, toner supply mono 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner supply drive on page
280
26 JC93-01061A Drive registration assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Registration drive assembly
on page 289
27 JC93-01062A Drive, feed (Tray 1) 1 Removal and replacement:

Feed/Tray 1 drive unit on page
293
28 JC93-01064A Drive fuser, exit 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser/exit drive unit on page
300
29 JC44-00236 Fuser drive board 220V 1 Removal and replacement:

B Fuser drive board on page
308
29 JC44-00235 Fuser drive board 110V 1 Removal and replacement:

B Fuser drive board on page
308
Not shown JC39-02569 Wire harness FDB interface to main PCA 1 Removal and replacement:
A Fuser drive board on page
308
30 JC44-00249A LVPS (SMPS), 110V Type 5H 1 Removal and replacement:

Low voltage power supply
(LVPS) type 5H on page 315
30 JC44-00250 LVPS (SMPS), 220V Type 5H 1 Removal and replacement:

A Low voltage power supply
(LVPS) type 5H on page 315
31 JC44-00223F LVPS (SMPS), 220v Type 3 1 Removal and replacement:

(LVPS) type 3 on page 312
31 JC44-00222E LVPS (SMPS), 110v Type 3 1 Removal and replacement:

(LVPS) type 3 on page 312
34 JC31-00161A Fan, fuser 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser fan on page 319
37 JC93-01071A Reservoir, toner 1 Removal and replacement:

Reservoir unit on page 326
39 JC82-00542A Main PCA 1 Removal and replacement:

(E825z, Main board on page 337
E825dn
series)
39 5CM58-6700 Main PCA 1 Removal and replacement:

1 (E825du Main board on page 337
series)
Not shown JC39-02250 FFC Cable, HVPS 1 Not applicable

A

No
Not shown 0604-001393 Return sensor (on the exit unit) 1 Removal and replacement:
Return sensor (on the exit
unit) on page 345
Not shown 0604-001393 Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit unit) 1 Removal and replacement:
Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit
unit) on page 355
Not shown 0604-001381 Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) 1 HP LaserJet Managed MFP
E82540-E82560, E82540du-
E82560du - Removal and
replacement: Prefeed sensor
2 (pickup unit 2) on page 364
Not shown 0604-001490 Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) 1 Removal and replacement:
Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit
1) on page 371
Not shown 0604-001393 Bin full sensor 1 HP LaserJet Managed MFP

E82540-E82560, E82540du-
replacement: Output 1 bin full
sensor (on the exit unit) on
page 381
Not shown JC39-02194A Wiring harness (output device) 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: High voltage power supply (HVPS) board

Learn how to remove and replace the HVPS.
View a video of how to remove and replace the HVPS.

power cable.
Removal and replacement: High voltage power supply (HVPS) board 191
display is blank).
JC44-00241B HVPS 24V
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test




3. Remove the HVPS

Follow these steps to remove the HVPS.

■ Disconnect all connectors on the HVPS board. Remove five screws, and then remove the HVPS
board.
Figure 2-44 Remove the HVPS board

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04574A Laser scanner unit
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly 195

2. Remove the laser scanner assembly

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly.

1. Remove two screws.
Figure 2-47 Remove two screws
2. Pull the laser scanner assembly partially out of the printer, disconnect one flat cable, and then
remove the laser scanner assembly.
Figure 2-48 Remove the laser scanner assembly

printer.

pads.
Removal and replacement: Internal hard disk drive (HDD)

Learn how to remove and replace the internal HDD.
View a video of how to remove and replace the HDD (internal).
Service level: Intermediate

power cable.
display is blank).
L41606-011 Main PCA HDD 500 GB
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test


remove it.


it.
3. Remove the HDD

Follow these steps to remove the HDD.
1. Remove four screws, and then release the HDD cover.
Figure 2-51 Remove the HDD cover

2. Remove four screws, disconnect the HDD cable, and then remove the HDD with its holder.
Figure 2-52 Remove the HDD
4.
1. Unpack the replacement assembly.
a. Dispose of the defective part.
b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.
2. Remove the accessory from its package.
a. Save all packaging for recycling.
b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.
Removal and replacement: Developer unit

Learn how to remove and replace the developer unit.
201
View a video of how to remove and replace the developer unit.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC96-11643A HP LaserJet Black Developer
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

the printer.

Post service test
1. Remove the developer unit

Follow these steps to remove the developer unit.
NOTE: For some target assemblies, the TCU is already removed.
2. Remove the imaging drum unit.
NOTE: For some target assemblies, the imaging unit is already removed.
3. Move the developer locking lever (callout 1) to the down position. Remove three screws to release
the bracket, and then disconnect the small, black cable connector.
Figure 2-53 Remove three screws and disconnect the small, black cable connector
4. Hold the grip point of the developer unit and remove it.
NOTE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the developer unit.
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the developer unit, press on the unit just above the waste
toner auger, and then slide the unit into the printer.
Remove the developer unit 203

Figure 2-54 Remove the developer unit

printer.
pads.
3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Fill the developer unit
1. The replacement developer unit is empty and must be filled with developer powder prior to
installation. Unpack the new developer unit and silver packet of developer powder from the kit
box.
IMPORTANT: During filling, place the developer unit on sheets of paper or a disposable cover to
catch any spilled developer powder.
2. Open the developer unit cove
3. Carefully open the developer packet, and then distribute the developer powder evenly into the
developer unit.
IMPORTANT:
4. Close the developer unit cover.
5. Install the developer unit in the printer.
Firmware counter reset and toner concentration initialization
1. Open the front door.
NOTE: The front door must be open at the beginning of this procedure. Do not close the door until
instructed.
2. From the Home screen on the control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools menu.
3. Select the Service menu.
4. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service
access code.
5. Select the Service Tools menu.
6. On the Information tab, select the Supply Status menu.
7. Select Field Replacement Unit.
8. Select Developer Unit.
9. Select Reset, to clear the counter and begin the toner concentration initialization.
10. Close the front door, wait for the toner concentration initialization process to complete, and then exit
service mode by touching the Home button.
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU)

Learn how to remove and replace the TCU.
View a video of how to replace the TCU
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) 205

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

power cable.
display is blank).
X3A74-67926 HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the TCU



printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Paper dust brush

Learn how to remove and replace the paper dust brush.

View a video of how to remove and replace the paper dust brush.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-01026B Paper dust brush
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test


1. Remove the TCU


Remove the TCU 209

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Image scanner assembly (flatbed)

Learn how to remove and replace the image scanner assembly.
View a video of how to remove and replace the image scanner assembly.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).

JC97-04907A Scanner whole unit
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



it.
3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).
1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector
cover (callout 2).
Figure 2-60 Remove the document feeder connector cover

2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors
(callout 2).
Figure 2-61 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire
3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.
4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.
Figure 2-62 Release the document feeder hinge screws
Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX) 213

5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.
Figure 2-63 Lift and remove the document feeder
NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.
4. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).
1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.
Figure 2-64 Remove document feeder connector cover

2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder
harness from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.
Figure 2-65 Remove the cable choke
3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.
Figure 2-66 Disconnect document feeder harness
4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open
to a full 90°.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be
reinstalled with the same alignment.
Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 215

Figure 2-67 Alignment marks
5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.
Figure 2-68 Remove screws

6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.
Figure 2-69 Release the document feeder
5. Remove the control panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel bezel.
1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.
Figure 2-70 Remove the control panel bezel.
2. Place the control panel in the upright position.
Remove the control panel bezel 217

3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.
CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.
6. Remove the control panel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.
2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two
screws on the control-panel frame.
Figure 2-71 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors
3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.
Figure 2-72 Remove the USB interconnect cable

4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control
panel.
Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control
panel.
7. Remove the keyboard (z bundles)

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard (z bundles).
Keyboard bundles only. For all other models, skip this step.
1. Disconnect one FFC.
Figure 2-73 Disconnect one FFC
2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.
Figure 2-74 Remove the control-panel keyboard
Remove the keyboard (z bundles) 219

8. Remove the Image scanner assembly (flat bed)
Follow these steps to remove the Image scanner assembly (flat bed).
1. Remove six screw-caps and six screws. It might be necessary to use leverage near the left hinge
and then pull the cover toward the back.
Figure 2-75 Remove screw-caps and screws and release scan-front cover
2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.
Figure 2-76 Release scan-left cover

3. Remove three screw-caps and three screws (callout 1). Release the scan-right cover.
Figure 2-77 Remove scan-right cover
2
1
NOTE: At the front of the scanner, remove the bracket (callout 2) and install it on the replacement
scanner whole unit.
4. Disconnect the two scan cables and one FFC at the top of the main board.
Figure 2-78 Disconnect scan cables
Remove the Image scanner assembly (flat bed) 221

5. Remove three screws from the left.
6. Remove two screws from the right.
7. Lift up and release the image scanner unit.
Figure 2-81 Lift up and release image scanner unit


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF white backing (LX).
This document provides the procedures to remove the white backing assembly.
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder white backing (LX).
Service level:

power cable.
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX) 223

display is blank).
JC63-05410A ADF white backing (LX)
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder white backing.
1. Open the document feeder cover.
2. Peel the white backing away to remove.
IMPORTANT: Remove all the tape and foam from the bottom of the document feeder.
3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.
4. Peel the adhesive tape backing off the new white backing.

5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.
Figure 2-82 Close the document feeder cover
6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.
Figure 2-83 Smooth the white backing


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (GX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF white backing (GX ADF).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder white backing (GX ADF).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).

JC63-05795A ADF white backing (GX ADF)
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the white backing

Follow these steps to remove the white backing.
2. Peel the white backing away to remove.
3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.
4. Replace any damaged or missing hook-and-loop fasteners by positioning them on the new white
backing.
5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.
Remove the white backing 227

6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.
Figure 2-84 Smooth the white backing

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Exit unit
Learn how to remove and replace the exit unit.
View a video of how to remove and replace the exit unit.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01369A Exit unit
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Exit unit 229

Post service test


2. Remove the right door
Follow these steps to remove the right door.
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-87 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-88 Release the right hinge
Remove the right door 231

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-89 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-90 Remove the right door


remove it.

Remove the front power cover 233

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.
■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the
Figure 2-94 Remove the top right cover
6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.
2. Remove four screws.
Figure 2-95 Fuser unit screw locations
3. Pull out the fuser unit.
CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.
Figure 2-96 Fuser unit removal
7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.
Remove the exit unit 235

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove four screws.
Figure 2-97 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws
2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.
Figure 2-98 Remove the exit unit


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Fuser unit

Learn how to remove and replace the fuser unit.
View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser unit.

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Fuser unit 237

JC82-00477C HP LaserJet 110V fuser assembly
JC82-00483C HP LaserJet 220V fuser assembly
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test




printer.
pads.
3. Install the fuser support brackets

Follow these steps to install the fuser support brackets.
NOTE: Installing the fuser support brackets is only required if the fuser PEM nut is damaged.
If the PEM nut separates from the printer frame, a service part for replacing this fastener is required. The
replacement parts are two brackets that support the fuser unit in the place of the PEM nut.

Figure 2-101 PEM nut
X3A76-67002 SVC AS-Bracket repair
You will receive two brackets, shown below, to install in the fuser cavity.
Figure 2-102 Fuser support brackets

1. Remove five screws to remove the two covers shown below. Removing the covers reveals the
mounting points for the support brackets.
Figure 2-103 Remove covers
2. Locate the left bracket mounting point (callout 1) and the right bracket mounting point (callout 2).
Figure 2-104 Fuser support mounting points
2
1
Install the fuser support brackets 241

3. Line up the left support bracket (part number X3A76-00005) to the corresponding mounting point
holes, as shown below, and then fasten the bracket to the frame with four screws.
Figure 2-105 Install the left bracket

4. Line up the right support bracket (part number X3A76-00004) to the corresponding mounting point
holes, as shown below, and then fasten the bracket to the frame with four screws.
Figure 2-106 Install the right bracket
Install the fuser support brackets 243

5. Install the fuser, and then confirm that the printer works correctly.
Figure 2-107 Install the fuser
6. Reinstall the two covers by fastening the five screws.
NOTE: The brackets feature lines for taking apart the legs. You can tear off partial sections if needed.
Use metal tools to remove them.
NOTE: Verify that the brackets are installed as shown below. The two brackets are not
interchangeable.

Removal and replacement: Pickup unit 1
Learn how to remove and replace the pickup unit 1.
View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup unit 1.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Pickup unit 1 245

JC93-01364A Main Pick Up 1st
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.
1. Remove the paper trays.
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-114 Remove one screw and the cover
Remove pickup unit 2 249

3. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-115 Remove three screws
4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.
Figure 2-116 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

completely.



printer.
pads.

Pickup unit 2.
■ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.
Figure 2-121 Align gear, coupler, and bracket
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Pickup unit 1.
■ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.
Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 253

Removal and replacement: Pickup unit 2

Learn how to remove and replace the pickup unit 2.
View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup unit 2.

power cable.
display is blank).

JC93-01365A Main pick up 2nd
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test








completely.


printer.
pads.

Pickup unit 2.
Pickup unit 1.

Removal and replacement: Right door
Learn how to remove and replace the right door.
View a video of how to remove and replace the right door.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC95-02091A Right door assembly
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test





printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive unit 1 (Tray 2)

Learn how to remove and replace the pickup drive unit 1.
View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup drive unit 1.

power cable.
display is blank).

JC93-01063C Drive, pickup 1
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.
■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then
remove the cover.
Figure 2-143 Remove the LVPS cover
4. Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.
■ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors
(callout 1) that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS
and fuser drive boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and
then tilt the top of the cage out to remove it.
Figure 2-144 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
11
5. Remove the pickup drive unit 1

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive unit 1.
■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the pickup drive (Tray 2).
Figure 2-145 Remove pickup drive (Tray 2)

Remove the pickup drive unit 1 269

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor

Learn how to remove and replace the pickup drive unit 2.
View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup drive Tray 3.

power cable.

display is blank).
JC93-01063C Drive, pickup 2
JC93-01083A Drive motor, step
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test




3. Remove the pickup drive unit 2

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive unit 2.

■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the pickup drive (Tray 3).
NOTE: If replacing only the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor
from the drive unit.
Figure 2-148 Remove pickup drive unit 2

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Main drive unit

Learn how to remove and replace the main drive unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the main drive unit.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-01060A Main drive unit
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test
1. Remove the imaging drum unit

Follow these steps to remove the imaging drum unit.
3. Loosen one screw.
Figure 2-149 Loosen one screw
4. Grip the handle and remove the drum unit.
NOTICE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.
Figure 2-150 Remove the drum unit
Remove the imaging drum unit 275





5. Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release two retainers.
Figure 2-155 Disconnect one connector and release two retainers
3. Remove three screws, and then remove the main drive unit.
NOTE: Remove only those screws marked in blue in the figure below.

Figure 2-156 Remove the main drive unit

printer.
pads.

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Main drive unit
■ If the drum unit doesn't fully install into position after reinstalling the main drive unit, open the right
door and rotate the coupler on the drum shaft (callout 1) a few degrees.
Figure 2-157 Rotate the coupler
Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive

Learn how to remove and replace the toner supply drive.
View a video of how to remove and replace the toner supply drive.

power cable.

display is blank).
JC93-01066B Drive, toner supply
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






it.

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.
Remove the left rear corner cover 283

1. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-162 Remove one screw
2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the
sheet metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 2-163 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected
to the formatter during reassembly.
Figure 2-164 Identify the formatter cables
4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it
away from the printer to remove it.
6. Remove the main board and cage

Follow these steps to remove the main board and cage.
1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector. Press in
on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable away from
the printer to disconnect it.
IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull
the cable away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the
center latch.
Remove the main board and cage 285

2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero
insertion force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables.
Release the cables from six retainers (callout 3).
1
3 2

3. Remove five screws. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away
from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-167 Remove five screws
7. Remove the toner supply drive

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive.
■ Remove the wire harness from the guides (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
Remove two screws, and then remove the toner supply drive.
CAUTION: If the toner cartridge is installed, remove it now.
Figure 2-168 Remove the toner supply drive
2
1

Remove the toner supply drive 287

printer.
pads.

Main board and cage
■ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF
connector before closing the latch to secure the cable.

Figure 2-169 Install the flat cable
Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.
View a video of how to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly 289

JC93-01061A Drive, registration
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test




it.
4. Remove the registration drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration drive assembly.

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove three screws
(callout 3), and then remove the registration drive assembly.
Figure 2-173 Remove the registration drive assembly
2
1

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Feed/Tray 1 drive unit
Learn how to remove and replace the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.
View a video of how to remove and replace the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-01062A Drive, feed Tray 1
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Feed/Tray 1 drive unit 293

Post service test






5. Remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.
Remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit 297

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
2. Remove the cover (callout 1).
Figure 2-183 Remove the cover

3. At the back of the printer, release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors
(callout 2). Remove three rubberized screws (callout 3), and then remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.
Figure 2-184 Remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit

printer.
pads.

■ Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.
Figure 2-185 Align the gears with the couplers
Removal and replacement: Fuser/exit drive unit

Learn how to remove and replace the fuser/exit drive.
View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser/exit drive unit.

power cable.

display is blank).
JC93-01064A Drive, fuser unit
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






it.
4. Remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage.
residual energy.
1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then
remove three screws.
Figure 2-189 Disconnect connectors and remove screws
1
2
Remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage 303

2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind
the cage. Remove the LVPS board and cage.
5. Remove the fuser fan

Follow these steps to remove the fuser fan.
1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.
Figure 2-191 Release the harness and remove three screws

2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.
3. Optional step: For a replacement fan, release five tabs along the edges of the fan housing. If you
are removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.
Figure 2-193 Release five tabs
4. Optional step:For a replacement fan, separate the fan housing, and then remove the fuser fan. If
you are removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in
the same orientation.
Remove the fuser fan 305

Figure 2-194 Remove the fuser fan
6. Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser/exit drive unit.
■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove four screws,
and then remove the fuser/exit drive unit.
Figure 2-195 Remove the fuser/exit drive unit
1
2


printer.
pads.

LVPS Type 4 and cage
■ Two of the connectors are the same size and might be installed in the incorrect positions. Make
sure that the two-wire harness (callout 1) is installed on the LVPS Type 4 and the three-wire harness
(callout 2) is installed in the fan connector behind the LVPS Type 4 cage.
Figure 2-196 LVPS connectors installation
1
2

Removal and replacement: Fuser drive board
Learn how to remove and replace the fuser drive board.
View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser drive board.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC44-00235B Fuser drive board 110V
JC44-00236B Fuser drive board 220V
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test





remove the cover.
4. Remove the fuser drive board

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive board.
residual energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer
before attempting to disconnect the connector.
■ Disconnect twelve connectors and release one retainer on the lower left. Remove four screws, and
then remove the fuser drive board.
TIP: Two of the connectors (callout 1) can be mistakenly switched and connected to the wrong
connector on the fuser drive board. If this happens, the printer will not power on. Make sure that the
cables are installed in the correct positions.
Figure 2-200 Fuser drive board

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 3

Learn how to remove and replace the LVPS type 3.
View a video of how to remove and replace the LVPS type 3.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC44-00222E LVPS type 3 110V
JC44-00223F LVPS type 3 220V
Required tools


the printer.
Post service test





remove the cover.
4. Remove the LVPS type 3

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS type 3.
residual energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board use retainers. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.
■ Disconnect all connectors. Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS type 3.
Figure 2-204 Remove LVPS type 3

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 5H

Learn how to remove and replace the LVPS type 5H.

View a video of how to remove and replace the LVPS type 5H.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC44-00249A LVPS type 5H 110V
JC44-00250A LVPS type 5H 220V
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test



remove the cover.
4. Remove the LVPS type 5H

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS type 5H.
residual energy.
NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board use retainers. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.
■ Disconnect all connectors. Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS type 5H.
Figure 2-208 LVPS type 5H

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Fuser fan

Learn how to remove and replace the fuser fan.
View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser fan.

power cable.

display is blank).
JC31-00161A Fan type 7
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






it.

residual energy.
1
2



3. Optional step: For a replacement fan, release five tabs along the edges of the fan housing. If you
are removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.
Figure 2-216 Release five tabs
4. Optional step:For a replacement fan, separate the fan housing, and then remove the fuser fan. If
you are removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in
the same orientation.

Figure 2-217 Remove the fuser fan

printer.
pads.


1
2
Removal and replacement: Reservoir unit

Learn how to remove and replace the reservoir unit.
View a video of how to remove and replace the reservoir unit.

power cable.
display is blank).

JC93-01071A Reservoir, toner
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test


Remove the left cover 327

2. Remove the laser scanner assembly



remove it.


5. Remove the TCU



Remove the developer unit 331




it.



11. Remove the reservoir unit

Follow these steps to remove the reservoir unit.

1. At the front of the printer, remove one screw securing the toner guide.
2. Lift the front of the guide up and slide it slightly toward the rear of the printer (callout 1). Rotate the
front of the guide toward the left side of the printer, and then remove the guide through the left side
opening.
Figure 2-235 Remove the toner guide
1
2
Remove the reservoir unit 335

3. Disconnect one connector and remove one screw.
Figure 2-236 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw
4. Remove the reservoir assembly.
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the reservoir assembly, install the tab in the back first, and
then rotate the assembly toward the sheet metal wall over the screw opening.
Figure 2-237 Remove the reservoir assembly


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Main board

Learn how to remove and replace the main board.
View a video of how to remove and replace the main board.

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Main board 337

JC82-00542A PCA, main board
5CM58-67001 PCA, main board (du models)
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






it.



Remove the formatter and cage 341

6. Remove the main board

Follow these steps to remove the main board.
center latch.

2. Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 1) are zero
Remove the MSOK board (callout 2) and install it on the replacement main board. Remove nine
screws, and then remove the main board.
IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main
board in the correct orientation in order for the printer to function. The MSOK chip is extremely
difficult to replace if it is lost or damaged.
IMPORTANT: A Shading Test for the ADF unit must be completed after replacing the ADF unit or
Main board.
Figure 2-246 Remove the main board
1
3 2


printer.
pads.

Main board
1. When reinstalling the MSOK board, note the dashed outline (callout 1) on the main board. When the
MSOK board is installed correctly, it fits within this outline.
Figure 2-247 Position of MSOK board

2. Make sure that the MSOK board is installed correctly on the replacement main board.
Figure 2-248 Install the MSOK board
3. When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF
Removal and replacement: Return sensor (on the exit unit)

Learn how to remove and replace the return sensor (on the exit unit).
Removal and replacement: Return sensor (on the exit unit) 345
View a video of how to remove and replace the return sensor.

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001393 Photo interrupter
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test







remove it.




Remove the top right cover 351



8. Remove the return sensor

Follow these steps to Remove the return sensor.
Remove the return sensor 353

■ Locate the sensor on the exit unit. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then peel the black
adhesive strip (callout 2) away from the top of the sensor. Release two small tabs (callout 3), and then
remove the sensor.
Figure 2-264 Return sensor
1
3

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit unit)
Learn how to remove and replace the duplex 1 sensor (on the exit unit).
View a video of how to remove and replace the duplex 1 sensor.

power cable.
display is blank).
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit unit) 355
Post service test





remove it.







8. Remove the duplex 1 sensor

Follow these steps to remove the duplex 1 sensor.

1. Locate the sensor on the exit unit. Remove two screws, and then lift the sensor holder up.
2. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the duplex 1 sensor.
Figure 2-280 Remove the duplex 1 sensor

printer.

pads.
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E82540du-E82560du - Removal and replacement:

Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2)
Learn how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2).
View a video of how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 2.

power cable.
display is blank).
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test








completely.

4. Remove the prefeed sensor 2

Follow these steps to remove the prefeed sensor 2.
■ Open the guide-pickup, and then remove the prefeed sensor 2.
Figure 2-291 Remove prefeed sensor 2


printer.
pads.

Pickup unit 2
Removal and replacement: Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1)

Learn how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1).

View a video of how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 1.

power cable.
display is blank).
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test





completely.



completely.

5. Remove the prefeed sensor 1

Follow these steps to remove the prefeed sensor 1.
1. Remove five screws, and then remove the bracket.
Figure 2-306 Remove five screws and the bracket.
Remove the prefeed sensor 1 379

2. Remove the sensor from its holder.
Figure 2-307 Remove the sensor

printer.
pads.

Pickup unit 2.

Pickup unit 1.

Output 1 bin full sensor (on the exit unit)
Learn how to remove and replace the output 1 bin full sensor (on the exit unit).
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E82540du-E82560du - Removal and replacement: Output 1 bin full
sensor (on the exit unit) 381
View a video of how to remove and replace the output 1 bin full sensor.

power cable.
display is blank).
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test







remove it.







8. Remove the output 1 bin full sensor

Follow these steps to remove the output 1 bin full sensor.
Remove the output 1 bin full sensor 389

1. On the exit unit, remove one self-tapping screw (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2).
Figure 2-324 Remove one screw and the guide
2. Remove the black adhesive strip from the exit unit.
Figure 2-325 Remove the black adhesive strip

3. Release two tabs, and then unhook the sensor from the sheet metal.
Figure 2-326 Release two tabs
Remove the output 1 bin full sensor 391

5. Rotate the shaft to release the sensor, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 2-328 Remove the exit 1 bin full sensor

printer.
pads.

ADF LX whole unit (du bundles) JC97-05074A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Bin full sensor 0604-001393 Main assembly 1 on page 188
Cover, Right side upper JC95-02098A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Drive fuser, exit JC93-01064A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Drive main, mono JC93-01060A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Drive pickup 1 JC93-01063C Main assembly 1 on page 188
Drive pickup 2 JC93-01063C Main assembly 1 on page 188
Drive registration assembly JC93-01061A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Drive, feed (Tray 1) JC93-01062A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Drive, toner supply mono JC93-01066B Main assembly 1 on page 188
Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit unit) 0604-001393 Main assembly 1 on page 188
Exit JC90-01369A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Exit 1 JC90-01370A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Exit 2 JC90-01373A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Fan, fuser JC31-00161A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Frame main pickup 1 JC93-01364A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Frame main pickup 2 JC93-01365A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Fuser drive board 110V JC44-00235B Main assembly 1 on page 188
Fuser drive board 220V JC44-00236B Main assembly 1 on page 188
GX - Flow ADF (dn/z bundles) JC97-04955A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Guide, return JC81-07088A Main assembly 1 on page 188
HP LaserJet black developerJC96 JC96-11643A Main assembly 1 on page 188
HP LaserJet fuser 110V assembly JC82-00477C Main assembly 1 on page 188
HP LaserJet fuser 220V assembly JC82-00483C Main assembly 1 on page 188
HP managed LJ toner collection unitX3A74 X3A74-67926 Main assembly 1 on page 188
High voltage power supply (HVPS) JC44-00241B Main assembly 1 on page 188
Image scanner JC97-04907A Main assembly 1 on page 188
LVPS (SMPS), 110V Type 5H JC44-00249A Main assembly 1 on page 188
LVPS (SMPS), 110v Type 3 JC44-00222E Main assembly 1 on page 188
LVPS (SMPS), 220V Type 5H JC44-00250A Main assembly 1 on page 188
LVPS (SMPS), 220v Type 3 JC44-00223F Main assembly 1 on page 188
Laser scanner assemblyJC97 JC97-04574A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Alphabetical parts list 393

Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Main PCA 5CM58-67001 (E825du Main assembly 1 on page 188

series)
Main PCA JC82-00542A (E825z, Main assembly 1 on page 188

E825dn series)
Main PCA HDD bracket JC97-02276A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Paper dust brushJC93 JC93-01026B Main assembly 1 on page 188
Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) 0604-001490 Main assembly 1 on page 188
Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) 0604-001381 Main assembly 1 on page 188
Reservoir, toner JC93-01071A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Return sensor (on the exit unit) 0604-001393 Main assembly 1 on page 188
Right door mono JC95-02091A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Tray 2 JC90-01610A Main assembly 1 on page 188
Tray 3 JC90-01611A Main assembly 1 on page 188
White backing (GX) JC63-05795A Main assembly 1 on page 188
White backing (LX) JC63-05410A Main assembly 1 on page 188
sGX - Flow ADF JC97-04956A Main assembly 1 on page 188

0604-001381 Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) Main assembly 1 on page 188
0604-001393 Bin full sensor Main assembly 1 on page 188
0604-001393 Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit unit) Main assembly 1 on page 188
0604-001393 Return sensor (on the exit unit) Main assembly 1 on page 188
0604-001490 Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) Main assembly 1 on page 188
5CM58-67001 (E825du Main PCA Main assembly 1 on page 188

series)
JC31-00161A Fan, fuser Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC44-00222E LVPS (SMPS), 110v Type 3 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC44-00223F LVPS (SMPS), 220v Type 3 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC44-00235B Fuser drive board 110V Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC44-00236B Fuser drive board 220V Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC44-00241B High voltage power supply (HVPS) Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC44-00249A LVPS (SMPS), 110V Type 5H Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC44-00250A LVPS (SMPS), 220V Type 5H Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC63-05410A White backing (LX) Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC63-05795A White backing (GX) Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC81-07088A Guide, return Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC82-00477C HP LaserJet fuser 110V assembly Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC82-00483C HP LaserJet fuser 220V assembly Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC82-00542A (E825z, Main PCA Main assembly 1 on page 188

E825dn series)
JC90-01369A Exit Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC90-01370A Exit 1 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC90-01373A Exit 2 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC90-01610A Tray 2 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC90-01611A Tray 3 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC93-01026B Paper dust brushJC93 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC93-01060A Drive main, mono Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC93-01061A Drive registration assembly Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC93-01062A Drive, feed (Tray 1) Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC93-01063C Drive pickup 1 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC93-01063C Drive pickup 2 Main assembly 1 on page 188

Table 2-5 Numerical parts list (continued)
JC93-01064A Drive fuser, exit Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC93-01066B Drive, toner supply mono Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC93-01071A Reservoir, toner Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC93-01364A Frame main pickup 1 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC93-01365A Frame main pickup 2 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC95-02091A Right door mono Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC95-02098A Cover, Right side upper Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC96-11643A HP LaserJet black developerJC96 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC97-02276A Main PCA HDD bracket Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC97-04574A Laser scanner assemblyJC97 Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC97-04907A Image scanner Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC97-04955A GX - Flow ADF (dn/z bundles) Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC97-04956A sGX - Flow ADF Main assembly 1 on page 188
JC97-05074A ADF LX whole unit (du bundles) Main assembly 1 on page 188
X3A74-67926 HP managed LJ toner collection unitX3A74 Main assembly 1 on page 188
Main assembly 2
View main assembly 2 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Main assembly 2
Parts diagram and parts list for the main assembly 2.

Figure 2-329 Main assembly 2
10-1
Table 2-47 Main assembly 2
No
10-1 X3A74-67902 Imaging drum unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Imaging drum unit on page
399
35 JC31-00161A Fan, type 6 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser fan on page 319
38 JC44-00091D LVPS (SMPS), 110V type 4 1 Removal and replacement:

(LVPS) Type 4 on page 402
38 JC44-00092 LVPS (SMPS), 220V type 4 1 Removal and replacement:

D Low voltage power supply
(LVPS) Type 4 on page 402
Not shown Y1G22-67901 Tray heaters (110V) 1 Not applicable
Not shown Y1G22-67902 Tray heaters (220V) 1 Not applicable
Main assembly 2 397

No
Not shown JC93-00540 Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 1 Removal and replacement:

B Tray 1 (MP) pick/reverse/feed
rollers on page 406
Not shown B5L31-67902 HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) 1 Removal and replacement:
Install accessory: HP Foreign
interface harness (FIH)
solution on page 410
Not shown J8030-61001 NFC Kit Installation 1 Removal and replacement:

NFC Kit Installation on page
411
Not shown 5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500 GB Kit (du models) 1 HP LaserJet Managed
MFP E82540du-E82560du -
Formatter (du models) on
page 418
Not shown 5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500 GB Kit 1 HP LaserJet Managed MFP
E82540-E82560 - Removal
and replacement: Formatter
on page 421
Not shown L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500 GB 1 HP LaserJet Managed MFP

E82540-E82560 - Removal
and replacement: Formatter
on page 421
Not shown B5L46-40014 Formatter HDD Cradle 1 Not applicable
Not shown T3U55-60001 Formatter HDD SATA Riser Module 1 Not applicable
Not shown X3A92-60002 PCA - Island of Data (IOD) 1 Removal and replacement:
Island of data (IOD) on page
426
Not shown X3A92-60002 PCA - Island of Data (IOD) 1 HP LaserJet Managed MFP
E82540-E82560 series -
Island of data (IOD) on page
429
Not shown X3A62-60001 Accelerator board - toast 1 Removal and replacement:

Accelerator board (GX ADF
only) on page 431
Not shown B5L47-60101 Control panel 1 Removal and replacement:

Control panel on page 440
Not shown B5L47-60102 Keyboard (z bundles) US 1 Removal and replacement:

Keyboard (z bundles) on page
444
Not shown B5L47-60103 Keyboard (z bundles) UK 1 Removal and replacement:

Keyboard (z bundles) on page
444
Not shown JC90-01772B Bridge unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Bridge unit on page 449

No
Not shown JC92-02969A PCA - front power switch 1 Removal and replacement:
Front power switch on page
451
Not shown JC39-02214A CRUM connector 1 Removal and replacement:

CRUM connector on page
455
Not shown JC31-00154A Fan - Type 3 24V LVPS 1 Removal and replacement:
Fan - Type 3 24V LVPS on
page 463
Not shown JC27-00012A Inductor unit (110V) 1 Removal and replacement:

Inductor unit on page 467
Not shown JC27-00009A Inductor unit (220V) 1 Removal and replacement:

Inductor unit on page 467
Not shown JC93-01467A Right door switch assembly 1 Removal and replacement:
Right door switch assembly
on page 472
Not shown JC92-02622A Paper size sensor 1 HP LaserJet Managed MFP

E82540-E82560, E82540du-
E82560du series - Removal
and replacement: Paper size
sensor on page 479
Not shown JC93-01013A High voltage rear frame assembly 1 HP LaserJet Managed MFP
E82540-E82560, E82540du-
replacement: High voltage
rear frame assembly on page
481
Not shown JC39-01202A Cable, SATA Main HDD 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC39-01943A Cable, PWR Main HDD 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC31-00154A Fan-type 3 24V LVPS/FDB 1 Not applicable
Not shown X3A92-6000 Formatter PCA-Obsidian Blue Angel 1 Not applicable

3
Not shown X3A62-60002 Accelerator PCA-toast Blue Angel 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Imaging drum unit

Learn how to remove and replace the imaging drum unit.
View a video of how to remove and replace the imaging drum unit.
Removal and replacement: Imaging drum unit 399


power cable.
display is blank).
X3A74-67902 HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test





printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) Type 4

Learn how to remove and replace the LVPS type 4.
View a video of how to remove and replace the LVPS type 4.

power cable.
display is blank).

JC44-00091D LVPS 110V Type 4
JC44-00092D LVPS 220V Type 4
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test




it.
4. Remove the LVPS type 4

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS type 4.

residual energy.
NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer
before attempting to disconnect the connector.
1. Remove three screws, then remove the shield-LVPS sub upper.
Figure 2-335 Remove the shield-LVPS sub upper
2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS type 4.
Figure 2-336 LVPS Type 4


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 (MP) pick/reverse/feed rollers

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 rollers.
View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 rollers.

power cable.
display is blank).

JC93-00540B HP LaserJet Tray 1 (MP) Roller
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller.
1. Open Tray 1. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of the cover.
NOTE: The plastic tabs on the edges of the cover might require extra pressure to remove.
Figure 2-337 Remove the cover
Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller 407

2. Remove the cover shown using a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of
the cover.
NOTE: The flag, it will need to be moved out of the way to remove cover.
Figure 2-338 Remove cover
Note the orientation of the flag.
3. Release the small tab and remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller (callout 2). The flag (callout 1)
will need to be moved out of the way to release rollers. Use caution and remove slowly to avoid
loosening the parts behind the rollers. If these parts come loose, they might fall into the printer and
will be difficult to retrieve. Note the location of all components.
NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.
Figure 2-339 Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller

printer.
pads.

After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
access code.
5. Select the Supply Status menu.
7. Select Tray X Rollers.
8. Select Tray 1 Roller Kit.
9. Select Reset.

Removal and replacement: Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution
Learn how to remove and replace the FIH accessory.
View a video of how to remove and replace the FIH accessory.

power cable.
display is blank).
B5L31-67902 Foreign interface harness
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test
Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.
Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.
1. Unpack the FIH accessory

Follow these steps to unpack the FIH accessory.
■ Unpack the accessory from the packaging.
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect
the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
2. Install the FIH accessory

Follow these steps to install the FIH accessory.
■ Locate the USB connector on the printer formatter. Connect the FIH to this connector
Figure 2-340 Connect the FIH
Removal and replacement: NFC Kit Installation

Learn how to remove and replace the NFC Kit.
View a video of how to remove and replace the NFC Kit.

Unpack the FIH accessory 411

power cable.
display is blank).
J8030-61001 Jetdirect wireless print server with NFC kit
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

the printer.
Post service test

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.
Verify that the light on the NFC accessory illuminates to confirm the installation is correct
Verify that a wireless network icon appears on the control panel.
1. Unpack the NFC kit

Follow these steps to unpack the NFC kit.
■ Unpack the kit from the packaging.
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the

sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect
the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
from the part prior to installation.
2. Install the NFC kit

Follow these steps to install the NFC kit.
1. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the HIP cover.
Figure 2-341 Release the HIP cover
2. Remove the HIP cover.
Figure 2-342 Remove the HIP cover
Install the NFC kit 413

3. Identify the USB connector in the HIP, and then attach the appropriate USB cable:
a. Locate the USB connector that is along one of the short edges. A USB Mini B receptacle
(callout 1) is the most common. However, on some models, a USB Mini B plug (callout 2) is used.
Figure 2-343 Identify USB connector
b. Select the appropriate cable from the two that are provided.
Figure 2-344 Select USB cable

c. Install the USB cable in the socket in the HIP. Note that the USB logo on the connector may
face down on some models.
Figure 2-345 Install the USB cable
4. Attach the power and grounding ends of the USB cable:

a. Attach the white power connector of the cable into the corresponding receptacle on the NFC
accessory.
Figure 2-346 Install the white power connector
b. Attach the metal ground connector of the cable to the grounding tab on the NFC accessory.
Figure 2-347 Attach the metal ground connector
5. Install the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.

a. Install the hook-shaped clips on the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.
Figure 2-348 Position the NFC accessory in the HIP recess
b. Gently push the NFC accessory onto the rounded clips so that it is held securely in place
within the recess.
Figure 2-349 Install the NFC accessory

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540du-E82560du - Removal and replacement: Formatter (du
models)
Learn how to remove and replace the formatter (du models).
View a video of how to remove and replace the formatter (du models).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).

X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA (du models)
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models).
■ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.
Figure 2-351 Remove the HDD (du models)
3. Remove the formatter PCA (du models)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA (du models).
■ Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter board, remove seven screws, and then remove the
formatter PCA.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter and the main PCA at the same time. Replace one

Figure 2-352 Remove the formatter PCA (du models)

printer.
pads.
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560 - Removal and replacement: Formatter

Learn how to remove and replace the formatter.

View a video of how to remove and replace the formatter.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test

2. Remove the accelerator board

Follow these steps to remove the accelerator board.
■ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the
formatter by the edges.
NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

Figure 2-354 Remove the accelerator PCA
3. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).
4. Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

■ Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter board, remove seven screws, and then remove the
formatter PCA.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter and the main PCA at the same time. Replace one
Figure 2-356 Remove the formatter PCA

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD)

Learn how to remove and replace the IOD (du models).
View a video of how to remove and replace the IOD (du models).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
X3A92-60002 PCA - Island of Data (du models)
Required tools


the printer.
Post service test


2. Remove the island of data (IOD; du models)

Follow these steps to remove the island of data (IOD; du models).
■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.

Figure 2-358 Remove the IOD (du models)

printer.
pads.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560 series - Removal and replacement: Island of data
(IOD)
Learn how to remove and replace the IOD.
View a video of how to remove and replace the IOD.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
X3A92-60002 PCA - Island of Data
Required tools

the printer.
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560 series - Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD) 429
Post service test


2. Remove the island of data (IOD)

Follow these steps to remove the island of data (IOD).
■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.

Figure 2-360 Remove the IOD

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Accelerator board (GX ADF only)

Learn how to remove and replace the accelerator board.

View a video of how to remove and replace the accelerator board.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
X3A62-60002 Accelerator PCA
NOTE: An accelerator PCA is only installed on some early models during original release. This has
been removed from all new models.
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test

2. Remove the accelerator board

Follow these steps to remove the accelerator board.
■ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the
formatter by the edges.
NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

Figure 2-362 Remove the accelerator PCA

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD; du models)

Learn how to remove and replace the HDD (du models).

View a video of how to remove and replace the HDD (du models).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500 GB (du models)
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD; du models) 435
2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models).

Figure 2-364 Remove the HDD (du models)

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)

Learn how to remove and replace the HDD.

View a video of how to remove and replace the HDD.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500 GB
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Control panel

Learn how to remove and replace the control panel.

View a video of how to remove and replace the control panel.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
B5L47-60101 Control panel
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Control panel 441

Post service test
Verify that the control panel illuminates and displays information while the printer is initializing. Verify
control panel functionality after initialization.



panel.
panel.


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Keyboard (z bundles)

Learn how to remove and replace the keyboard.
View a video of how to remove and replace the keyboard.
Service level:

power cable.

display is blank).
B5L47-60102 US English keyboard assembly
B5L47-60103 UK English keyboard assembly
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

Type on the keyboard and verify that it is recognized by the control panel.

Remove the control panel bezel 445



panel.
panel.
3. Remove the keyboard (z bundles)

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard (z bundles).
Remove the keyboard (z bundles) 447

Keyboard bundles only. For all other models, skip this step.
1. Disconnect one FFC.
Figure 2-373 Disconnect one FFC
2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.
Figure 2-374 Remove the control-panel keyboard


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Bridge unit

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge unit.
View a video of how to remove and replace the bridge unit.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Bridge unit 449

JC90-01772B Bridge unit
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
1. Remove the bridge unit

Follow these steps to remove the bridge unit.
■ Remove one screw, and then slightly lift and slide the bridge unit away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-375 Remove the bridge unit

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Front power switch

Learn how to remove and replace the front power switch.
View a video of how to remove and replace the front power switch.

power cable.

display is blank).
JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

Press the power switch and verify that the printer turns on.


remove it.


3. Remove the front power switch

Follow these steps to remove the front power switch.
■ Remove one screw, and then remove the power switch board.
NOTE: If necessary, remove the power switch button assembly after removing the PCA.
Figure 2-379 Remove one screw and the power switch


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: CRUM connector

Learn how to remove and replace the CRUM connector.
View a video of how to remove and replace the CRUM connector.

power cable.
Removal and replacement: CRUM connector 455

display is blank).
JC39-02214A CRUM connector
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test





3. Remove the TCU



it.

Remove the exit cover 459




8. Remove the CRUM connector

Follow these steps to remove the CRUM connector.
Remove the CRUM connector 461

1. Inside the left cover, release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).
2. At the front of the printer, release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the CRUM connector
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-391 Remove the CRUM connector
2
1


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Fan - Type 3 24V LVPS

Learn how to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans.
View a video of how to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans.

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Fan - Type 3 24V LVPS 463

JC31-00154A Fan- Type 3 24V LVPS
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test




3. Remove the LVPS fans

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS fans.

■ Disconnect two connectors, release four tabs, and then remove the LVPS fans.
TIP: When installing replacement fans, make sure that the arrow embossed on the fans points into
the printer.
Figure 2-394 Remove the LVPS fans

printer.
pads.


Also use the following sSpecial installation instructions.
LVPS fans
■ When installing the replacement fans, make sure that the embossed arrow on the fans point toward
the printer.
Figure 2-395 Correct installation of LVPS fans
Removal and replacement: Inductor unit

Learn how to remove and replace the inductor unit.
View a video of how to remove and replace the inductor unit.

power cable.
display is blank).

JC27-00012A Inductor unit (110V)
JC27-00009A Inductor unit (220V)
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






remove the cover.
4. Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage.
residual energy.
11

5. Remove the inductor unit
Follow these steps to remove the inductor unit.
■ Disconnect the wire harness, remove two screws, and then remove the inductor unit.
Figure 2-400 Remove the inductor unit

printer.
pads.
Remove the inductor unit 471

Removal and replacement: Right door switch assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the right door switch.
View a video of how to remove and replace the right door switch.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-01467A Switch assembly, right door
Required tools


the printer.
Post service test





it.

residual energy.

1
2


6. Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove four screws,
and then remove the fuser/exit drive unit.
Figure 2-408 Remove the fuser/exit drive unit
1
2
7. Remove the right door switch assembly

Follow these steps to remove the right door switch assembly.
■ Disconnect one connector. Remove one screw, and then remove the right door switch assembly.
Figure 2-409 Remove the side door open sensor

Remove the right door switch assembly 477

printer.
pads.

1
2

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E82540du-E82560du series - Removal and
replacement: Paper size sensor
Learn how to remove and replace the paper size sensor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the paper size sensor.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC92-02622A Sensor, paper size
Required tools

the printer.
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E82540du-E82560du series - Removal and replacement: Paper size
sensor 479
Post service test

1. Remove the paper size sensor

Follow these steps to remove the paper size sensor.
■ Do the following:
● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.
● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 2-411 Remove the paper size sensor

printer.
pads.


High voltage rear frame assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the high voltage rear frame (terminal).
View a video of how to remove and replace the high voltage rear frame (terminal).

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-01013A Assembly high voltage rear frame
Required tools

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E82540du-E82560du - Removal and replacement: High voltage rear
frame assembly 481
the printer.
Post service test







it.



Remove the formatter and cage 485

7. Remove the main board and cage

Follow these steps to remove the main board and cage.

center latch.
2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero
Release the cables from six retainers (callout 3).
1
3 2
Remove the main board and cage 487

3. Remove five screws. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away
from the printer to remove it.
8. Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release two retainers.
Figure 2-424 Disconnect one connector and release two retainers
3. Remove three screws, and then remove the main drive unit.
NOTE: Remove only those screws marked in blue in the figure below.

Figure 2-425 Remove the main drive unit
9. Remove the high voltage terminal

Follow these steps to remove the high voltage terminal.
1. Disconnect two in-line connectors (callout 1), and then release the cables (callout 2) from the cable
guides.
Figure 2-426 Disconnect two connectors and release cables
Remove the high voltage terminal 489

2. Remove one ground screw.
Figure 2-427 Remove one ground screw
3. Disconnect three connectors on the HVPS board.
Figure 2-428 Disconnect three connectors

4. Open the right door. Remove three screws, and then remove the high voltage terminal.
Figure 2-429 Remove three screws and the high voltage terminal

printer.
pads.

■ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF

■ If the drum unit doesn't fully install into position after reinstalling the main drive unit, open the right
door and rotate the coupler on the drum shaft (callout 1) a few degrees.
Figure 2-431 Rotate the coupler

Accelerator PCA-toast Blue Angel X3A62-60002 Main assembly 2 on page 397
Accelerator board - toast X3A62-60001 Main assembly 2 on page 397
Bridge unit JC90-01772B Main assembly 2 on page 397
CRUM connector JC39-02214A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Cable, PWR Main HDD JC39-01943A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Cable, SATA Main HDD JC39-01202A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Control panel B5L47-60101 Main assembly 2 on page 397
Fan - Type 3 24V LVPS JC31-00154A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Fan, type 6 JC31-00161A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Fan-type 3 24V LVPS/FDB JC31-00154A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Formatter HDD 500 GB Kit 5851-6712 Main assembly 2 on page 397
Formatter HDD 500 GB Kit (du models) 5851-6712 Main assembly 2 on page 397
Formatter PCA-Obsidian Blue Angel X3A92-60003 Main assembly 2 on page 397
HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) B5L31-67902 Main assembly 2 on page 397
High voltage rear frame assembly JC93-01013A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Imaging drum unit X3A74-67902 Main assembly 2 on page 397
Inductor unit (110V) JC27-00012A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Inductor unit (220V) JC27-00009A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Keyboard (z bundles) UK B5L47-60103 Main assembly 2 on page 397
Keyboard (z bundles) US B5L47-60102 Main assembly 2 on page 397
LVPS (SMPS), 110V type 4 JC44-00091D Main assembly 2 on page 397
LVPS (SMPS), 220V type 4 JC44-00092D Main assembly 2 on page 397
NFC Kit Installation J8030-61001 Main assembly 2 on page 397
PCA - Island of Data (IOD) X3A92-60002 Main assembly 2 on page 397
PCA - Island of Data (IOD) X3A92-60002 Main assembly 2 on page 397
PCA - front power switch JC92-02969A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Paper size sensor JC92-02622A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Right door switch assembly JC93-01467A Main assembly 2 on page 397
Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed rollers JC93-00540B Main assembly 2 on page 397
Tray heaters (110V) Y1G22-67901 Main assembly 2 on page 397
Tray heaters (220V) Y1G22-67902 Main assembly 2 on page 397

5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500 GB Kit Main assembly 2 on page 397
5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500 GB Kit (du models) Main assembly 2 on page 397
B5L31-67902 HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) Main assembly 2 on page 397
B5L47-60101 Control panel Main assembly 2 on page 397
B5L47-60102 Keyboard (z bundles) US Main assembly 2 on page 397
B5L47-60103 Keyboard (z bundles) UK Main assembly 2 on page 397
J8030-61001 NFC Kit Installation Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC27-00009A Inductor unit (220V) Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC27-00012A Inductor unit (110V) Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC31-00154A Fan - Type 3 24V LVPS Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC31-00154A Fan-type 3 24V LVPS/FDB Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC31-00161A Fan, type 6 Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC39-01202A Cable, SATA Main HDD Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC39-01943A Cable, PWR Main HDD Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC39-02214A CRUM connector Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC44-00091D LVPS (SMPS), 110V type 4 Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC44-00092D LVPS (SMPS), 220V type 4 Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC90-01772B Bridge unit Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC92-02622A Paper size sensor Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC92-02969A PCA - front power switch Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC93-00540B Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed rollers Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC93-01013A High voltage rear frame assembly Main assembly 2 on page 397
JC93-01467A Right door switch assembly Main assembly 2 on page 397
X3A62-60001 Accelerator board - toast Main assembly 2 on page 397
X3A62-60002 Accelerator PCA-toast Blue Angel Main assembly 2 on page 397
X3A74-67902 Imaging drum unit Main assembly 2 on page 397
X3A92-60002 PCA - Island of Data (IOD) Main assembly 2 on page 397
X3A92-60002 PCA - Island of Data (IOD) Main assembly 2 on page 397
X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA-Obsidian Blue Angel Main assembly 2 on page 397
Y1G22-67901 Tray heaters (110V) Main assembly 2 on page 397
Y1G22-67902 Tray heaters (220V) Main assembly 2 on page 397

Exit assemblies
View the exit assemblies exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Exit assemblies
Parts diagram and parts list for the exit assemblies.
Figure 2-432 Exit assemblies
Table 2-70 Exit assemblies
No
3-1 JC93-00802 Drive, motor step 2 Removal and replacement:

A Exit gate solenoid/motors/
page 496
Exit assemblies 495

Table 2-70 Exit assemblies (continued)
No
3-2 JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting 1 Removal and replacement:

Exit gate solenoid/motors/
page 496
3-5 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Exit gate solenoid/motors/
page 496
Removal and replacement: Exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor (on the exit unit)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit gate solenoid, motors, and sensors.
View a video of how to remove and replace the exit gate solenoid, motors, and sensors.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-00802A Drive, motor step (Qty 2)
JC33-00031B Solenoid - lifting

Required tools

the printer.
Post service test







remove it.








8. Remove the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor

Follow these steps to remove the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor.
1. Disconnect one connector. Gently pry the black gear from behind to remove it. Remove the e-ring,
and then remove the white gear.
NOTE: If necessary, remove two motors, and then remove one sensor.
Figure 2-447 On the exit unit, disconnect one connector and remove two gears

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the exit gate solenoid (callout A).
Figure 2-448 Exit gate solenoid

printer.
pads.

Drive, motor step JC93-00802A Exit assemblies on page 495
Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Exit assemblies on page 495
Solenoid, lifting JC33-00031B Exit assemblies on page 495

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Exit assemblies on page 495
JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting Exit assemblies on page 495
JC93-00802A Drive, motor step Exit assemblies on page 495
Cassettes tray 2/3

View the cassettes tray 2/3 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Cassettes Tray 2/3

Parts diagram and parts list for the cassettes tray 2/3.

Figure 2-449 Cassettes Tray 2/3
Table 2-72 Cassettes Tray 2/3
No
0 JC90-01610A Cassette, Tray 2 1 Not applicable
0 JC90-01611A Cassette, Tray 3 1 Not applicable

Cassette, Tray 2 JC90-01610A Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page

508
Cassette, Tray 3 JC90-01611A Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page

508

JC90-01610A Cassette, Tray 2 Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page

508
JC90-01611A Cassette, Tray 3 Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page

508
Main frame assembly

View the main frame assembly exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Main frame assembly

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame assembly.
Figure 2-450 Main assembly frame
13-2
6R
7R
1R 5R
14-4
2R
3R
4R
8R
9R

Table 2-73 Main assembly frame
No
1 JC93-01200A Main frame registration assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Registration assembly on
page 511
3R JC39-02204 Registration cable 1 Removal and replacement:

A Registration sensor assembly
and/or cable on page 521
4R 0604-001381 Photo, interrupte 1 Removal and replacement:

Registration sensor assembly
and/or cable on page 521
6 JC93-01370A Tray closing assembly 2 Removal and replacement:

Tray closing unit on page 532
14-1 JC93-00492 Frame main, TCU sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

A Toner collection unit (TCU)
sensors on page 536
14-3 0604-001393 Phone, interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner collection unit (TCU)
sensors on page 536
Not shown JC93-00466 Front door switch open 1 Removal and replacement:
A Front cover open sensor on
page 560
Not shown JC39-02217A Harness, fuser connector 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC39-02187A Harness, engine side for DCF + connector 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Registration assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the registration assembly.
View a video of how to remove and replace the registration assembly.

power cable.
Removal and replacement: Registration assembly 511

display is blank).
JC93-01200A Registration assembly
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






3. Remove the TCU

Remove the TCU 515


5. Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.
2. Remove the gear cover.
Figure 2-460 Remove the gear cover
Remove the registration assembly 517

3. Release two retainers (callout 1), disconnect one in-line connector (callout 2), and then remove two
screws (callout 3).
Figure 2-461 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws
4. Rotate the left side of the registration assembly away from the printer, and then remove it.
Figure 2-462 Remove the registration assembly


printer.
pads.

Registration assembly
1. Install the back, gear side of the shaft into the opening in the sheet metal first.
Figure 2-463 Install the gear side of the shaft
2. Remove the bushing (callout 1) from the end of the front of the shaft.

Figure 2-464 Remove the bushing
3. Install the bushing in the opening in the sheet metal.
NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges
match the keyed opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 2-465 Install the bushing
4. Install the front of the shaft into the bushing.

Figure 2-466 Install the front of the shaft
Removal and replacement: Registration sensor assembly and/or cable

Learn how to remove and replace the registration sensor and cable.
View a video of how to remove and replace the registration sensor and cable.
Service level: Advanced

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Registration sensor assembly and/or cable 521

JC39-02204A Registration cable
0604-001381 Registration sensor
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






3. Remove the TCU

Remove the TCU 525


5. Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.
2. Remove the gear cover.
Figure 2-476 Remove the gear cover
Remove the registration assembly 527

3. Release two retainers (callout 1), disconnect one in-line connector (callout 2), and then remove two
screws (callout 3).
4. Rotate the left side of the registration assembly away from the printer, and then remove it.
Figure 2-478 Remove the registration assembly
6. Remove the registration sensor assembly and cable

Follow these steps to remove the registration sensor assembly and cable.

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then release the wire
harness from the cable guide (callout 3).
1
2
2. Remove three self-tapping screws, and then remove the registration sensor assembly.
Figure 2-480 Remove three screws and the registration sensor assembly


printer.
pads.

Registration assembly
1. Install the back, gear side of the shaft into the opening in the sheet metal first.
Figure 2-481 Install the gear side of the shaft
2. Remove the bushing (callout 1) from the end of the front of the shaft.

Figure 2-482 Remove the bushing
3. Install the bushing in the opening in the sheet metal.
NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges
match the keyed opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 2-483 Install the bushing
4. Install the front of the shaft into the bushing.

Figure 2-484 Install the front of the shaft
Removal and replacement: Tray closing unit

Learn how to remove and replace the tray closing unit.
View a video of how to remove and replace the tray closing unit.

power cable.
display is blank).

JC93-01370A Tray closing unit
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test




remove the cover.
4. Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage.

residual energy.
11
5. Remove the tray closing unit

Follow these steps to remove the tray closing unit.
1. Remove Tray 2.
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cassette rail cover.
Figure 2-489 Remove the CST rail cover
Remove the tray closing unit 535

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the tray closing unit.
Figure 2-490 Remove the tray closing unit

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) sensors

Learn how to remove and replace the TCU sensors.
TCU level sensor

View a video of how to remove and replace the TCU level sensor.
TCU detect sensor
View a video of how to remove and replace the TCU detect sensor.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-00492A TCU sensor (level)
0604-001393 Photo interrupter (detect)
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) sensors 537

Post service test

1. Remove the TCU





remove it.




it.

Remove the inner cover 541

8. Remove the TCU sensors

Follow these steps to remove the TCU sensors.
■ If removing the toner collection unit level sensor (callout A), remove one screw, disconnect one
connector, and then remove the sensor. If removing the toner collection unit detect sensor (callout B),
disconnect one connector and remove the sensor.


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit

Learn how to remove and replace the right door dampener.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
5CM63-67901 Right door dampener and lever kit
Removal and replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit 543
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test


remove it.


3. Remove the TCU

Remove the TCU 545




it.










completely.



completely.

12. Remove the right door dampener

Follow these steps to remove the right door dampener.
1. Remove two screw caps and three screws, and then remove the right front cover.
Figure 2-523 Remove the right front cover
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front lower cover.
Remove the right door dampener 555

Figure 2-524 Remove the front lower cover
3. Remove four screws to detach the front end of the tray rails.
CAUTION: The rails can be easily damaged when they are detached.
Figure 2-525 Detach the tray rails
4. Before proceeding, use paper reams to support the printer chassis.
CAUTION: When the sheet-metal corner bracket is removed the chassis will become misaligned if
it is not supported.

Figure 2-526 Support the chassis
5. Remove six screws (callouts 1-6).
Reinstallation tip: These screws are labeled 1 to 6. When the bracket is reinstalled, make sure that
the screws are installed in order (1 to 6).
Figure 2-527 Remove six screws
3
5 4
2
1
Remove the right door dampener 557

7. Rotate the top of the bracket away from the printer (callout 1), and then lift it up (callout 2) to release
the tab (callout 3) at the bottom of the bracket.
Figure 2-529 Remove the corner bracket
1 2
8. Remove the dampener gear assembly from the bracket.
IMPORTANT: Do not discard the failed dampener. Return the assembly to HP for failure analysis.

Figure 2-530 Remove the dampener

printer.
pads.


Pickup unit 1
Pickup unit 2
Removal and replacement: Front cover open sensor

Learn how to remove and replace the front cover open sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the front cover open sensor.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-00466A Front door switch open
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Front cover open sensor 561

Post service test
1. Remove the TCU





remove it.




it.

Remove the inner cover 565

8. Remove the front cover open sensor

Follow these steps to remove the front cover open sensor.
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front cover open sensor.
Figure 2-542 Remove one screw and the cover open sensor


printer.
pads.

Frame main, TCU sensor JC93-00492A Main assembly frame on page

511
Front door switch open JC93-00466A Main assembly frame on page

511
Harness, engine side for DCF + connector JC39-02187A Main assembly frame on page
511
Harness, fuser connector JC39-02217A Main assembly frame on page

511
Main frame registration assembly JC93-01200A Main assembly frame on page

511
Phone, interrupter 0604-001393 Main assembly frame on page

511
Photo, interrupte 0604-001381 Main assembly frame on page

511
Registration cable JC39-02204A Main assembly frame on page

511
Tray closing assembly JC93-01370A Main assembly frame on page

511

0604-001381 Photo, interrupte Main assembly frame on page

511
0604-001393 Phone, interrupter Main assembly frame on page

511
JC39-02187A Harness, engine side for DCF + connector Main assembly frame on page
511
JC39-02204A Registration cable Main assembly frame on page

511
JC39-02217A Harness, fuser connector Main assembly frame on page

511
JC93-00466A Front door switch open Main assembly frame on page

511
JC93-00492A Frame main, TCU sensor Main assembly frame on page

511
JC93-01200A Main frame registration assembly Main assembly frame on page

511
JC93-01370A Tray closing assembly Main assembly frame on page

511
Drive system
View the drive system exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Drive system
Parts diagram and parts list for the drive system.

Figure 2-543 Drive system
4-3
Table 2-80 Drive system
No
1-1 JC31-00075C BLDC Motor, 38w 1 Not applicable
1-2 JC93-01049A Main drive, common mono 1 Not applicable
2-1 JC31-00110A Motor circuit, step 1 Not applicable
2-1 0604-001393 Photo, interrupter 1 Not applicable
3-1 JC31-00123B Motor BLDC 1 Not applicable
3-2 JC93-01084A Drive, motor step alienation 1 Not applicable
3-3 6602-001581 Belt timing gear 1 Not applicable
4-1 JC31-00132A Motor step 1P 1 Not applicable
4-2 JC31-00037A Electric clutch 1 Not applicable
4-3 6602-001730 Belt timing gear 1 Not applicable
5-1 JC93-01083A Drive, motor step 1 Not applicable

BLDC Motor, 38w JC31-00075C Drive system on page 570
Belt timing gear 6602-001581 Drive system on page 570
Belt timing gear 6602-001730 Drive system on page 570
Drive, motor step JC93-01083A Drive system on page 570
Drive, motor step alienation JC93-01084A Drive system on page 570
Electric clutch JC31-00037A Drive system on page 570
Main drive, common mono JC93-01049A Drive system on page 570
Motor BLDC JC31-00123B Drive system on page 570
Motor circuit, step JC31-00110A Drive system on page 570
Motor step 1P JC31-00132A Drive system on page 570
Photo, interrupter 0604-001393 Drive system on page 570

0604-001393 Photo, interrupter Drive system on page 570
6602-001581 Belt timing gear Drive system on page 570
6602-001730 Belt timing gear Drive system on page 570
JC31-00037A Electric clutch Drive system on page 570
JC31-00075C BLDC Motor, 38w Drive system on page 570
JC31-00110A Motor circuit, step Drive system on page 570
JC31-00123B Motor BLDC Drive system on page 570
JC31-00132A Motor step 1P Drive system on page 570
JC93-01049A Main drive, common mono Drive system on page 570
JC93-01083A Drive, motor step Drive system on page 570
JC93-01084A Drive, motor step alienation Drive system on page 570
Main frame pickup 1 and 2

View the main frame pickup 1 and 2 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Main frame pickup 1 and 2

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup 1 and 2.
Figure 2-544 Main frame pickup 1 and 2

Table 2-81 Main frame pickup 1 and 2
No
1 0604-001490 Photo, interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup lifting and empty
sensor (pickup unit 1) on page
573
2 0604-001381 Photo, interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup lifting and empty
sensor (pickup unit 2) on page
582
Removal and replacement: Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1)
Learn how to remove and replace the pickup unit 1 lifting and empty sensors.
View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup unit 1 lifting and empty sensors.

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1) 573
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test








completely.


completely.

5. Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

Follow these steps to remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor.
■ Disconnect the corresponding sensor connector, and then remove the sensor.
● Empty sensor (callout A)
● Pickup lifting sensor (callout B)

Figure 2-558 Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

printer.
pads.

Pickup unit 2.

Pickup unit 1.
Removal and replacement: Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2)
Learn how to remove and replace the pickup unit 2 lifting and empty sensors.

View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup unit 2 lifting and empty sensors.

power cable.
display is blank).
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2) 583





completely.

4. Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

Follow these steps to remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor.
■ Disconnect the corresponding sensor connector, and then remove the sensor.
● Empty sensor (callout A)
● Pickup lifting sensor (callout B)

Figure 2-571 Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

printer.
pads.

Pickup unit 2.


Photo, interrupter 0604-001381 Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573
Photo, interrupter 0604-001490 Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573

0604-001381 Photo, interrupter Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573
0604-001490 Photo, interrupter Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573
Main (sub) frame pickup

View the main (sub) frame pickup exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Main frame pickup

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup

Figure 2-573 Frame main pickup
Table 2-84 Frame main pickup
No
1-2 0604-001393 Photo, interrupter 2 Not applicable
3 JC66-04625 Roller feed 1 Not applicable

A
Main frame pickup 593

Table 2-84 Frame main pickup (continued)
No
5 JC93-01092A Tray2/3 pickup roller 3 Removal and replacement:

Trays 2–x pick, feed, and
separation rollers on page
594
5 X3A92-67917 Tray2/3 pickup rollers kit 1 Not applicable
6 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

* it consists of 3 JC93-01092A rollers
Removal and replacement: Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
Learn how to remove and replace the tray 2-x rollers.
View a video of how to remove and replace the tray 2-x rollers.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-01092A HP LaserJet Trays 2-x rollers

Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers

Follow these steps to remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers.
NOTE: HP recommends replacing all three rollers at the same time.
2. Remove the two cassettes.
Figure 2-574 Remove the two cassettes
Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers 595
3. Inside the tray opening, slide the return guide toward the front of the printer until it stops.
Figure 2-575 Slide the return guide
Reinstallation tip: After installing the new rollers, slide the return guide toward the rear of the
printer to prevent paper jams.
4. Release the latch at the end of the rollers (callout 1) by pulling the latch tab away from the shaft, and
then slide the pick, feed, and separation rollers off of the shaft (callout 2) to remove them.
Figure 2-576 Remove rollers
5. When removing the rollers, make sure to leave the white couplers (callout 1) in place. If the couplers
become dislodged, reinstall them as shown in the figure below.
NOTE: The figure shows the pickup assembly removed from the printer to more clearly show the
positions of the couplers and rollers.

Figure 2-577 Coupler locations

printer.
pads.

After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the access
code.
7. Select Tray X Rollers.
8. Select the tray number for the replaced rollers.
9. Select Reset.

Coupler, torque limiter JC67-00455A Frame main pickup on page

593
Photo, interrupter 0604-001393 Frame main pickup on page

593
Roller feed JC66-04625A Frame main pickup on page

593
Tray2/3 pickup roller JC93-01092A Frame main pickup on page

593

0604-001393 Photo, interrupter Frame main pickup on page

593
JC66-04625A Roller feed Frame main pickup on page

593
JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter Frame main pickup on page

593
JC93-01092A Tray2/3 pickup roller Frame main pickup on page

593
Right door
View the right door exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Right door
Parts diagram and parts list for the right door
Figure 2-578 Right door

Table 2-86 Right door
No
1 JC90-01352B Tray 1 door 1 Removal and replacement:

Tray 1 door on page 602
2 JC63-04910B Front cover, mp 1 Not applicable
3 JC63-04918B Cover, dummy sHCI 1 Not applicable
4 JC63-04920 Side cover 1 Not applicable

B
5 JC63-04916B Upper right door cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Upper right door cover on
page 612
8 JC95-01970A Side cover, link 1 Not applicable
9 JC66-04400 Side link 1 Not applicable

A
11 JC93-01085A Drive motor, step 1 Not applicable
12 6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 3 Not applicable
14 JC61-07372A Spring, TS 1 Not applicable
15 JC66-04628 Roller, feed-duplex 1 1 Not applicable

A
17 JC95-01972A Cover, side takeaway 1 Not applicable
18 JC95-01968A Cover, side exit 1 Not applicable
23 JC95-01969A Cover, side guide 1 Not applicable
24 JC66-04629 Roller, feed-duplex 2 1 Not applicable

A
28 JC66-04398 Link lever, d 1 Not applicable

A
29 JC64-00710A Side locker 1 Not applicable
Not shown 0604-001393 Fuse out sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser out sensor (on the right
door) on page 616
Not shown 0604-001490 Feed sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

Feed sensor (on the right
door) on page 621
Not shown 0604-001393 Tray 1 empty sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

Tray 1 empty sensor on page
629
Not shown 0604-001393 Tray 1 paper length sensor 1 Removal and replacement:
Tray 1 paper length sensor on
page 639
Right door 601

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 door
Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 door.
View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 door.
Service level: Advanced

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01352B Tray 1 door
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test



3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.
Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper 605
2. Remove three screws, and then remove the lower cable cover [A].
Figure 2-586 Remove three screws and the lower cable cover

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.
Figure 2-589 Remove the feed guide take away lower
6. Disconnect the sensor connector. Remove one screw, and then remove the feed guide take away
upper.
Figure 2-590 Remove the feed guide take away upper
4. Remove the Tray 1 door
Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 door.
1. Remove one e-ring and bushing.
Figure 2-591 Remove one e-ring and bushing
3. Remove the shaft.
Figure 2-593 Remove the shaft

4. Release and position the PTB assembly as shown in the figure, and then remove three screws.
5. Remove the guide-duplex lower.
Figure 2-595 Remove the guide-duplex lower
Remove the Tray 1 door 609

9. Disconnect the sensor connector.

10. Release the Tray 1 door linker.
Figure 2-600 Release the Tray 1 door linker
11. Release the Tray 1 door.
Figure 2-601 Release the Tray 1 door

printer.

pads.
Removal and replacement: Upper right door cover

Learn how to remove and replace the upper right door cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the upper right door cover.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC63-04916B Cover, right upper
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

remove it.


3. Remove the upper right door cover

Follow these steps to Remove the upper right door cover.

Figure 2-605 Remove the upper right door cover

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor (on the right door)
Learn how to remove and replace the fuser out sensor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser out sensor.

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001393 Fuser out sensor
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test



3. Remove the fuser out sensor

Follow these steps to remove the fuser out sensor.
Remove the fuser out sensor 619

1. Remove one screw on the back, top corner of the door.
2. Remove one screw on the front, top corner of the door, and then open the cover-side exit.
3. Remove one screw, and then rotate the sensor holder up.

4. Disconnect the sensor connector, and then remove the fuser-out sensor from its holder.

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Feed sensor (on the right door)

Learn how to remove and replace the feed sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the feed sensor.

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001490 Feed sensor
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






upper.
4. Remove the feed sensor
Follow these steps to remove the feed sensor.
■ Disconnect the sensor connector, and then remove the feed sensor located on the feed guide take
away upper.
Figure 2-628 Disconnect one connector and remove the feed sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 empty sensor
Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 empty sensor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 empty sensor.

power cable.
display is blank).
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 empty sensor 629

Post service test




upper.




5. Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 empty sensor.
■ Disconnect the connector, and then remove the Tray 1 empty sensor.
Figure 2-652 Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 paper length sensor

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 paper length sensor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 paper length sensor.

power cable.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Tray 1 paper length sensor
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test







upper.



5. Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor.
1. Remove the Tray 1 tray upper.
Figure 2-676 Remove the Tray 1 tray upper
Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor 649

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor.
Figure 2-677 Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor

printer.
pads.

Cover, dummy sHCI JC63-04918B Right door on page 601
Cover, side exit JC95-01968A Right door on page 601
Cover, side guide JC95-01969A Right door on page 601
Cover, side takeaway JC95-01972A Right door on page 601
Drive motor, step JC93-01085A Right door on page 601
Feed sensor 0604-001490 Right door on page 601
Front cover, mp JC63-04910B Right door on page 601
Fuse out sensor 0604-001393 Right door on page 601
Link lever, d JC66-04398A Right door on page 601
Roller, feed-duplex 1 JC66-04628A Right door on page 601
Roller, feed-duplex 2 JC66-04629A Right door on page 601
Side cover JC63-04920B Right door on page 601
Side cover, link JC95-01970A Right door on page 601
Side link JC66-04400A Right door on page 601
Side locker JC64-00710A Right door on page 601
Spring, TS JC61-07372A Right door on page 601
Timing belt, gear 602-003183 Right door on page 601
Timing belt, gear 6602-001730 Right door on page 601
Tray 1 door JC90-01352B Right door on page 601
Tray 1 empty sensor 0604-001393 Right door on page 601
Tray 1 paper length sensor 0604-001393 Right door on page 601
Upper right door cover JC63-04916B Right door on page 601

0604-001393 Fuse out sensor Right door on page 601
0604-001393 Tray 1 empty sensor Right door on page 601
0604-001393 Tray 1 paper length sensor Right door on page 601
0604-001490 Feed sensor Right door on page 601
602-003183 Timing belt, gear Right door on page 601
6602-001730 Timing belt, gear Right door on page 601
JC61-07372A Spring, TS Right door on page 601
JC63-04910B Front cover, mp Right door on page 601
JC63-04916B Upper right door cover Right door on page 601
JC63-04918B Cover, dummy sHCI Right door on page 601
JC63-04920B Side cover Right door on page 601
JC64-00710A Side locker Right door on page 601
JC66-04398A Link lever, d Right door on page 601
JC66-04400A Side link Right door on page 601
JC66-04628A Roller, feed-duplex 1 Right door on page 601
JC66-04629A Roller, feed-duplex 2 Right door on page 601
JC90-01352B Tray 1 door Right door on page 601
JC93-01085A Drive motor, step Right door on page 601
JC95-01968A Cover, side exit Right door on page 601
JC95-01969A Cover, side guide Right door on page 601
JC95-01970A Side cover, link Right door on page 601
JC95-01972A Cover, side takeaway Right door on page 601
Tray 1
View the tray 1 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Tray 1
Parts diagram and parts list for tray 1.

Figure 2-678 Tray 1
Table 2-93 Tray 1
No
1 JC90-01357B Tray 1 main pickup 1 Not applicable
4 JC90-01353A Guide, feed Tray 1 1 Not applicable
10 JC93-01092A Tray 2/3 main pick, feed, separation rollers 3 Not applicable
11 JC90-01355A Tray 1 bracket, pickup 1 Not applicable
11-1 JC33-00029 MP solenoid 1 Removal and replacement:

B Tray 1 solenoid on page 653
11-4 0604–001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable
11-5 JC66-04459 Actuator lever, empty 1 Not applicable

A
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 solenoid

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 solenoid.
View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 solenoid.
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 solenoid 653


power cable.
display is blank).
JC33-00029B Solenoid, Tray 1
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test







upper.



5. Remove the Tray 1 solenoid

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 solenoid.
1. Remove two screws, remove three gears, and then release Tray 1.
Figure 2-702 Remove two screws and three gears
Remove the Tray 1 solenoid 663

2. Remove two screws, three e-rings, and three bushings. Remove the bracket-rear.
Figure 2-703 Remove the bracket-rear
3. Remove seven screws, and then remove the frame-base.
Figure 2-704 Remove seven screws
4. Remove two screws, and then remove the Tray 1 solenoid.


printer.
pads.

Actuator lever, empty JC66-04459A Tray 1 on page 653
Guide, feed Tray 1 JC90-01353A Tray 1 on page 653
MP solenoid JC33-00029B Tray 1 on page 653
Photo-interrupter 0604–001393 Tray 1 on page 653
Tray 1 bracket, pickup JC90-01355A Tray 1 on page 653
Tray 1 main pickup JC90-01357B Tray 1 on page 653
Tray 2/3 main pick, feed, separation rollers JC93-01092A Tray 1 on page 653

0604–001393 Photo-interrupter Tray 1 on page 653
JC33-00029B MP solenoid Tray 1 on page 653
JC66-04459A Actuator lever, empty Tray 1 on page 653
JC90-01353A Guide, feed Tray 1 Tray 1 on page 653
JC90-01355A Tray 1 bracket, pickup Tray 1 on page 653
JC90-01357B Tray 1 main pickup Tray 1 on page 653
JC93-01092A Tray 2/3 main pick, feed, separation rollers Tray 1 on page 653
Right door guide

View the right door guide exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Right door guide

Parts diagram and parts list for the right door guide.
Figure 2-706 Right door guide

Table 2-95 Right door guide
No
0 JC95-01969A Side cover guide 1 Not applicable
2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable
3 6107-001737 Spring, ts 1 Not applicable
4 JC66-04405 Actuator lever, dup 1 Not applicable

A
6 6107-001731 Spring, cs 4 Not applicable
7 JC66-02289 Idle roller, rubber 4 Not applicable

B
8 JC61-06988A Feed guide 1 Not applicable

Actuator lever, dup JC66-04405A Right door guide on page 668
Feed guide JC61-06988A Right door guide on page 668
Idle roller, rubber JC66-02289B Right door guide on page 668
Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Right door guide on page 668
Side cover guide JC95-01969A Right door guide on page 668
Spring, cs 6107-001731 Right door guide on page 668
Spring, ts 6107-001737 Right door guide on page 668

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Right door guide on page 668
6107-001731 Spring, cs Right door guide on page 668
6107-001737 Spring, ts Right door guide on page 668
JC61-06988A Feed guide Right door guide on page 668
JC66-02289B Idle roller, rubber Right door guide on page 668
JC66-04405A Actuator lever, dup Right door guide on page 668
JC95-01969A Side cover guide Right door guide on page 668
Right door exit and takeaway

View the right door exit and takeaway exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Right door exit and takeaway

Parts diagram and parts list for the right door exit and takeaway.
Figure 2-707 Right door exit and takeaway
Table 2-96 Right door exit and takeaway
No
1 JC95-01968A Right door side exit 1 Not applicable

Table 2-96 Right door exit and takeaway (continued)
No
1-2 6107-001737 Spring, ts 1 Not applicable
1-3 JC66-04406 Actuator lever, fuser out 1 Not applicable

A
1-4 0604–001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable
2 JC95-01972A Side cover, takeaway 1 Not applicable
2-2 0604-001490 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC93-01467A Switch assembly - right door 1 Not applicable
Right door exit and takeaway 671

Actuator lever, fuser out JC66-04406A Right door exit and takeaway
on page 670
Photo interrupter 0604-001490 Right door exit and takeaway

on page 670
Photo-interrupter 0604–001393 Right door exit and takeaway

on page 670
Right door side exit JC95-01968A Right door exit and takeaway
on page 670
Side cover, takeaway JC95-01972A Right door exit and takeaway

on page 670
Spring, ts 6107-001737 Right door exit and takeaway

on page 670
Switch assembly - right door JC93-01467A Right door exit and takeaway
on page 670

0604-001490 Photo interrupter Right door exit and takeaway

on page 670
0604–001393 Photo-interrupter Right door exit and takeaway

on page 670
6107-001737 Spring, ts Right door exit and takeaway

on page 670
JC66-04406A Actuator lever, fuser out Right door exit and takeaway
on page 670
JC93-01467A Switch assembly - right door Right door exit and takeaway
on page 670
JC95-01968A Right door side exit Right door exit and takeaway
on page 670
JC95-01972A Side cover, takeaway Right door exit and takeaway

on page 670
PTB Transfer
View the PTB transfer exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
PTB transfer
Parts diagram and parts list for the PTB transfer.

Figure 2-708 PTB transfer
Table 2-97 PTB transfer
No
0 JC93-01117A HP LaserJet paper transfer belt 1 Removal and replacement:

Paper transfer belt (PTB) on
page 674
1 JC96-09859 PTB, sub-cover rear 1 Not applicable

A
2 JC96-09862 PTB, sub-cleaning blade 1 Not applicable

A
3 JC96-09861A PTB, sub-cover front 1 Not applicable
5 JC96-09860 PTB, sub-guide upper 1 Not applicable

A
Removal and replacement: Paper transfer belt (PTB)

Learn how to remove and replace the PTB.

View a video of how to remove and replace the PTB.

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-01117A HP LaserJet paper transfer belt
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Paper transfer belt (PTB) 675

1. Remove the PTB
Follow these steps to remove the PTB.
2. Remove one screw and the connector cover.
Reinstallation tip: Before reinstalling the connector cover, roll the wires around the connector to
ensure they are all contained under the cover.
Figure 2-709 Remove the connector cover
3. Disconnect the PTB connector.

4. Remove one screw and position the lever as shown in the figure below.
Figure 2-711 Remove one screw and position the lever
5. Remove one screw and position the lever as shown in the figure below.
Figure 2-712 Remove one screw and position the lever
6. Remove the PTB assembly.
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the PTB, slide it all the way to the back of the printer to engage
the prongs on the bottom of the PTB.
NOTE: There is one unused connector on the right door under the PTB.
Remove the PTB 677

Figure 2-713 Remove the PTB assembly

printer.
pads.

HP LaserJet paper transfer belt JC93-01117A PTB transfer on page 674
PTB, sub-cleaning blade JC96-09862A PTB transfer on page 674
PTB, sub-cover front JC96-09861A PTB transfer on page 674
PTB, sub-cover rear JC96-09859A PTB transfer on page 674
PTB, sub-guide upper JC96-09860A PTB transfer on page 674

JC93-01117A HP LaserJet paper transfer belt PTB transfer on page 674
JC96-09859A PTB, sub-cover rear PTB transfer on page 674
JC96-09860A PTB, sub-guide upper PTB transfer on page 674
JC96-09861A PTB, sub-cover front PTB transfer on page 674
JC96-09862A PTB, sub-cleaning blade PTB transfer on page 674
Reservoir
View the reservoir exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Reservoir
Parts diagram and parts list for the reservoir.
Figure 2-714 Reservoir

Table 2-99 Reservoir
No
0 X3A79-60003 Toner reservoir 1 Removal and replacement:

Reservoir assembly on page
681
Not shown JC39-02243A Harness reservoir unit; K7600,UL 10272,400 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Reservoir assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the reservoir assembly.

power cable.
display is blank).
X3A79-60003 Toner reservoir
Required tools

Removal and replacement: Reservoir assembly 681

the printer.
Post service test

Remove the left cover


Remove the laser scanner assembly

Remove the laser scanner assembly 683

Remove the reservoir assembly

Follow these steps to remove the reservoir assembly.
1. Open the front cover, then remove the toner cartridge.
2. Remove one screw securing the toner guide.
3. Lift the front of the guide up and slide it slightly toward the rear of the printer (callout 1). Rotate the
front of the guide toward the left side of the printer, and then remove the guide through the left side
opening.
Figure 2-720 Remove the toner guide

4. Disconnect one connector and remove one screw.
5. Remove the reservoir assembly.
NOTE: When reinstalling the reservoir assembly, install the tab in the back first, and then rotate
the assembly toward the sheet metal wall over the screw opening.
Figure 2-722 Remove the reservoir assembly.
Remove the reservoir assembly 685

Toner reservoir X3A79-60003 Reservoir on page 681

X3A79-60003 Toner reservoir Reservoir on page 681
ADF (LX models)

View the ADF (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ADF (LX models)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF (LX models).
Figure 2-723 ADF (LX models)
Table 2-101 ADF (LX models)
No
1 JC97-04853A ADF cover open (LX) 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) jam
access cover (LX) on page
693
2 JC97-04856B ADF pickup (LX) 1 Not applicable
3 JC63-05563 ADF, front cover (LX) 1 Not applicable

A

Table 2-101 ADF (LX models) (continued)
No
4 JC63-05561A ADF, cover rear (LX) 1 Not applicable
7 JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) input
tray (LX) on page 697
7 X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) input
tray (LX) on page 697
7-4 JC66-04079 ADF pinion gear (LX) 1 Not applicable

A
Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (LX bundles).
View a video of how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (LX/du bundles).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-05074A Document feeder whole unit assembly (LX models)

Required tools

the printer.
Post service test




it.

cover (callout 2).

(callout 2).
grounding wire.


printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (LX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04853A Jam access cover (LX)
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX) 693
Post service test
1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-730 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.
Figure 2-731 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.
Figure 2-732 Release the top back cover.
2. Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder jam access cover.
1. Open the jam access cover, and then remove one screw.
Figure 2-733 Remove the jam access cover screw
Remove the document feeder jam access cover 695

2. Remove the pivot pin, and then pivot the cover and release the hinge to remove the jam access
cover.
Figure 2-734 Remove the jam access cover

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (LX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (E778xx series)
X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) E783xx series)
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX) 697
Post service test

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-735 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws
2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-736 Open the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-737 Remove the document feeder front cover

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 699

3. Remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray.
■ Disconnect one connector on document feeder board (callout 1), remove one screw and hinge pin
(callout 2), and then remove the input tray.
NOTE: Carefully guide the cable out of the chassis while removing the tray.

Figure 2-741 Remove the input tray connector, screw, and hinge pin
1
2

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (LX).

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (LX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04920A Contact image sensor (CIS)
JC97-04722A Contact image sensor (CIS) (E778xx series)
JC97-04920A Contact image sensor (CIS) (E783xx series)
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 703



3. Remove the pick and feed roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the pick and feed roller assembly.
Remove the pick and feed roller assembly 705

2. Remove two screws on the front cover.
Figure 2-749 Remove two screws on front cover

3. Open the ADF and then remove three screw caps.
Figure 2-750 Remove three screw caps
4. Remove three screws, and then remove the front cover.
Figure 2-751 Remove three screws and front cover
Remove the pick and feed roller assembly 707

5. Rotate the pick/feed roller assembly to release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame.
Figure 2-752 Release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame
6. To remove the pick/feed roller assembly lift up on the front side (callout 1) and, then slide towards
the front (callout 2) to release the pick/feed roller assembly.
Figure 2-753 Release the pick/feed roller assembly

7. Rotate the roller assembly over, and then disconnect one connectors. Remove the document
feeder pick roller assembly.
Figure 2-754 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly
TIP: Note the four flags (callout 1) on the bottom of the pick/feed roller assembly. When
reinstalling, hold up the flags while reinstall to allow for proper installation.
Figure 2-755 Pick/Feed roller assembly four flags
4. Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.
1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be
reinstalled in the same orientation.
Remove the CIS assembly 709

Figure 2-756 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 2-757 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin
3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder main motor (LX).
View a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.
View a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX) 711
JC31-00163A Main motor assembly (LX)
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



2. Remove the main motor

Follow these steps to remove the main motor.
Remove the main motor 713

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove the tension spring (callout 2), and then remove four
screws (callout 3).
Figure 2-761 Remove the main motor connector, spring, and screws
2
1
2. Carefully lift the motor out while releasing the gear belt.
Reinstallation tip:
a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.
b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.
c. Install the tension spring.
d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.
Figure 2-762 Main motor and gear belt

(callout 2).
Remove the CIS assembly 715

printer.
pads.

ADF cover open (LX) JC97-04853A ADF (LX models) on page 687
ADF pickup (LX) JC97-04856B ADF (LX models) on page 687
ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC97-04859A ADF (LX models) on page 687
ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) X3A84-60103 ADF (LX models) on page 687
ADF, cover rear (LX) JC63-05561A ADF (LX models) on page 687
ADF, front cover (LX) JC63-05563A ADF (LX models) on page 687

JC63-05561A ADF, cover rear (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 687
JC63-05563A ADF, front cover (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 687
JC97-04853A ADF cover open (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 687
JC97-04856B ADF pickup (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 687
JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) ADF (LX models) on page 687
X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) ADF (LX models) on page 687
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

View the ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models).
Figure 2-765 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

Table 2-107 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)
No
1-1 JC92-02962A LX PCA 1 Removal and replacement:

PCA-Scanner (LX) on page
719
1-5 JC97-04528A LX, hinge r 1 Not applicable
1-6 JC97-04527A LX, hinge l 1 Not applicable
2-5 JC97-04857A Pick Roller Assy - LX 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) pick/
feed roller assembly (LX) on
page 723
2-5-1 JC97-04099A LX pick roller 1 Not applicable
2-5-6 JC97-04860A LX feed roller 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA (LX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner (LX) 719

JC92-02962A Document feeder PCA assembly (LX)
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA.
Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA 721

■ Disconnect six connectors and the ground wire from PCA, remove four screws, and then remove the
document feeder PCA (LX).
Figure 2-769 Document feeder PCA (LX)

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup/feed roller assembly (LX/du models).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup/feed roller assembly
(LX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04857A Pick feed roller assembly (LX)
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX) 723
Post service test

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly.
Figure 2-770 Open the document feeder cover
2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.
NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)
Figure 2-771 Remove the document feeder cover screws

3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 2-772 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector
4. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.
Figure 2-773 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly
5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on
both sides of the assembly) are correctly installed and move freely.
Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 725
Figure 2-774 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket
6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide
the shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.
CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.
NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.
Figure 2-775 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips


printer.
pads.

LX PCA JC92-02962A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 719
LX feed roller JC97-04860A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

LX pick roller JC97-04099A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

LX, hinge l JC97-04527A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

LX, hinge r JC97-04528A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 ADF exterior and ADF pickup

Pick Roller Assy - LX JC97-04857A ADF exterior and ADF pickup


0604-001393 Photo interrupter ADF exterior and ADF pickup

JC92-02962A LX PCA ADF exterior and ADF pickup

JC97-04099A LX pick roller ADF exterior and ADF pickup

JC97-04527A LX, hinge l ADF exterior and ADF pickup

JC97-04528A LX, hinge r ADF exterior and ADF pickup

JC97-04857A Pick Roller Assy - LX ADF exterior and ADF pickup

JC97-04860A LX feed roller ADF exterior and ADF pickup

ADF main frame assembly (LX models)

View the ADF main frame assembly (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF main frame assembly (LX models).

Figure 2-776 ADF main frame (LX models)
13
Table 2-110 ADF main frame assembly (LX models)
No
1-1 JC97-04586A LX separation housing 1 Not applicable
1-2 JC97-04852A ADF LX separation roller 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder separation
roller assembly (LX) on page
731
1-2-1 JC97-04861A ADF LX separation sub roller Not applicable
1-3 JC69-01326A Friction pad 1 Not applicable
5-5 JC66-04104A Actuator, output1 1 Not applicable
6-2 JC66-04105A Actuator, feed out 1 Not applicable
6-3 JC66-04103A Actuator, registration 1 Not applicable
6-5 0604–001393 Photo interrupter1 1 Not applicable

Table 2-110 ADF main frame assembly (LX models) (continued)
No
7 JC31-00156C Feed motor assembly (Motor, bldc type 1) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder feed motor
(LX) on page 738
13 JC31-00163A Motor - Step main 1 Not applicable
16 JC47-00038A LX - Motor feed DC 1 Not applicable
17 JC66-04100A LX - Link Cover Open 1 Not applicable
19 JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) 1 Not applicable
19 JC97-04722A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) 1 Not applicable
19 JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) 1 Not applicable
1Early models only during original release. This part removed from newer models.
Removal and replacement: Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly
(LX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX) 731
JC97-04852A ADF separation roller assembly (LX)
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly.
Figure 2-777 Open the document feeder cover

2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.
NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)
Figure 2-778 Remove the document feeder cover screws
3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 2-779 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector
Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 733
Figure 2-780 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly
5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on
both sides of the assembly) are correctly installed and move freely.
Figure 2-781 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket
6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide
the shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.
CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.
NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.

Figure 2-782 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips
2. Remove the LX document feeder separation roller

Follow these steps to remove the LX document feeder separation roller.
1. Rotate the separation roller cover up to release it, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-783 Remove the separation roller cover
Remove the LX document feeder separation roller 735

Figure 2-784 Document feeder separation roller cover and roller assembly
3. Release two claws, and then remove the separation roller assembly.
NOTE: The separation roller assembly spring under the roller is not captive.
Figure 2-785 Remove the separation roller assembly

4. When the assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the spring is correctly seated in the holder.
Figure 2-786 Separation roller assembly spring

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder feed motor (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder feed motor (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder feed motor (LX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC31-00156C Feed motor assembly (LX) (bldc type 1)
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test


2. Remove the feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the feed motor.
1. Loosen the cables in the cable guide, remove two screws and then move the cable guide out of the
way.
Figure 2-790 Feed motor cable guide

2. Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then carefully lift the motor out to remove.
Figure 2-791 Remove the feed motor

printer.
pads.

ADF LX separation roller JC97-04852A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
ADF LX separation sub roller JC97-04861A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 730
Actuator, feed out JC66-04105A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
Actuator, output1 JC66-04104A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
Actuator, registration JC66-04103A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
Contact Image Sensor (CIS) JC97-04920A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 730
Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) JC97-04722A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 730
Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 730
Friction pad JC69-01326A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
LX - Link Cover Open JC66-04100A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
LX - Motor feed DC JC47-00038A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
LX separation housing JC97-04586A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
Motor - Step main JC31-00163A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
Photo interrupter 0604-001381 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
Photo interrupter1 0604–001393 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 730
0604-001381 Photo interrupter ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
0604–001393 Photo interrupter1 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
JC31-00163A Motor - Step main ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
JC47-00038A LX - Motor feed DC ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
JC66-04100A LX - Link Cover Open ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
JC66-04103A Actuator, registration ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
JC66-04104A Actuator, output1 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
JC66-04105A Actuator, feed out ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
JC69-01326A Friction pad ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
JC97-04586A LX separation housing ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
JC97-04722A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 730
JC97-04852A ADF LX separation roller ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 730
JC97-04861A ADF LX separation sub roller ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 730
JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 730
Flow ADF (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Flow ADF (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF (GX/sGX).

Figure 2-792 Flow ADF (GX/sGX)
Table 2-113 ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX
No
1 JC97-04869A ADF Cover open 1 Not applicable
2 JC97-04872A Pickup, upper - GX 1 Not applicable
2 JC97-04646B Pickup, upper - sGX 1 Not applicable
3 JC66-02270A Cover, hinge - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
5 JC97-04881A Cover, front - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
6 JC97-04879A Dummy, front - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
8 JC97-04692A Damper - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
9 JC97-04880A Cover, bottom - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
10 JC97-04883A Main frame - GX 1 Not applicable
10 JC97-04882A Main frame sGX 1 Not applicable
13 JC63-05566 Cover, rear - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

A

Table 2-113 ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX (continued)
No
Not shown JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (ultrasonic) (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement:
Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor
with PCA (GX/sGX) on page
751
Not shown JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (ultrasonic) (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement:
Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor
with PCA (GX/sGX) on page
751
Complete JC97-04955A Flow ADF - GX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX)
on page 745
Complete JC97-04956A Non Flow ADF - sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX)
on page 745
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (GX/sGX bundles).
View a video of how to remove and replace the flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX bundles).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX) 745

JC97-04955A Flow ADF - GX
JC97-04956A Non Flow ADF - sGX
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



it.

Remove the upper rear cover 747

grounding wire.
to a full 90°.



printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX/sGX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder ultrasonic sensor (GX/sGX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder feed ultrasonic sensor
(GX/sGX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (GX only)
JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only)
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX/sGX) 751
Post service test






3. Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.
1. Remove 4 screws.
Figure 2-807 Remove 4 screws.
Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly 755

2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly
Figure 2-808 Remove the pickup roller assembly
TIP: Re-assembly
● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.
4. Remove the paper path cover

Follow these steps to remove the paper path cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.
Figure 2-809 Remove the document feeder paper path cover
5. Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA

Follow these steps to remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA.
1. Remove the separation roller, and then remove one screw (callout 1).
Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA 757

2. Remove the pick/feed cover.
Figure 2-811 Remove the pick/feed cover
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the ultrasonic sensor.
Figure 2-812 Remove the ultrasonic sensor


printer.
pads.

ADF Cover open JC97-04869A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Cover, bottom - GX/sGX JC97-04880A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Cover, front - GX/sGX JC97-04881A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Cover, hinge - GX/sGX JC66-02270A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Cover, rear - GX/sGX JC63-05566A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Damper - GX/sGX JC97-04692A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Dummy, front - GX/sGX JC97-04879A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Flow ADF - GX JC97-04955A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Main frame - GX JC97-04883A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Main frame sGX JC97-04882A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Non Flow ADF - sGX JC97-04956A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
PCA - ADF receiver (ultrasonic) (GX only) JC92-02967A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
744
PCA - ADF transmitter (ultrasonic) (GX only) JC92-02966A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
744
Pickup, upper - GX JC97-04872A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Pickup, upper - sGX JC97-04646B ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744

JC63-05566A Cover, rear - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC66-02270A Cover, hinge - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (ultrasonic) (GX only) ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
744
JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (ultrasonic) (GX only) ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
744
JC97-04646B Pickup, upper - sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC97-04692A Damper - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC97-04869A ADF Cover open ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC97-04872A Pickup, upper - GX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC97-04879A Dummy, front - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC97-04880A Cover, bottom - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC97-04881A Cover, front - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC97-04882A Main frame sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC97-04883A Main frame - GX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC97-04955A Flow ADF - GX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
JC97-04956A Non Flow ADF - sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

744
Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF open cover (GX/sGX).

Figure 2-813 ADF open cover (GX/sGX)
Table 2-116 Flow ADF open cover
No
0 JC97-04869A Cover, open (GX/sGX) 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF jam access cover
(GX/sGX) on page 762
2 JC97-04696B Cover, open lower (GX/sGX) 1 Not applicable
2-5-1 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 4 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF jam access cover (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (GX/sGX).

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (GX/sGX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04869A Open cover - GX
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF jam access cover (GX/sGX) 763



3. Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder jam access cover.

1. Disconnect connector at document feeder PCA and route cable out.
2. Disconnect the ground wire.
Figure 2-821 Remove the jam access cover ground wire
Remove the document feeder jam access cover 767

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), remove hinge (pivot) pin, and then remove door arm support (callout
2)
Figure 2-822 Remove the jam access cover door arm support
4. Remove the jam access cover.

printer.
pads.

Cover, open (GX/sGX) JC97-04869A Flow ADF open cover on page

762
Cover, open lower (GX/sGX) JC97-04696B Flow ADF open cover on page
762
Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF open cover on page

762

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF open cover on page

762
JC97-04696B Cover, open lower (GX/sGX) Flow ADF open cover on page
762
JC97-04869A Cover, open (GX/sGX) Flow ADF open cover on page

762
Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX).

Figure 2-823 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)
Table 2-118 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)
No
2-1 JC97-04650A Pick feed roller assembly (GX/sGX) 1 Removal and replacement:
Flow ADF pickup roller
assembly (GX/sGX) on page
771
2-2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX).
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX) 771
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup roller assembly
(GX/sGX).

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04650A Pick feed roller assembly - GX/sGX
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test
1. Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly.
1. Open the document feeder top cover.
2. Remove the pickup roller assembly:
a. Remove 4 screws.
b. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly
TIP: Re-assembly
Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly 773

3. Remove the pickup rollers:
a. Remove four screws and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-826 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover
b. Remove two plastic clips and two bushings, disconnect two springs, and then remove the
shaft coupler.
NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

Figure 2-827 Remove the pickup roller components
Figure 2-828 Pickup roller components-disassembled
c. Slide the roller shaft and then remove the pickup roller assembly.
4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.


printer.
pads.

ADF pick roller (GX/sGX)
After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
access code.
7. Select ADF Pick Roller.
8. Select ADF Pick Roller.
9. Select Reset.

Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/

sGX) on page 771
Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/

sGX) on page 771
Pick feed roller assembly (GX/sGX) JC97-04650A Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/
sGX) on page 771

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/

sGX) on page 771
0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/

sGX) on page 771
JC97-04650A Pick feed roller assembly (GX/sGX) Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/
sGX) on page 771
Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX).
Figure 2-830 Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

Table 2-120 Flow ADF stacker
No
0 JC97-04658B Stacker -GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF input tray (GX/sGX)
on page 779
Not shown JC82-00693 Flow ADF - stacker upper CM 1 Not applicable

A
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF input tray (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (GX/sGX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (GX/sGX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04658B Stacker - Gx/sGX
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF input tray (GX/sGX) 779

Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






3. Remove the dampening unit

Follow these steps to remove the dampening unit.
■ Remove three screws, and then remove the damping unit.
Figure 2-837 Remove the document feeder dampening unit

Remove the dampening unit 783

1. Remove 4 screws.
TIP: Re-assembly

5. Remove the input tray
Follow these steps to remove the input tray.
1. Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector, and then remove cable from guide.
Figure 2-840 Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector
2. Lift the tray from the front, and pivot the tray outward to remove.
Remove the input tray 785

printer.
pads.

Flow ADF - stacker upper CM JC82-00693A Flow ADF stacker on page 779
Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF stacker on page 779
Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Flow ADF stacker on page 779
Stacker -GX/sGX JC97-04658B Flow ADF stacker on page 779

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF stacker on page 779
0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF stacker on page 779
JC82-00693A Flow ADF - stacker upper CM Flow ADF stacker on page 779
JC97-04658B Stacker -GX/sGX Flow ADF stacker on page 779
Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)
Figure 2-841 Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)
1-3

Table 2-122 Flow ADF main
No
1-1 JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF separation roller
assembly on page 790
1-2 JC97-04652A Cover, separation roller - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
1-3 JC61-08235A Spring CS 1 Not applicable
5 JC97-04656B Scan in lower assembly - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF scan in lower
assembly (GX/sGX) on page
823
7 0609-001558 Contact image sensor - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF contact image
sensor (CIS) (GX/sGX) on page
795
8 JC97-04681A Drive release pickup - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF rear motors (GX/
sGX) on page 803
11 JC92-02964A PCA - AF HIC (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX)
on page 812
11 JC92-02964B PCA - sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

PCA-Scanner sGX (dn models
only) on page 829
12 JC97-04680A Motor, feed drive - GX/sGX 4 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF front motor (GX/
sGX) on page 816
13 JC97-04640A Hinge L - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
14 JC97-04641A Hinge R - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
16 JC61-07694A Motor, ADF fan 1 Not applicable
17 JC31-00168A Fan - GX/sGX (CIS) 1 Removal and replacement:

Contact image sensor (CIS)
fan (GX/sGX) on page 819
19 JC97-04679A Drive - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

sGX) on page 803
20 JC31-00177A Step motor, ip 1 Removal and replacement:

sGX) on page 803
21 JC31-00146A Fan type 4 ADF GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX)
on page 812
23 JC97-04668B Input tray - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
26 JC97-04687A White roller - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
27 JC97-04830A Scan out - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable
29 JC97-04682A Motor, drive release scan 1 Not applicable
Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX) 789

Table 2-122 Flow ADF main (continued)
No
36 6602-001730 Timing belt gear - GX/sGX 3 Not applicable
Not shown JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only) 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF separation roller assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (GX/sGX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly
(GX/sGX).

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly - GX\sGX
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly.
1. Slightly lift the input tray, and then remove the separation roller cover.
Figure 2-842 Remove the separation roller cover
2. Remove one plastic clip.
NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.
Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly 791

Figure 2-843 Remove one plastic clip
3. Slide the roller assembly to the front, and then pull up to release the claws from the shaft.
Reinstallation tip: Position the spring and shaft before attaching the claws to the shaft.
Figure 2-844 Release the separation roller
4. Remove the separation roller.
NOTE: Make sure that the sponge washer (circled in a previous step) is retained during the
removal of the roller assembly–it might fall off.

Figure 2-845 Remove the separation roller
TIP: Re-assembly tip
1. Put the spring to the arrow direction at the bottom of the holder.
2. Insert the spring at the hole carefully.
Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly 793

3. Push the separation roller assembly to the bottom (Callout 1), then insert the assembly (2
joints) to the shaft (Callout 2)

printer.
pads.


Flow ADF separation roller
After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
access code.
7. Select ADF Separation (Reverse) Roller.
8. Select ADF Separation Roller.
9. Select Reset.
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF contact image sensor (CIS) (GX/sGX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (GX/sGX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (GX/sGX).
Service level:

power cable.

display is blank).
0609-001558 Contact image sensor - GX/sGX
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 797




Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly 799

1. Remove 4 screws.
TIP: Re-assembly

4. Remove the paper path cover
Follow these steps to remove the paper path cover.
■ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.
Figure 2-854 Remove the document feeder paper path cover

Remove the paper path cover 801

(callout 2).


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF rear motors (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder rear motors (GX/sGX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder rear motors (GX/sGX).
Service level:

power cable.
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF rear motors (GX/sGX) 803

display is blank).
JC97-04679A Drive - GX/sGX
JC97-04681A Drive release pickup - GX/sGX
JC97-04680A Pickup motor
JC97-04680A Pre-REGI motor
JC97-04680A Exit motor
JC97-04680A Feed motor
JC31-00177A REGI motor
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Identify the document feeder motors

Follow these steps to identify the document feeder motors.

■ Use the figure below to locate the motor.
Figure 2-857 Document feeder motors identification
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
Callout Description
1 Motor 1
2 Motor 2
3 Pickup motor
4 Pre-REGI motor
5 Exit motor
6 Feed motor
7 REGI motor



3. Remove motors 1 and 2

Follow these steps to remove motors 1 and 2.
■ Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.
Figure 2-861 Remove the motor
4. Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors

Follow these steps to remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors.
1. Loosen the cable retainer, and then disconnect one connector from the motor.
TIP: Remove the connector harness from the retainer, and then disconnect the connector.
Remove motors 1 and 2 807

2. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the pickup
motor off the screws to remove it.
NOTE:
● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the
motor pulley.
● Install the tension spring.
● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
Figure 2-863 Pickup motor

3. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the pre-REGI
motor off the screws to remove it.
NOTE:
● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the
motor pulley.
● Install the tension spring.
● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
Figure 2-864 Pre-REGI motor
5. Remove the exit motor

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor.
Remove the exit motor 809

1. Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the CIS fan.
Figure 2-865 Remove the main fan
2. Remove the spring (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), loosen three screws, and then
remove the exit motor.
Reinstallation tip:
b. Install the tension spring.
c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount

6. Remove the feed motor
Follow these steps to remove the feed motor.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
2. Remove two screws, and then remove motor.
7. Remove the REGI motor

Follow these steps to remove the REGI motor.
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the Pre-REGI motor.
Remove the feed motor 811

3. Disconnect one connector from the motor.
TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.
4. Remove one spring, loosen (do not remove) 3 screws, and then slide the motor off the screws to
remove it.
Reinstallation tip:
b. Install the tension spring.
c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA fan (GX/sGX).

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA fan (GX/sGX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC31-00146A Document feeder PCA fan assembly
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX) 813


2. Remove the document feeder PCA fan

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder PCA fan.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and then release two tabs (callout 2) to remove the fan.
Reinstallation tip: Install the fan with the correct orientation when reinstalling.
Figure 2-872 Remove the document feeder PCA fan connector

Remove the document feeder PCA fan 815

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF front motor (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder front motor (GX/sGX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder front motor (GX/sGX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).

JC31-00177A Motor, step
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



2. Remove the front motor

Follow these steps to remove the front motor.
■ Remove two screws and disconnect one connector, and then remove the motor.
Reinstallation tip:
b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.
c. Install the tension spring.
d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount

Figure 2-876 Remove the document feeder front motor

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS) fan (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS fan (GX/sGX).

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS fan (GX/sGX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC31-00168A CIS fan
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test


2. Remove the document feeder CIS fan

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder CIS fan.
■ Remove one connector, and then remove two mounting screws to remove the fan.
Figure 2-880 Remove the document feeder CIS fan


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF scan in lower assembly (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder scan in lower assembly (GX/sGX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder scan in lower assembly
(GX/sGX).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF scan in lower assembly (GX/sGX) 823
JC97-04656B Scan in lower assembly
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






3. Remove the scan in lower assembly

Follow these steps to remove the scan in lower assembly.
1. Remove two screws (ADF front).
Remove the scan in lower assembly 827

2. Remove five screws (ADF back; four sheet-metal and one ground).
3. Remove one screw (ADF back).
4. At the front corner, carefully pry the scan in lower assembly away from the ADF frame.
IMPORTANT: Locate the dimples in the scan in lower assembly. Separate the dimples from the
ADF frame.
NOTE: When installing a replacement scan in lower assembly, do not crease or wrinkle the
attached Mylar.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 2-890 Pry the scan in lower assembly away from the ADF

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner sGX (dn models only)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA-scanner (sGX dn models).

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA-scanner (sGX dn
models).
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC92-02964A PCA-scanner (sGX dn models)
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test



it.


grounding wire.
to a full 90°.


4. Remove the scan joint board

Follow these steps to remove the scan joint board.
1. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.
Figure 2-899 Release scan-left cover
Remove the scan joint board 835

2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws, and then remove the scan-right cover.
Figure 2-900 Remove scan-right cover
3. At the top of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws.

4. At the back of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws, and then remove the
scan-rear cover.
Figure 2-902 Remove three screws and the scanner rear cover
5. Disconnect all harnesses. Remove four screws, and then release the scanner PCA.
NOTE: There are two empty connectors.
Figure 2-903 Remove screws and release scanner PCA


printer.
pads.

Contact image sensor - GX/sGX 0609-001558 Flow ADF main on page 789
Cover, separation roller - GX/sGX JC97-04652A Flow ADF main on page 789
Drive - GX/sGX JC97-04679A Flow ADF main on page 789
Drive release pickup - GX/sGX JC97-04681A Flow ADF main on page 789
Fan - GX/sGX (CIS) JC31-00168A Flow ADF main on page 789
Fan type 4 ADF GX/sGX JC31-00146A Flow ADF main on page 789
Hinge L - GX/sGX JC97-04640A Flow ADF main on page 789
Hinge R - GX/sGX JC97-04641A Flow ADF main on page 789
Input tray - GX/sGX JC97-04668B Flow ADF main on page 789
Motor, ADF fan JC61-07694A Flow ADF main on page 789
Motor, drive release scan JC97-04682A Flow ADF main on page 789
Motor, feed drive - GX/sGX JC97-04680A Flow ADF main on page 789
PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) JC92-02967A Flow ADF main on page 789
PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only) JC92-02966A Flow ADF main on page 789
PCA - AF HIC (GX only) JC92-02964A Flow ADF main on page 789
PCA - sGX JC92-02964B Flow ADF main on page 789
Scan in lower assembly - GX/sGX JC97-04656B Flow ADF main on page 789
Scan out - GX/sGX JC97-04830A Flow ADF main on page 789
Separation roller assembly - GX/sGX JC97-04915A Flow ADF main on page 789
Spring CS JC61-08235A Flow ADF main on page 789
Step motor, ip JC31-00177A Flow ADF main on page 789
Timing belt gear - GX/sGX 6602-001730 Flow ADF main on page 789
White roller - GX/sGX JC97-04687A Flow ADF main on page 789

0609-001558 Contact image sensor - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
6602-001730 Timing belt gear - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC31-00146A Fan type 4 ADF GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC31-00168A Fan - GX/sGX (CIS) Flow ADF main on page 789
JC31-00177A Step motor, ip Flow ADF main on page 789
JC61-07694A Motor, ADF fan Flow ADF main on page 789
JC61-08235A Spring CS Flow ADF main on page 789
JC92-02964A PCA - AF HIC (GX only) Flow ADF main on page 789
JC92-02964B PCA - sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only) Flow ADF main on page 789
JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04640A Hinge L - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04641A Hinge R - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04652A Cover, separation roller - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04656B Scan in lower assembly - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04668B Input tray - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04679A Drive - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04680A Motor, feed drive - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04681A Drive release pickup - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04682A Motor, drive release scan Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04687A White roller - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04830A Scan out - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 789
Image scanner
View the image scanner exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Image scanner
Parts diagram and parts list for the image scanner.

Figure 2-904 Image scanner
Table 2-131 Image scanner
No
1 JC97-04522B Scanner glass 1 Removal and replacement:

Scanner glass on page 842
2 JC92-02781A PCA scanner 1 Not applicable
3 JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass 1 Not applicable
4 JC97-04516A Scanner open sensor 1 Not applicable
Image scanner 841

Table 2-131 Image scanner (continued)
No
5 JC97-04521A Scanner - front lamp 1 Removal and replacement:

LED lamp module on page
844
7 JC31-00158A Motor, step 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC39-02128A Harness - Scanjoint to main 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC39-02129A Harness - Home open sensor 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Scanner glass

Learn how to remove and replace the scanner glass.
View a video of how to remove and replace the scanner glass.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04522B Scanner glass

Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.
■ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.
Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right
to remove it.
Figure 2-905 Remove scanner glass

Remove the scanner glass 843

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: LED lamp module

Learn how to remove and replace the LED lamp module.
View a video of how to remove and replace the LED lamp module.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).

JC97-04521A Scanner - front lamp
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



it.


grounding wire.
to a full 90°.



cover (callout 2).

(callout 2).
grounding wire.


to remove it.
6. Remove the LED lamp module

Follow these steps to remove the LED lamp module.

1. CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed. then
remove the LED lamp module.
Remove the transparent tape.
Figure 2-919 Remove transparent tape
2. Disconnect the flat cable.
Figure 2-920 Disconnect cable
3. Remove four screws. Remove the LED lamp module.
Figure 2-921 Remove screws and release LED lamp module

printer.
pads.

Flat Cable-WLED JC39-02120A Image scanner on page 841
Harness - Home open sensor JC39-02129A Image scanner on page 841
Harness - Scanjoint to main JC39-02128A Image scanner on page 841
Motor, step JC31-00158A Image scanner on page 841
PCA scanner JC92-02781A Image scanner on page 841
Scanner - front lamp JC97-04521A Image scanner on page 841
Scanner glass JC97-04522B Image scanner on page 841
Scanner open sensor JC97-04516A Image scanner on page 841
Tempered scan glass JC01-00101A Image scanner on page 841

JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass Image scanner on page 841
JC31-00158A Motor, step Image scanner on page 841
JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED Image scanner on page 841
JC39-02128A Harness - Scanjoint to main Image scanner on page 841
JC39-02129A Harness - Home open sensor Image scanner on page 841
JC92-02781A PCA scanner Image scanner on page 841
JC97-04516A Scanner open sensor Image scanner on page 841
JC97-04521A Scanner - front lamp Image scanner on page 841
JC97-04522B Scanner glass Image scanner on page 841
Image scanner, lower

View the image scanner, lower exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
Image scanner, lower

Parts diagram and parts list for the lower image scanner.

Figure 2-922 Image scanner, lower
Table 2-134 Image scanner, lower
No
1 JC97-04509A Scanner - FFC CCD 1 Not applicable
2 JC97-04512A Scanner - guide harness 1 Not applicable
(JC39-02131 WLED I/F Harness, JC92-02728A

WLED I/F PBA included)
3 JC97-04507A Scanner - APS 1 Removal and replacement:

APS sensor on page 860
4 JC97-04523B Scanner assembly - CCD and lens 1 Removal and replacement:

Scanner assembly - CDD and
lens on page 857
Not shown JC81-09891A Auto adjustment chart A3 Ver. 1.0 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Scanner assembly - CDD and lens
Learn how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens.
View a video of how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04523B Scanner assembly -CDD and lens
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Scanner assembly - CDD and lens 857

Post service test
Remove the scanner glass

to remove it.
Remove the scanner assembly CDD and lens

Follow these steps to remove the scanner assembly CDD and lens.
1. Remove four screws, and then release the imaging unit cover.
Figure 2-924 Remove screws and release imaging unit cover

2. Disconnect the flat cable.
Figure 2-925 Disconnect flat cable
3. Remove two screws and release the scanner assembly CDD and lens.
CAUTION: Do not remove or adjust the other two screws shown as they require factory setting
only.
Figure 2-926 Remove screws and release scanner imaging unit
4. Place Imaging unit according to label number as -1/0/+1 then assemble plate-spring after assembly
of FFC into Imaging unit.
CAUTION: Do not remove or adjust the other two screws shown as they require factory setting
only.
Remove the scanner assembly CDD and lens 859

Figure 2-927 Place Imaging unit according to label number as -1/0/+1
Unpack the replacement assembly

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: APS sensor

Learn how to remove and replace the APS sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the APS sensor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC97-04507A APS sensor assembly
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

Removal and replacement: APS sensor 861


it.


grounding wire.
to a full 90°.



cover (callout 2).
(callout 2).
grounding wire.



to remove it.
6. Remove the APS sensor

Follow these steps to remove the APS sensor.
1. Remove the joint board cover.
Figure 2-941 Remove joint board cover

Figure 2-942 Remove screw
3. Disconnect the harness.
Figure 2-943 Disconnect harness
4. Remove two screws. Release the APS sensor.
Figure 2-944 Remove screws and release APS sensor


printer.
pads.

Auto adjustment chart A3 Ver. 1.0 JC81-09891A Image scanner, lower on page
856
Flat Cable-WLED JC39-02120A Image scanner, lower on page

856
Photo interrupter 604-001453 Image scanner, lower on page

856
Scanner - APS JC97-04507A Image scanner, lower on page

856
Scanner - FFC CCD JC97-04509A Image scanner, lower on page

856
Scanner - guide harness JC97-04512A Image scanner, lower on page

856
Scanner assembly - CCD and lens JC97-04523B Image scanner, lower on page
856

604-001453 Photo interrupter Image scanner, lower on page

856
JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED Image scanner, lower on page

856
JC81-09891A Auto adjustment chart A3 Ver. 1.0 Image scanner, lower on page
856
JC97-04507A Scanner - APS Image scanner, lower on page

856
JC97-04509A Scanner - FFC CCD Image scanner, lower on page

856
JC97-04512A Scanner - guide harness Image scanner, lower on page

856
JC97-04523B Scanner assembly - CCD and lens Image scanner, lower on page
856

Learn about the dual cassette feeder (DCF) exploded diagrams, parts lists, and repair procedures.
DCF main
View the DCF main exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
DCF main
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF main.
Figure 2-945 DCF main

Table 2-137 DCF main
No
1 JC60-00078 Machinery, fastener screw 2 Not applicable

A
2 JC90-01649A DCF, sub-takeaway (right door) 1 Removal and replacement:

right door on page 874
3 6009-001665 Hex screw 19 Not applicable
4 JC93-01135A Feed drive opt 1 Removal and replacement:

motor on page 881
5 JC93-01063C Drive pickup assembly 2 Removal and replacement:

pickup motor on page 884
6 JC90-01652A Cassette, fifth 1 Not applicable
7 JC90-01654A Cassette, fourth 1 Not applicable
8 JC90-01680A DCF second pickup 1 Removal and replacement:

pickup units on page 887
9 JC90-01679A DCF first pickup 1 Removal and replacement:

pickup units on page 887
10 6602-003185 Timing belt 1 Not applicable
14 JC90-01677A DCF, sub-auto closing 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC93-01092A Rollers - pick, feed, sep 2 Not applicable
Not shown 0604-001490 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC66-00977A Clutch one way 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC93-01435A SF left cassette rail assembly 2 Not applicable
Not shown JC93-01045A SF right cassette rail assembly 2 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF right door.
View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF right door.

Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01649A DCF right door
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test






3. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door.

1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.
Figure 2-952 Remove the lower right cover
2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the
tab (callout 1).
Figure 2-953 Slide the hinge pin
Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door 879

3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the
right to remove it (callout 2).
Figure 2-954 Remove the DCF right door
4.
rollers or pads.


Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF cassette motor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF cassette motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-01135A SF drive feed assy (Opt)
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor 881

Post service test

1. Remove the DCF rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the DCF rear cover.
■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
Figure 2-955 Remove the DCF rear cover
2. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor.
1. Disconnect two connectors, and then open one retainer.
Figure 2-956 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.
Figure 2-957 Remove the feed drive unit
3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.
3.
883
rollers or pads.

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF pickup motor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF pickup motor.
Service level:

power cable.

display is blank).
JC93-01063C Drive pickup assembly
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test


Remove the DCF rear cover 885

2. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor
Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor.
■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the DCF pickup assembly.
Figure 2-960 Remove the DCF pickup assembly
3.
rollers or pads.

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF pickup units.
View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF pickup units.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01679A First pickup assembly
JC90-01680A Second pickup assembly
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units 887
Post service test






3. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door.
1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.
Figure 2-967 Remove the lower right cover
Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door 891

2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the
tab (callout 1).
Figure 2-968 Slide the hinge pin
3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the
right to remove it (callout 2).
Figure 2-969 Remove the DCF right door
4. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cable cover.
Figure 2-970 Remove two screws and the cable cover
2. Remove five screws, and then remove two brackets.
Figure 2-971 Remove five screws and two brackets
Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units 893

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness from the cable guide
(callout 2). Remove eight screws (callout 3).
Figure 2-972 Disconnect two connectors and remove eight screws
4. Rotate both pickup units away from the feeder on the left (callout 1). Release the belt (callout 2) that
connects the two units. Slide the pickup units to the left (callout 3) to remove them.
Figure 2-973 Remove the pickup units
5.

rollers or pads.

895
Cassette, fifth JC90-01652A DCF main on page 874
Cassette, fourth JC90-01654A DCF main on page 874
Clutch one way JC66-00977A DCF main on page 874
Coupler, torque limiter JC67-00455A DCF main on page 874
DCF first pickup JC90-01679A DCF main on page 874
DCF second pickup JC90-01680A DCF main on page 874
DCF, sub-auto closing JC90-01677A DCF main on page 874
DCF, sub-takeaway (right door) JC90-01649A DCF main on page 874
Drive pickup assembly JC93-01063C DCF main on page 874
Feed drive opt JC93-01135A DCF main on page 874
Hex screw 6009-001665 DCF main on page 874
Machinery, fastener screw JC60-00078A DCF main on page 874
Photo-interrupter 0604-001490 DCF main on page 874
Rollers - pick, feed, sep JC93-01092A DCF main on page 874
SF left cassette rail assembly JC93-01435A DCF main on page 874
SF right cassette rail assembly JC93-01045A DCF main on page 874
Timing belt 6602-003185 DCF main on page 874

0604-001490 Photo-interrupter DCF main on page 874
6009-001665 Hex screw DCF main on page 874
6602-003185 Timing belt DCF main on page 874
JC60-00078A Machinery, fastener screw DCF main on page 874
JC66-00977A Clutch one way DCF main on page 874
JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter DCF main on page 874
JC90-01649A DCF, sub-takeaway (right door) DCF main on page 874
JC90-01652A Cassette, fifth DCF main on page 874
JC90-01654A Cassette, fourth DCF main on page 874
JC90-01677A DCF, sub-auto closing DCF main on page 874
JC90-01679A DCF first pickup DCF main on page 874
JC90-01680A DCF second pickup DCF main on page 874
JC93-01045A SF right cassette rail assembly DCF main on page 874
JC93-01063C Drive pickup assembly DCF main on page 874
JC93-01092A Rollers - pick, feed, sep DCF main on page 874
JC93-01135A Feed drive opt DCF main on page 874
JC93-01435A SF left cassette rail assembly DCF main on page 874
DCF frame
View the DCF frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
DCF frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF frame.

Figure 2-974 DCF frame
32 31
31
32
Table 2-142 DCF frame
No
1 JC93-01435A Frame, left cst rail assembly 2 Not applicable
2 JC93-01045A Frame, right cst rail assembly 2 Not applicable
6 JC90-01385A DCF sub-takeaway interlock 1 Not applicable
14 6109-001138 Caster 4 Not applicable

Table 2-142 DCF frame (continued)
No
15 JC61-04871A DCF guide adjust 4 Not applicable
18 V1F98-67001 DCF PCA 1 Removal and replacement:

PCA on page 899
23 JC39-02276A DCF, main harness 1 Not applicable
25 JC39-02278A DCF, sub harness 1 Not applicable
30 JC39-02268 DCF, t1mot harness 1 Not applicable

A
31 JC61-06655A Rear holder-hinge 1 Not applicable
32 JC61-06713A Front holder-hinge 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF PCA.
View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF PCA.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA 899

V1F98-67001 PCA-MX7 DCF
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test


2. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA.

■ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the DCF PCA.
Figure 2-976 Remove the DCF PCA
3.
rollers or pads.

901
Caster 6109-001138 DCF frame on page 898
DCF PCA V1F98-67001 DCF frame on page 898
DCF guide adjust JC61-04871A DCF frame on page 898
DCF sub-takeaway interlock JC90-01385A DCF frame on page 898
DCF, main harness JC39-02276A DCF frame on page 898
DCF, sub harness JC39-02278A DCF frame on page 898
DCF, t1mot harness JC39-02268A DCF frame on page 898
Frame, left cst rail assembly JC93-01435A DCF frame on page 898
Frame, right cst rail assembly JC93-01045A DCF frame on page 898

6109-001138 Caster DCF frame on page 898
JC39-02268A DCF, t1mot harness DCF frame on page 898
JC39-02276A DCF, main harness DCF frame on page 898
JC39-02278A DCF, sub harness DCF frame on page 898
JC61-04871A DCF guide adjust DCF frame on page 898
JC90-01385A DCF sub-takeaway interlock DCF frame on page 898
JC93-01045A Frame, right cst rail assembly DCF frame on page 898
JC93-01435A Frame, left cst rail assembly DCF frame on page 898
V1F98-67001 DCF PCA DCF frame on page 898
DCF rear frame

View the DCF rear frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
DCF rear frame

Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF rear frame.
Figure 2-977 DCF rear frame

Table 2-144 DCF rear frame
No
1 JC61-03002A Ground plate 2 Not applicable
6 JC93-00018A Main frame rear auto-size holder 2 Not applicable
6-2 JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor 2 Removal and replacement:

Paper size sensor on page
904
Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF paper size sensor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF paper size sensor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC92-02622A Paper size sensor
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the paper size sensor

Follow these steps to remove the paper size sensor.
■ Do the following:
● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.
● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.
2.
Remove the paper size sensor 905

rollers or pads.


Ground plate JC61-03002A DCF rear frame on page 904
Main frame rear auto-size holder JC93-00018A DCF rear frame on page 904
PCA, paper size sensor JC92-02622A DCF rear frame on page 904

JC61-03002A Ground plate DCF rear frame on page 904
JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor DCF rear frame on page 904
JC93-00018A Main frame rear auto-size holder DCF rear frame on page 904

Opt feed drive
Parts diagram and parts list for the opt feed drive.
Figure 2-979 Opt feed drive
Table 2-146 Opt feed drive
No
0 JC93-01135A Opt feed drive 1 Not applicable
2 JC31-00177A Step motor, ip 1 Not applicable
8 6009-001665 Hex screw 1 Not applicable
Opt feed drive 909

DCF second pickup
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF second pickup.
Figure 2-980 DCF second pickup
Table 2-147 DCF second pickup
No
4 6044-000125 E-ring 6 Not applicable
8 JC66-00977A Clutch one way 4 Not applicable
11 JC63-03776A Sheet sensor 2 Not applicable
13 JC93-01092A Frame, main pickup roller 3 Not applicable
16 6003-000269 Screw, tap type 4 Not applicable
20 JC61-00884A Bush-6, dl 2 Not applicable

2000-sheet HCI (department)
View the 2000-sheet HCI (department) exploded diagrams and parts lists.
2K HCI main
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI main.
Figure 2-981 2K HCI main
Table 2-148 2K HCI main
No
2 JC93-01114A Feed drive, HCI 1 Not applicable
3 JC93-01115A Pickup drive 1 Not applicable
4 JC93-01118A Lift drive, shift assembly 1 Not applicable
5 JC90-01646A HCI right door (takeaway) 1 Not applicable
6 JC90-01642A Cassette 1 Not applicable
7 JC90-01736A Assy - main pickup 1 Not applicable
8 JC93-01119A Drive takeaway roller 1 Not applicable
2000-sheet HCI (department) 911

Table 2-148 2K HCI main (continued)
No
10 JC90-01382A Sub-auto closer 1 Not applicable
2K HCI drive
View the 2K HCI drive exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
2K HCI drive
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI drive.
Figure 2-982 2K HCI drive
Table 2-149 2K HCI drive
No
1-1 JC31-00177A Motor step, 1p 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray feed motor
on page 913
1-2 6602-003670 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable
2 JC93-01115A Pickup drive 1 Not applicable

Table 2-149 2K HCI drive (continued)
No
2-1 JC93-01083A Drive motor, step 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray pickup motor
on page 917
3-1 JC31-00125A Motor shift gear 1 Not applicable
3-2 JC31-00109A HCI motor gear 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
on page 919
Not shown JC31-00125A HCI shaft motor 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray shaft motor
on page 922
Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray feed motor

Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray feed motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC31-00177A Bottom HCI tray feed motor
Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray feed motor 913

Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.
Figure 2-983 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover
2. Remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor.

1. Disconnect two motor connectors, and open the harness clamp.
Figure 2-984 Disconnect two connectors and open the clamp
2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.
Figure 2-985 Remove the feed drive unit
Remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor 915

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.
3.
rollers or pads.


Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray pickup motor

Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-01083A Bottom HCI tray pickup motor
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray pickup motor 917

Post service test


2. Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.
■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.
Figure 2-988 Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor
3.

rollers or pads.

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.
Service level:

power cable.
Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor 919

display is blank).
JC31-00109A Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test



2. Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.
■ Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and the remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.
Figure 2-990 Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
3.
rollers or pads.

Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor 921

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray shaft motor
Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC31-00125A Bottom HCI tray shaft motor
Required tools

the printer.

Post service test

2. Remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.
■ Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.
Figure 2-992 Remove the shaft motor
3.
Remove the 2K HCI rear cover 923

rollers or pads.


Drive motor, step JC93-01083A 2K HCI drive on page 912
HCI motor gear JC31-00109A 2K HCI drive on page 912
HCI shaft motor JC31-00125A 2K HCI drive on page 912
Motor shift gear JC31-00125A 2K HCI drive on page 912
Motor step, 1p JC31-00177A 2K HCI drive on page 912
Pickup drive JC93-01115A 2K HCI drive on page 912
Timing belt, gear 6602-003670 2K HCI drive on page 912

6602-003670 Timing belt, gear 2K HCI drive on page 912
JC31-00109A HCI motor gear 2K HCI drive on page 912
JC31-00125A HCI shaft motor 2K HCI drive on page 912
JC31-00125A Motor shift gear 2K HCI drive on page 912
JC31-00177A Motor step, 1p 2K HCI drive on page 912
JC93-01083A Drive motor, step 2K HCI drive on page 912
JC93-01115A Pickup drive 2K HCI drive on page 912

2K HCI cassette
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI cassette.
Figure 2-993 2K HCI cassette
Table 2-154 2K HCI cassette
No
0 JC90-01642A Cassette 1 Not applicable
2 JC61-01742A Connector holder, scf 1 Not applicable
14 JC61-00076A Spring, etc torsion doc (cc2-f) 1 Not applicable
29 JC61-07471A Cassette guide rail 1 Not applicable
2K HCI cassette 927

2K HCI frame
View the 2K HCI frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
2K HCI frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI frame.
Figure 2-994 2K HCI frame
17
18
17
18
Table 2-155 2K HCI frame
No
1 JC61-03331A Idle roller, cst 2 Not applicable
6 JC61-04871A Adjust guide, DCF 4 Not applicable
7 6109-001138 Caster 4 Not applicable
13 Y1G21-67001 PCA - Department HCI 1 Removal and replacement: 2K

HCI tray PCA on page 929
14 JC39-02285 Cable harness, sub if 1 Not applicable

A

Table 2-155 2K HCI frame (continued)
No
15 JC39-02284 Cable harness, heater 1 Not applicable

A
16 JC39-02283 Harness, main if 1 Not applicable

A
17 JC61-06655A Rear Holder Hinge 1 Not applicable
18 JC61-06713A Front Holder Hinge 1 Not applicable
19 JC39-02286 Harness, inner tray 1 Not applicable

A
20 JC39-02279A Cable harness, motor 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: 2K HCI tray PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the 2K HCI tray PCA.
View a video of how to remove and replace the 2K HCI tray PCA.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Y1G21-67001 PCA - department HCI
Removal and replacement: 2K HCI tray PCA 929

Required tools

the printer.
Post service test


2. Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray PCA.

■ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the bottom HCI tray PCA.
Figure 2-996 Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA
3.
rollers or pads.

931
Adjust guide, DCF JC61-04871A 2K HCI frame on page 928
Cable harness, heater JC39-02284A 2K HCI frame on page 928
Cable harness, motor JC39-02279A 2K HCI frame on page 928
Cable harness, sub if JC39-02285A 2K HCI frame on page 928
Caster 6109-001138 2K HCI frame on page 928
Harness, inner tray JC39-02286A 2K HCI frame on page 928
Harness, main if JC39-02283A 2K HCI frame on page 928
Idle roller, cst JC61-03331A 2K HCI frame on page 928
PCA - Department HCI Y1G21-67001 2K HCI frame on page 928

6109-001138 Caster 2K HCI frame on page 928
JC39-02279A Cable harness, motor 2K HCI frame on page 928
JC39-02283A Harness, main if 2K HCI frame on page 928
JC39-02284A Cable harness, heater 2K HCI frame on page 928
JC39-02285A Cable harness, sub if 2K HCI frame on page 928
JC39-02286A Harness, inner tray 2K HCI frame on page 928
JC61-03331A Idle roller, cst 2K HCI frame on page 928
JC61-04871A Adjust guide, DCF 2K HCI frame on page 928
Y1G21-67001 PCA - Department HCI 2K HCI frame on page 928

2K HCI main pickup
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI main pickup.
Figure 2-997 2K HCI main pickup
Table 2-157 2K HCI main pickup
No
0 JC93-01139A HCI main 1 Not applicable
5 JC93-01092A Roller, pick, feed, and separation 3 Not applicable
11 JC66-04607 Roller - feed takeaway 1 Not applicable

A
16 JC61-00884A Bush-6, D (L) 1 Not applicable
25 JC66-04670A Roller - right door feed takeaway 1 Not applicable
28 JC66-04281A Pulley belt 1 Not applicable

3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and
E87640/50/60 only)
View the 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and E87640/50/60 only) exploded diagrams and
parts lists.
3K sHCI main 1
View the 3K sHCI main 1 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
3K sHCI main 1
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI main 1.
Figure 2-998 3K sHCI main 1
17
3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and E87640/50/60 only) 935

Table 2-158 3K HCI main 1
No
1 JC63-04797B Left cover 1 Not applicable
2 JC67-00711D Screw cap 3 Not applicable
3 JC63-04798B Pickup cover 1 Not applicable
4 JC90-01660A Assembly, rear 1 Removal and replacement: Side HCI rear cover on page
cover LCT 936
5 JC66–04279A Link door 2 Not applicable
6 JC61-06568A Link holder, hinge r 1 Not applicable
7 JC66-04277A Link door, rear 2 1 Not applicable
15 JC66-04278A Link door, front 2 1 Not applicable
16 JC61-06567A Link holder, hinge f 1 Not applicable
17 JC93-01143A Latch bracket 2 Not applicable

frame*
Not shown V1G20-67001 PCA - 3K sHCI 1 Removal and replacement: Side sHCI PCA on page
939
Not shown 6001-000130 Screw, M3 1 Not applicable
Not shown 6003-001256 Screw, tap type M4 1 Not applicable
* This part is assembled with DCF or HCI
Removal and replacement: Side HCI rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI rear cover.
View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI rear cover.

power cable.

display is blank).
JC90-01660A Assy - cover, rear LCT
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test

1. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.
Remove the side HCI rear cover 937

■ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.
Figure 2-999 Remove the sHCI rear cover
2.
rollers or pads.


Removal and replacement: Side sHCI PCA
Learn how to remove and replace the side sHCI PCA.
View a video of how to remove and replace the side sHCI PCA.

power cable.
display is blank).
V1G20-67001 Side HCI PCA
Required tools

the printer.
Removal and replacement: Side sHCI PCA 939

Post service test
1. Remove the side HCI right cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI right cover.
■ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.
Figure 2-1000 Right sHCI cover
2. Remove the side HCI cable cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI cable cover.
■ Remove the side HCI cable cover.
Figure 2-1001 Remove the sHCI cable cover


4. Remove the side HCI PCA

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI PCA.
■ Disconnect all connectors. Remove three screws, and replace the sHCI PCA.
Figure 2-1003 sHCI PCA
5.
Remove the side HCI PCA 941

rollers or pads.


Assembly, rear cover LCT JC90-01660A 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
Left cover JC63-04797B 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
Link door JC66–04279A 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
Link door, front 2 JC66-04278A 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
Link door, rear 2 JC66-04277A 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
Link holder, hinge f JC61-06567A 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
Link holder, hinge r JC61-06568A 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
PCA - 3K sHCI V1G20-67001 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
Pickup cover JC63-04798B 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
Screw cap JC67-00711D 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
Screw, M3 6001-000130 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
Screw, tap type M4 6003-001256 3K HCI main 1 on page 936

6001-000130 Screw, M3 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
6003-001256 Screw, tap type M4 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
JC61-06567A Link holder, hinge f 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
JC61-06568A Link holder, hinge r 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
JC63-04797B Left cover 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
JC63-04798B Pickup cover 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
JC66-04277A Link door, rear 2 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
JC66-04278A Link door, front 2 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
JC66–04279A Link door 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
JC67-00711D Screw cap 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
JC90-01660A Assembly, rear cover LCT 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
V1G20-67001 PCA - 3K sHCI 3K HCI main 1 on page 936
3K sHCI main 3
View the 3K sHCI main 3 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
3K sHCI main 3

Table 2-161 3K sHCI main 3
No
8-1 6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable
8-3 JC66-04295 Feed pulley gear 1 Not applicable

A
8-4 JC93-01083A Drive motor, stepJC93 1 Removal and replacement:

Side HCI pickup motor on
page 945
8-5 JC31-00163A Step motor, ip 1 Removal and replacement:

Side HCI feed motor on page
949
8-6 JC66-04294 Drive gear 1 Not applicable

A
9-1 JC31-00109A Gear motor 1 Removal and replacement:

Side HCI lift-up motor on page
953
10 JC39-02287A Motor harness 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Side HCI pickup motor

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI pickup motor.
Removal and replacement: Side HCI pickup motor 945

View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI pickup motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-01083A Side HCI pickup motor
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test




Remove the side HCI right cover 947

4. Remove the side HCI pickup motor

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI pickup motor.
■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then replace the pickup motor.
Figure 2-1008 Pickup motor
5.

rollers or pads.

Removal and replacement: Side HCI feed motor

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI feed motor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI feed motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Side HCI feed motor 949

JC31-00163A Side HCI feed motor
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test





4. Remove the side HCI feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI feed motor.

1. Disconnect two connectors. Open the cable clamp. Remove three screws, and then remove the
Drive-PH
Figure 2-1012 Drive PH
2. Remove two screws, and then replace the feed motor.
Figure 2-1013 Feed motor
5.

rollers or pads.

Removal and replacement: Side HCI lift-up motor

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI lift-up motor.
View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI lift-up motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Side HCI lift-up motor 953

JC31-00109A Side HCI lift-up motor
Required tools

the printer.
Post service test





4. Remove the side HCI lift-up motor

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI lift-up motor.

■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then replace the sHCI lift-up motor.
Figure 2-1017 sHCI lift-up motor
5.
rollers or pads.


957
Drive gear JC66-04294A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
Drive motor, stepJC93 JC93-01083A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
Feed pulley gear JC66-04295A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
Gear motor JC31-00109A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
Motor harness JC39-02287A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
Step motor, ip JC31-00163A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
Timing belt, gear 6602-001730 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945

6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
JC31-00109A Gear motor 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
JC31-00163A Step motor, ip 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
JC39-02287A Motor harness 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
JC66-04294A Drive gear 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
JC66-04295A Feed pulley gear 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945
JC93-01083A Drive motor, stepJC93 3K sHCI main 3 on page 945

3K sHCI main 5
No
9 JC66-04290 Actuator SNS 1 Not applicable

A
15 JC39-02291A Connect sensor harness 1 Not applicable
16 JC39-02288 Plow harness 1 Not applicable

A

3K sHCI main 6
No
13 JC39-02288 Plow harness 1 Not applicable

A
3K sHCI main 6 961

Pickup cover unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the pickup cover unit
Figure 2-1020 Pickup cover unit
Table 2-167 Pickup cover unit
No
9 JC66-00977A Clutch, one way 2 Not applicable
10 JC61-01288A Idle holder, one way 1 Not applicable
16 JC63-04799A Pickup cover lever 1 Not applicable
17 JC61-00884A Bush-6, D (L) 2 Not applicable
25 0604–001393 Photo-interrupter 2 Not applicable

Table 2-167 Pickup cover unit (continued)
No
26 JC66-04276A Actuator, empty pickup 1 Not applicable
Pickup cover unit 963

3K sHCI frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI frame
Figure 2-1021 3K sHCI frame
Table 2-168 3K sHCI frame
No
7 V1G20-67001 PCA - 3K sHCI 1 Not applicable
11 JC93-01124A Assembly, frame latch rear sensor 1 Not applicable
14 JC93-01125A Assy - frame latch sensor front 1 Not applicable

Table 2-168 3K sHCI frame (continued)
No
15 JC93-01123A Assembly, frame interlock 1 Not applicable
3K sHCI frame 965

3 Problem solving
Learn about problem solving.
Control panel messages document (CPMD)

Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).
NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual.
Click here to access the complete CPMD for this printer.
Error codes (types and structure)

Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current
printer status or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and
have a set structure with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).
● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error.
For example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.
● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.
HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message
document (CPMD) for each printer.
The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or
resolve the error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.
The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error
codes.
Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters
Error code System Component System Error Description
10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.
11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the formatter.
13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.
15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.
17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.
20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.
21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression error

when trying to process job.
30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the unit.
31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.
32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or error.
966 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)
33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity

(SureStart), or Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
notification or error.
40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB

accessory error.
41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and
misprint or mismatch errors typically involving
(but not limited to) the fuser, the laser scanner,
or the paper path.
42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log, Shell,

System Manager, or other component.
44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.
45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the OXPd

Web Kit (communications log).
46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.
47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.
48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job

pipeline error.
49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.
50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.
51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.
52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.
54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).
55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.
56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.
57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.
58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.
59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.
60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.
61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data package.
62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.
Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.
63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical, communication,

etc.).
65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.
66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.
67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error
69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.
Error codes (types and structure) 967

Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)
70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.
76.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) Power supply fluctuations causes formatter and

DC controller communication issue and results
them not to be in synchronization.
80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.
81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.
82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.
90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB, display) or
interconnection error.
98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.
99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware install

(engine or accessory), or disk error.
How to search for printer documentation

Find printer documentation using the internal HP portals.
The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP
portals GCSN and WISE (formerly SAW). GCSN is available to HP channel partners and WISE is available
to call agents, service technicians, and other HP internal users. The level of detail available will depend
on your access credentials.
How to search WISE for printer documentation

These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users.
View a video of how to find support content in WISE.
To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, enter document ID c05048451, to
locate CPMD list.
Go to WISE and enter this document ID c05791539 for written instructions.
How to search GCSN for printer documentation

These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners. View a video of how find support content
in GCSN, or follow the steps below.
1. On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods:
● Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter, or
● On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.

Figure 3-1 GCSN home page
2. Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product model
(leave the Model field as blank or the default).
NOTE: Make sure to login to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most
comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, contact your HP
representative.
Figure 3-2 Sample product search criteria (GCSN)
3. Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to
bypass the Product Search fields next time for that particular model (optional).
How to search for printer documentation 969

Figure 3-3 Add favorites (GCSN)
4. Clear all of the high-level check boxes.
Figure 3-4 Clear search criteria (GCSN)
5. Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search.
NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which
type of manual or guide the content might be listed.
Figure 3-5 Select search criteria (GCSN)
6. Select Submit.

7. If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search
result is 100 documents).
NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model.
All other available content is filtered out.
Table 3-2 Information type selections
Technical information type Select this checkbox
Control panel message document (CPMD) CPMD-Map
List of all CPMDs per product Support Information
Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide
Service cost document Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual
Service guide or Service manual Service Guide/Manual
Self-solve or troubleshooting document Support Information
User manual or User guide User Guide
Warranty and Legal Guide Warranty Statement
Troubleshooting process
Learn about the troubleshooting process.
Determine the problem source

When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts
you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible
causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem.
The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.
● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The
flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the
malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
● Are supply items within their rated life?
● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?
● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE: The customer or service provider is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies
that are in good condition.
Power subsystem
Learn about the power subsystem.
Troubleshooting process 971

Power-on checks
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and
the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this
section to isolate and solve the problem.
If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-
panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.
Power-on troubleshooting overview

If the control panel is blank 1 minute after turning on the printer, check the following items:
During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place
your hand over the vents at the rear of the printer, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the
scanner. If the fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer. You can lean close to the printer
and hear the fan operating.
A fan begins to blow on the right door (fuser), and then the control panel goes through a series of set
up functions. The main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam
condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly
determine if the main motor is turned on.
If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.
1. Make sure that the printer is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip)
that delivers the correct voltage.
2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the LED is on.
3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.
4. Depress the button on the back of the control panel to test the control panel functionality.
5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.
6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.
Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation

Customers usually report that the control-panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to
collect as much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.
Following are some printer behaviors the customer might encounter:
● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or back light).
● The control panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.
● The control panel is blank (LEDs are on or flashing) and the back light is on (but no text visible).
Following are some possible causes of a blank control-panel display:
● No power to the printer.
● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.
● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller, or the
connectors are not fully seated on the formatter.

● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, fax PCA, network
PCA, USB device, or other component).
● The formatter is defective.
● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.
● The DC controller is defective.
Following are some questions to ask the customer:
● Was the printer newly install or has the printer been properly functioning?
– For a new install, investigate to see if there was any shipping damage to the printer.
– Did the customer notice any damage to the shipping box or any visible damage to the printer?
● What happened just prior to the control panel going blank?
– Was the printer serviced recently, a power outage occurred?
– Has a lightning storm recently occurred?
– Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?
● Make sure to get a complete description of the failure.
– Is the control-panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?
– Is the control-panel display back light on?
– Has a print job been sent to the printer? The customer might report that their print jobs seemed
to print but when they go to the printer the control-panel display is blank.
Recommended actions
If the control-panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light) check to see if the
printer is getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on.
If there are no signs of power, then perform the following:
1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.
TIP: Try using a different power cable if possible.
2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power
supply is operational).
3. Check if the yellow LED on formatter is flashing. If so, there is a communication issue between the
formatter and the control panel.
4. Turn the printer power off.
5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness (and/or flat cable) is properly connected (and
fully seated), and then turn the printer power on again.
6. Check control panel diagnostics by pressing the button on the back of the control panel to run
different diagnostic tests.
Recommended actions 973

7. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control-panel display is blank. If applicable: Check
if the contrast setting is adjusted to very low. If so, try turning the contrast knob to see if the
control-panel display becomes visible.
8. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.
NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely to a defective control panel.
9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot
and is fully seated.
NOTE: For some printers, there may be more than one memory DIMM installed. Some printers
have third-party solutions/applications or fonts that use memory.
10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive,
solid-state drive, memory DIMM(s), fax PCA, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).
● Make sure that the formatter is fully seated.
IMPORTANT: This is important because the formatter or a component on the formatter might
be defective or shorted, which causes the printer to lose power.
11. Reinstall the formatter. Make sure that it makes a good connection and is fully seated.
Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.
12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control-panel display.
13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.
CAUTION: Turn the printer power off, and then on again, after replacing a component on the
formatter.
14. If the control-panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, and the
control panel diagnostics do not function, replace the control panel. If the control panel diagnostics
are functioning, then replace the formatter.
Control panel checks

Learn about the control panel checks.
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts

Learn about the control panel diagnostic flowcharts.
Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.
● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).
● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.
● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.
● No control panel sound.
● Home button is unresponsive.
● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
Learn about the touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image).
NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.
Figure 3-6 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)
Black display White display Dim display

(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)
Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.
Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.
Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?
Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y
Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.
Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N
Replace the
control panel.
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Learn about how the touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image) 975

Figure 3-7 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone
Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?
Open the
Perform the
touch test.
Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?
Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.
Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?
Do not replace the

control panel.
No control panel sound

Learn what to do when there is no control panel sound.

Figure 3-8 No control panel sound
Control panel
has no
sound
Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save
Can sounds
be heard?
N
Y
Open the
Perform the sound test.
Can sounds
be heard?
Y
N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?
Home button is unresponsive

Learn what to do when the home button is unresponsive.
Home button is unresponsive 977

Figure 3-9 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illuminated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
turn the power off, and
then on again.
Open the
Perform the Home
button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Turn the product power off,

and then on again.
Open the
Perform the
Home button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y
Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Learn about when the hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Figure 3-10 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)
Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.
Individual component diagnostics

Learn about individual component diagnostics.
Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics

LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.
Understand lights on the formatter

Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.
Figure 3-11 LEDs
Table 3-3 LEDs
Item Description
1 Heartbeat LED
2 HP Jetdirect LEDs
Individual component diagnostics 979

HP Jetdirect LEDs
Learn about the HP Jetdirect LEDs.
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and
the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is
off, a link has failed.
For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link
settings on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.
2. Open the following menus:
● Networking
● Ethernet
● Link Speed
3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.
Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics

The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality,
paper path, noise, assembly, and timing issues.
Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or right door is open.
Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).
WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service
personnel should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power
supplies when the printer is turned on.
Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Learn how to defeat the toner cartridge door interlock.
1. Open the toner cartridge door.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches.

Figure 3-12 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock
Defeat the right door interlock

Learn how to defeat the right door interlock.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the front door logic switches.
Figure 3-13 Defeat the right door interlock
Tools for troubleshooting

Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.
Defeat the right door interlock 981

Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test)
Learn about the individual component diagnostics (special-mode test).
This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.
NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.
2. Select one of the following tests:
● Continuous Scan
● Run Fax Test
3. Select the component test options for the test.
Tools for troubleshooting

Learn about tools for troubleshooting.
Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the printer.
Step 1: Check that the printer power is on

Learn how to check that the printer power is on.
1. Make sure that the printer is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a white
light. If it is not, press the power button. If the power button does not light up, check the following
conditions.
● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the printer and the outlet.
● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.
2. If the printer motors do not rotate, make sure that the toner cartridges are installed and that the
doors are all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.
Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages

Learn how to check the control panel for error messages.
The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.
Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life.
NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual
individual life or yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other
factors. Estimated life is not an implied warranty.

Step 3: Test print functionality
Learn how to test print functionality.
1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration
Page item, and then touch the Print button to print the report.
3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel
to see if paper is jammed inside the printer.
NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this printer.
Step 4: Test copy functionality

Learn how to test copy functionality.
1. Place the configuration page into the ADF and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly
through the ADF, you might need to clean the ADF rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the
paper meets specifications for this printer.
2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.
3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small
glass strip.
Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality

Learn how to test the fax sending functionality.
1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.
2. Open the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.
3. Touch the Fax on the printer control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.
Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality

Learn how to test the fax receiving functionality.
1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.
2. Touch the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tests menu. Touch the Run Fax
Test button to test the fax functionality.
3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the printer.
4. Review and reset the printer fax settings.
Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer

Learn how to try sending a print job from a computer.
1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the printer.
2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver.
3. Uninstall and then reinstall the printer software.
Step 3: Test print functionality 983

Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
Learn how to test the plug and print USB drive printing functionality.
1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the USB port near the
control panel.
2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.
3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.
Factors that affect printer performance

Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:
● The software program that you are using and its settings
● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper)
● Printer processing and download time
● The complexity and size of graphics
● The speed of the computer you are using
● The USB or network connection
● Whether the printer is printing in color or in monochrome
● The type of USB drive, if you are using one
● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity
Print menu map

Learn how to print the menu map.
To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Reports menu.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
Print current settings pages

Learn how to print current settings pages.
Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful
in the troubleshooting process.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select the Current Settings Page option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
Print event log

Printing the event log might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. For more information, see the
Interpret control-panel messages and event log entries section in the printer troubleshooting manual.
Print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel.
● Troubleshooting
● Event Log
3. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.
Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel.
2. Open the Service menu.
3. Enter the following service access code for the printer:
● Access code: 04082517
4. Touch the Event Log item.
Clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel.
2. Open the Service menu.
3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.
4. Enter the following service access code for the printer:
● Access code: 04082517
5. Select the trash icon to clear the event log.
Pre-boot menu options

The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.
Print event log 985

CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization
for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be
completely lost. HP does not recommend this action.
TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See Remote Admin on page 995.
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
Figure 3-14 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.
Figure 3-15 Pre-boot menu
Table 3-4 Pre-boot screen buttons
Use this button to see more information about a selected item.

Table 3-4 Pre-boot screen buttons (continued)
Use this button to scroll up through menu items.
Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.
Use this button to scroll down through menu items.
Use this button to go back to the previous menu.
Not used.
Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.
3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.
4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
Figure 3-16 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
2. Use the button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.
3. Use the button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 987
4. Use the button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button.
NOTE: The printer will initialize.
NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version
of the printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support
these options.
Table 3-5 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu

and continues the normal boot process.
If a selection is not made in the initial menu within

30 seconds, the printer returns to a normal boot (the
same as selecting Continue).
If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout

does not apply.
Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is

required to open the Pre-boot menu.
Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.
If authentication is required (and the user is not

already signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The
user is required to sign in.
Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download

process. A USB Thumbdrive option will work on all
USB FutureSmart printers. USB or Network connections
are not currently supported.
USB
Thumbdrive
Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk
partitions.
CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item

removes all data.
A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
The system is not bootable after this action and

a 99.09.67 error displays on the control panel. A
firmware download must be performed to return
the system to a bootable state.

Table 3-5 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)
Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data
except the firmware repository where the master
firmware bundle is downloaded and saved).
CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item

removes all data except the firmware repository. A
delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer

configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).
This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing

the firmware image from the active directory
without having to download new firmware code
(printer remains bootable).
Change Select this item to set or change the administrator

Password password.
Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a

password from the Administrator menu. Before the
password is actually cleared, a message will be
shown asking to confirm that the password should
be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the
action.
When the confirmation prompt displays, press the

OK button to clear the password.
Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an
external device for job storage. Job storage is
normally enabled only for the Boot device. This will
be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed.
Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new
secure disk to this printer.
The secure disk already locked to this printer will

remain accessible to this printer. Use this function
to have more than one encrypted disk accessible by
the printer when using them interchangeably.
The data stored on the secure disk locked to this

printer always remains accessible to this printer.
Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure
disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer
will remain accessible to this printer and uses the
old disk's encryption password with the new disk.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer

remains accessible to this printer.
Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the
non-secure disk and clear the password associated
with the yet-to-be installed secure disk.
CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.
Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-
secure disk for this session only, and then search
for the missing secure disk in future sessions.
Boot Device Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command is a one-pass overwrite, which erases the
entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.
Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all data on the disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The
encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-
encrypted disk.
Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.
Administrator Manage Disk Internal Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal
Device device or get a status about the internal device.
Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command erases the entire disk, including firmware.
The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow the user to gain access to it from any printer.

system files are reinstalled. The HP High
Performance Secure Hard Disk is erased.

available.

External Select the External Device item to erase the

Device external device or get status about the external
device.
Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data

system files are reinstalled.
The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire

disk, including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

system files are reinstalled. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.

available.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode The network can be configured to obtain the
[DHCP] network settings from a DHCP server or as static.
NOTE: This
configuration is Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition
only active when from the DHCP server.
the Pre-boot
menu is open.
IP Mode Use this item to manually assign the network

[STATIC] addresses.
IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.
Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.
Default Use this item to manually enter the default

Gateway gateway.
Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.
Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options
that can be set for the next time the printer is
turned on and initializes to the Ready state.
Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision

item to allow the printer to initialize and show the
firmware version when the printer reaches the
Ready state.
Once the printer power is turned on the next time,

the Show Revision item is unchecked so that the
firmware revision is not shown.
Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address
and all customer settings. (This item also returns
all settings to factory defaults.)
NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.
Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed
third-party applications.
Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer
calibration for the very next power-initialization
cycle only.
Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock

the Service menu access (both in the Pre-boot
menu and the Device Maintenance menu).
Service personnel must have the administrator

remove the Lock Service setting before they can
open the Service menu.
Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/

ScanVolume during startup.
First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the

printer to initialize as if it is the first time it has
been turned on.
For example, the user is prompted to configure

first-time settings like date/time, language, and
other settings.
Select this item so that it is enabled for the next

time the printer power is turned on.
When the printer power is turned on the next time,

this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured
settings are used during configuration, and the
first-time setting prompt is not used.
Embedded Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable

Jetdirect Off the embedded HP Jetdirect.
By default this item is unchecked so that

HP Jetdirect is always enabled.
WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the

wireless accessory.

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are

useful to diagnose
hardware components
and their interface
connections. Use these
items to troubleshoot
specific hardware
components, and the
interface between
them and other
components.
Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run

item to exclude the
Memory diagnostic
when executing
multiple diagnostics.
Short Use the Short item to

select a brief memory
test.
NOTE: This test

requires about four
minutes to execute.
Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
memory test.
NOTE: This test

requires about twenty
minutes to execute.
Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run

item to exclude the
Disk diagnostic when
executing multiple
diagnostics.
Short Use the Short item to

select a brief firmware
self-test.
NOTE: This test

requires about two or
three minutes to
execute.
Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
firmware self-test.
NOTE: This test

requires about sixty
minutes to execute.
Optimized Use the Optimized

item to select a test
that checks the active
sectors on the disk.
NOTE: This test

requires about thirty
minutes to execute.
Raw Use the Raw item

to select a test that
checks every sector on
the disk.
NOTE: This test

requires about fifty
minutes to execute.
Smart Use the Smart item

to select a very brief
test that checks the
drive self-monitoring
analysis and reporting
technology (SMART)
status—the drive
detects and reports
reliability indicators
to help anticipate
disk failures (SMART
status).
CPB Use the CPB item to

verify the integrity of
the copy processor
board (CPB) and
the formatter PCA
connections.
Interconnect Use the Interconnect

item to verify the
integrity of the
interconnect PCA (ICB)
and its connections.
Run Selected Select the Run

Selected item to
execute a selected
test.
NOTE: If more than

one test is selected,
they are executed in
sequence.
Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
navigate the menu selections from a remote location.
IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.
This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the
Remote Admin function, see Remote Admin on page
995.

Stop Telnet
Refresh IP
System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting
menu is not accessible, then use the System Triage
item to copy the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive
at the next printer start up.
The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.
Change Svc Use this item to change the Service menu personal
PWD identification number (PIN).
Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number

(PIN) has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the
original PIN.
Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.
Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these

values.
Developer Tools Netexec
Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The
printer functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any
computer (with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and
interact with the Pre-boot menu.
IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.
This section describes the following Remote Admin items.
Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and
enabled, on the remote telnet client computer.
NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a
Windows® operating system.
HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are
other operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and
configuring the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that
operating system.
Telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet
client function might not be enabled by default.
Remote Admin 995

NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system.
Screens and menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.
1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.
Figure 3-17 Open the Control Panel
2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.
Figure 3-18 Turn Windows features on or off
3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the
box to select it, and then click the OK button.
TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

Figure 3-19 Enable the telnet client feature
Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the
printer. The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote
access network security programs.
If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network
(VPN) connection to the network.
Connect a remote connection

Learn how to connect a remote connection using telnet.
Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present
at the printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.
NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how
the printer is configured.
1. Turn the printer on.
2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch
the middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.
Network connection 997

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 3-20 Select the +3:Administrator item
4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 3-21 Select the +A:Remote Admin item
5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 3-22 Select the 1:Start Telnet item
6. Do one of the following
● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7..
Figure 3-23 Telnet connecting message
● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Figure 3-24 Telnet error message
a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.
b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.
○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use
DHCP instead.
○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.
c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.
7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the
information on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.
NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.
● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.
● Port: The standard telnet port (23).
● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).
Figure 3-25 Telnet server function initialized
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer

The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 999

1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the
OK button to open a Windows command window.
Figure 3-26 Open a command window
2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 3-27 Start a telnet session
3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.
NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7. in Start the
telnet server function at the printer on page 997.
TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall
or on a different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection on page
997.

Figure 3-28 Establish a telnet connection
4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7. in Start the telnet server function at the printer on page
997 at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer
terminates the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the
printer. See Start the telnet server function at the printer on page 997.
Figure 3-29 Enter the PIN
5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection
is successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options on
page 985.
NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection,
the following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.
● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 1001

Figure 3-30 Remote Admin window
Disconnect a remote connection

Learn how to disconnect a remote connection.
The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet
client computer.
NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote
telnet client computer.
1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 3-31 Access the administrator menu

2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press
the Enter key.
Figure 3-32 Access the remote admin menu
3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.
IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present
at the printer do the following:
● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item,
and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.
Figure 3-33 Terminate the telnet connection
Control panel menus

You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for
more advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or
host name in the address bar of a web browser.
Reports menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select Reports.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Control panel menus 1003

Table 3-12 Reports menu
First level Second level Values Description
Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire
Settings menu and the
View selected values for each
setting.
Current Settings Page Print Shows the current printer

settings.
View
Configuration Page Print Shows the printer settings

and installed accessories.
View
How to Connect Page Print Shows the IP address, the

host name, and the hardware
View (MAC) address for the printer
if it is connected to a network.
Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate

remaining life for the
View supplies; reports statistics
on total number of pages
and jobs processed, serial
number, page counts, and
maintenance information.
HP provides approximations
of the remaining life for
the supplies as a customer
convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels
might be different from the
approximations provided.
Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper

sizes that have passed
View through the printer; lists
whether they were simplex,
duplex, monochrome, or color;
and reports the page count.
File Directory Page Print Shows the file name and

folder name for files that are
View stored in the printer memory.
Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web

Services for the printer.
View
HP Flex Build Configuration Print Shows installed Flex

Page Build components and
View replacement history.
NOTE: 877/826/786/731
printers only.
Event Log Print Displays or prints event logs

listing event code, date/time,
View cycles and repetitions on the
printer.
Paper Path Page Print Shows paper path usage on

the printer.
View

Table 3-12 Reports menu (continued)
Fax Reports (MFP fax models Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes
only) that have been sent from or
View received by this printer.
Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes

that have been used for
View outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
were billed to each code.
Blocked Fax List Print Provides a list of phone

numbers that are blocked
View from sending faxes to this
printer.
Fax Call Report Print Provides a detailed report of

the last fax operation, either
View sent or received.
Other Pages PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.
PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.
Secure Drum Data Erase Print Prints the secure drum data
erase pattern to overwrite
any residual image data that
might be left on the drum
from the previous print job.
Settings menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
Table 3-13 Settings menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
General Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and
YYYY/MMM/DD to configure date/
time settings.
Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format

that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.
Date/Time Date Select the time Select the time

zone from a list. zone, date, and
time that the
printer uses.
Time Select the date

from a pop-up
calendar.
Settings menu 1005

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)
Time Zone Select the time

from a pop-up
keypad.
Energy Sleep Schedule A list of + (Add) Use to configure

Settings scheduled the printer
events Edit to automatically
displays. wake up or go to
Delete sleep at specific
times on specific
days. Using this
feature saves
energy.
NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.
New event Event Type Select whether to

add or edit a Wake
event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time
and the days for
the wake or sleep
event.
Time Set the wake or

sleep event time
parameters.
Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or

week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.
Sleep Settings Sleep After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number

Inactivity minutes of minutes after
which the printer
Shut Down Default = 0 enters Sleep or
minutes Auto Off mode.
Touch the existing
number to open
the virtual keypad,
and then increase
or decrease
the number of
minutes.
Display Display Brightness Manual The Manual Use to specify the

Settings setting uses a intensity of the
slider to manually LCD control panel
control the display display.
brightness.
System Sound On* Use to specify

whether you hear
Off a sound when you
touch the screen
or press buttons
on the control
panel.

Language Settings Language Select from a Use to select a

list of languages different language
that the printer for control panel
supports. messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.
Keyboard Each language has Select the default

Layout a default keyboard keyboard layout
layout. To change that matches the
Flow models it, select from a list language you want
only of layouts. to use.
Information Show connection Use this menu

Screen information* item to display or
hide connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.
DisplayDate and Yes* Select whether to

Time display or hide the
No date and time on
the control panel
Home screen.
Job Status Fewer* Use this feature

Notifications to control how
More many job status
notifications
appear while a job
is proceeding
● If the setting
is Fewer,
there will only
be a
notification to
indicate the
job has been
added to the
job queue
(except Fa,
which always
indicates
success or
failure).
● If the setting
is More, there
will be status
notifications
while the job
is proceeding
including a
completion
notification.
Settings menu 1007

Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 between any
seconds activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the control
panel display
returns to the
Home menu, and
any user signed in
to the printer is
signed out.
Clearable On Use this feature

Warnings to set the period
Job* that a clearable
warning displays
on the control
panel. If the
On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job
that generated
the warning and
disappear from
the display when
the next job starts.
Continuable Auto-continue (10 Use this option

Events seconds)* to configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to when the printer
continue encounters certain
errors. If the
Auto-continue (10
seconds) option
is selected, the
job will continue
after 10 seconds.
If the Touch OK
to continue option
is selected, the
job will stop and
require the user
to touch the
OK button before
continuing.

Enable Enabled* Use this feature

Device USB to enable or
Disabled disable the USB
port, which allows
connecting to a
computer by using
a USB device.
Jam Auto* This printer

Recovery provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:
Auto: The printer

attempts to
reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.
Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because no
memory is used
to store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.
NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs
out of paper and
the job is being
printed on both
sides, some pages
can be lost.
On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated to
store the last few
pages printed. This
might cause a
decrease in overall
performance.
Auto Enabled The printer

Recovery attempts to
Disabled* reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.
Settings menu 1009

Enable Disabled Use the Enable

AutoSend AutoSend menu
Enabled* to enable or
disable the
AutoSned feature.
The AutoSend
feature enables
your product
to periodically
send product
configuration
information
including serial
number, event
logs, page usage
counts, and
supplies status
information to HP
web addresses
(URLs), or
email addresses.
Information sent
to HP is used to
improve products
and services, and
to monitor the
product if you
have a relationship
with HP that
provides you
serives such as
proactive cartidge
replacement,
pay-per-page
contracts, support
agreements, or
usage tracking.
Hold Off Print Enabled* Enable this feature

Job if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating
a copy job from
the control panel.
Held print jobs
start printing after
the copy job is
finished, provided
that no other copy
job is in the print
queue.
Copy/Print Copy Image Preview Display a preview

Settings of the image
before printing it.
Enable Print Enabled Enables the printer

from USB to open a file from
Drive Disabled* a USB drive.

Manage Job Sort Order Job Name* This option

Stored Jobs allows you list
Date the jobs either
alphabetically or
chronologically.
Retain Temporary Do not retain* Sets which

Jobs After Reboot temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.
Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored
in the printer
memory.
The Temporary
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.
Temporary Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.
4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
temporary jobs
1 week that can be stored
on the printer. The
4 weeks maximum allowed
value is 300.
Standard Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.
4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
standard jobs that
1 week can be stored on
the printer. The
4 weeks maximum allowed
value is 300.
Settings menu 1011

Default Print Number of Copies Range: Sets the default

Options 1-32000 number of copies
for a copy
Default = 1 job. This default
applies when the
Copy function or
the Quick Copy
function is initiated
from the printer
Home screen.
Paper Selection Select from a Configures the

list of sizes default paper size
that the used for print jobs.
printer
supports.
Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3-8.5 Configures the

Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 8.5 the user selects
inches Custom as the
paper size for a
print job.
Y Dimension Range: 5-14

inches
Default = 14
inches
Use Inches Enabled*
Disabled
Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

whether the
2-sided original document
is printed on one
or both sides,
and whether the
copies should be
printed on one or
both sides. For
example, select
the 1-sided original,
2-sided output
option when the
original is printed
on one side, but
you want to make
two-sided copies.
Fit to Page (PDF) On Use this feature to

reduce or enlarge
Off* the image/content
of each page to
fit the currently
selected paper
size.

Fit to Page (TIFF, On* Use this feature to

BMP, JPG, PNG) reduce or enlarge
Off the image/content
of each page to
fit the currently
selected paper
size.
Quality and Speed Quick View
Normal*
Fine Lines
Settings menu 1013

Edge Control Automatic* The Edge Control

setting determines
Off how edges are
rendered. Edge
Light Control has
two components:
Normal adaptive
halftoning and
Maximum trapping. Adaptive
halftoning
increases edge
sharpness.
Trapping reduces
the effect
of color-plane
misregistration by
overlapping the
edges of adjacent
objects slightly..
● Automatic:
The printer
uses the
default Edge
Control
setting.
● Off: Turns off

both trapping
and adaptive
halftoning.
● Light: Sets
trapping at a
minimal level,
and adaptive
halftoning is
on.
● Normal:
Trapping is at
a medium
level and
adaptive
halftoning is
on.
● Maximum:
Trapping is at
the highest
level, and
adaptive
halftoning is
on.

Halftone Automatic* Use this feature to

control the default
Smooth halftone screen
that the printer
Detail uses for print jobs.
Select from the

following options:
● Automatic:
The halftone
screen
frequency is
picked
automatically
by the printer
to provide the
best print
quality for a
range of
content.
● Smooth: Low
frequency
halftone
screen
optimized for
printing
smooth
gradients and
vector
graphics.
● Detail: High
frequency
halftone
screen
optimized for
printing
detailed
content, such
as
photographs.
Settings menu 1015

Neutral Grays Automatic* Neutral Grays

determine the
Black Only method for
creating gray
CMYK Gray colors in text,
graphics, and
photographs.
● Automatic:
The printer
combines
colors for
each
document
element to
provide high-
quality output
for most
color printing
needs.
● Black Only:
Generates
neutral colors
(black and
shades of
gray) by using
only the black
color. This
guarantees
neutral colors
without a
color cast
(tint of a
particular
color).
● CMYK Gray:
Generates
neutral colors
(black and
shades of
gray) by
combining
the printer
colors. This
method
produces
smoother
gradients and
transitions to
other colors,
and it
produces the
darkest black.

Envelope Off* Use this feature

Rotate to enable rotation
90 Degrees when printing on
envelopes.
180 degrees
Envelopes are
usually loaded
into the printer
as short-edge
feed. However,
if the Envelope
Rotate function is
enabled, you can
load envelopes as
long-edge feed.
The printer rotates
the image to be
printed so that it
appears correctly
on the envelopes.
● Off (default):
Load
envelopes in
short-edge
feed
direciton.
● 90 degrees:
Load
envelopes in
long-edge
feed
direction.
● 180 degrees:
Load
envelopes in
short-edge
feed direction
with the flap
on the bottom
side.
PCL and Suppress Blank Off* When set to On,

PostScript Pages any blank pages
Settings On will not be printed.
Courier Font Regular* Select which

version of the
Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be
used if a heavier
Courier font is
needed.
Settings menu 1017

Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature

to select whether
Disabled* a PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.
Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

PDF error page is
Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.
Personality Auto* Configures the

default print
PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific
printer language,
the printer does
not automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.
PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font

source for the
Disk resident user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.
Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the

font number for
Default = 0 the user-soft
default font using
the source that
is specified in
the Font Source
menu. The printer
assigns a number
to each font and
lists it on the PCL
font list. The font
number displays in
the Font # column
of the printout.

Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source

option and the
Default = 10 Font Number
setting indicate a
contour font, then
use this feature
to select a default
pitch (for a fixed-
spaced font).
PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL

print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is
a set of printer
commands that
HP developed to
provide access to
printer features.
Use the Form

Length feature
to select the
user-soft default
vertical form
length.
Orientation Portrait* Select the

orientation that is
Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select
the Portrait option
if the short edge is
at the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.
Symbol Set Select from a list Select any one of

of symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set
is a unique
grouping of all the
characters in a
font. The factory
default value
for this option
is PC-8. Either
PC-8 or PC-850
are recommended
for line-draw
characters.
Settings menu 1019

Append CR No* Configure whether

to LF a carriage return
Yes (CR) is appended
to each line feed
(LF) encountered
in backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no
job control). Select
Yes to append the
carriage return.
The default setting
is No. Some
environments,
such as UNIX,
indicate a new line
by using only the
line-feed control
code. This option
allows the user
to append the
required carriage
return to each line
feed.
Media Standard* Use to select

Source and maintain input
Mapping Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:
Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on newer
HP LaserJet
models.
Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on
HP LaserJet 4 and
older models.

Print Quality Adjust paper types Select from a list If print quality
of paper types problems occur,
use this menu to
Reset Paper Types adjust the Print
Mode for the
paper type in use.
If a user-defined
type (enabled in
the Embedded
Web Server) has
preprinted content
that makes the
sides of the paper
different, set the
paper type as
Marked Paper.
Customize Colors RGB: Office (sRGB)

NOTE: Color
CMYK: SWOP printers only.
Manage Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Trays Tray printer handles
First jobs that have
specified a
specific input tray.
Two options are
available:
Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that
a specific tray
should be used,
even if that tray is
empty.
First: The printer

pulls from another
tray if the
specified tray
is empty, even
though the
user specifically
indicated a tray for
the job.
Settings menu 1021

Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether

Prompt a prompt should
Unless loaded appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified
tray and the
printer pulls from
the multipurpose
tray instead.
Two options are
available:
Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.
Unless loaded: A
message displays
only if the
multipurpose tray
is empty.
Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a
tray is closed.
Two options are
available:
Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.
Do not display:
Prevents the
tray configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.

Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on

or off the control
Do not allow panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty.
Two options are
available:
Enabled: When
this option is
selected, the user
is prompted either
to add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray.
Disabled: When
this option is
selected, the
user is not
given the option
of selecting a
different tray. The
printer prompts
the user to add
paper to the tray
that was initially
selected.
Alternative Off* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
On preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing
to one side of
the sheet or to
both sides of the
sheet. When this
option is selected,
load the paper
as you would for
printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with
the printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the
speed required for
printing on both
sides.
Settings menu 1023

Duplex Blank Automatic* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Always two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:
Auto: Enables
Smart Duplexing,
which instructs
the printer not
to process blank
pages.
Yes: Disables
Smart Duplexing
and forces the
duplexer to flip the
sheet of paper
even if it is
printed on only one
side. This might
be preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.
Image Rotation Left to right* The Image

Rotation setting
Right to left allows alternatives
affecting how
Alternate preprinted paper
is loaded into the
tray
NOTE: For
stapled print or
copy jobs, make
sure the Staple/
Collate setting
matches the
Image Rotation
setting as to which
side of paper (left
or right) you want
stapled. If these
setting do not
match each other,
you will need to
change the loading
orientation of the
paper so that the
job is stapled in the
correct spot.

Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-size

paper when an A4
No job is sent but
no A4-size paper
is loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job
is sent but no
letter-size paper
is loaded). This
option will also
override A3 with
ledger-size paper
and ledger with
A3-size paper.
Unsupported Size Use default size Use this feature

Behavior automatically* to print documents
that are on a
Prompt for user paper size that the
response product does not
support
● Select Use
default size
automatically
to use the
paper size
selected in
Default Print
Options.
● Select
Prompt for
user
response to
be asked to
use the size
selected in
Default Print
Options or to
cancel the
job.
Settings menu 1025

Rotate Offset Automatic Use this feature

to separate each
NOTE: When set Off* copy by rotating
to Automatic, its position in
rotation does not the output bin.
occur if: Two options are
available:
● The tray is
specified in Off: Jobs are
the job and printed normally
the User with separating
Selected Tray each copy.
setting is set
to Exclusively. Automatic: Copies
are rotated
● The specified automatically.
bin in the job
does not
support both
orientations.
● The job is
uncollated.
● The job is
collated, but
only has one
sheet per
copy.
● The job has

mixed paper
size or type.
● The user
selects a
different
paper after
the job has
started.
● A job setting
works only
with a
specific
orientation.
● The Job
Offset setting
is available
and set to On.
Tray Priority Tray 4 You can set the

tray priority. If
Tray 3 first setting is
Tray 1, the printer
Tray 2 automatically
prints from Tray 1
Tray 1 after the current
tray runs out of
paper.

Tray Protection NOTE: You can When this option

select all but one is chosen, the
of the trays. At selected tray will
least one tray be protected. This
must be prevents paper
unselected at all from being fed if
times Use Another Tray
is enabled. If you
Tray 4 select Tray 1, for
example, then Tray
Tray 3 1 is excluded when
using another tray.
Tray 2
Tray 1
Paper Out Action Auto Continue Specify the action

Time-Out the printer will take
when the paper
Auto Continue configured for the
Action print job does not
match the paper
loaded in the input
tray
Scan/Digital Scan+ Image Make optional* Use this menu to

Send Settings Preview configure settings
Require preview that affect scan
apps.
Disable preview
E-mail E-mail Setup Use to configure

Settings settings that
NOTE: Email apply to sending
Settings only documents
through email or
saving documents
to a folder on the
network or on a
USB multi-drive.
The E-mail
Setup Wizard
feature configures
the printer to
send scanned
images as email
attachments. To
open the printer
HP Embedded
Web Server and
set up the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.
Settings menu 1027

Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.
Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.
Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Network Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Folder job options for
Settings Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.
Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.
Make optional: The

depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.
Settings menu 1029

SharePoint Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Settings job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.
Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.
Make optional: The

depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Scan to USB Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Drive job options for
Settings Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.
Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.
Make optional: The

depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.
Settings menu 1031

Digital Allow Use of a DSS Disabled Configure how

Sending Server the printer
Software Enabled* interacts with the
Setup Allow Transfer to HP Digital Sending
New DSS server Software (DSS)
server. HP DSS
handles digital
sending tasks,
such as faxing,
emailing, and
sending scanned
documents to a
network folder
or USB storage
device.
Use the Allow Use

of a DSS Server
and Allow Transfer
to New DSS
server options
to configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.
Fax Internal Fax Line 1

Modem
Setup Line 2
Fax Send Image Preview

Settings
Fax Dialing Line Monitor Off These settings

Settings Volume control how the
Low* fax modem dials
the outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.
Dialing Mode Tone*
Pulse
Redial 1-5 Minutes

Interval
Default = 5
minutes
Fax Send Fast*

Speed
Medium
Slow
Dialing Prefix
Detect Dial
Tone
Redial on Range: 0-9

Error
Default = 2

Redial on No Range: 0-2

Answer
Default = 0
Redial on Range: 0-9

Busy
Default = 3
General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature

Settings Confirmation is enabled, you
Disabled* must enter the fax
number twice.
Fax Line Automatic*

Selection
Line 1
Line 2
PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users

who have the
Disabled correct driver
installed to send
faxes through the
printer from their
computers.
Error Line 1* Enabled* When error-

Correction correction mode
Mode Line 2* Disabled is enabled
and an error
occurs during fax
transmission, the
printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.
Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend

or overlay the fax
Overlay header page.
Settings menu 1033

Billing Code Enable Billing Off* When billing codes

Settings Codes are enabled, a
On prompt displays
that asks the
user to enter the
billing code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.
You can also

use the billing
codes report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of the
billing codes that
have been used
for faxes that have
been sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.
Default Specify a default

Billing Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in
the Billing Code
field when the
user sends an
outgoing fax. If this
field is blank, no
default billing code
is provided for the
user.
Minimum Range: 1-16 Specify the

Length required length of
Default = 1 the billing code.
Billing codes can
be between 1 and
16 characters long.
Allow users Off

to edit billing
codes On*
Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ring Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.
High
Rings To Range: 1-6

Answer
Default = 1

Fax Receive Fast*

Speed
Medium
Slow
Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have

Schedule concerns about
Always print faxes* the security of
private faxes, use
Use Fax Printing this feature to
Schedule store faxes rather
than having them
automatically
print. Open the Fax
Printing Schedule
sub-menu, and
then you can
choose to always
store faxes, always
print them, or you
can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.
Schedule + (Add) Print incoming If you are using

faxes a fax printing
Touch this to Edit schedule, use this
set up a fax Store incoming menu to configure
printing Delete (trash faxes when to print
schedule if can) faxes.
you selected Time
the Use Fax
Printing Event Days
Schedule
option.
Settings menu 1035

Blocked Fax Fax Number The blocked fax

Numbers to Block list can contain
up to 30 numbers.
When the printer
receives a call
from one of
the blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax.
It also logs
the blocked fax
in the activity
log along with
job-accounting
information.
Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number
to Block field, and
then touch the
arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.
To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button
to delete it from
the blocked fax list.
To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.
You also can use

the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.

Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure

Options to receive
Notify when job notification about
completes the status of a
sent document.
Notify only if job
fails Do not notify:
Turns off this
feature.
Notify when
job completes:
Select to receive
notification for this
job only.
Notify only
if job fails:
Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.
Print E-mail: Select

to receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.
Include NOTE: When

Thumbnail sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail image
of the first page of
the fax in your
notification.
Notification Touch this text

E-mail field, provide the
address email address to
which you want
notifications sent,
and then touch the
OK button.
Stamp On Use this option to

Received add the date, time,
Faxes Off* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.
Settings menu 1037

Fit to Page On* Use to shrink faxes

that are larger
Off than Letter-size or
A4-size so that
they can fit onto
a Letter-size or
A4-size page. If
this feature set
to Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter
or A4 will flow
across multiple
pages.
Paper Tray Automatic*
Select from a list

of the trays.
Out Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
Page flips up select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.
Fax Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding Forwarding received faxes
Enabled to another fax
machine.
Type of Fax All faxes Use to select the

Job to type of fax jobs
Forward Sent faxes that you want
forwarded.
Received faxes*
Fax IP Fax
Forwarding
Method Internal Modem*
Fax Provide the

Forwarding forwarding phone
Number number, and then
touch the OK
button.
Clear Fax Clears all events

Activity Log from the fax
activity log.

Manage Low Warning Black 0 %* Set the estimated

Supplies Thresholds Cartridge percentage at
0 %* which the printer
Cyan notifies you when
Cartridge 0 %* a toner cartridge is
very low.
Magenta 0 %*
Cartridge
10 %*
Yellow
Cartridge
Document
feeder kit
Low Warning On Displays a

Threshold message on the
Message Off control panel when
a cartridge is very
low.
Very Low Black Cartridge Stop

Behavior
Color Cartridges Continue
Document Feeder Prompt to continue

Kit
Staples Stop
Prompt to continue
Delay Very Stop Yellow Cartridge 0 After a supply

Low Message pages* reaches the very
Continue low state, the
Magenta warning message
Cartridge 0 pages* can be delayed by
a specified page
Cyan Cartridge 0 count.
pages*
Black Cartridge 0
pages*
Restrict Enable Use this feature

Color Use to enable, restrict,
Disable Color or disable color
printing or copying.
Color if allowed*
Settings menu 1039

Color/Black Auto Instructs the

Mix printer when
Mostly Color to switch
Pages between color
and monochrome
Mostly Black printing modes for
Pages the best overall
performance.
Auto: Uses the

mode that is
appropriate for
the first page
of the job. If
necessary, the
printer switches
modes during the
middle of a job and
then stays in that
mode until the job
is finished.
Mostly Color
Pages: The printer
uses color mode
for all jobs, even if
the job contains no
color pages.
Mostly Black
Pages: The printer
uses monochrome
mode until it
detects a color
page. The printer
switches back
to monochrome
mode when
it detects
a sequence
of several
monochrome
pages.

Store Usage On supplies The Store Usage

Data Data provides
Not on supplies a way to
suppress the toner
cartridges from
storing most of
the information
gathered
exclusively for
the purpose of
understanding the
usage of the
printer. Select
the On supplies
setting to store
the data on the
toner cartridge
memory chip.
Select the Not
on supplies setting
to suppress the
information from
being stored on
the memory chip.
Supply Off* Select to

Protection permanently
Protect Supplies protect cartridges
so that they can
be used only in this
product or fleet of
products.
Cartridge Off* Set Authorized

Policy HP to allow
Authorized HP only genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this
product.
Reset Document Feeder After replacing a

Supplies Kit supply kit, select it
from the list and
touch "Reset."
Manage Job Offset On

Stapler/
Stacker Off
Developer Use this menu

Options to configure
developer settings
for the product.
Networking Ethernet INFORMATION PRINT YES Yes: Prints a page

SECURITY that contains the
REPORT NO* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.
No: A security
settings page is
not printed.
Settings menu 1041

TCP/IP HOST NAME Use the arrow An alphanumeric

buttons to edit the string, up to
host name. 32 characters,
used to identify
NPIXXXXXX* the printer. This
name is listed on
the HP Jetdirect
configuration
page. The default
host name is
NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the
last six digits of
the LAN hardware
(MAC) address.
IPV4 CONFIG BOOTP Specifies the

SETTINGS METHOD method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
AUTO IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
MANUAL
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.
DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server.
If selected and
a DHCP lease
exists, the DHCP
Release menu and
the DHCP Renew
menu are available
to set DHCP lease
options.
Auto IP: Use

for automatic
link-local IPv4
addressing. An
address in the
form 169.254.x.x
is assigned
automatically.
If you set this

option to the
Manual setting,
use the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.
DHCP YES
RELEASE
NO*

DHCP YES
RENEW
NO*
PRIMARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.
Secondary Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.
IPV6 ENABLE OFF Use this item to

SETTINGS enable or disable
ON* IPv6 operation on
the print server.
Off: IPv6 is
disabled.
On: IPv6 is
enabled.
ADDRESS MANUAL Use this item

SETTINGS to enable
and manually
ENABLE configure a TCP/
IPv6 address.
ADDRESS
Settings menu 1043

DHCPV6 ROUTER Router Specified:

POLICY SPECIFIED The stateful
auto-configuration
ROUTER method to be used
UNAVAILABLE* by the print server
is determined by
ALWAYS a router. The
router specifies
whether the print
server obtains
its address,
its configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.
Router
Unavailable: If
a router is
not available,
the print server
should attempt to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.
Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.
PRIMARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DEFAULT = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.
SECONDARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DEFAULT = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

PROXY Specifies the proxy

SERVER server to be
used by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.
To specify a
proxy server, enter
its IPv4 address
or fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.
For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.
PROXY PORT DEFAULT = 00080 Enter the port

number used by
the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.
IDLE DEFAULT = 0270 The time period,

TIMEOUT in seconds, after
which an idle
TCP print data
connection is
closed (default
is 270 seconds,
0 disables the
timeout).
SECURITY SECURE WEB HTTPS REQUIRED*
HTTPS OPTIONAL
IPSEC KEEP
DISABLE*
FIREWALL KEEP
DISABLE*
Settings menu 1045

802.1X RESET
KEEP*
ANNOUNCE ENABLE*
MENT AGENT
DISABLE
RESET YES
SECURITY
NO*
FIPS KEEP
RESET & REBOOT

DEVICE
LINK SPEED AUTO*
10T HALF
10T FULL
10T AUTO
100TX HALF
100TX FULL
100TX AUTO
1000T FULL
I/O Timeout 15* seconds

Range: 5 to 300
Copy menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Copy menu.
Table 3-14 Copy menu
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Sides Original Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether

the original document
2-sided is printed on one or
both sides.
Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate whether

the copies should be
2-sided printed on one or both
sides.

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)
Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in
black and white. For
mixed documents, the
printer will determine
whether to print in
color or black and
white.
Color: Prints
documents in color.
Black: Prints
documents in black
and white or grayscale.
Quick Sets and Load

Defaults
Save
Options Sides Original Sides 1-sided
2-sided
Output Sides 1-sided
2-sided
Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in
black and white. For
mixed documents, the
printer will determine
whether to print in
color or black and
white.
Color: Prints
documents in color.
Black: Prints
documents in black
and white or grayscale.
Copy menu 1047

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document
Secure ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of
the page.
● Secure:
Background text
and pattern that
is barely visible on
the first copy of a
document.
Stamps Top Left Select up to six

preset positions for a
Top Center stamp and configure
the content that will
Top Right be printed there.
Some positions might
Bottom Left require selecting the
stamp from a list of
Bottom Center predefined options.
Bottom Right

Image Overlay Add New Image Use this feature to add

an image to each page
None* of a copy job.
After scanning and

saving the desired
image from the control
panel, this image will
be placed behind the
content on each page
of the copy job.
NOTE: To use this

feature, the images
must be scanned from
the scanner glass.
Follow these steps to

copy using an overlay
image.
1. Touch Image
Overlay, touch
Add New Image,
and then follow
the on-screen
instructions to
scan the desired
image from the
scanner glass.
TIP: For best

results, use the
same paper size
and the same
orientation for the
saved image and
the copy job.
2. Select the saved

image that you
want to add to
each page of the
copy job.
3. Start the copy

job, or select the
Preview option
to preview the
output.
Staple None* Sets the position of the

staple on the page.
Top left angled
Two left
Two to
Top right angled
Two right
Top left or right
Copy menu 1049

Hole Punch None*
Three left
Two left
Three top
Two top
Three right
Two right
Two bottom
Four left
Four right
Four left or top
C-fold Max sheets folded Controls the C-fold

together action of the booklet
maker.
Inward fold; opens left
or up
Inward fold; opens right

or down
Outward fold; opens

left or up
Outward fold; opens

right or down
Scan mode Standard Document Book Mode allows the

user to scan pages
Book Mode from a book.
2–sided ID 2–sided ID allows the

user to scan both sides
of an identification
card onto one sheet.

Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Use to scale the

size of the document
Manual up or down. Select
one of the predefined
● 25% percentages, or select
the Scaling field and
● 50% type a percentage
between 25 and
● 63% (Letter to 400. The Auto option
Statement) automatically scales
the image to fit the
● 64% (11x17 to paper size in the tray.
Letter)
NOTE: To reduce the
● 77% (11x17 to image, select a scaling
Legal) percentage that is less
than 100. To enlarge the
● 78% (Legal to image, select a scaling
Letter) percentage that is
greater than 100.
● 85% (Letter to
Exec)
● 100% (Letter to
Legal)
● 105% (Exec to
Letter)
● 122% (Legal to
11x17)
● 131% (Letter to
11x17)
● 131% (Statement
to Letter)
● 150%
● 200%
● 400%
● Custom1
● Custom2
Image Shift Off* Use this feature to

shift the content of
Automatically center the page. This is useful
for moving the image
Manual away from punched
holes, staples, folds, or
binding edges.
Original Size Select from a list of Describes the page

sizes that the printer size of the original
supports. document.
Copy menu 1051

Paper Selection Paper Size For the best color and

image quality, select
Paper Type the appropriate paper
type from the control
Paper Tray panel menu or from the
print driver.
Booklet Booklet Format (Checkbox) Use to copy two or

more pages onto one
sheet of paper so you
can fold the sheets
in the center to form
a booklet. The printer
arranges the pages
in the correct order.
For example, if the
original document has
eight pages, the printer
prints pages 1 and 8 on
the same sheet.
Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In
the Orientation area,
select whether the
original document has
a portrait or landscape
orientation.
Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages

onto one sheet of
Two (2) paper.
Four (4) NOTE: Before using

this screen, use the
Content Orientation
screen to describe the
original document
orientation.
Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing the
sharpness could make
text appear crisper,
but decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
copy.
Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount
of white and black in
the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.
Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.
Automatic Tone
Auto Paper Color

Removal
Optimize Text/Picture Text Use this setting to

optimize the output for
Mixed* a particular type of
content.
Printed picture
Use Text for documents
Photograph that contain mostly
text. This option is
also best suited for
scanning documents
with highlighter marks.
Use Mixed for

documents that
contain a mix of text
and graphics.
Use Printed picture

for line drawings
and preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books. If you
see bands of irregular
intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed
picture to improve the
quality.
Use Photograph for

photographic prints.
Copy menu 1053

Erase Edges Front Side Use this menu item

to remove blemishes,
● Top edge such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
● Bottom edge cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
● Left edge image. In each of
the text boxes enter
● Right edge the measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
Back Side for how much of the top
edge, bottom edge, left
● Top edge edge, and right edge to
clean.
● Bottom edge
● Left edge
● Right edge
Collate Collate on (Sets in If you are making more

page order)* than one copy, select
the Collate on (Sets
Collate off (Pages in page order) option
grouped) to assemble the pages
in the correct order in
each set of copies.
Select the Collate off

(Pages grouped) option
to group the same
pages together. For
example, if you are
making five copies of
an original document
that has two pages,
all five first pages
would be grouped
together and all five
second pages would
be grouped together.
Blank Page Off* When enabled, blank

Suppression pages found in the
Suppress Blank Pages original document are
not included in the
output document.
Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning
Automatically to automatically
Straighten on straighten the scanned
image when pages
are skewed during
scanning.

Output Bin Automatically select
Output bin 1
Output bin 2
Alternate bin
Lower booklet bin
Standard bin
Upper bin
Middle bin
Scan menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Scan menu.
Table 3-15 Scan menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Scan to Email File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
● PDF* file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
● PDF/A sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
● JPEG
● TIFF
● MTIFF
● XPS
Resolution
● 600 dpi
● 400 dpi
● 200 dpi*
● 150 dpi
● 75 dpi
Quality and File Size
● Very Low (smaller file)
● Low
● Medium*
● High
● Very High (larger file)
Scan menu 1055

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)
Original 1-sided* Use this feature to describe

Sides the layout for each side of the
Pages Flip Up Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
page.
Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.
Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.
Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.
Color
Black/Gray
Black
Watermark None* Use this feature to add a

watermark to the document
Text
Text: Text is placed at the
center of the page.
Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.
Bottom Center
Bottom Right

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.
Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.
Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.
Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.
Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.
Original Size Select from a list of sizes that Describes the page size of
the printer supports. the original document.
Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.
Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.
Scan menu 1057

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.
Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic Tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.
Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.
Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.
Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.
Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.
The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.
Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed Picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.
Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.
Use Printed Picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.
Use Photograph for

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side
● Top Edge
● Bottom Edge
● Left Edge
● Right Edge
Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Content option to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.
NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.
Scan menu 1059

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.
Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.
Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum Pages Per File output into multiple files.
Blank Page Separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Barcode Page Separator Maximum Pages Per File field.
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z
bundles only) When a file type that does
not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.
When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum six of
the email also interacts with
this feature. In this case, the
more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.
Notification Do Not Notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.
Notify Only If Job Fails ● SelectDo Not Notify to

turn off this feature
● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.
● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
the job is not sent
successfully
Signing and Signing A digitally signed email

Encryption ensures the recipient that you
Encrypt sent this email. An encrypted
message can be opened only
by the recipient.

Scan to Folder Paths

Network
Folder
File Name
Quick Sets
and Defaults
Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution file format for the scanned
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
High Compression (smaller
file)
PDF Encryption
Original 1-sided* Use this feature to describe

Pages Flip Up Use 1-sided for originals that

page.

the page.

such as calendars.
Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.
Color: Scans documents in

color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.
Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.
Scan menu 1061

Scan Mode Standard document* Use this feature to provide

2-sided ID output
● Prompt for additional Use Standard document to

pages scan regular documents
using the default scan
settings.
Use Prompt for additional

pages to create a single job

of paper.

paper.
Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.
Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to work

Landscape the way the content of
placed on the page. Portrait
means the long edge of
the page is along the top.
In the Orientation area,
select whether the original
document has a portrait or
landscape orientation.


Darkness image.

crisper, but decreasing it
appear smoother.
Adjusting Darkness
the colors.


image.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease
the difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.
Background Adjust the Background

Cleanup Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a faint
image.
Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
appear smoother.
Automatic The printer automatically

Tone adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the most
appropriate for the scanned
document.
Auto Paper
Color
Removal
(Flow models
only)
Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.
Scan menu 1063

Optimize Text Use this setting to optimize

Mixed* type of content.
Printed picture Use Text for documents that

Photograph option is also best suited
for scanning documents with
highlighter marks.

graphics.
Use Printed picture for line

try selecting Printed picture
Use Photograph for

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to remove

Back side erase borders or staple marks, by
Front side erase of the scanned image. In each
measurements, in millimeters
top edge, bottom edge, left
Cropping Do not crop Use this menu item to

Options automatically crop the scan
Crop to content for digital sending. Use the
Crop to content option to
Crop to paper scan the smallest possible
area that has detectable
content.
Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank pages

Suppression in the original document from
Suppress Blank being included in the output
document.

during scanning.
Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)


Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.
● White page Touch the Create Multiple

Files checkbox. Enter the
● Red/pink page maximum number of pages
● Green page Maximum pages per file field.
● Yellow page When a file type that does

● Any color page is selected, such as JPEG
document.

specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

Notify when job completes of a sent document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.
Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.
Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only
if the job is not sent
successfully.
Scan to USB Folder Path

Drive
File Name
Quick Set
Defaults
Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
file)
PDF Encryption
Scan menu 1065

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the layout

for each side of the
2-sided original document. First
document is printed on one
side or both sides. Then touch
the Orientation setting to
indicate whether the original
has portrait or landscape
orientation. If it is printed on
both sides, also select the
2-sided format that matches
the original document.
Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color

color.
Black/Gray: Scans


means the long edge of
the page is along the top.
In the Orientation area,
document has a portrait or
Use Automatically Detect

Automatically Detect setting.
Using Automatically Detect is
circumstances.

Image Darkness Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Darkness image.

Automatic tone crisper, but decreasing it
Adjusting Darkness
the colors.


image.

settings.

scanned output.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease
the difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.
Background Adjust the Background

Cleanup Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a faint
image.
Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
appear smoother.
Scan menu 1067

Automatic The printer automatically

Tone adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the most
appropriate for the scanned
document.
Auto Paper
Color
Removal
(Flow models
only)
Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.
Optimize Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the output for

Text/Picture a particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or a
Printed picture mixture.
Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to

manually optimize the setting
for text or for pictures.
Text: Use to optimize the text

portion of the copy when text
and/or pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use for

line drawings and preprinted
books.
Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.
Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to remove

Back side erase borders or staple marks, by
Front side erase of the scanned image. In each
measurements, in millimeters
top edge, bottom edge, left
Cropping Do not crop Use this menu item to

Options automatically crop the scan
Crop to content for digital sending. Use the
Crop to content option to
Crop to paper scan the smallest possible
area that has detectable
content.


during scanning.
Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank pages

Suppression in the original document from
Suppress Blank Pages being included in the output
document.

● Automatically retry
(E877, E826 z bundles
only)

Blank page separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

● White page Maximum pages per file field.
● Red/pink page When a file type that does

● Green page is selected, such as JPEG
● Yellow page ignored. When scanning front
● Any color page are generated per original
document.
Barcode page separator
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z When scanning to email,
bundles only) the configuration option that
Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

Notify when job completes of a sent document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.
Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.
Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only
if the job is not sent
successfully.
Scan menu 1069

Include Select Include Thumbnail to

Thumbnail receive a thumbnail image of
the first page of the job in
your notification.
Scan to Job Sides Original Sides

Storage
● 1-sided
● 2-sided
Output Sides
● 1-sided
● 2-sided
Color/Black Automatically detect Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color*

color.
Black/Gray: Scans

Scan Mode Standard document*
Book
2-sided ID
Reduce/ Automatic*
Enlarge
Manual
Image Shift Off*
Automatically center
Manual
Paper Paper Size

Selection
Paper Type
Paper Tray
Booklet Booklet Format



circumstances.
Pages per One

Sheet
Two
Four (right, then down)
Four (down, then right)

Darkness image.
Contrast Adjust Sharpness to clarify

appear smoother.
Adjusting Darkness
the colors.


image.
Scan menu 1071



Printed picture option is also best suited
for scanning documents with
Photograph highlighter marks.

graphics.

try selecting Printed picture
Use Photograph for


Back Side
● Top Edge
● Bottom Edge
● Left Edge
● Right Edge
Collate Collate*
Collate off

document.

Automatically Straighten on straighten the scanned image
during scanning.


only)
Scan to Save Use this feature to save

Sharepoint Settings the current settings as the
default settings for an app or
to create a new Quick Set.
First configure the desired
options. Then touch Save
and choose to either save
the current settings as the
default settings for the app or
as a new Quick Set.
File Type and File Type Select File Type and

file)
PDF Encryption
Original Auto (keep sides with content) Use this feature to describe
1-sided* original document
2-sided Use 1-sided for originals that

Pages Flip Up page.

the page.

such as calendars.
Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

Color
Black/Gray
Black
Scan menu 1073


Bottom Center
Bottom Right

2-sided ID output.



of paper.

paper.


circumstances.


Darkness image.

Automatic tone crisper, but decreasing it
Adjusting Darkness
the colors.


image.

settings.

scanned output.
Scan menu 1075



Printed picture option is also best suited for

graphics.

Use Photograph for


Back Side
● Top Edge
● Bottom Edge
● Left Edge
● Right Edge

to Content option to scan the

glass.


document.

Blank page separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

Barcode page separator Maximum Pages Per File field.
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z
bundles only) When a file type that does
document.

specifies the maximum six of
the email also interacts with
this feature. In this case, the
more restrictive of the two
Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to receive

Notify Only If Job Fails ● Select Do not notify to


only.

the job is not sent
successfully
Remote Scan Use the Remote Scan

Request Request app to scan and
send documents requested
by a remote computer.
Remote scans are initiated on

a computer with applications
such as TWAIN Software
or other AirPrint Compatible
devices
Scan menu 1077

Scan+ Common Scan Redact and Sign Scan Shortcuts can be used
Shortcuts to quickly set up a job for
OCR specialty tasks.
Document Separation
Barcode Separation
Sticky Notes and Envelopes
2-sided ID
Auto Sense Fastest Scan Speeds Auto Sense Presets make it

Preset easy to optimize a scan job
Best Productivity for fastest scan speeds or
(Recommended) best productivity.
● Fastest Scan Speeds

disables some
automatic features,
which requires less
image processing and
allows scanning at
the fastest speeds
available.
● Best Productivity
enables several
automatic features,
including automatic
sides, automatic content
orientation, automatic
image straightening,
and automatic image
optimization.
NOTE: Unlike Quick Sets,

Auto Sense Preset presets do
not affect destinations and
recipients.
Watermark None* Use this feature to add a

watermark to the document
Text
● Text: Text is placed at the
center of the page.

Bottom Center
Bottom Right

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to receive

Notify Only If Job Fails ● Select Do not notify to


only.

the job is not sent
successfully
Scan Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

Color
Black/Gray
Black

Blank page separator Touch the Create Multiple

Files check box. Enter the
Barcode page separator maximum number of pages
Maximum Pages Per File field.
When a file type that does

document.

Signing and Signing A digitally signed email

Encryption ensures the recipient that you
Encrypt sent this email. An encrypted
message can be opened only
by the recipient.
Scan menu 1079


to Contentoption to scan the

glass.
Copy Number of Copies (1 to 9999) Use this feature to set the

Copies number of printed copies.
Output Sides 1-sided* Use this feature to set the

layout and format for the
2-sided output.
Pages flip-up Select from the following

options:
● Use 1-sided for originals

that are printed on one
side of the page.
● Use 2-sided for originals

that are printed on both
sides of the page.
● Select Pages flip-up for

originals othat flip on the
top/bottom edge of the
page, such as calendars.
Color/Black Automatically detect* Automatically detect: Prints

color documents in color, and
Color black and white documents
in black and white. For mixed
Black/Gray documents, the product will
determine whether to print in
color or black and white.
Color: Prints documents in

color.
Black/Gray: Prints documents

in grayscale.

Paper Paper Size Use this feature to select the

Selection paper for the job.
Paper Type
Use Paper Size or Paper
Paper Tray Type to enable the printer
to automatically find the
selected paper size or type.
Use Paper Tray to select a

source tray. Depending on the
administrator's setting, the
product will either print from
that tray first, or it will limit
printing from that tray.
Fax Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi) Select the resolution for

outgoing faxes. If you
Fine (200 x 200dpi) increase the resolution, faxes
might be clearer but they
Superfine (300 x 300dpi) could transmit more slowly.
Auto Sense Original Auto (keep sides with content) Use this feature to describe
1-sided* original document
2-sided Use 1-sided for originals that

Pages Flip Up page.

the page.

such as calendars.


circumstances.
Scan menu 1081


Darkness image.

Automatic Tone crisper, but decreasing it
Adjusting Darkness
the colors.


image.

settings.

scanned output.



Printed picture option is also best suited for

graphics.

Use Photograph for


during scanning.

only)

document.
Advanced File Type and File Type Select File Type and
file)
DF EncryptionP
Scan menu 1083


2-sided ID output.



of paper.

paper.

Back Side
● Top Edge
● Bottom Edge
● Left Edge
● Right Edge
Fax menu (when a fax option is installed)

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Fax menu.
Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only)
Dialing Prefix
Fax Recipients
Quick Sets and

Defaults

Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)
Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First select
whether the original
document is printed
on one side or both
sides. Then touch the
Orientation setting to
indicate whether the
original has portrait or
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.
Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document.
● Watermark Text ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of
● Text Font the page.
● Text Size NOTE: Flow models

only.
● Text Color
Stamps None* Select up to six

preset positions for a
Top Left stamp and configure
the content that will
Top Center be printed there.
Some positions might
Top Right require selecting the
stamp from a list of
Bottom Left predefined options.
Bottom Center NOTE: Flow models

only.
Bottom Right
Resolution Standard (100 x Select the resolution

200dpi)* for outgoing faxes.
If you increase the
Fine (200 x 200dpi) resolution, faxes might
be clearer but they
Superfine (300 x could transmit more
300dpi) slowly. Some file types,
for example a file that
will be processed with
OCR, require a specific
resolution. When these
file types are selected,
the Resolution setting
might be automatically
changed to a valid
value.
Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

sizes that the printer page size of the
supports. original document.
Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 1085

Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait: This setting

means the short edge
of the page is along the
top.
Landscape: This
setting means the long
edge of the page is
along the top.
Image Adjustment Sharpness Use to improve the

overall quality of
Darkness the copy. Adjust
the darkness and
Contrast sharpness, and you
can use the
Background Cleanup Background Cleanup
setting to remove
Automatic tone faint images from
the background or
Auto Paper Color to remove a light
Removal background color.
Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount
of white and black in
the colors.
Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.
Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.
Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output

for a particular type
Automatically detect Text of content. You can
optimize the output for
NOTE: Flow models Mixed text, printed pictures, or
only. a mixture.
Printed picture
Manually Adjust: Use to
Photograph manually optimize the
setting for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to optimize

the text portion of the
copy where text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use

for line drawings
and preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.
Fax Line Selection Automatic* HP MFP Analog Dual

Fax 810 Accessory
Line 1 needs to be installed
Line 2
Blank Page Disabled* Prevents blank pages

Suppression in the original
Enabled document from being
document.
Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning to
Automatically automically straighten
Straighten* the scanned image
when pages are
skewed during
scanning.
Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 1087

Notification Do not notify* Use to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do Not Notify: Turns off

this feature.
Notify When Job

Completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.
Notify Only If Job

Fails: Select to receive
the job is not sent
successfully.
Print menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Print menu.
Table 3-17 Print Options menu
Print from Job Storage Stored Job to Print Untitled Print a job stored on the
printer.
Stored Faxes
Print from USB Drive USB File to Print Choose file to print on USB Print a job stored on a USB
drive. drive.
Fax Polling Fax Polling Number Use the Fax Polling app to
print faxes sent to another fax
machine.
Supplies menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.
Table 3-18 Supplies menu
First level Values Description
Supplies Summary
Black Cartridge Status
Cyan Cartridge Order HP Part
Magenta Cartridge Pages Printed
Yellow Cartridge Approximate Pages Remaining

Table 3-18 Supplies menu (continued)
First level Values Description
Toner Collection Unit Status
Document Feeder Kit Order HP Part
Stapler 1
Trays menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.
Table 3-19 Trays menu
Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list Choose the paper size for the
of supported sizes. tray
Tray 2–x
Type Select paper type from a list Choose the paper type for
of supported types. the tray.
Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the
Troubleshooting menu.
Trays menu 1089

Table 3-20 Troubleshooting
Configuration/ ● Settings Select

Status Pages Menu Map the configuration/
Status reports to
● Current review, and then
Settings touch the Print or
Page View button.
● Configuration
Page
● How to
Connect
Page
● Supplies
Status Page
● sage Page
● File Directory
Page
● Web Services
Status Page
● Color Usage
Job Log
Reports
Other Pages ● Demonstratio

n Page
● RGB Samples
● CMYK
Samples
● PCL Font List
● PS Font List
Event Log Print Prints the 50 most

recent events in
the Event Log.
For each event,
the printed log
shows the error
number, page
count, error code,
and description or
personality.
Paper Path Page View Shows how many

pages were
Print printed from each
tray.

Table 3-20 Troubleshooting (continued)
Fax (Fax is Fax T.30 Trace Print T.30 Report Print Use to print
optional) or configure the
fax T.30 trace
report. T.30 is
the standard
that specifies
handshaking,
protocols, and
error correction
between fax
machines.
When to Print Never Configure the

Report automatically T.30 report to
print* print after certain
events. You can
Print after every choose to print
fax the report after
every fax job, every
Print only after fax fax job sent, every
send jobs fax job received,
every send error,
Print after any fax or every receive
error error.
Print only after fax

send errors
Print only after fax

receive errors
Fax V.34 Normal* Use to disable

V.34 modulations if
Off several fax failures
have occurred
or if phone line
conditions require
it.
Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a

technician to
Diagnostic evaluate and
diagnose fax
issues by listening
to the sounds of
fax modulations
Fax Log Entries On The standard fax

log includes basic
Off* information such
as the time and
whether the fax
was successful.
The detailed
fax log shows
the intermediate
results of the redial
process not shown
in the standard fax
log.
Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Print Use to print pages
Page that help you
resolve problems
with print quality.
Troubleshooting menu 1091

Table 3-20 Troubleshooting (continued)
Diagnostic Tests
Continuous Scan 2-sided
Run Fax Test Start Use this menu

to perform a
test on specific
components within
the product to
determine whether
the components
are functioning
correctly.
Retrieve Insert a US drive Create files

Diagnostic Data into the USB that contain
port. The exported information about
data might the product that
contain personally can help identify
identifiable the cause of
information. problems.
Generate Debug Start

Data
Maintenance menu
Learn about the Maintenance menu.
Backup/Restore menu
To display: At the product control panel, select Support Tools and then Maintenance, and then select the
Backup/Restore menu.
Table 3-21 Backup/Restore menu
Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backup Time Enter a time

Backups
Days Between Enter the number of

Backups days
Backup Now
Export Last Backup
Restore Data Insert a USB drive that

contains the backup
file.
Calibration/Cleaning menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibrate/
Cleaning menu.

Table 3-22 Calibrate/Cleaning menu
Calibration/Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning

page that was created by
using the Create Cleaning
Page menu. The process
takes up to 1.5 minutes.
Calibration Start The product automatically

calibrates itself at various
times. However, you can
calibrate the product
immediately if you see
problems with print quality.
Use this feature to perform a
full calibration, which can take
up to three minutes. Use this
calibration if the color layers
seem to be shifted on the
page.
Before calibrating the

product, make sure that the
Ready indicator displays on
the control-panel display. If
a job is in progress, the
calibration occurs when that
job is complete.
Calibration/Cleaning menu 1093

Table 3-22 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (continued)
Delay Calibration at Wake/ No Delay Controls the timing of power-

Power On on calibration when the
Delay 15 minutes product wakes up or is turned
on.
Wake: Select if you are not

using the feature and want to
print jobs immediately when
the product wakes up or is
turned on, before calibration
begins.
No: The product will calibrate

immediately when it wakes up
or is turned on. The product
will not print any jobs until it
finishes calibrating.
Yes: Enables the product that

is asleep to accept print
jobs before it calibrates. It
might start calibrating before
it has printed all the jobs
it has received. This option
allows quicker printing when
coming out of sleep mode or
when you turn the product
on, but print quality might be
reduced.
NOTE: For the best results,

allow the product to calibrate
before printing. Print jobs
performed before calibration
might not be of the highest
quality.
USB Firmware Upgrade menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the USB
Firmware Upgrade menu.
Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Clear paper jams

Learn about clearing paper jams.
Paper jam locations

Learn about paper jam locations.

1
1 Tray 1
2 Tray 2
3 Tray 3
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam

Learn about A1 tray 1 paper jams.
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the Tray 1. When a
jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A1.XX Jam in tray 1
1. Gently remove the jammed paper.
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam 1095

2. Open and then close the front door to resume
printing.
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam

Learn about A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jams.
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 or Tray 3.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
NOTE: The procedure to clear a paper jam in Tray 3 is the same as for Tray 2. Only Tray 2 is shown
here.

2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the right door.
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam 1097

4. Open the tray.
5. Gently remove any jammed paper.

6. Close the tray. Printing automatically resumes.
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI

Learn about clearing paper jams in the bottom HCI.
1. Open the HCI.
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI 1099

2. Remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the HCI.
Service mode (tech mode; du models)

Learn about service mode (tech mode; du models).
Entering service mode

Learn about entering service mode.
1. From the control panel, select Support tools and then Service.
2. Enter the Service PIN ID.
● 04082517

3. Select Service tools.
Figure 3-34 Service tools view
Service mode menu tree

Learn about the service mode menu tree.
Figure 3-35 Information
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Information General Engine Board Serial

Number
Supply Status Customer Replacement Toner (K)

Unit
Field Replacement Unit Imaging Unit (K)
Service mode menu tree 1101

Development Unit (K)
TCU
Paper transfer belt (PTB)
Fuser
Tray x rollers
Flow ADF Roller
Software Version System Firmware Version
Main Firmware Version
Engine Firmware Version
Boot ROM Version
File System Version
Flow ADF Firmware Version
Finisher Version
Scanner Version
Scan Control Version
Tray 2 Version
Tray 3 Version
Tray 4 Version
Tray 5 Version
Tray 6 Version
EP Version
Fuser Version
TR Version
Toner Version
Print CMS Version
Copy CMS Version
Scan CMS Version
Print Reports Supplies Information
Auto Toning History

Figure 3-36 Maintenance counts
Maintenance counts Part Replacement Count Toner Cartridge (K)
Imaging Unit (K)
Development Unit (K)
Paper Transfer Belt (PTB)
Fuser
Tray x rollers
Flow ADF Pickup Roller
Service mode menu tree 1103

Figure 3-37 Diagnostics
Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics
Engine NVM Read/Write
Engine Test Routines
Scanner Diagnostics Scanner Diagnostics Shading Test Shade and Print Report
Print Last Shade Report
Shade and Print Report

(Flow ADF) (dn/z models)
P rint Last Shade Report

(Flow ADF) (dn/z models)
Scanner/Flow ADF (dn/z

and du models) NVM Read/
Write
Scanner/Flow ADF (dn/z

models) Test Routines
Adjustment Print Adjustment Image Position
Print Test Patterns
Copy Adjustment Image Position
Scan Area Adjustment Automatic Adjustment
Manual Adjustment
Flow ADF Adjustment Automatic Adjustment
Manual Adjustment
Image Management Auto Tone Adjustment Normal

Activation
Full

Print Test Patterns
Figure 3-38 Service functions
Service Functions Main Memory Clear
Debug Log Job Status
Details
Capture Log All
Period Start Date/End Date
Transfer Assembly Control T2 Control Mode Paper Group/Paper Side/

Mode Paper Direction/T2 PWM
Envelope Rotate Off
90 degrees
180 degree
Information
Learn more service mode information.
General
Learn general information about the menus.
Information > General
This menu displays the following information:
● Printer serial number
Information 1105
● Ethernet IP address
● Ethernet Mac address
● Optional Ethernet IP address
● Optional Ethernet Mac address
● Total printed impressions
● Installed date and time
Supply status
Learn about supply status.
Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit
● This menu displays the printer’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the
list to check the information of the selected unit.
Field replacement unit (FRU)
Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit
● This menu displays the printer’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to
check the information of the selected unit.
In this menu, there are five columns: Item, Threshold, Status, Count, and Maximum Life.
● Status: This column shows the current status of the selected item.
– OK: The current count is smaller than the default warning value.
– Check: The current count is bigger than the default warning value.
– OFF: The current count exceeds the maximum life.
● Count: This column shows the current count of the selected item.
● Maximum Life: This column shows the maximum capacity of the selected item.
The technician can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.
Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to zero after replacing the
unit.
Software version
Learn about the software version.
Information > Software Version
● This menu displays the version of the software installed on the printer.
Print reports
Learn how to print reports.

Information > Print Reports
This menu displays reports that can be printed from the system. The following reports are available to
print:
● Supplies Information
● Auto Toning History
Information > Print Reports > Auto Toning History
NOTE: TRC means Tone Reproduction Curve.
This report shows a history of execution of the TRC control. The TRC control preserves color
consistency against changes in supplies resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The
purpose of the history report is to check if the TRC control is working normally.
● If the TRC control performs normally, Pass count must be a non-zero value and Fail count must be
zero.
● If Fail count is not zero, check the image density sensor.
Maintenance counts
Learn about Maintenance counts.
Part replacement count

Learn about part replacement count.
Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count
● This menu displays the replacement counts for the system parts. Users can select one group and
press OK to see the exact name of the part and the occurrence of the replacement.
The following table shows replaceable parts groups of the system:
Table 3-23 Part Replacement Count
Unit Item Sensing Method
Toner Cartridge Toner (Black) Auto Sensing
Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (Black) Auto Sensing
Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing
Transfer Transfer Roller Count Clear
Roller Tray 2 Roller Count Clear
Flow ADF Roller Flow ADF Roller Count Clear
Maintenance counts 1107

Diagnostics
Learn about diagnostics.
Engine diagnostics
Learn about the engine diagnostics.
Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization
● This menu initializes all engine NVM values to the default.
Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Read/Write
Table 3-24 Engine Diagnostics (Engine NVM Read/Write)
Purpose To change a configuration value for the engine firmware
Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can
navigate through the list of codes with descriptions and
saved values.
Users can also input a code through the text box to find a
configuration value directly.
After selecting one value, press the Edit button to open an

interface for user input.
Table 3-25 Engine NVM Read/Write codes
Code Display Meaning Offset
109–0200 Standby Center Temperature 10/10
109–0201 Standby Side Temperature 10/10
Engine test routines
● Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines
Table 3-26 Engine Diagnostics (Engine Test Routines)
Purpose To perform test routines for the engine
Operation procedure When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users
can navigate through the list of routines and descriptions
that display. Users can directly input an EDC code through
the text box to search for a routine. A maximum of three
routines can be selected at the same time.
After selecting one or more routines, press the OK button to

open the test window. The selected routines will display and
users can start/start the selected test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference See the following table.

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes
Code Display Meaning
100-004 100-0044 Black Drum Motor Black OPC BLDC motor is on/off
4
100-004 100-0049 Black Drum Motor Ready Detects if black OPC BLDC motor is running at normal
9 speed
100-007 Drum Fan Run Detects if drum fan rotation.

4
100-007 Drum Fan Ready Detects if drum fan ready.

5
100-014 Duplex Motor Forward Duplex motor forward on/off

0
100-0141 Duplex Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow on/off
100-0142 Duplex Motor Forward Slowest Duplex motor forward slowest on/off
100-016 Duplex Fan 1 Run Start/stop duplex fan 1 run

0
100-018 Duplex Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if duplex fan 1 is running at normal speed
0
100-020 Tray 2 Elevating Motor Tray 2 elevate motor on/off

0
100-021 Tray 3 Elevating Motor Tray 3 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

0

0
100-0241 Waste Toner LED Waste Toner LED on/off
100-025 Waste Toner Full Sensor Detects if the Waste Toner is full
0
100-0251 PTB Waste Toner Full Sensor Detect level of a PTB Waste Toner bottle
100-026 SMPS Fan Run Start/stop SMPS fan run

0
100-027 SMPS Fan Run Ready Detects if SMPS fan is running at normal speed
0
100-034 Feed Motor Feed motor is on/off

0
100-0341 Feed Motor Slow Feed motor slow is on/off
100-034 Feed Motor Slowest Feed motor slowest is on/off

2
100-037 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Tray 2 motor is on/off

0
100-0371 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 2 motor slow on/off
100-037 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 2 motor slowest on/off

2
Engine diagnostics 1109

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

0

1

2

0

2

0

1

2
100-041 Registration Motor Registration motor is on/off

0
100-0411 Registration Motor Slow Registration motor slow on/off
100-0412 Registration Motor Slowest Registration motor slowest on/off
100-042 Tray 1 Feed Motor Tray 1 Feed motor is on/off

0
100-0421 Tray 1 Feed Motor Slow Tray 1 Feed motor slow on/off
100-042 Tray 1 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 1 Feed motor slowest on/off
2
100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Exit 2 motor is on/off

0
100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slow Exit 2 motor slow on/off

1
100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slowest Exit 2 motor slowest on/off

2
100-049 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Duplex motor forward is on/off

0
100-0491 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow is on/off
100-049 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Slowest Duplex motor forward slowest is on/off
2
100-060 Return Motor Forward Return motor forward is on/off

0
100-060 Return Motor Forward Slow Return motor forward slow is on/off
1
100-060 Return Motor Forward Slowest Return motor forward slowest is on/off
2

100-060 Return Motor Backward Return motor backward is on/off

3
100-060 Return Motor Backward Slow Return motor backward slow is on/off
4
100-060 Return Motor Backward Slowest Return motor backward slowest is on/off
5

0

2
101-0101 Tray 4 Shift Gate Solenoid Tray 4 shift gate solenoid on/off
101-0140 Tray 4 Feed Motor Tray 4 feed motor on/off
101-0141 Tray 4 Feed Motor Slow Tray 54 feed motor slow on/off
101-0142 Tray 4 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 4 feed motor slowest on/off
101-0190 Output Bin Full Sensor Detects when paper is at output bin full sensor
101-0191 Output Bin 2 Full Sensor Detects when paper is at output bin 2 full sensor
101-0270 Tray 1 Clutch Tray 1 clutch on/off
101-0271 Tray 1 Solenoid Tray 1 solenoid on/off
101-0280 Return Gate Solenoid Return Gate solenoid on/off
101–1000 Power 24V1
101–1001 Power 24V2
101–1002 Power 24V3
101–1003 Power 24V4
102-000 Tray 2 Home Position Detects when Tray 2 is closed

0
102-0001 Tray 2 Lock Detect Detect Tray 2 lock unit
102-000 Tray 2 Lock Position Check Tray 2 lock position

2
102-0010 Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 2
102-0041 Tray 2 Paper Size Read Detects paper Tray 2 size.

102-005 Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 2 is elevated to the sensor
0

0
102-0111 Tray 3 Paper Size Read Detects paper Tray 3 size.
102-0150 Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4
102-0181 Tray 4 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 4 size.
102– Tray 4 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 level sensor 1
0201
0202
102-0210 Tray 5 Home Position Detect when Tray 5 is closed.

0
102-0251 Tray 5 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 5 size
0
102–0271 Tray 5 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 5 level sensor 1
0272
102– Tray 5 Install Sensor 1 Detect when Tray 5 install sensor 1

0273
102– Tray 5 Install Sensor 2 Detect when Tray 5 install sensor 2

0274
102-028 Tray 1 Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Bypass Tray (Tray 1)
0
102-0281 Tray 1 Paper Size Read Detect Paper Tray 1 size
102-029 Prefeed 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 2 sensor

2

102-030 Tray 3 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 3 feed sensor (optional)
0
102-032 Tray 4 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 4 feed sensor (optional)
0
102-033 Tray 4 Door Open Sensor Detect when Tray 4 is closed

0

3

0
102-035 Prefeed 6 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 6 sensor (optional)

3
102-036 Registration Sensor Detects when paper is at the registration sensor

0
102-0361 Fuser Out Sensor Detects when paper is at the fuser out sensor.
102-0371 Exit 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at exit 2 sensor.
102-038 Duplex Jam 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 1 sensor.
0
102-039 Duplex Jam 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 2 sensor.
0
102-043 Front Cover Sensor Detects status of front cover

5
102-043 Side Cover Sensor Detects status of side cover

6
102-048 Tray 6 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 6

0
0
102-0531 Tray 6 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 6 level sensor 1
102-053 Tray 6 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 6 level sensor 2
2
102-053 Tray 6 Install Sensor 1 Detect when Tray 6 install sensor 1

3
102-053 Tray 6 Install Sensor 2 Detect when Tray 6 install sensor 2

4
102-0730 Tray 4 Knock Up Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 knock up home sensor
102-0731 Tray 4 Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4 shift tray
102-0732 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 shift tray level
sensor 1

102-0733 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 shift tray level
sensor 2
102-0734 Tray 4 Shift Plate Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 shift plate home sensor
102-0735 Tray 4 Shift Plate End Sensor Detect when Tray 4 shift plate end sensor
102-0736 Tray 4 Gate Solenoid Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 gate solenoid home sensor
104-000 Waste Install Sensor Detects if waste is installed

0
105-003 Black MHV Bias Black MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
0
106-003 Black Developer Bias Black developer bias voltage on at normal drive level
0
106-003 Black Developer AC Bias Black developer bias AC voltage on at normal drive
1 level
106-020 HVPS Installed Detect HVPS unit

0
107-0033 THV(-) Bias THV minus bias voltage on at normal drive level
107-0034 THV CC Bias THV constant current plus bias voltage
107-0035 THV CV Bias THV constant voltage plus bias voltage
107-0165 Black Eraser On Black eraser lamp on/off
107-0169 Black Eraser Detect Detect black eraser status
109-000 Fuser Temperature A Detects what the temperature A is on fuser

0
109-001 Fuser Temperature B Detects what the temperature B is on fuser

0
109-0012 Inner Temperature Inner temperature
109-001 Outer Temperature Outer temperature

3
109-001 Humidity Humidity

4
109-002 Fuser Fan Run Ready Detects if fuser fan motor runs at normal speed
0
109-0021 Exit 2 Fan Run Start/stop exit 2 fan run
109-002 Exit 2 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 2 fan runs at normal speed
2
109-002 Exit 3 Fan Run Start/stop exit 3 fan run

3
109-002 Exit 3 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 3 fan runs at normal speed
4
109– Exit 4 Fan Run Start/stop exit 4 fan run

0025
109– Exit 4 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 4 fan runs at normal speed
0026

109-003 Fuser Motor Forward Fuser motor forward on/off

0
109-003 Fuser Motor Ready Detects if fuser motor runs at each speed
4
109-004 Fuser Fan Run Fuser fan motor on/off

0
109-004 Exit Fan Run Exit fan motor on/off

6
109-004 Exit Fan Run Ready Detects if exit fan runs at normal speed
7
109-013 Fuser Gap Motor Fuser press control motor on/off

0
109-014 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Detects if the fuser press is located home position
0
109-020 Detect Fuser Relay Detect fuser relay status

0
109-0210 Detect Zero Cross Period Detect zero cross period
109-030 Fuser Installed Detect fuser unit

0
110-000 LSU Motor 1 Run Ready Detects if LSU motor 1 runs at normal speed
0
110-006 LSU Motor 1 Run LSU motor 1 on/off

0
110-0110 LSU LD Power 4 LSU LD 4 power on/off (black)
110-0170 LSU HSync 4 DetectsLSU HSync 4 (black)
110-0200 LSU Installed Detect LSU
111-0030 Toner Dispense Motor Black Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
111-0070 Toner Sensor Black TC sensor in developer tank
111-0140 Toner Control Voltage Black Black toner voltage on/off
111-0230 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Black Black supply motor lock sensor
111-0330 Toner Reservoir Motor Black Black reservoir motor on/off
111-0370 Toner Reservoir Level Black Black reservoir level display
112-0340 Center ID Sensor P Read Show center ID sensor P value
112-0350 Center ID Sensor S Read Show center ID sensor S value
113-000 Finisher Present Sensor Detect if the finisher is in place

0
113-0350 Finisher Entrance Sensor Detects when paper is at entrance sensor
113-0360 Finisher Exit Sensor Detects when paper is at exit sensor
113-0361 Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect when a paper is at compile sensor
113-0370 Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detects paddle home position

113-0380 Finisher Left Tamper Home Sensor Detects lift tamper home position
113-0390 Finisher Right Tamper Home Sensor Detects right tamper home position
113-0410 Finisher Stapler Door Sensor Detects if stapler door cover is closed
113-0420 Finisher Jam Cover Sensor Detects if jam door cover is closed
113-0430 Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detects stapler home position
113-0440 Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detects stapler level
113-0451 Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect stapler ready sensor
113-0461 Finisher Ejector 1 Home Sensor Detect ejector 1 home position
113-0462 Finisher Ejector 2 Home Sensor Detect ejector 2 home position
113-0463 Finisher Ejector 2 Encoder Sensor Detect ejector 2 encoder Sensor
113-0470 Finisher Main Tray Home Sensor Detects main tray home position
113-0471 Finisher Main Tray Beam Sensor Detect main tray beam sensor
113-0472 Finisher Main Tray Low Limit Sensor Detect main tray low limit sensor
113-0473 Finisher Main Tray Encoder Sensor Detect main tray encoder sensor
113-0481 Finisher Paper Support Sensor Detect paper support home sensor
113-0491 Finisher Traverse Front Sensor Detect traverse front home sensor
113-0492 Finisher Traverse Rear Sensor Detect traverse rear home sensor
113-0501 Finisher Entrance Motor Finisher entrance motor on/off
113-0502 Finisher Exit Motor Finisher exit motor on/off
113-0510 Finisher Paddle Motor Finisher paddle motor on/off
113-0520 Finisher Left Tamper Motor Finisher left tamper motor on/off
113-0530 Finisher Right Tamper Motor Finisher right tamper motor on/off
113-0550 Finisher Staple Unit Motor Finisher staple unit motor on/off
113-0561 Finisher Ejector 1 Motor Finisher ejector 1 motor on/off
113-0562 Finisher Ejector 2 Motor Finisher ejector 2 motor on/off
113-0563 Finisher Ejector 2 Reverse Motor Finisher ejector 2 reverse direction on/off
113-0570 Finisher Main Tray Motor Finisher main tray motor on/off
113-0571 Finisher Paper Support Motor Finisher paper support motor on/off
113-0581 Finisher Traverse Motor Finisher staple unit traverse motor on/off
113-0591 Finisher Paper Hold Solenoid Finisher paper hold solenoid on/off
113-060 Finisher Punch Motor Finisher punch motor on/off

0
113-0610 Finisher Punch Encoder Sensor Detect finisher punch encoder sensor
113-0611 Finisher Punch Position Sensor Detect finisher punch position sensor
113-0612 Finisher Punch Home Sensor Detect finisher punch home sensor

113-0620 Finisher Hopper Install Sensor Detect finisher punch hopper install sensor
113-0621 Finisher Hopper Full Sensor Detect finisher punch hopper full sensor
113-2000 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Lift Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher buffer lift sensor
113-2010 2 Bin Finisher Clamp Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher clamp home sensor
113-2020 2 Bin Finisher Diverter Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher diverter home sensor
113-2030 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Away Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 away sensor
113-2031 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 home sensor
113-2032 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 encoder sensor
113-2040 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 2 home sensor
113-2041 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 2 encoder sensor
113-2050 2 Bin Finisher End Fence Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher end fence sensor
113-2060 2 Bin Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher paddle home sensor
113-2070 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Entrance Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher Bridge entrance sensor
113-2071 2 Bin Finisher IPTU Middle Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher Bridge Unit middle sensor
113-2080 2 Bin Finisher Entrance Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher entrance sensor
113-2090 2 Bin Finisher Main Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main exit sensor
113-2091 2 Bin Finisher Sub Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher sub exit sensor
113-2100 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher buffer exit sensor
113-2110 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler home sensor
113-2111 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Rear Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler rear sensor
113-2112 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Front Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler front sensor
113-2113 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Manual Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler manual sensor
113-2114 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Head Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler head sensor
113-2115 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler low sensor
113-2116 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler ready sensor
113-2120 2 Bin Finisher Front Tamper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher front tamper sensor
113-2130 2 Bin Finisher Rear Tamper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher rear tamper sensor
113-2140 2 Bin Finisher Main Beam Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main beam sensor
113-2141 2 Bin Finisher Main Front Level Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main front level sensor
113-2142 2 Bin Finisher Main Rear Level Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main rear level sensor
113-2143 2 Bin Finisher Main Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main encoder sensor
113-2144 2 Bin Finisher Main Full Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main full sensor
113-2145 2 Bin Finisher Sub Full Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher sub full sensor
113-2150 2 Bin Finisher Booklet Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher booklet paper sensor

113-2160 2 Bin Finisher Staple Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher staple paper sensor
113-2161 2 Bin Finisher Staple Button Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher staple button sensor
113-2170 2 Bin Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher compile paper sensor
113-2180 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Cover Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher bridge cover sensor
113-2181 2 Bin Finisher Top Cover Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher top cover sensor
113-2182 2 Bin Finisher Front Door Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher front door sensor
113-2190 2 Bin Finisher Stack Top Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stack top sensor
113-2200 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher bridge detect sensor
113-2201 2 Bin Finisher Punch Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher punch detect sensor
113-2202 2 Bin Finisher Booklet Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher booklet detect sensor
113-2500 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Lift Motor 2 bin finisher buffer lift motor on/off
113-2510 2 Bin Finisher Clamp Motor 2 bin finisher camp motor on/off
113-2520 2 Bin Finisher Diverter Motor 2 bin finisher diverter motor on/off
113-2530 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Motor 2 bin finisher eject 1 motor on/off
113-2540 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Motor 2 bin finisher eject 2 motor on/off
113-2560 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Feed Motor 2 bin finisher bridge feed motor on/off
113-2570 2 Bin Finisher Entrance Motor 2 bin finisher entrance motor on/off
113-2580 2 Bin Finisher Exit Feed Motor 2 bin finisher exit feed motor on/off
113-2590 2 Bin Finisher End Fence Motor 2 bin finisher end fence motor on/off
113-2600 2 Bin Finisher Paddle Motor 2 bin finisher paddle motor on/off
113-2610 2 Bin Finisher Main Tray Motor 2 bin finisher main tray motor on/off
113-2620 2 Bin Finisher Staple Move Motor 2 bin finisher staple move motor on/off
113-2621 2 Bin Finisher Staple Head Motor 2 bin finisher staple head motor on/off
113-2630 2 Bin Finisher Front Tamper Motor 2 bin finisher front tamper motor on/off
113-2640 2 Bin Finisher Rear Tamper Motor 2 bin finisher rear tamper motor on/off
113-2650 2 Bin Finisher Manual Blue LED 2 bin finisher manual blue LED on/off
113-2651 2 Bin Finisher Manual Red LED 2 bin finisher Manual red LED on/off
113-2660 2 Bin Finisher BM exit cam Motor
113-2670 2 Bin Finisher BM exit cam Solenoid
113-3000 Booklet Stopper Home Sensor Detect booklet Stopper home sensor
113-3010 Booklet Staple Home Sensor Detect booklet staple home sensor
113-3020 Booklet Front Staple Empty Sensor Detect booklet front staple empty sensor
113-3030 Booklet Rear Staple Empty Sensor Detect booklet rear staple empty sensor
113-3040 Booklet Knife Home Sensor Detect booklet knife home sensor

113-3050 Booklet Guide Home Sensor Detect booklet guide home sensor
113-3060 Booklet Diverter Home Sensor Detect booklet Diverter home Sensor
113-3080 Booklet Tamper Home Sensor Detect booklet tamper home sensor
113-3090 Booklet Paddle Home Sensor Detect booklet paddle home sensor
113-3100 Booklet Entrance Paper Sensor Detect booklet entrance paper sensor
113-3110 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor Detect booklet fold output paper sensor
113-3120 Booklet Fold Exit Paper Sensor Detect booklet fold exit paper sensor
113-3130 Booklet Press Home Sensor Detect booklet press home sensor
113-3500 Booklet Feed Motor Booklet feed motor on/off
113-3510 Booklet Fold Motor Booklet fold motor on/off
113-3520 Booklet Stopper Solenoid Booklet stopper solenoid on/off
113-3530 Booklet Stopper Motor Booklet stopper motor on/off
113-3540 Booklet Tamper Motor Booklet tamper motor on/off
113-3550 Booklet Knife Motor Booklet knife motor on/off
113-3560 Booklet Diverter Motor Booklet diverter motor on/off
113-3570 Booklet Press Motor Booklet press motor on/off
113-3580 Booklet Paddle Motor Booklet paddle motor on/off
113-3590 Booklet Guide Motor Booklet guide motor on/off
113-3600 Booklet Staple Motor Booklet staple motor on/off
113-4000 Punch Scan Home Sensor Detect punch scan home sensor
113-4010 Punch Scan Edge 1 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 1 sensor
113-4020 Punch Home Sensor Detect punch home sensor
113-4030 Punch Position A Sensor Detect punch position A sensor
113-4031 Punch Position B Sensor Detect punch position B sensor
113-4040 Punch Encoder Sensor Detect punch encoder sensor
113-4050 Punch Hopper Full Sensor Detect punch hopper full sensor
113-4060 Punch Type 1 Detect Sensor Detect punch type 1 detect sensor
113-4061 Punch Type 2 Detect Sensor Detect punch type 2 detect sensor
113-4500 Punch Scan Motor Punch scan motor on/off
113-4510 Punch Motor Punch motor on/off

Fax diagnostics
Learn about the fax diagnostics.
Fax NVM Read/Write
● Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax NVM Read/Write
Table 3-28 Fax Diagnostics )Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write)
Purpose To change a configuration value for fax firmware.
Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can navigate through
the list of configuration values and descriptions that display.
Users can input a code through the text box to search for a configuration value.
After selecting a value, press the Edit button to open an interface for user input.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Table 3-29 Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write codes
Code Name Description Default Range
20-200 Pause dial time Pause time (value * 1000 ms) Country/ 0-200
region value
20-210 Dial pulse M/B ratio 33/66 40/60 Country/ 0=

region value OPTION_DP_
33
1=
OPTION_DP_
40
2=
OPTION_DP_
37
3=
OPTION_DP_
50
20-220 Auto dial start pause time Pause time before auto- 1 0-10
dialing (second)
20-300 Ring on time Ring on time (ms) 170 90-800
20-310 Ring off time Ring off time (ms) 560 90-800
20-320 Ring detection frequency Sets the call indication 1 1 = 12-80 hz

frequency range that will be
detected by LIU. 2 = 16-55 hz
3 = 20-55 hz
4 = 22-55 hz
20-330 Ring on max time Ring on max time (ms) 5100 3000-12000
20-340 Ring off max time Ring off max time (ms) 11100 9000-22000

Table 3-29 Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write codes (continued)
20-400 DTMF high-frequency level DTMF high-frequency level Country/ 0-15

(dBm) region value
20-410 DTMF low-frequency level DTMF low-frequency level Country/ 0-15

(dBm) region value
20-420 DTMF timing DTMF duration of on/off 8 1 = 80/80

output (ms)
2 = 70/70
3 = 70/150
4 = 60/60
5 = 80/100
6 = 150/50
7 = 150/240
8 = 100/100
9 = 100/80
20-500 Dial mode Select tone/pulse Country/ 0=

region value OPTION_TON
E_MODE
1=
OPTION_PUL
SE_MODE
20-520 Error rate Adjust error rate 2 0=

(Off/5%/10%/20%) OPTION_RAT
E_OFF
1=
OPTION_RAT
E_5
2=
OPTION_RAT
E_10
3=
OPTION_RAT
E_20
20-530 Dial tone detect Detect dial tone prior to Country/ 0=

sending region value OPTION_OFF
1=
OPTION_ON
20-540 Loop current detect Detect if loop current is Country/ 0=

present prior to sending region value OPTION_OFF
1=
OPTION_ON
20-550 Busy signal detect Detect busy signal to allow Country/ 0=

redials region value OPTION_OFF
1=
OPTION_ON
Fax diagnostics 1121

Table 3-29 Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write codes (continued)
20-560 TCF duration Adjust TCF duration (ms) 1500 1000-3000
20-800 Modem speed Select modem start speed 24
20-810 Fax transmission level Adjust fax transmission level Country/ Country/
(dBm) region value region value
20-830 Auto dial timeout Adjust auto dial timeout Country/ 30-150
(second) region value
20-920 CNG detection count CNG tone detection check 2 1-15

count during ANS/FAX mode
20-930 Caller ID This option is needed to Country/ 0=

guide Caller ID off for user region value OPTION_OFF
environment
1=
OPTION_ON
20-940 Ext. phone Ext. phone detection enable/ 1 0 = Disable

disable (default: enable 1)
1 = Enable
21-999 Fax line setting Fax test line setting (dual fax) 0 0 = Line 1
1 = Line 2
21-800 Modem speed line 2 Select modem start speed for 24

line 2. This item will display
only when a dual line fax kit
is installed
Fax test routines
● Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax Test Routines
Table 3-30 Fax Diagnostics (Fax Test Routines)
Purpose To perform test routines for the fax machine.
Operation When the main Fax Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list of routines
procedur and descriptions that display. Users can input a code through the text box to search for a routine.
e
After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the selected routine. Users can
start/stop the selected test routine.
Table 3-31 Fax Test Routines codes
Code Name Description State

Displayed
20-012 Single tone 1100Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1100Hz on line 1 On/Off
20-020 DTMF # Line1 Emits DTMF # on line 1 On/Off
20-021 DTMF * Line1 Emits DTMF * on line 1 On/Off

Table 3-31 Fax Test Routines codes (continued)

Displayed
20-022 DTMF 0 Line1 Emits DTMF 0 on line 1 On/Off
20-040 V.21 300 bps Line1 Emits V.21 300 bps Line 1 On/Off
20-041 V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 Emits V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 On/Off
20-043 V.29 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.29 7200 bps Line1 On/Off
Fax diagnostics 1123


Displayed
21-020 DTMF # Line2 Emits DTMF # on line 2 On/Off
21-021 DTMF * Line2 Emits DTMF * on line 2 On/Off


Displayed
Scanner diagnostics
Learn about the scanner diagnostics.
Shading test
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test
Scanner diagnostics 1125

Table 3-32 Scanner Diagnostics (Shading Test)
Purpose ● To check the quality of scanned images, especially if there might be defects in optical
devices such as the lens, mirror, or lamp.
● Check the quality problem as shown below:
Operation For the Image Scanner Unit

Procedure
Press Shade and Print report to see if the current shading value is correct. Mono, red, green,
and blue gray shading values will be shown on the printed report. When the previous shading
value is needed, press “Print Last Shade Report”.
For the Flow ADF unit
1. Load the shading sheet on the Flow ADF tray.
2. Enter SCV mode. Select the following menu items:
Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test > Shade and Print Report (Flow ADF)
Press Print Last Shade Report (ADF) for the previous shading value report.
3. Check if the printed results are correct.
NOTE:
● When executing Flow ADF shading, use only the shading sheet (JC63–05055A).
● A Shading Test for the Flow ADF unit must be completed after replacing the Flow ADF
unit or main board.
Verification Look at the bottom of the report page for a "RESULTS : OK" message.
Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write

Table 3-33 Scanner Diagnostics (Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write)
Purpose To read and/or write values in the scanner and Flow

ADF memory.
Operation Procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays,

users can navigate through the list of codes with
descriptions and saved values. Users can also directly
input a code through the text box to search for an
NVM.
After selecting a code, the Edit button will be enabled

only if the code is writable.
If the selected code is writable and the Edit button

is enabled, press the button to configure the desired
value for the code.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Table 3-34 Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write codes
Code NVM description Default GX Model
05-0000 Pick Up Count 0 O
05-0001 Separation Roller Count 0 O
05-0010 Document Duplex Reverse Point 0 O
05-0030 Simplex Registration Value (Registration 1) 0 O
05-0040 Duplex Registration Value (Registration 2) 0 O
05-0050 Width Guide Max Value Depends on Flow O

ADF
05-0060 Width Guide Min Value Depends on Flow O

ADF
Scanner/Flow ADF test routines
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines
Table 3-35 Scanner Diagnostics (Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines)
Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and Flow ADF.
Operation Procedure When the main Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines window displays, users
can navigation through the list of routines and descriptions that display.
Users can input a code through the text box to search for a routine.
After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the
selected routine. Users can start/stop the selected test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Scanner diagnostics 1127

Table 3-36 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes
Code Name Value GX model
06-0000 Scanner Original Size High/Low O

Detecting Sensor 1
06-0001 Scanner Original Size High/Low O

Detecting Sensor 2
06-0010 Scanner Cover Open/ High/Low O

Close Sensor 1
06-0011 Scanner Cover Open/ High/Low O

Close Sensor 2
06-0020 Scanner Platen Motor Start/Stop O

Forward
06-0030 Scanner Platen Motor Start/Stop O

Backward
06-0040 Scanner Platen Home High/Low O

Position Sensor
05-0000 Document Length .1 High/Low O

Sensor
05-0001 Document Length .2 High/Low O

Sensor
05-0020 Document Cover Open High/Low O

Sensor
05-0040 Document Detect Sensor High/Low O
05-0050 Document Feed Sensor High/Low O
05-0060 Document Simplex High/Low O

Registration Sensor
05–0061 Document Duplex

Registration Sensor
05-0070 Document Scan Read High/Low O

Sensor 1
05-0071 Document Scan Read High/Low O

Sensor 2
05-0080 Document Exit Sensor High/Low O
05-0090 Document Pickup Clutch Start/Stop X
05-0110 Document Motor Forward Start/Stop O
05-0111 Document Motor Start/Stop O

Backward
05-0123 Document width 1 MSO High/Low O

Sensor

Sensor

Sensor
05-0130 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop O

Forward

Table 3-36 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes (continued)
Code Name Value GX model
05-0131 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop O

Backward
05-0140 Document Pickup Roller High/Low X

Detect Sensor
05-0151 Document Stacker Lift High/Low O

Lower Sensor
05-0160 Document Registration 1 Start/Stop O

Motor Forward

Motor Backward

Motor Forward

Motor Backward
05-0180 Document Stacker Lift Start/Stop O

Motor Forward
05-0181 Document Stacker Lift Start/Stop O

Motor Backward
05–0182 Document Exit Motor

Forward
05–0183 Document Exit Motor

Backward
05–0184 Document Pickup

Release Motor Forward
05–0185 Document Pickup

Release Motor Backward
05–0186 Document Scan ln

Release Motor Forward
05–0187 Document Scan ln

Release Motor Backward
05-0190 Document Width Guide 10Bit (0~1023) O

ADC Sensor
05–0191 Document USM ADC

Sensor
05–0192 Document USM

Calibration Test
05-0210 Document Jig Test Low Start/Stop O

Speed Simplex
05-0230 Document Jig Test High Start/Stop O

Speed Simplex
Adjustment
Learn about the print adjustment.
Adjustment 1129
Print adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position
Table 3-37 Print Adjustment (Image Position)
Purpose Manually adjust the position of the printed image on

the paper in the print engine.
Operational Procedure 1. Select a tray to adjust.
2. Change the adjustment value using the + or -

buttons, then press the OK button to save the
changes.
● Simplex Leading Edge
● Simplex Side Edge
● Duplex Leading Edge
● Duplex Side Edge
NOTE:
● Adjustment must be done for each tray (Tray

1, 2, 3, 4, and 5).
● Do not choose ALL for the tray selection.
● Adjust for the tray with each new tray

selection.
3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image

is adjusted. If not, repeat Step 2.
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Print Margin Test
This menu is used to print out the test pattern manually.
Copy adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position

Table 3-38 Copy Adjustment (Image Position)
Purpose Manually adjust the position of the copied image on the paper in the
copy engine.
Operation Procedure NOTE: Before copy adjustment:
● Make sure that the initial values of margin adjustment are the same
as the values of the print adjustment.
● Perform an adjustment for each tray. Do not choose All for tray
selection, as this can confuse the adjustment.
NOTE:
● Complete adjustment for each tray (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5).
● Do not choose All for tray selection.
● Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.
1. Locate the Scanner A/S Chart on the Flow ADF tray.
2. Change the adjustment value using the + or - button, and then press
OK to save the changes.
● Simplex Leading Edge
● Simplex Side Edge
● Duplex Leading Edge
● Duplex Side Edge
3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image has moved. If not,
repeat Step 2.
Scan area adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Adjustment 1131
Table 3-39 Scan Area Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)
Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of scanned images automatically.
Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.
Note that the Lead Edge arrows point to the left side of the scanner glass
and are placed face down. The Scanner A/S Chart comes in two sizes, A4 and
Letter.
2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the
proper value based on the scanning result of the chart.
3. The new value saves to the system.
4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned
from the scanner glass.
5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b)
from the chart to the scanned image.
6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.
NOTE: Specifications:
● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Table 3-40 Scan Area Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)
Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.
Operation Procedure 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
● Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
● Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
● Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)
2. Select one item and press the Edit button.
3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.
4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification,
press +, otherwise press -.
5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -,
otherwise, press +.
6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.
from the scanner glass.
scanned image.
● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
Flow ADF adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Flow ADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Adjustment 1133
Table 3-41 Flow ADF Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)
Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of images scanned with the Flow
ADF automatically.
Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.
2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the
proper value based on the scanning result of the chart.
3. The new value saves to the system.
from the Flow ADF.
scanned image.
● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
NOTE: After executing the Flow ADF adjustment, perform a shading test.
Refer to Scanner Diagnostics.
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Flow ADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Table 3-42 Flow ADF Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)
Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.
Operation 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
procedure
● Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
● Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
● Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)
2. Select one item and press the Edit button.
3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.
4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press +,
otherwise press -.
5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -, otherwise,
press +.
● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.
7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the Flow
ADF.
8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the chart
to the scanned image.
9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the scanned
image.
10. If Auto Skew Correction during job box is checked, skewed image is corrected by digitally
rotating the scanned images.
NOTE: When this function is enabled, visual artifact (like checkerboard patterns) might
appear on the image depending on the original contents or copy option settings.
Adjustment 1135
NOTE: After executing the Flow ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to Scanner
Diagnostics.
Image management
Learn about image management.
Auto tone adjustment activation
● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal
Table 3-43 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Normal)
Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image

is poor. Normal TRC Control is recommended after
changing a unit, such as a toner cartridge, imaging
unit, and PTB, or after restarting the printer.
Operation Procedure 1. Select On or Off for Normal TRC Control

execution.
● Off: Normal TRC Control will not execute.
● On: Normal TRC Control will execute during

the determined conditions,
2. Change the execution condition(s) of Normal TRC

Control.
● Page Count: The system executes Normal

TRC Control based on the count of printed
pages since the last execution.
● Time Left Alone: The system executes

Normal TRC Control when the system
returns from a power save mode and the
rest time exceeds the configured value.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality
has recovered.
● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full
Table 3-44 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Full)
Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is

replaced, the life of the OPC drum is changed, the
density of the image is poor, or the temperature and/or
humidity in the room changes suddenly.
Operation Procedure 1. Select On or Off for Full TRC Control execution.
● Off: Full TRC Control will not execute.
● On: Full TRC Control will execute during the

determined conditions,
2. Change the execution condition(s) of Full TRC

Control.
● Page Count: The system executes Full TRC

Control based on the count of printed pages
since the last execution.
● Time Left Alone: The system executes Full

TRC Control when the system returns from
a power save mode and the rest time
exceeds the configured value.

Table 3-44 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Full) (continued)
Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is

replaced, the life of the OPC drum is changed, the
density of the image is poor, or the temperature and/or
humidity in the room changes suddenly.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality
has recovered.
Print test patterns

Learn about the print test patterns.
Diagnostics > Print Test Patterns >
● EP Calibration Pattern1 Contone
Service functions
Learn about service functions.
Main memory clear

Learn about the main memory clear.
Service Functions > Main Memory Clear
● This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. This function can
be used to reset the system to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. User
configured values return to the default values.
To clear the main memory, select the country/region where the system is located, and restart the
printer.
Debug log
Learn about the debug log.
Service Functions > Debug Log
● This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options:
– Off: This option disables the logging option.
– Job Status: This option only enables the logging of user created jobs.
– Details: This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. This
option might affect the performance of certain system operations. Use this option when the
system performs abnormally and engineers need to investigate the problem.
Capture log
Learn about the capture log.
Print test patterns 1137

Service Functions > Capture Log
● This function copies all the saved logs in the system to a USB flash drive as a .zip file. The size of the
system log could reach up to 1 GB. If the system log size becomes very large, it will take a longer time
to copy to the USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the printer.
2. Tap the Service Mode app. When the pop-up displays, press the area below the pop-up until the
password window appears. Enter 04082517 and press the OK button.
3. Go to Service Functions > Debug Log and change the debug log level to INFO.
4. Go to Service Functions > Capture Log.
5. Select All or Period. If selecting Period, enter the start and end date.
6. Press the Capture Log button.
7. Once the log is completed, a completion message will display. Restore the debug log level to
JOB STATUS.
NOTE: If the system log size becomes very large, it will take longer to copy to the USB flash
drive.
8. Check that the Log File has been saved to the USB flash drive.
Transfer assembly control mode

Learn about the transfer assembly control mode.

Service Functions > Transfer Assembly Control Mode
Table 3-45 Transfer Assembly Control Mode

●
Purpose To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the
transfer value to optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.
Operation Procedure ● T2 Control Mode
– Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.
– Adjust PWM value based on the problem type.
○ Blur: Increase PWM value
○ Poor Transfer: Increase PWM value
○ Re-transfer: Decrease PWM value
○ White Spot: Decrease PWM value
○ OPC Cylic Ghost: Decrease PWM value
Verification Print a test job and make sure the transfer problem has been resolved.
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Envelope rotate
Learn about the envelope rotate function.
Service Functions > Envelope Rotate
● This menu enables rotation when printing on an envelope. The machine usually guides loaded
envelopes with SEF direction. If this function is enabled, the user can load an envelope with LEF
direction and the machine will rotate the image for printing on the envelope.
This function provides the following setting options:
– Off (default): Load envelope SEF direction
– 90 degrees: Load envelope LEF direction.
Envelope rotate 1139

– 180 degrees: Load envelope SEF direction with flap on bottom side.
NOTE: If the paper source is Auto, the device will feed from the Tray 1 because the LEF envelope
can only be loaded in the Tray 1 according to paper specification.
If the length of envelope is over the maximum size of the custom width, the device will not rotate
the image and determine that the direction of the envelope is SEF. For example, the A4 model
supports custom sizes like W 98–216 ~ L148–356. This model does not support C5 Env (162x229) DL
Env (110x220), No 9 Env (98x225), No 10 Env (105x241) rotation.
Print quality troubleshooting guide

Learn about print quality troubleshooting.
Image quality problems and solutions

Learn about print -quality troubleshooting.
Print quality defects can be caused by printer components, consumables, media, internal software,
external software applications, and environmental conditions.
To successfully troubleshoot print quality problems, eliminate as many variables as possible.
First, generate prints using printable pages using laser paper. Use paper from an unopened ream that
has been acclimated to room temperature. Make sure that genuine HP toner is installed in the printer.

Figure 3-39 A/S chart (A3)
Image quality problems and solutions 1141

Figure 3-40 A/S chart
Table 3-46 A/S chart
Item Description Use
[1] Grid pattern For adjusting margin and

magnification
[2] Black patches For adjusting skew error
[3] Barcode For checking the reproduction of the

barcode
[4] Note area For recording the date, conditions,

and so on.
[A] Halftone band For checking banding and jitter (K

50%)
[B, L] Resolution patterns For checking resolution
[C, D, E] Images For checking color reproduction
[F] Map image For checking fine line reproduction
[G] Color patches For checking color reproduction and

uniformity
[H] Gradation pattern For checking tone reproduction of

seven colors (C, M, Y, K, R, G, B/
10~100%)

Table 3-46 A/S chart (continued)
Item Description Use
[I] Color/Mono text For checking the reproduction of

color, mono text
[J] Multilingual feature For checking the reproduction of

small text
[K] White gap pattern For checking color to color, color to

mono white gap
[M] Rulers For checking the magnification error

(unit: cm)
[N] Rulers For checking the magnification error

(unit: inch)
How to analyze image defects
See the following flowchart.
TIP: Depending on the remaining life of the part, the cause of the defect can vary. Check the
remaining life of the part.
Check for defects even if the defect is not repeated.
Image quality problems and solutions 1143

Figure 3-41 Defect analysis flowchart
How to analyze image defects (rollers)
Use the following table to isolate rollers suspected of causing defects.
Table 3-47 Roller period table (repetitive defects)
Roller Periodic
Magnetic roller (MR) 36.9 mm (1.45 in)
Charge Roller (CR) 37.7 mm (1.48 in)

Table 3-47 Roller period table (repetitive defects) (continued)
Roller Periodic
PTB D/R 65.7 mm (2.59 in)
Fuser Belt (HR) 110.0 mm (4.33 in)
Fuser Pressure Roller (PR) 114.7 mm (4.51 in)
PTB BELT 157.1 mm (5.95 in)
OPC/Drum 188.5 mm (7.42 in)
Vertical black lines

Learn about vertical black lines.
Figure 3-42 Typical faulty images
Table 3-48 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Check item Action
1 Check the OPC for scratches or contamination in a Replace the drum unit.
vertical direction.
Vertical black lines 1145

Table 3-48 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)
2 Scanner unit is contaminated (Flow ADF glass/ Wipe the surface of the contaminated parts with a
mirror/CCD sensor) soft cloth.
Vertical light or white lines

Learn about vertical light or white lines.

1 A foreign substance is between the magnetic roller Remove the foreign substance.
and the blade.
No toner on magnetic roller.
Make the hook (transparency sheet is recommended.)
Put the hook into the gap between magnetic roller and
blade.
Pull out foreign substances.
2 The developer in the developer unit is empty or the ● Check the life remaining of the developer unit on
developer unit life has expired. the supply information report.
– If its life has expired, replace the developer

unit.
● Check if the developer layer on magnetic roller is

uniform.
– If the developer layer is short, replace the

developer unit.
3 The laser beam path is blocked. Clean the laser scanner assembly window.
(Foreign substance is on the laser scanner assembly

window.)
Vertical light or white lines 1147

4 The OPC is scratched or contaminated in a vertical Replace the drum unit.

direction.
Horizontal periodic black lines, dots

Learn about horizontal periodic black lines and dots.
1 Horizontal periodic band or dot (CR 38 mm). Clean the contaminated surface on the charge roller
with a soft cloth.
Check if the surface of the charge roller is
contaminated or scratched. If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.
2 Horizontal periodic band or dot (OPC 188 mm). Clean the contaminated surface on the OPC drum
with a soft cloth.
Check if the surface of the OPC drum is contaminated
or scratched. If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.
3 Check if the charge roller contact plate had debris or Clean the charge roller contact plate.
is contaminated.
If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.
If the problem persists after replacing the drum unit,

replace the HVPS board.
Horizontal periodic light/dark lines, dots

Learn about horizontal periodic light/dark lines and dots.

1 Horizontal periodic bands (OPC, 188 mm) This problem is likely to resolve itself over time.
● OPC was exposed for too long. If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.
● Damage was caused by a high voltage in a short

amount of time.
2 Horizontal periodic bands (magnetic roller, 35.7 mm) Replace developer unit.
The magnetic roller is in poor condition.
V-groove of the surface of magnetic roller is not

uniform.
Blurred image
Learn about blurred images.
Blurred image 1149

Step Cause Action
1 High humidity and/or the quality of the paper. Use new, high quality paper.
2 THV transfer voltage is low. Increase the THV transfer voltage.
3 Connection between HVPS and THV is incorrect. Check if the connection between THV high voltage
terminal and HVPS THV terminal is correct.
Check if the connection between the HVPS and TR is

correct.
Foggy image
Learn about foggy images.

Step Cause Action
1 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Replace the drum unit.
2 Toner is over supplied by abnormal TC sensor. Replace the toner cartridge.
3 Transfer assembly voltage is abnormally high. Check the HVPS connection.
● Connection of transfer rollers in THV and TR.
Replace HVPS.
4 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace HVPS.
HVPS is damaged or broken.
Light image
Learn about light image.
Step Cause Action
1 A poor transfer has occurred. Replace HVPS.
Light image 1151

Step Cause Action
2 Output voltage of HVPS is abnormally low. Replace HVPS.
● Color density decreases.
3 TC sensor operates abnormally. Replace the developer unit.
Uneven pitch and jitter image

Learn about uneven pitch and jitter image.

Step Cause Action
1 Under 3 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands have Remove foreign substance from the drive gears.
occurred.
Grease the drive gears.
● Toner cartridge gears
● OPC unit gears.
● Main drive unit gears.
Replace abnormal units.
● Toner cartridge
● Drum unit
● Main drive unit
2 Under 1 mm periodic jitter or horizontal bands have Check if the laser scanner assembly is assembled
occurred. correctly. If not, replace the screws.
Replace the laser scanner assembly.
Skewed image
Learn about skewed images.
Skewed image 1153

1 Is the tray properly installed? Reinstall the tray correctly.
2 Is too much paper loaded in the tray? Remove some paper.
3 Are the paper guides properly set? Adjust the paper guides.
4 Is the surface of the pickup/reverse/feed Clean or replace the contaminated roller.

roller dirty?
5 Is the Flow ADF installed and adjusted Reinstall the Flow ADF unit.
properly?
Adjust the Flow ADF skew.
6 Is the intermediate transfer belt installed Reinstall the ITB unit.

properly?
Poor fusing performance

Learn about poor fusing performance.

Step Cause Action
1 Check the paper type. Check that the paper type displayed on the control
panel is the same type of paper being used for the
Depending on what type of paper is used, print speed print job.
varies.
● Plain (71~90g/), Thick (91~105g/): Full Speed
● Heavy weight (106~175g/): Half Speed
● Envelope (75~90 g/), Label (120~150 g/): Half

Speed
2 The fuser unit is worn out. Replace the fuser unit.
3 Check the surface of the fuser belt and pressure Replace the fuser unit.
roller for scratches.
4 Check the temperature control system for problems. Check the non-contact thermistor sensor
● Thermistor is broken or operates abnormally
● Halogen lamp is broken or operates abnormally
Check the halogen lamp.
If parts are broken, replace the broken parts or the

fuser unit.
5 Check if the pressure control system operates Check the pressure control system.
properly.
If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.
6 Paper is wrapped on the heating roller. Remove the wrapped paper and print a test page.
If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.
Stain on the paper back side

Learn about the stain on the paper back side.
Stain on the paper back side 1155

Step Cause Action
1 Is the transfer roller dirty or worn out? Clean or replace the transfer roller assembly.
2 Is the fuser belt or pressure roller dirty? Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.
3 Check the pressure roller surface for damage or Replace the fuser unit.
scratches.
Setting standard tone

Learn about setting a standard tone.
When to perform the set the standard tone procedure
● When the printer is installed for the first time.
● After replacing the transfer belt (PTB or ITB) or cleaning the color toner density (CTD) sensor.
● When there is a difference in color between models.
● When image brightness changes in comparison to a previous printing.
Figure 3-53 Image brightness (color image shown for contrast)
Normal image Dark image Light image

NOTE: If the problem persists after performing the setting standard tone procedure, investigate other
print-quality causes.
Perform a Setting Standard Tone
Use this procedure to adjust the color tone standard set during manufacturing.

1. Load A4- or Letter-size in a short-edge feeding (SEF) tray.
2. At the control panel, select the Setting item.
3. Log in as an Admin user.
● Adjustment
● Tone Adjustment
● Setting Standard Tone
5. Select the OK item to print a scan ID chart.
6. Place the scan ID chart on the flatbed glass, and then start a scan.
7. When prompted after the scan is complete, Select the OK item.
8. Perform a FullTRC function: Adjustment > Auto Tone Adjustment > Full + Execute Now.
Cancel a Setting Standard Tone
Use this procedure to cancel a setting standard tone and return to the customized tone (set by the user
after setting the standard tone).
● Adjustment
● Tone Adjustment
● Cancel Setting Standard Tone
2. When cancellation is complete, select the OK item
3. Perform a FullTRC function: Adjustment > Auto Tone Adjustment > Full + Execute Now.
Scan image fail
When a problem occurs on the scanned ID chart, an error message displays. Check the following items:
● Check the scanned ID chart for correct placement.
● Make sure that the chart direction is horizontal.
● Retry the setting standard tone procedure.
Jagged characters, unclear characters, or blurred text

Learn about the jagged characters, unclear characters, or blurred text defect.
Jagged characters, unclear characters, or blurred text 1157

Text of lines appear jagged, unclear, or blurred. This defect is usually caused by a faulty laser/scanner
diode.
NOTE: Feed direction (callout 1).
Step Cause Action
1 Is the laser/scanner flat-flexible cable (FFC) correctly Check both ends of the laser/scanner FFC for
connected? damage, and then make sure the FFC is fully seated in
the connectors.
2 After checking the FFC does the error persist? If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner FFC or
the laser/scanner assembly (PN JC97-04864A).
Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models)

Learn about adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models).

1. Open the ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.
Figure 3-55 Open ADF and loosen screws
2. Adjust the position of the ADF hinge according to the skew status.
Figure 3-56 Adjust ADF hinge
Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models) 1159

a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)
Figure 3-57 Adjust hinge

b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
Figure 3-58 Adjust hinge
3. Detach the ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the ADF sponge on the scanner glass.
Close the ADF unit to attach the sponge.
Adjusting the Flow ADF skew

Learn about adjusting the flow ADF skew.
Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1161

1. Open the Flow ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.

2. Adjust the position of the Flow ADF hinge according to the skew status.

a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the

b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the

3. Detach the Flow ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the Flow ADF sponge on the scanner
glass. Close the Flow ADF unit to attach the sponge.

4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams
Learn about the electrical-mechanical diagrams.
Connection diagrams
Learn about the electrical-mechanical connection diagrams.
Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER)

Learn about the connection diagram for the fuser/exit/duplex/toner.
Electrical-mechanical diagrams 1167

HDD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
SATA SIGNA L
SATA PO W ER
CN 22-SATA PO W ER
CN 19-SATA SIGN AL
SATA_RX_N
SATA_RX_P
SATA_TX_P
SATA_TX_N
5V2_SATA
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
EXIT/DU PLEX
I.5m m / 14*2P
Color
CN 33 EXIT/DU PLEX
4 1 14 1 A_DU P_RET TO NER CRUM
DU P_RET 3 2 13 2 nA_DUP_RET 1.5mm / 17*1P
M OT STEP 2 3 12 3 nB_DU P_RET CN 50 TB CRU M JC39-02261A JC39-02214A
1 4 11 4 B_DU P_RET 3.3V_CRUM 1 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_K 2 4 2 3 2 3
5 10 5 A_DU PLEX1 3 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M K
4 SCL_CRUM_ TB_K
3 6 9 6 nA_DUPLEX1 DGN D 4 2 4 1 4 1
DUP1 M O T STEP 2 7 8 7 nB_DU PLEX1 1 5
1 8 7 8 B_DU PLEX1
JC39-02214A
3.3V_CRUM 5 5 1 4 1 4
3 9 6 9 R_5V_PS SDA_CRUM_ TB_C 6 4 2 3 2 3
D up RETU RN 10 5 10 DGND 7 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M C
2 SCL_CRUM_ TB_C
SEN 11 4 11 nSEN SE_P_DUP_RETU RN DGN D 8 2 4 1 4 1
1
1 5
2 12 3 12 DGND
EXIT TEM P JC39-02214A
1 13 2 13 ADC_EXIT_TEMP 3.3V_CRUM 9 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_M 10 4 2 3 2 3
14 1 14 NC SCL_CRUM_ TB_M 11 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M M
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 3
DGN D 12 2 4 1 4 1
3 1 14 15 R_5V_PS 1 5
BIN FU LL1 2 2 13 16 DGND
1 3 12 17 nSEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT1 3.3V_CRUM 13 1
JC39-02214A
5 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_Y 14 4 2 3 2 3
3 1 5 4 11 18 R_5V_PS SCL_CRUM_ TB_Y 15 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M Y
BIN FU LL2 2 2 4 5 10 19 DGND DGN D 16 2 4 1 4 1
1 3 3 6 9 20 nSEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT2 1 5
NC 17
JC39-02190A
7 8 21 R_5V_PS
4 2 8 7 22 DGND
5 1 9 6 23 nDETECT_JOB_SEP
TO NER CRUM
3 10 5 24 24V4 1.5mm / 17*1P Mono
SO L
EXIT GATE
SO LEN O ID 2 CN 50 TB CRU M
1
JC39-02237A 5
11 4 25 EN _EXIT_SO L 3.3V_CRUM 1 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_K 2 4 2 3 2 3
12 3 26 R_5V_PS 3 3 2 3 2 BTL CRU M
3 SCL_CRUM_ TB_K 3
D UP 13 2 27 DGND 4 2 4 1 4 1
2 DGN D
JAM 1 14 1 28 nSEN SE_JAM_ DU PLEX1 1 5
1
3.3V_CRUM 5 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_C 6 4 2 3 2 3
FU SER DRIVE 3 2 3 2 DEVE CRU M
SCL_CRUM_ TB_C 7 3
1.5mm / 16*2P 8 2 4 1 4 1
DGN D
1 5
JC39-02195A CN 30 FU SER DRIVE
10 1 R_DGND 3.3V_CRUM 9
9 2 CLK_BLDC_FUSER 5V_PS 10 2 1 ERASER LED
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_FU SER M_ O N _ERASER 11 1 2
7 4 nEN_BLDC_FU SER
FU SER BLDC
6 DGN D 12
BLDC 5
5
6
NC
R_DGND 3.3V_CRUM 13
4 7 DG ND SDA_CRUM_ TB_Y 14
3 8 DG ND SCL_CRUM_ TB_Y 15
2 9 24V2_SW DGN D 16
1 10 24V2_SW NC 17
3 11 FAN_FUSER_O UT
FUSER OU T 2 12 FB_OUT_FAN _FUSER_OUT
FAN 1 13 DG ND
SIDE CO M 1 3 14 DG ND TO N ER RESERVOIR
COVER OPEN N .O .
N .C.
2
3
2
1
15 CO VER_O PEN _SIDE
16 nCO VER_O PEN_SIDE
I.5mm / 11*2P Color
CN 27 Toner M otor/L
o ck JC39-02257A
4 17 A_FUSER_REL A_TNR_SU P_KC 1 4
TO N ER
3 18 nA_FUSER_REL nA_TNR_SUP_KC 2 3
SU PP
FU SER REL M O T STEP 2 19 nB_FU SER_REL nB_TN R_SU P_KC 3 2
M O T_KC
1 20 B_FU SER_REL B_TN R_SU P_KC 4 1
3 3
1 9 21 FAN_EXIT1 R_5V_PS 5 TN R LO CK
2 2
EXIT FAN 1 2 8 22 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT1 DGN D 6 SEN S_KC
1 1
3 7 23 DG ND nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_KC 7
3 4 6 24 FAN_EXIT2 A_RES_KC 8 4
EXIT FAN 2 2 5 5 25 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT2 nA_RES_KC 9 3 RESERVO IR
1 6 4 26 DG ND nB_RES_KC 10 2 M O T_KC
JC39-02191A B_RES_KC 11 1
3 7 3 27 FAN_EXIT3
EXIT FAN 3 2 8 2 28 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT3 A_TNR_SU P_M Y 12 4
29 DG ND 13 TO N ER
1 9 1 nA_TNR_SUP_M Y 3
SU PP
nB_TN R_SU P_MY 14 2
30 R_5V_PS 15 M O T_M Y
3 3 B_TN R_SU P_M Y 1
Fuser 2 31 DG ND
2
POSI 1 32 nSENS_FU SER_PO S1 R_5V_PS 16 3
1 RES LO CK
DGN D 17 2
nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_MY 18 1 SEN S_M Y
FU SER DRAWE R
A_RES_MY 19 4
I.5m m / 9*2P
JC39-02218A JC39-02217A nA_RES_M Y 20 3 RESERVO IR
CN 40 FUSER DRAW ER nB_RES_M Y 21 2 M O T_M Y
1 11 1 DGND B_RES_M Y 22 1
2 10
FU SER N C TH ERM
CEN TER
3
2
1
3
4
9
8
2
3
4
DGND
N C_C_TD
N C_C_TC
TO N ER RESERVOIR
3 5 7 5
I.5mm / 11*2P Mono
N C TH ERM DGN D CN 27 Toner M otor/L
o ck JC39-02242A
2 6 6 6 N C_S_TD A_TNR_SU P_KC 1 4
SIDE TO NER
1 7 5 7 N C_S_TC nA_TNR_SUP_KC 2 3
SU PP
nB_TN R_SU P_KC 3 2
M OT
8 4 8 nDETECT_FU SER B_TN R_SU P_KC 4 1
9 3 5 3
R_5V_PS TN R LO CK
10 2 6 2
DGN D SEN S
11 1 1
21P-RW ZV-K4GG -P4
21R-RW ZV-K2G G-P4
nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_KC 7

JC39-02243A
8
JST
JST
A_RES_KC 7 1 4
nA_RES_KC 9 6 2 3 RESERVO IR
6 1 10 9 R_5V_PS 10
nB_RES_KC 5 3 2 M OT
5 2 9 10 3.3V_CRUM 11
B_RES_KC 4 4 1
4 3 8 11 ADC_CU RL_TEST
3 7 3 5 3
4 12 DGND RES FU LL
FUSER 2 6 2 6 2
5 13 SDA2_FU SER SEN S
EEPRO M 1 5 1 7 1
6 14 SCL2_FU SER
7 4 15 THERM_ REAR1
8 3 16 THERM_ REAR2
JC39-02244A 4
DGN D 12 4 1
M_ TC_VIN _K 13 3 2 3 TC
9 2 17 THERM_ FRO N T1 14 2 3 2 SENSO R
24V1_TC
10 1 18 THERM_ FRO N T2 15 1 4 1
M_ TN R_VCON _K
R_5V_PS 16
DGN D 17
nSEN SE_RES_FULL 18
A_RES_MY 19
nA_RES_M Y 20
nB_RES_M Y 21
To FDB B_RES_M Y 22
Connection Diagram (Scanner)

Learn about the connection diagram for the scanner.
1168 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

???
CN 55 ???
1 3.3V_MICOM
2 PA30|SWCLK
3 PA31|SWDIO
4 DGND
5 nRST_XMEGA
FLOW DOCUMENT FEEDER

-1.5mm / 17*2P
CN 42 D SDF
M S1_STEP_SCAN 1
CUR_STEP_SCAN 2
DIR_STEP_SCAN 3
nEN _STEP_SCAN 4
PLS_STEP_SCAN 5
PW M _W LED 6
nCO VER_O PEN _PLATEN 2 7
nCO VER_O PEN _PLATEN 1 8
??? nSEN SE_SCAN _HO M E 9
-1.5mm / 6*1P nSEN SE_APS2 10
nSEN SE_APS1 11
CN 51 ??? nDETECT_RSDF 12
6 1 6 1 DG N D nSENSE_PAPER_RADF 13
5 2 5 2 nSEN SE_P_REG I_R1 nSENSE_SCAN_PO S_1 14
4 3 4 3 5V_PS TXD_DSDF 15
3 4 3 4 DG N D RXD_DSDF 16
2 5 2 5 nSEN SE_P_REG I_R2 nRST_RSDF 17
1 6 1 6 5V_PS nSENSE_SCAN_PO S_2 18
DGN D 19
DGN D 20
DGN D 21
DGN D 22
3.3V_SCAN 23
DGN D 24
5V_W KUP 25
DGN D 26
5V_SCAN 27
5V_SCAN 28
DGN D 29
24V_SCAN 30
24V_SCAN 31
24V_SCAN 32
24V_SCAN 33
M S2_STEP_SCAN 34
DCIS
40P FFC
CN 43 DCIS
CLK_M AIN _DCIS_P 1
CLK_M AIN _DCIS_N 2
DGN D 3
LVDO _DCIS_4_P 4
LVDO _DCIS_4_N 5
DGN D 6
LVDO _DCIS_3_P 7
LVDO _DCIS_3_N 8
DGN D 9
LVDO _DCIS_2_P 10
LVDO _DCIS_2_N 11
DGN D 12
RX_CLK_DCIS_P 13
RX_CLK_DCIS_N 14
DGN D 15
LVDO _DCIS_1_P 16
DCIS
LVDO _DCIS_1_N 17
DSDF
DGN D 18
LVDO _DCIS_0_P 19
LVDO _DCIS_0_N 20
DGN D 21
DGN D 22
SDI_DCIS 23
SCLK_DCIS 24
Scanner Unit
SDO _DCIS 25
SLO AD_DCIS 26
DGN D 27
DGN D 28
PI_SH_DCIS 29
DGN D 30
3.3V_SCAN 31
3.3V_SCAN 32
3.3V_SCAN 33
3.3V_SCAN 34
3.3V_SCAN 35
3.3V_SCAN 36
3.3V_SCAN 37
3.3V_SCAN 38
DGN D 39
DGN D 40
CCDM
BBP 50P FFC
50P
CN 41 BBP CN 44 CCDM
1 5V DGN D 1
2 N EN_STEP_DU PLEX1 CLK_M AIN _CCDM_ P 2
3 EN _M P_CLU TCH CLK_M AIN _CCDM_ N 3
4 N EN_STEP_FU SER_REL DGN D 4
5 CO VER_OPEN _SIDE SLO AD_CCDM 5
6 N EN_STEP_TNR_SU P_KC SCLK_CCDM 6
7 DIR_STEP_TNR_SUP_KC SDI_CCDM 7
8 EN _EXIT_SO L DGN D 8
9 N EN_STEP_DUP_RET PITG_CCDM 9
10 NSENSE_T1_PO S nRST_AFE 10
11 N EN_STEP_TNR_SU P_KC SDO _CCDM 11
12 PW M _M P_SO L DGN D 12
13 CLK_BLDC_FU SER LVDO _CCDM _4_N 13
14 N EN_BLDC_FUSER LVDO _CCDM _4_P 14
15 CO VER_OPEN _FRO N T DGN D 15
16 N SEN SE_P_EM PTY2 LVDO _CCDM _3_N 16
17 PLS_STEP_T1 LVDO _CCDM _3_P 17
18 N EN_STEP_T1 DGN D 18
19 nEN_STEP_FEED RX_CLK_CCDM _N 19
20 NSENSE_FUSER_PO S1 RX_CLK_CCDM _P 20
21 nEN_STEP_REGI DGN D 21
22 PLS_STEP_DU PLEX1 LVDO _CCDM _2_N 22
23 nSEN SE_CU RL1 LVDO _CCDM _2_P 23
24 N SEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT1 DGN D 24
25 DIR_STEP_TNR_SUP_M Y LVDO _CCDM _1_N 25
26 N EN_STEP_DU PLEX2 LVDO _CCDM _1_P 26
27 PLS_STEP_DU P_RET DGN D 27
28 N SENSE_JAM_ DUPLEX1 LVDO _CCDM _0_N 28
29 N SEN SE_P_DUP_RETU RN LVDO _CCDM _0_P 29
30 N SEN SE_P_REGI DGN D 30
31 PLS_STEP_DU PLEX2 3.3V_SCAN 31
32 PLS_STEP_FEED 3.3V_SCAN 32
33 PLS_STEP_PICKU P1 3.3V_SCAN 33
34 PLS_STEP_PICKU P2 3.3V_SCAN 34
35 PLS_STEP_REG I 3.3V_SCAN 35
36 nSEN SE_CU RL2 3.3V_SCAN 36
37 N SEN SE_P_PRE_FEED1 3.3V_SCAN 37
38 N SEN SE_P_PRE_FEED2 3.3V_SCAN 38
39 N SEN SE_P_FEED DGN D 39
40 N SEN SE_P_FU SER_O UT DGN D 40
41 N SENSE_JAM_ DUPLEX2 5V_SCAN 41
42 N EN_STEP_PICKU P1 5V_SCAN 42
43 N EN_STEP_PICKU P2 5V_SCAN 43
44 ADC_FB_FR 5V_SCAN 44
45 ADC_FB_REGI DGN D 45
46 ADC_FB_FEED DGN D 46
47 FB_DU P2 10V_CCD 47
48 FB_PU1 10V_CCD 48
49 FB_PU2 10V_CCD 49
50 DGN D 10V_CCD 50
BBP
16P
CN 54 BBP
1 5V
2 N EN_BLDC_O PC_K
3 N READY_BLDC_O PC_K
4 N EN_BLDC_O PC_C
5 N READY_BLDC_O PC_C
6 N EN_BLDC_O PC_M
7 N READY_BLDC_O PC_M
8 N EN_BLDC_O PC_Y
9 N READY_BLDC_O PC_Y
10 NSEN SE_SHUT_ACR
11 NREADY_BLDC_FU SER
12 N EN_STEP_RES_KC
13 DIR_STEP_RES_KC
14 N EN_STEP_RES_M Y
15 DIR_STEP_RES_M Y
16 DGN D
Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB)

Learn about the connection diagram for the laser scanner assembly/OPE/USB.
Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB) 1169

SPEAKER
HUB
FDIJOINT
-1.5m m / 11P
CN20 FDIJO INT

DGND 1
DGND 2
3.3VSUSP 3
5V_SUSP 4
nDETECT_FDI 5
NOT_READY_FDI 6
EN_COPY_EXIT_FDI 7
nEN_COPY_CNT_FDI 8
nDETECT_PSIZE_FDI 9
nDETECT_COLOR_DFI 10
nEN_FDI 11
N/W RJ45
CN1 NETW ORK 1
TD+ 2
TD- 3
RD+ 4
TERM1 5
Color Only LSU SIGNAL M Y
50FFC
TERM2
RD-
6
7
CN25 LSU SIGNAL TERM3 8
MY TERM4 9
1 DGND GREEN- 10
2 PW M _LD_POW ER_M GREEN+ 11 NTWORK
3 DGND YELLOW - 12
4 nHSYNC_M _DP YELLOW +
5 nHSYNC_M _DN
6 DGND
7 nVDO_M _B1_DP
USB
8 nVDO_M _B1_DN
9 DGND CN14 USB 1
10 nSH_M1 USB3D_VBUS 2
11 nSH_M2 USB3D_DN 3
12 DGND USB3D_DP 4
13 VDO_M _B2_DP DGND 5
14 nVDO_M _B2_DN USB3D_PXN 6
15 DGND USB3D_PXP 7
16 nVDO_M _B3_DP DGND 8
17 nVDO_M _B3_DN USB3D_RXN 9
18 DGND USB3D_RXP
19 nSH_M3
20 nSH_M4
21 DGND PC
22 nVDO_M _B4_DP
23 nVDO_M _B4_DN USB HOST Ch2
24 DGND
25 CN17 USB HOST Ch2 1
nLDON_LSU_M
26 USB3H_VBUS_REAR2 2
nLDON_LSU_Y
27 USB3H_REAR2_DN 3
DGND
28 USB3H_REAR2_DP 4
nHSYNC_Y_DP
29 DGND 5
nHSYNC_Y_DN
30 USB3H_REAR2_RXN 6
DGND
31 USB3H_REAR2_RXP 7
nVDO_Y_B1_DP
32 DGND 8
VDO_Y_B1_DN
33 USB3H_REAR2_TXN 9
DGND
34 USB3H_REAR2_TXP
nSH_Y1
35 nSH_Y2
36 DGND
EXT.DRIVE
37 nVDO_Y_B2_DP
38 nVDO_Y_B2_DN USB HOST Ch1
39 DGND
40 nVDO_Y_B3_DP CN16 USB HOST Ch1 1
41 nVDO_Y_B3_DN USB3H_VBUS_REAR1 2
42 DGND USB3H_REAR1_DN 3
43 nSH_Y3 USB3H_REAR1_DP 4
44 nSH_Y4 DGND 5
45 DGND USB3H_REAR1_RXN 6
46 nVDO_Y_B4_DP USB3H_REAR1_RXP 7
47 nVDO_Y_B4_DN DGND 8
48 DGND USB3H_REAR1_TXN 9
LASER SCANNER 49
50
PW M _LD_POW ER_Y
DGND
USB3H_REAR1_TXP
ASSEMBLY CARD READER

(COLR) LSU SIGNAL KC
60FFC
CN2 LSU SIGNALKC
1 DGND
2 DGND
3 DGND
4 DGND
5
6
7
DGND
DGND
DGND
LSU
40FFC
Mono Only
8 DGND
9 DGND CN28 LSU
10 PW M _LD_POW ER_C DGND 1
11 DGND NC 2
12 nVDO_C_B4_DN 24V3 3
13 nVDO_C_B4_DP 24V3 4
14 DGND NC 5
15 nSH_C4 DGND 6
16 nSH_C3 nSTART_LSU_M OT 7
17 DGND nREADY_LSU 8
18 nVDO_C_B3_DN CLK_LSU_M OT 9
19 nVDO_C_B3_DP 5V_LSU 10
20 DGND 5V_LSU 11
21 nVDO_C_B2_DN DGND 12
22
23
24
nVDO_C_B2_DP
DGND
PW M _LD_POW ER_K
DGND
13
14
15
LASER SCANNER
nSH_C2 nHSYNC_K_DP
25
26
nSH_C1
DGND
nHSYNC_K_DN
DGND
16
17
ASSEMBLY
27
28
nVDO_C_B1_DN
nVDO_C_B1_DP
nVDO_K_B1_DP
nVDO_K_B1_DN
18
19
(MONO)
29 DGND DGND 20
30 nHSYNC_C_DN nSH_K1 21
31 nHSYNC_C_DP nSH_K2 22
32 DGND DGND 23
33 nLDON_LSU_C nVDO_K_B2_DP 24
34 nLDON_LSU_K nVDO_K_B2_DN 25
35 DGND DGND 26
36 nVDO_K_B4_DN nVDO_K_B3_DP 27
37 nVDO_K_B4_DP nVDO_K_B3_DN 28
38 DGND DGND 29
39 nSH_K4 nSH_K3 30
40 nSH_K3 nSH_K4 31
41 DGND DGND 32
42 nVDO_K_B3_DN nVDO_K_B4_DP 33
43 nVDO_K_B3_DP nVDO_K_B4_DN 34
44 DGND DGND 35
45 nVDO_K_B2_DN nLDON_LSU_K 36
46 nVDO_K_B2_DP DGND 37
47 DGND DGND 38
48 nSH_K2 DGND 39
49 nSH_K1 CON_DETECT_LSU 40
50 DGND
51 nVDO_K_B1_DN
52 nVDO_K_B1_DP
53 DGND
54 nHSYNC_K_DN
55 nHSYNC_K_DP
56 DGND
57 PW M _LD_POW ER_K
58 DGND
59 ADC_LSU_TEMP
60 CON_DETECT_LSU
Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup)

Learn about the connection diagram for the Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup.

REAR/FRONT/LED
Color Only I.5m m /10*2P TB CRUM
1.5m m /8*1P Color
JC39-02229A JC39-02230A CN35 REAR/FRONT/LED
1 1 15 1 ACR_REAR CN48 TB CRUM
LEFT 2 2 14 2 5VA ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1
ACR 3 3 13 3 DGND 5VA 2
REAR 4 4 12 4 NC DGND 3
5 5 11 5 PW M _ACR_LED_REAR ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4
JC39-02239A JC39-02258A
1 6 10 6 ADC_ACR_FRONT_P R_5V_PS 5 1 3 3
2 2 T1 POSI
RIGHT 2 7 9 7 5VA DGND 6 2
3 1 SENSOR
ACR 3 8 8 8 DGND SENS_T1_POS 7 1
FRONT 4 9 7 9 NC
5 10 6 10 PW M _ACR_LED_FRONT DGND 8 3
nSENSE_P_REGI 9 PAPER REGI
2
5V_PS 10 SENSOR
1 11 5 11 ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1
2 12 4 12 5VA
CENTER
3 13 3 13 DGND
CTD
4 14 2 14 ADC_CTD_CENTER_S TB CRUM
5 15 1 15 PW M _ACR_LED_CENTER 1.5m m /8*1P
CN48 TB CRUM
Mono
ACR SHUTTER 2 1 5 16 DGND ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1 JC39-02236A 7 1 JC39-02235A 1
M OT DC 1 2 4 17 OUT_DC_ACR_SHUT1 6 2
5VA 2 2
JC39-02220A DGND 3 5 3 3 CTD SENSOR
3 3 3 18 R_5V_PS 4 4
ACR SHUTTER ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4 4
2 4 2 19 DGND 3 5
SENS PW M _ACR_LED_CENTER 5 5
1 5 1 20 nSENSE_SHUT_ACR
DGND 6 2 6 2 INNER
ADC_INNER_TEM P 7 1 7 1 TEM P
PICKUP 8
DGND 3 1 3
9 PAPER REGI
nSENSE_P_REGI 2 2 2
10 SENSOR
CN49 PICKUP 5V_PS 1 3 1
JC39-02234A 1 JC39-02204A
3 1 9 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EM PTY1 2 2 8 2 DGND
1 3 7 3 nSENSE_P_EM PTY1
JC39-02201A 4 m icroSD SOCKET
3 4 6 R_5V_PS
2 5 5 5 DGND
PAPER_LIFT1 CN12 microSD SOCKET
1 6 4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1 1
DATA2_SD
2
3 7 3 7 DGND DATA3_SD
3
FEED1 2 8 2 8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1 CM D_SD
4
1 9 1 9 5V_PS 3.3V
5
CLK_SD
6
4 10 A_PICKUP1 DGND
7
3 11 nA_PICKUP1 DATA0_SD
PICKUP1 8
M OT STEP 2 12 nB_PICKUP1 DATA1_SD
9
1 13 B_PICKUP1 DGND
10
DGND
11
3 14 R_5V_PS DGND
1 10 12
2 15 DGND DGND
PAPER_EM PTY2 2 9 13
1 16 nSENSE_P_EM PTY2 DGND
3 8 14
DGND
3
JC39-02202A 17 R_5V_PS
4 7
2 5 6 18 DGND M SOK
PAPER_LIFT2
1 6 5 19 nSENSE_C_LIFT2
CN21 M SOK
20 DGND 1
3 7 4 DGND
FEED2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2 2
2 8 3 SCK_M SOK
22 5V_PS 3
1 9 2 DGND
4
10 1 M SOI_M SOK
5
DGND
4 23 A_PICKUP2 6
nSS_M SOK
PICKUP2 3 24 nA_PICKUP2 7
DGND
M OT STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2 M SIO_M SOK
8
1 26 B_PICKUP2 9
3_3V_PS
10
SCL0_M SOK
11
3_3V_PS
FEED_REGI 12
SDA0_M SOK
DEBUGGER M AIN
CN53 FEED_REGI
JC39-02336A -2.0mm /4*1P
1 6 1 A_FEED
2 5 2 24V4 CN8 DEBUGGER M AIN
FEED M OT
STEP 3 4 3 nA_FEED 3.3V 1
4 3 4 nB_FEED RXD_M CB 2
HYBRID
5 2 5 24V4 TXD_M CB 3
6 1 6 B_FEED DGND 4
1 6 7 A_REGI DEBUGGER SCAN

2 5 8 24V1_SW -2.0mm /4*1P
REGIM OT
STEP 3 4 9 nA_REGI
CN9 DEBUGGER SCAN
4 3 10 nB_REGI
HYBRID 11 24V1_SW 3.3V 1
5 2 2
12 B_REGI RXD_SCB
6 1 3
TXD_SCB
M P CLUTCH DGND 4
1 2 13 24V4
CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH
DEBUGGER ENGINE
-2.0mm /4*1P
SIDE /MP CN10 DEBUGGER
ENGINE
1.5m m /20*2P
3.3V 1
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A CN32 SIDE / M P /PTB RXD_ENG 2
2 1 5 1 20 1 24V3 TXD_ENG 3
M P SO L
1 2 4 2 19 2 PW M _MP _SOL DGND 4
INNER
JC39-02210A ENGINE PANEL
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
-1.5m m /5*1P FINISHER
M P EM PTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EM PTY CN11 ENGINE PANEL
DGND 1
3 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS 5V_SUSP 2
M P PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_W IDTH RXD_ENG_PANEL 3
W IDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND R_5V_SUSP 4
JC39-02211A TXD_ENG_PANEL 5
3 4 3 9 12 9 R_5V_PS
M P PAPER
2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH
1 6 1 11 10 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH DUAL FAX
3 1 3 12 9 12 DGND CN24 DUALFAX

PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8 13 nSENSE_P_FEED 5V_SUSP 1 FINISHER
1 3 1 14 7 14 5V_PS DGND 2
JC39-02208A 3.3V 3
3K
4 15 6 15 A_DUPLEX2 3.3V 4
DUP2 3 16 5 16 nA_DUPLEX2 DGND 5
M OT STEP 2 17 4 17 nB_DUPLEX2 DGND 6
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2 CM L_M ODEM 1 7
3 CM L_M ODEM 2 8 *****-****/
19 2 19 NC AOUT0 9 M OLEX
20 1 20 NC AOUT1 10
nRST_M ODEM 1 11
JC39-02338A 1 6
JC39-02240A 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS nCTS_M ODEM 1 12
3 54679-1619/
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND nCTS_M ODEM 2 13
M OLEX
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1 nRTS_M ODEM 1 14
nRTS_M ODEM 2 15
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS DGND 16
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND nDETECT_MO DEM 1 17
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2 nDETECT_MO DEM 2 18
TXD_M ODEM1 19
4 7 4 TXD_M ODEM2 20
3 8 3 RXD_M ODEM1 21
PTB CRUM
2 9 2 RXD_M ODEM2 22
Mono 1 10 1 nRI_MOD EM _1
nRI_MOD EM _2
23
24
nINT_M ODEM _1 25
nINT_M ODEM _2 26
nDCD_M ODEM _1 27
PTB 4 1 7 27 DGND nDCD_M ODEM _2 28
7 14
W ASTE 3 2 6 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL nRST_M ODEM _2 29
8 13
FULL 2 3 5 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED DGND 30
9 12
1 4 4 30 R_5V_PS
10 11
11 10 31 3.3V_CRUM
JC39-02207A 12 9 32 SCL2_PTB
13 8 33 SDA2_PTB
14 7 34 DGND
3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX 6 2
2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2 7 1
1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM _DUPLEX2
3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 39 DGND
2 2 2 19 2
OUT 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
1 3 1 20 1
JC39-02209A
3 1 3
FAN
2 2 2
SIDE
1 3 1
To FDB
2-292246-2/
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A TYCO
3 1 6 1
CURL1 2 2 5 2
1 3 4 3
2-292249-2/
3 4 3 4 TYCO
CURL2 2 5 2 5
1 6 1 6
7
8 DCF
Color 9
10
LC T HCF
Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup) 1171

Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock)
Learn about the connection diagram for the OPC/WTB/CST Lock.

T1 /ERASER /OPC CRUM
-1.5mm /16*2P OPC HOM E
CN36 T1 / ERASER /
JC39-02256A JC39-02255A OPC CRUM CN29 O PC HO M E
1 1 6 1 6 1 5V_PS
JC39-02240A
R_5V_PS 1 3
2 2 5 2 5 2 ON_ERASER_K DGND 2 2
3 3 4 3
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_K 3 1
4 4 3 4 4 3 3.3V_CRUM
3 4 SDA_CRUM _OPC_K
2 R_5V_PS 4 3
5 2 5 2 5 SCL_CRUM _OPC_K
1 DGND 5 2
6 1 6 1 6 DGND nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_C 6 1
R_5V_PS 7 3
JC39-02256A DGND 8 2
1 1 6 1 6 7 5V_PS 9 1
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_M
2 2 5 2 5 8 ON_ERASER_C
3 3 4 3 R_5V_PS 10 3
4 4 3 4 4 9 3.3V_CRUM 11 2
DGND
3 10 SDA_CRUM _OPC_C 12 1
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_Y
2 5 2 5 2 11 SCL_CRUM _OPC_C
1 6 1 6 1 12 DGND
2 13 ADC_INNER_TEMP
1 14 DGND OPC K
15 NC
16 NC CN29 OPC K JC39-02239A
JC39-02256A 1 10
DIR_BLDC_OPC_K 9
1 1 6 1 6 17 5V_PS 2
CLK_BLDC_OPC_K 8
2 2 5 2 5 18 ON_ERASER_M 3
nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K 7
3 3 4 3 4
nEN_BLDC_OPC_K 6
4 4 3 4 4 19 3.3V_CRUM 5
3 20 SDA_CRUM _OPC_M
NC
6 5 BLDC
2 BRK_BLDC_OPC_K 4
5 2 5 2 21 SCL_CRUM _OPC_M 7
1 DGND 3
6 1 6 1 22 DGND 8
DGND 2
9
DGND 1
10
DGND
11
JC39-02256A NC
1 6 1 6 23 5V_PS 12
1
2 2 5 2 5 24 ON_ERASER_Y
3 3 4 3
4 4 3 4 4 25 3.3V_CRUM
3 26 SDA_CRUM _OPC_Y
2 5 2 5 2 27 SCL_CRUM _OPC_Y T/C SENSOR
1 6 1 6 1 28 DGND -1.5m m /15*2P
CN34 T/C SENSOR
1 4 29 A_T1 DGND 1 JC39-02260A JC39-02259A
2 3 30 nA_T1 4 1 4
TC_VIN_K 2 3 2 3
3 2 31 nB_T1 3
24V1_TC 2 3 2
4 1 32 B_T1 4
TNR_VCON_K 1 4 1
DGND 5 4 1
JC39-02259A 4
TC_VIN_C 6 3 2 3
24V1_TC 7 2 3 2
TNR_VCON_C 8 1 4 1
R_5V_PS 9
12 1 3
DGND 10
11 2 2
nSENSE_FULL_RES_K 11
10 3 1
R_5V_PS 12
9 4 3
DGND 13
BLDC OPC KCMY 8 5 2
nSENSE_FULL_RES_C 14
7 6 1
JC39-02342A
CN47 BLDC OPC NC 15
6 7 3
JC39-02232A KCM Y 5 8 2
10 1 DIR_BLDC_OPC_K 4 9 1
9 2 CLK_BLDC_OPC_K
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K 3 10 3
7 4 nEN_BLDC_OPC_K 2 11 2
6 5 NC
BLDC 5 6 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_K
1 12 1
4 7 DGND DGND 16
4 1
JC39-02259A 4
3 8 DGND TC_VIN_M 17
3 2 3
2 9 24V1_SW 24V1_TC 18
2 3 2
1 10 24V1_SW TNR_VCON_M 19
1 4 1
10 11 DIR_BLDC_OPC_C DGND 20
4 1
JC39-02259A 4
9 12 CLK_BLDC_OPC_C TC_VIN_Y 21
3 2 3
8 13 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_C 24V1_TC 22
2 3 2
7 14 nEN_BLDC_OPC_C TNR_VCON_Y 23
1 4 1
6 15 NC
BLDC 5 16 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_C R_5V_PS 24
4 17 DGND DGND 25
3 18 DGND nSENSE_FULL_RES_M 26
2 19 24V7
1 20 24V7 R_5V_PS 27
DGND 28
10 21 DIR_BLDC_OPC_M nSENSE_FULL_RES_Y 29
9 22 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M
8 23 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M NC 30
7 24 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M
6 25 NC
BLDC 5 26 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_M
4 27 DGND
3 28 DGND
2 29 24V7
1 30 24V7 HVPS2 /SKEW MO TOR
-1.5mm /12*2P
10 31 DIR_BLDC_OPC_Y CN4 HVPS2 / SKEW CN2
9 32 CLK_BLDC_OPC_Y M O TOR
33 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_Y
JC39-02228A 12 nEN_DEVE_AC_K
8 nEN_DEVE_AC_K 1 12
7 34 nEN_BLDC_OPC_Y nEN_DEVE_AC_C 2 11 11 nEN_DEVE_AC_C
6 35 NC nEN_DEVE_AC_M 3 10 10 nEN_DEVE_AC_M
BLDC 5 36 BRK_BLDC_OPC_Y nEN_DEVE_AC_Y 4 9 9 nEN_DEVE_AC_Y
4 37 DGND ADC_READ_HVPS_24V 5 8 8 ADC_READ_HVPS_24V
3 38 DGND DGND 6 7 7 GND
2 39 24V5 DGND 7 6 6 GND
1 40 24V5 DGND 8 5 5 GND
3.3V_PS 9 4 4 3.3V
24V2_SW 10 3 3 24V
24V2_SW 11 2 2 24V
24V2_SW 12 1 1 24V
A_SKEW _Y 13 12
nA_SKEW _Y 14 11
B_SKEW _Y 15 10
nB_SKEW _Y 16 9
A_SKEW _M 17 8
nA_SKEW _M 18 7
B_SKEW _M 19 6
nB_SKEW _M 20 5
A_SKEW _C 21 4
nA_SKEW _C 22 3
B_SKEW _C 23 2
nB_SKEW _C 24 1
W TB/CST LOCK/FAN_LSU
CN38 WTB/CST/
LOCK/FAN_LSU JC39-02349A
FAN_LSU 1 3
FB_OUT_ FAN_LSU 2 2
DGND 3 1
A_W TB 4 4
nA_W TB 5 3
nB_W TB 6 2
B_W TB 7 1
DGND 8 3 1 COM
COVER_OPEN_FRONT 9 2 2 N.O.
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT 10 1 3 N.C.
DGND 11 4 1 4
ADC_W TB_FULL 12 3 2 3
EN_W TB_LED 13 2 3 2
5V_PS 14 1 4 1
R_5V_PS 15 3
DGND 16 2
nDETECT_W TB 17 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_2 18 10 1 2 1
R_5V_PS 20 8 3 3
DGND 21 7 4 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK1 22 6 5 1
JC39-02186A
R_5V_PS 25 3 8 3
DGND 26 2 9 2
NC 28
LSU PD /RESERVOIR SENSOR

-1.5m m /22*1P
CN26 LSU P M OTOR JC39-02231A

5V_LSU 1
5V_LSU 2
DGND 3
24V2 4
DGND 5
nSTART_LSU_M OT 6
nREADY_LSU 7
CLK_LSU_M OT 8
Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock) 1173

Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB)
Learn about the connection diagram for the HVPS/LVPS/FDB.
M ono Only
HVPS(MONO)
HVPS
24FFC
HEATER SW ITCH
M AIN SW ITCH
CN31 HVPS
nDETECT_HVPS 1 1 nDETECT_HVPS
24V2_SW 2 2 24V
24V2_SW 3 3 24V
ADC_HVPS_24V 4 4 ADC_HVPS_24V
24V2_SW 5 5 24V
GND 6 6 GND
JC39-02250A
GND 7 7 GND
3.3V 8 8 3.3V
GND 9 9 GND
NC 10 10 NC
ADC_READ_M HV 11 11 ADC_READ_M HV
JC39-02197A
AC
PW M _THV+_CV_hybrid 12 12 PW M _THV+_CV_hybrid
JC39-02203A
PW M _M HV 13 13 PW M _M HV
PW M _THV+_CV_SELECT_hybrid 14 14 PW M _THV+_CV_SELECT_hybrid
J
9
-
A
7
C03
21
ToFUSER
PW M _SAW 15 15 PW M _SAW
ADC_READ_THV 16 16 ADC_READ_THV
INLET
PW M _THV_N 17 17 PW M _THV_N
nEN_DEVE 18 18 nEN_DEVE
PW M _FUSER_BIAS 19 19 PW M _FUSER_BIAS
PW M _DEVE_DC 20 20 PW M _DEVE_DC
GND
PW M _THV_P 21 21 PW M _THV_P
PW M _DEVE_VPP 22 22 PW M _DEVE_VPP
JC39-02199A
PW M _DEVE_AC 23 23 PW M _DEVE_AC
GND 24 24 GND
JC39-02248A
4
3
2
1
HEATER SW ITCH
4
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
M AIN SW ITCH
LIVE
LIVE
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
CN10
LIVE
LIVE
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
CN5
NEUTRAL
LIVE
CN1
COM M ON
LAM P2
LAM P1
CN6
FUSER
INLET
DEVE HV M 2
JC39-02249A
To INPUT OPTION
THV M
JC39-02247A
SAW /M HV
CN2 1
1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL 2
M ono :SM PS TYPE3R
TYPE5 3
Color SM
INPUT OPTION
(OPTI
CN7 (Blue)
1 LIVE CN3
JC39-02246A
2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE 1
O N/SCAN)
: PS TYPE4
FDB
2 NEUTRAL FUSER HV M 2
TYPE3R TYPE3R
DCF
JC39-02193A
CON1 CN8(Red)
LIVE 1 1 LIVE CN4
NEUTRAL 2 2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL JC39-02
6196A
J
C
3
9
-
0
2
1
A
JC39-02192A
ColorOnly
HVPS
220V Only
35FFC
HVPS(COLOR)
CN11
CN3 HVPS
ON_FUSER_CENTER 1
1
REACTOR
ON_FUSER_RELAY 5
nDETECT_HVPS 1 1 nDETECT_HVPS
ON_SM PS_RELAY 7
FUSER_ON
24VS
RELAY_ON
24V_ON/OFF
GND
CON4
+24V3
GND
+24V2
GND
+24V1
GND
+5V
CON3
2
ON_FUSER_SIDE 2
PW M _D_AC_FREQ 2 2 PW M _D_AC_FREQ
TYPE3R S
ZERO_CROSS 10
SM PS TYPE 3R
M AIN IF
PW M _D_AC_VPP_Y 3 3 PW M _D_AC_VPP_Y
AC_SENSE 9
ADC_R_M HV_K 4 4 ADC_R_M HV_K

+24VS2 6
+24VS1 4
PW M _D_DC_Y 5 5 PW M _D_DC_Y
CN12
GND 8
GND 3
CN9
IGNAL
NC 6 6 NC
1
PW M _DC_AC_VPP_M 7 7 PW M _DC_AC_VPP_M
2
8 8 PW M _THV+_CC_SEL
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PW M _THV+_CC_SEL
PW M _D_DC_M 9 9 PW M _D_DC_M
JC27-00 PW M _THV+CC_Hyb 10 10 PW M _THV+CC_Hyb
90009A
J
2
7
0
A
C
- 0 PW M _D_AC_VPP_C 11 11 PW M _D_AC_VPP_C
PW M _M HV_K 12 12 PW M _M HV_K
JC39-02252A
SM PS TYPE5 6*2P PW M _D_DC_C 13 13 PW M _D_DC_C
CN5 SM PS TYPE5 PW M _M HV_C 14 14 PW M _M HV_C
1 5V1 PW M _D_AC_VPP_K 15 15 PW M _D_AC_VPP_K
2 5V2 PW M _M HV_M 16 16 PW M _M HV_M
SM PS TYPE5 PW M _D_DC_K 17 17 PW M _D_DC_K
TYPE5 3 24V1
4 24V2 PW M _M HV_Y 18 18 PW M _M HV_Y
CN3 JC39-02213A(C) 19 19 ADC_R_THV2
CN1 +24V1 1 3
2
1
A
J
9
-
4
)
M
(-
32
C
0
40
A2 M )
JC39-02344A(
5
6
24V3 ADC_R_THV2
ADC_R_M HV_C 20 20 ADC_R_M HV_C
1 LIVE 24V4 HV_OPC_Y
GND 2
JC39-02225A
7 DGND PW M _THV_2 21 21 PW M _THV_2
2 NEUTRAL +24V2 3
8 DGND ADC_R_M HV_M 22 22 ADC_R_M HV_M HV_OPC_M
GND 4 23 23 PW M _THV2_CLEAN
9 DGND PW M _THV2_CLEAN
+24V3 5 24 24 ADC_R_M HV_Y
10 DGND ADC_R_M HV_Y HV_OPC_C
GND 6 25 25 PW M _SAW
11 DGND PW M _SAW
+24V4 7 26 26 ADC_R_ITHV_Y
12 DGND ADC_R_ITHV_Y HV_OPC_K
(M ain SYSTEM )
GND 8 27 27 PW M _FUSER_BIAS
PW M _FUSER_BIAS
SM PS TYPE5
SM PS TYPE3 4*2P ADC_R_ITHV_M 28 28 ADC_R_ITHV_M

ADC_R_IHTV_K 29 29 ADC_R_IHTV_K
TYPE5 SIGNAL CN6 SM PS TYPE4
PW M _ITHV_Y 30 30 PW M _ITHV_Y
/ TYPE3R
CN4 JC39-02212A(C) 8 1 ADC_R_IHTV_C 31 31 ADC_R_IHTV_C
5V_OPT
JC39-02223A
HV_DEVE_Y
GND 1 C
9
10
J
3
9
2
(
A
)
C
-
4
M-
20 M )
3
JC39-02343A( 7 2 24V5 PW M _ITHV_M 32 32 PW M _ITHV_M
+24V_ON/OFF 2 6 3 PW M _ITHV_K 33 33 PW M _ITHV_K
24V6 HV_DEVE_M
GND 3 5 4 PW M _ITHV_C 34 34 PW M _ITHV_C
24V7
4 5 GND 35 35 GND
DGND HV_DEVE_C
3 6 DGND
SM PS TYPE5 2 7 DGND
1 HV_DEVE_K
8 DGND
CN2
+5V1 1
GND 2
JC39-02226A
HV_T1_Y 1
+5V2 3 AC CTRL./FDB /PAPER 2
GND 4
DET 1.5m m /17*2P HV_T1_M 3
JC39-02221A(C) CN39 AC CTRL./ 4
-
2
1
)
C
J
C
0
3
M
3
2
A3
9 M)
9
2
(
JC39-02233A( JC39-02569A FDB / PAPER DET HV_T1_C 5
JC39-02196A
J
C
3
9
-
0
2
1
6
A 6
17 1 ZEROCROSS
10 1 HV_T1_K 7
16 2 AC_SENS
9 2
15 3 DGND
8 3
14 4 ON_SM PS_RREAY
7 4
13 5 24V3
6 5
C39-02227A
12 6 ON_FUSER_RELAY T2HV
5 6
11 7 24VS_FUSER
4 7
10 8 DGND
3 8
9 9 ON_FUSER_SIDE
2 9
8 10 ON_FUSER_CENTER
1 10 1
3
2 11 11 EN_24V_ENGINE 2
7
JC39-02224A
1 12 6 12 DGND HV_SAW
3
5
4
3
2 13 5 13 EN_24V_OPTION
1 14 4 14 DGND
3 15 3 15 FAN_SM PS
SM PS
FAN
2 16 2 16 FB_OUT_FAN_SM PS
1 17 1 17 DGND
4 18 nDETECT_CST1
PAPER SIZE1 PAPER SIZE2
3 19 DGND
2 20 ADC_P_SIZE1
1 21 DGND
4 22 nDETECT_CST2
3 23 DGND
2 24 ADC_P_SIZE2
1 25 1.8V_PS
26 FAN_DEVE
DEVE / OPC
3
2 27 FB_OUT_FAN_DEVE
FAN
1 28 DGND
4 29 ADC_OUT_TEM P
3 30 DGND
2 31 ADC_OUT_HUM I
1 32 3.3V_PS
OUT TEM P
/HUM ID
33 NC
34 NC
Electrical-mechanical relationships diagrams

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagrams.
Toner supply drive (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the toner supply drive.

Figure 4-1 Toner supply drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)
JC31-00110A
1 TONER
2 SUPPLY
3 MOT
4
24v
0604-001393
5 TONER
6 LOCK
7 SENSOR
5v
CN 27 Connector on Main PCA

TONER RESERVOIR
-1.5mm /11*2P
CN27 TonerMotor/Lock
A_TNR_SUP_KC 1
nA_TNR_SUP-KC 2 TONER SUPP MOT JC39-02242A
nB_TNR_SUP_KC 3
B_TNR_SUP_KC 4
R_5V_PS 5
TNR LOCK SENS 5v JC39-02242A
DGND 6
nSENSE_TNR_LOCK_KC 7
JC39-02242A JC39-02243A
A_RES_KC 8 7 1 4
nA_RES_KC 9 6 2 3 RESERVOIR
nB_RES_KC 10 5 3 2 MOT
B_RES_KC 11 4 4 1
JC39-02242A JC39-02243A
3 5 3
2 RES FULL
2 6 SENS
1 7 1
JC39-02244A
DGND 12 4 1 4
3 2 3 TC
M_TC_VIN_K 13
2 3 2 SENSOR
24V1_TC 14
1 4 1
M_TNR_VCON_K 15
R_5V_PS 16
DGND 17
nSENSE_RES_FULL 18
JC39-02242A
A_RES_MY 19
nA_RES_M Y 20
nB_RES_M Y 21
B_RES_M Y 22
Toner supply drive (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific) 1175

Registration unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the registration unit.
Figure 4-2 Registration unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)
0604-001381
PAPER 3
REGI 2
SENSOR 1
5v
TB CRUM
-1.5mm /8*1P
CN48 TB CRUM JC39-02236A JC39-02235A

ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1 7 1 1
5VA 2 6 2 2
DGND 3 5 3 3 CTD SENSOR
ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4 4 4 4
PW M_ACR_LED_CENTER 5 3 5 5
JC39-02236A JC39-02235A
DGND 6 2 6 2 INNER
ADC_INNER_TEMP 7 1 7 1 TEMP
DGND 8 JC39-02236A JC39-02204A

3 1 3
nSENSE_P_REGI 9 2 2 2
5V_PS 10 3 1 PAPER REGI
1
5v SENSOR
Pickup unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup unit.

Figure 4-3 Pickup unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)
0604-001393
1
4 PAPER_EMPTY1
0604-001393 2
5 5v
PAPER_LIFT1 3
6
5v
PICKUP
CN49 PICKUP
JC39-02234A
9 1 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY1 5v JC39-02201A
8 2 DGND
7 3 nSENSE_P_EMPTY1
5v
JC39-02234A
6 4 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT1 5v JC39-02201A 5 5 DGND
4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1
5v
3 JC39-02234A
3 7 7 DGND
FEED1 2 8 2
8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1
1 9 1
9 5V_PS
JC39-02234A
4 10 A_PICKUP1
PICKUP1 3
MOT STEP 2
11 nA_PICKUP1
12 nB_PICKUP1
1 13 B_PICKUP1
JC39-02234A
3 1 10 14 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY2 2 2 9 15 DGND
1 3 8 16 nSENSE_P_EMPTY2
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 4 7
17 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT2 2 5 6
18 DGND
1 6 5
19 nSENSE_P_PRE_LIFT2
4 JC39-02234A
3 7 20 DGND
FEED2 2 8 3
2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2
1 9
1 22 5V_PS
10
JC39-02234A 23 A_PICKUP2
4
3 24 nA_PICKUP2
PICKUP2
MOT
STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2
1 26 B_PICKUP2
Pickup unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific) 1177

Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the side unit.

Figure 4-4 Side unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)
0604-001393
P FUSER 3
OUT SENSOR 2
5v 1
JC93-01085A
4 DUP2 MOT
3 24v
2
3 0604-001490 1
2
1
PRE FEED
SENSOR
3
5v 2
1
0604-001393
DUPLEX JAM 2
SENSOR
5v
SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P
CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
5 1 20
4 2 19 2 PW M_MP_SOL
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS
5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
4 8 13 8 DGND
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 9 R_5V_PS

3 9 12
2 10 11 10 DGND
1 11 10 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 12 DGND

3 12 9
PRE FEED 5v JC39-02208A 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
2 13 8
1 7 14 5V_PS
14 5v
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 15 A_DUPLEX2
4 15 6
16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
DUP2 MOT 3 5
2 17 17 nB_DUPLEX2
4 24v
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2
JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC
JC39-02338A JC39-02240A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
4 7 4
3 8 3
PTB CRUM 2 9 2
Mono 1 10 1
4 7 JC39-02205A
PTB 1 7 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
WASTE 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL
2 3 5 9 12
FULL 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
JC39-02205A
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
JC39-02207A 12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
14 34 DGND
7
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
DUPLEX JAM 2 5v 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
2 16 5 36 DGND
1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
5v
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
P FUSER OUT 5v JC39-02209A 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
2 19 2 39 DGND
1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
5v
Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific) 1179

1180
MAIN SWITCH
HEATER
SWITCH
JC39-02197A
JC39-022203A
TO FUSER
INLET
GND
JC39-02199A
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
CN5
LIVE
LIVE
LIVE
LIVE
CN1
CN6
LIVE
CN10
INLET
FUSER
LAM P2
LAM P1
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
COMMON
MAIN SWITCH
HEATER SWITCH
CN2
1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL
(Heater_Option)
To INPUT OPTION
TYPE5
INPUT OPTION
INLET
CN7 (Blue)
Heater_Cassette_Main
1 LIVE CN3
MAIN SWITCH
2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE
(OPTION/SCAN)
2 NEUTRAL
Color SM PS TYPE4
FDB
Mono: SM PS TYPE3R
TYPE 3R TYPE3R
DCF
CON1 CN8 (Red)
LIVE 1 1 LIVE CN4
NEUTRAL 2 2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL JC39-02196A
JC39-02193A
Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

JC39-02192A
CN11
1
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
24VS
CON4
CON3
2
+24V3
+24V2
+24V1
RELAY_ON
FUSER_ON
24V_ON/OFF
MAIN IF
CN12
1
220V Only
REACTOR
AC_SENSE
GND
ON_SM PS_RELAY
+24VS2
ON_FUSER_RELAY
+24VS1
GND
ON_FUSER_SIDE
ON_FUSER_CENTER
CN9
ZERO_CROSS
2
SM PS TYPE 3R
TYPE 3R SIGNAL
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
JC27-00009A
SM PS TYPES5 6*2P
CN5 SM PS TYPE5
1 5V1
SM PS TYPE 5 2 5V2
CTD unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)

TYPE5 3 24V1
Rear unit (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)
CN3 4 24V2
CN1
JC39-02213A (C)
5 24V3
REACTOR (220 ONLY)

+24V1 1 JC39-02344A (M)
1 LIVE 6 24V4
GND 2
2 NEUTRAL 7 DGND
+24V2 3
GND 4 8 DGND
+24V3 5 9 DGND
GND 6 10 DGND
+24V4 7 11 DGND
GND 8 12 DGND
SM PS TYPES3 4*2P
TYPE5 SIGNAL CN6 SM PS TYPE4
/TYPE3R
CN4 8 1 5V_OPT
JC39-02212A (C)
GND 1 7 2 24V5
JC39-02343A (M)
+24V_ON/OFF 2 6 3 24V6
SM PS TYPE5
(Main SYSTEM)
GND 3 5 4 24V7
4 5 DGND
3 6 DGND
2 7 DGND
SM PS TYPE 5
1 8 DGND
CN2
+5V1 1
GND 2
+5V2 3
AC CTRL./FDB/PAPER
GND 4
DET-1.5mm /17*2P
JC39-02221A (C) CN39 AC CTRL./
JC39-02233A (M) FDB / PAPER DET
JC39-02196A
10 1 17 1 ZEROCROSS
9 2 16 2 AC_SENS
8 3 15 3 DGND
7 4 14 4 ON_SM PS_RREAY
6 5 13 5 24V3
5 6 12 6 ON_FUSER_RELAY
4 7 11 7 24VS_FUSER
8 DGND
3 8 10
9 ON_FUSER_SIDE
2 9 9
10 ON_FUSER_CENTER
1 10 8
3
2 11 11 EN_24V_ENGINE
7 12 DGND
1 12 6
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the rear unit.
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the CTD unit.
5
4
3
13 5 13 EN_24V_OPTION
2
14 4 14 DGND
1
3 15 3 15 FAN_SM PS
2 16 2 16 FB_OUT_FAN_SM PS
FAN
SM PS
1 17 1 17 DGND
1
2
3
4
4 18 nDETECT_CST1
3 19 DGND
1
2
3
4
2 20 ADC_P_SIZE1
1 21 DGND
4 22 nDETECT_CST2
PAPER SIZE2
3 23 DGND
PAPER SIZE1
2 24 ADC_P_SIZE2
PAPER SIZE1
1 25 1.8V_PS
3 26 FAN_DEVE
PAPER SIZE2
2 27 FB_OUT_FAN_DEVE
Figure 4-5 Rear unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)
FAN
1 28 DGND
DEVE/OPC
4 29 ADC_OUT_TEMP
3 30 DGND
2 31 ADC_OUT_HUM I
1 32 3.3V_PS
/HUM ID
OUT TEMP
33 NC
34 NC
Figure 4-6 CTD unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560 specific)
1 JC39-02235A
2 CTD SENSOR
5v
3
4
5
TB CRUM
-1.5mm /8*1P
CN48 TB CRUM JC39-02236A

ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1 7 1
5VA 2 6 2 CTD SENSOR 5v
DGND 3 5 3
4 4 JC39-02235A
ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4
PW M_ACR_LED_CENTER 5 3 5
JC39-02236A
DGND 6 2 6 2 INNER
ADC_INNER_TEMP 7 1 7 1 TEMP
DGND 8
JC39-02236A
3 1 3
nSENSE_P_REGI 9 2 2 PAPER REGI
2
5V_PS 10 SENSOR
1 3 1
JC39-02204A
Exit unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the exit unit.
Exit unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1181
Figure 4-7 Exit unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)
JC93-00802A
5
JC93-00802A
6
7 1
8 2
3
DUP1 MOT 4
DUP_RET
MOT
JC93-00802A
24v 24v
EXIT GATE 3
SOLENOID 2
1
24v

EXIT/DUPLEX
-1.5Vmm /14*2P
CN33 EXIT/DUPLEX
DUP_RET JC39-02188A
1 14 1 A_DUP_RET
MOT 2 13 2 nA_DUP_RET
3 24v 12
3 nB_DUP_RET
4 11 4 B_DUP_RET
JC39-02188A 5 A_DUPLEX1
5 10
DUP1 MOT 6 nA_DUPLEX1
6 24v 9 7 nB_DUPLEX1
7 8
8 7 8 B_DUPLEX1
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 9 R_5V_PS

3 9 6 10 DGND
Dup RETURN 5
SEN 2 10 11 nSENSE_P_DUP_RETURN
1 11 4
JC39-02189A 3 JC39-02188A
2 12 12 DGND
13 2 13 ADC_EXIT_TEMP
1
14 1 14 NC
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A
3 1 14 15 R_5V_PS
BINFULL1 2 2 13 16 DGND
1 3 12 17 nSENSE_P_BINFULL_EXIT1
BINFULL2
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A
3 1 5 4 11 18 R_5V_PS
2 2 4 5 10 19 DGND
1 3 3 6 9 20 nSENSE_P_BINFULL_EXIT2
JC39-02188A 21 R_5V_PS
JC39-02189A 7 8
4 2 8 7 22 DGND
5 1 9 6 23 nDETECT_JOB_SEP
EXIT GATE JC39-02189A JC39-02188A
3 10 5 24 24V4
SOLENOID 24v
2
24v 11 4 25 EN_EXIT_SOL
1
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 26 R_5V_PS
3 12 3
DUP 13 2 27 DGND
2
JAM 1 14 1 28 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX1
1

Fuser exit drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the fuser exit drive.
Figure 4-8 Fuser exit drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640,
E87650, E87660 shared)
FUSER BLDC
JC39-02195A
24v
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 17 FUSER
8 18 REL MOT
9 19
10 20
FUSER DRIVE
-1/5mm /16*2P
FUSER BLDC
CN30 FUSER DRIVE
JC39-02195A
1 R_DGND
24v 2 CLK_BLDC_FUSER
3 nREADY_BLDC_FUSER
4 nEN_BLDC_FUSER
5 NC
6 R_DGND
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V2_SW
10 24V2_SW
3 11 FAN_FUSER_OUT
FUSER OUT 2
FAN 1 12 FB_OUT_FAN_FUSER_OUT
13 DGND
COM 1 3
SIDE 14 DGND
N.O. 2 2 15 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
COVER OPEN N.C. 3 1 16 nCOVER_OPEN_SIDE
17 A_FUSER_REL
FUSER REL MOT 18 nA_FUSER_REL
19 nB_FUSER_REL
20 B_FUSER_REL
3 1 9 21 FAN_EXIT1
EXIT FAN 1 2 2 8 22 FB_OUT_FAN_EXIT1
1 3 7 23 DGND
3 4 6 24 FAN_EXIT2
2 5 5 25 FB_OUT_FAN_EXIT2
EXIT FAN 2
1 6 4 26 DGND
JC39-02191A
3 7 3 27 FAN_EXIT3
EXIT FAN 3 2 8 2 28 FB_OUT_FAN_EXIT3
1 9 1 29 DGND
3 3 30 R_5V_PS
Fuser 2 2 31 DGND
POSI 1 1 32 nSENSE_FUSER_PO S1
Registration drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the registration drive.
Fuser exit drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1183
Figure 4-9 Registration drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640,
E87650, E87660 shared)
JC31-00132A
6 REGI MOT
5 24v
4
3
2
1
FEED_REGI
FEED MOT CN53 FEED+REGI

JC39-02336A
1 6 1 A_FEED
2 5
STEP 3 4
2 24V4
3 nA_FEED
4 3
HYBRID 5 2
4 nB_FEED
5 24V4
6 1
6 B_FEED
24v
6 7 A_REGI
5 8 24V1_SW
REGI MOT
4 9 nA_REGI
24v 3 10 nB_REGI
2 11 24V1_SW
1 12 B_REGI
MP CLUTCH 1 2 13 24V4
CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH
Feed drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the feed drive.

Figure 4-10 Feed drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)
JC31-00132A
6 FEED MOT
5 24v
4
3
2
1
FEED_REGI
CN53 FEED+REGI
JC39-02336A
6 1 A_FEED
JC31-00132A 5 2 24V4
FEED MOT 4 3 nA_FEED
3 4 nB_FEED
24v
2 5 24V4
1 6 B_FEED
24v
1 6 7 A_REGI
2 5 8 24V1_SW
STEP 3 4 9 nA_REGI
REGI MOT
4 3 10 nB_REGI
HYBRID 5 2 11 24V1_SW
6 1 12 B_REGI
1 2 13 24V4
MP CLUTCH CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH
Pickup drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup drive.
Pickup drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1185
Figure 4-11 Pickup drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)
JC93-01083A
PICKUP1 MOTOR
10
24v
11
12
13
PICKUP
CN49 PICKUP
JC39-02234A
3 1 9 1 R_5V_PS
JC39-02201A JC39-02234A
3 4 6 4 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT1 2 5 5 5 DGND
1 6 4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1
7 3 JC39-02234A
3 7 DGND
FEED1 2 8 2 8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1
1 9 1
9 5V_PS
JC93-01083A
PICKUP1 10 A_PICKUP1
MOTOR 24v 11 nA_PICKUP1
24v 12 nB_PICKUP1
13 B_PICKUP1
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 1 10 14 R_5V_PS
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 4 7 17 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT2 2 5 6
18 DGND
1 6 5
19 nSENSE_P_PRE_LIFT2
JC39-02202A 4 JC39-02234A
3 7
3 20 DGND
FEED2 2 8
2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2
1 9
1 22 5V_PS
10
JC39-02234A 23 A_PICKUP2
4
3 24 nA_PICKUP2
PICKUP2
MOTOR
STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2
1 26 B_PICKUP2
MP unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the MP unit.

Figure 4-12 MP unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)
JC33-00029B 2
MP SOL 1
5v
0604-001393 3
MP EMPTY 4
5v 5
0604-001393
JC39-02211A MP PAPER MP PAPER 3
WIDTH LENGTH 4
1.8v 5v 5
SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P
CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

MP SOL JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
1 5 1 20
24v 2 PW M_MP_SOL
24v 2 4 2 19
0604-001393
MP EMPTY JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
5v JC39-02210A
4 2 4 5v 17 4 DGND
5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY
MP PAPER JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
WIDTH 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS
2 5 7 1.8v 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
1.8v 8 13 8 DGND
3 4
MP PAPER JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
4 3 9 12 9 R_5V_PS
LENGTH JC39-02211A
5 2 10 5v 11 10 DGND
5v 6 1 11 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
10
JC39-02208A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 3 12 DGND
12 9
2 2 2 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
PRE FEED 13 8
1 3 1 7 14 5V_PS
14
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
15 15 A_DUPLEX2
4 6
16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
3
DUP2 STEP 2 17
5
4
17 nB_DUPLEX2
MOT 18 B_DUPLEX2
1 18 JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
3 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
7 4
8 3
9
Color 10
2
1
4 JC39-02205A
PTB 1 7 7 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
2 3 5 9 12
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
JC39-02205A
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
JC39-02207A 12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
14 34 DGND
7
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX
2 6 2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2
1 7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 2 2 2 19 2 39 DGND
OUT 1 3 1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
JC39-02209A
MP unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1187

Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the side unit.

Figure 4-13 Side unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)
0604-001393
1 5v
2
3
0604-001393
4
3
2
0604-001490 1
3 24v
2
1
0604-001393
5 5v
6
7
SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P
CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
5 1 20
4 2 19 2 PW M_MP_SOL
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS
5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
4 8 13 8 DGND
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 9 R_5V_PS

3 9 12
2 10 11 10 DGND
1 11 10 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 12 DGND

PRE FEED 5v JC39-02208A 3 12 9
2 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
13 8
1 7 14 5V_PS
14 5v
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 15 A_DUPLEX2
DUP2 4 15 6
MOT 16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
3 5
2 17 17 nB_DUPLEX2
4 24v
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2
JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC
JC39-02338A JC39-02240A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
4 7 4
3 8 3
PTB CRUM 2 9 2
Mono 1 10 1
4 7 JC39-02205A
PTB 1 7 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
2 3 5 9 12
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
JC39-02205A
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
JC39-02207A 12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
14 34 DGND
7
DUPLEX JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
5v 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
JAM 2
6 2 16 5 36 DGND
7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
5v
P FUSER JC39-02205A JC39-02206A
5v 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
OUT
2 2 19 2 39 DGND
JC39-02209A 3 1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
5v
Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1189
Right door guide (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the right door guide.

Figure 4-14 Right door guide electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640,
E87650, E87660 shared)
0604-001393
DUPLEX
5
JAM 2
6
5v
7
SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P
CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

2 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
1 5 1 20
MP SOL 1 2 PW M_MP_SOL
2 4 2 19
JC39-02210A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
MP EMPTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS
MP PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
WIDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND
JC39-02211A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 9 R_5V_PS

3 4 3 9 12
MP PAPER 2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH 1 6 1 11 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
10
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 12 DGND
3 1 3 12 9 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8
1 3 1 7 14 5V_PS
JC39-02208A 14
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 15 A_DUPLEX2
4 15 6
16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
DUP2 3
MOT
STEP 2 17
5
4
17 nB_DUPLEX2
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2
JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
3 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
7 4
8 3
9 2
Color 10 1
JC39-02207A JC39-02205A
4 1 7 7
PTB 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
2 3 5 9 12
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
JC39-02205A
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
JC39-02207A 14 34 DGND
7
DUPLEX JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
JAM 2 5v 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
6 2 16 5 36 DGND
7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
5v
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 2 2 2 19 2 39 DGND
OUT 1 3 1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
JC39-02209A
Right door guide (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1191
Right door output takeaway (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660
shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the right door output takeaway.

Figure 4-15 Right door output takeaway electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560,
E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
3
2
1
JC39-02209A
P FUSER
OUT
5v
SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P
CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

2 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
1 5 1 20
MP SOL 1 2 PW M_MP_SOL
2 4 2 19
JC39-02210A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
MP EMPTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY
JC39-02206A 15 JC39-02205A 6 1.8V_PS

3 1 6 6
MP PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
WIDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND
JC39-02211A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 9 R_5V_PS

3 4 3 9 12
MP PAPER 2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH 1 6 1 11 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
10
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 12 DGND
3 1 3 12 9 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8
1 3 1 7 14 5V_PS
JC39-02208A 14
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 15 A_DUPLEX2
4 15 6
16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
3
DUP2
MOT
STEP 2 17
5
4
17 nB_DUPLEX2
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2
JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
7 4
8 3
9 2
Color 10 1
JC39-02207A JC39-02205A
4 1 7 7
PTB 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
2 3 5 9 12
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
14 34 DGND
7
JC39-02207A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX
2 6 2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2
1 7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
P FUSER JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
OUT 5v JC39-02209A 2
2 19 39 DGND
1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
5v
Right door output takeaway (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1193
Front unit (E82540, E82550, E82560)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the front unit.

Figure 4-16 Front unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560)
1
2
3
COM
N.O.
N.C.
4
3
ADC_WTB_FULL 2
EN_W TB_LED 1
5v
3 nDETCT_W TB
2 5v
1
W TB/CST LOCK/FAN_LSU
CN 38 W TB/CST
LOCK/FAN_LSU JC39-02239A
FAN_LSU 1 3
FB_OUT_FAN_LSU 2 2
DGND 3 1
JC39-02239A 4
A_W TB 4
nA_W TB 5 3
nB_W TB 6 2
B_W TB 7 1
DGND 8 JC39-02239A COM

3
COVER_OPEN_FRONT 9 2 N.O.
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT 10 1 N.C.
ADC_WTB_FULL
JC39-02239A EN_W TB_LED
DGND 11 4
ADC_W TB_FULL 12 3 5v
EN_W TB_LED 13 2
5V_PS 14 1
JC39-02239A nDETCT_W TB
R_5V_PS 15 3 5v
DGND 16 2
nDETECT_W TB 17 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_2 18
JC39-02239A 10 1
JC39-02186A
2 1
R_5V_PS 20 JC39-02239A 8 3 JC39-02186A
3
DGND 21 7 4 2
JC39-02239A JC39-02186A
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_2 23
5 6 2 1
JC39-02239A JC39-02186A
R_5V_PS 25 3 8 3
DGND 26 2 9 2
NC 28
Front unit (E82540, E82550, E82560) 1195

Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup lift motors, feed motor, and
cover open sensor (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-17 Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor electrical-mechanical relationships
(DCF/HCI)
Pickup lift 1 motor

(JC31-00009C)
Pickup lift 2 motor

24V (JC31-00009C)
24V Cover open sensor 1 2 3 4

with harness 24V
9 10
1 2 3 4
6 1
4 3
3 4
1 3 4 6 24V
1 6
Feed motor
(JC31-00177A)
JC39-02268A JC39-02274A
CN601 CN801
1 B_PICK_LIFT1 B_PICK_LIFT2 1
24V 2 nB_PICK_LIFT1 nB_PICK_LIFT2 2 24V
3 nA_PICK_LIFT1 nA_PICK_LIFT2 3
4 A_PICK_LIFT1 A_PICK_LIFT2 4
5 B_FEED
24V 6 nB_FEED
7 nA_FEED DCF PCA
8 A_FEED
(V1F98-67001)
24V 9 DGND
10 nSIDE_C_OPEN_IN
Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor (DCF/HCI) 1197
Paper empty and limit-2 sensors (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper empty and limit-2 sensors
(DCF/HCI).
Figure 4-18 Paper empty and limit-2 sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
Prefeed 2 sensor
(0604-001381)
Paper empty 2 sensor
5V 7 8 9
1 2 3 (0604-001393)
5V
5V
4 5 6 Paper limit 2 sensor
(0604-001393)
DCF PCA (V1F98-67001)

JC39-02270A
CN501
1 VCC
5V
1 9 2 GND
5V
2 8 3 SENS_P_EMPTY2
3 7 4 VCC
4 6 5V
5V JC39-02269A 5 GND
5 5
6 4 6 SENS_P_LIMIT2
7 3 7 GND
5V
8 2 5V
8 SENS_PREFEED2
9 1
9 VCC

Paper empty, path, limit-1, and path sensors (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper empty, path, limit-1, and path
sensors (DCF/HCI).
Figure 4-19 Paper empty , path, limit-1, and path sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
Path 1 sensor
(0604-001490) 10 11 12
5V
7 8 9
5V
Prefeed 1 sensor
(0604-001490)

1 2 3 (0604-001393)
5V
Paper limit 1 sensor

4 5 6 5V
(0604-001393)
JC39-02272A
DCF PCA (V1F98-67001)

CN502
1 VCC
5V
1 12 2 GND
5V
2 11 3 SENS_P_EMPTY1
3 10
4 9 4 VCC
5V 5V
5 8 5 GND
6 7 6 SENS_P_LIMIT1
7 6 JC39-02271A
5V 8 5 7 GND
5V
9 4 8 SENS_PREFEED1
10 3 9 VCC
5V 11 2
12 1 10 GND
5V
11 SENS_PATH1
12 VCC
13 NC
14 NC
Paper size sensors (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper size sensors (DCF/HCI).
Paper empty, path, limit-1, and path sensors (DCF/HCI) 1199

Figure 4-20 Paper size sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
Paper size 1 sensor

(JC32-00013A)
3.3V
1 2 3 4
3.3V
5 6 7 8
Paper size 2 sensor
(JC32-00013A)
JC39-02275A
JC39-02606A
CN802 CN301
1 TRAY1_OPEN
3.3V 2 DGND
3 ADC_P_SIZE1
4 3.3V DCF PCA
Engine
5 TRAY2_OPEN
(V1F98-67001)
Contoller
3.3V 6 DGND Board
7 ADC_P_SIZE2 (ECB)
8 3.3V
HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI).

Figure 4-21 HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)
HCI PCA (JC92-02738E)

CN301
nSYNC_TRAY 1
nCMD_REQ_TRAY 2
DETECT_TRAY_OPEN 3
NC 4
nDETECT_TRAY (DGND) 5
DGND 6
DGND 7 Engine
DGND 8 Controller
DGND 9 JC39-02605A
Board
24V 10
24V 11
(ECB)
24V 12
5V 13
5V 14
5VS 15
nRST_TRAY 16
RXD_ENG2TRAY 17
TXD_TRAY2ENG 18
CN901 CN5
3.3V 1 8 3.3V
SENS_P_EMPTY_SUB 2 9 nP_EMPTY_R
7 7
SENS_P_SUB_HOME 3 6 6 10 HOME2
SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN2 4 5 5 11 nP_LEVEL2_F
SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN1 5 4 4 12 nP_LEVEL1_F
3 3
SENS_P_SUB_END 6 13 END
2 2
SENS_KNOCKUP_HOME 7 JC39-02286A 1 1 JC39-02356A 14 HOME1
SENS_P_EMPTY2 8 7 7 1 SOL_HOME
6 6 2 GND
HCF TRAY OPEN 9
5 5
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB2 10 4 4 3 nP_LEVEL2_R
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB1 11 3 3 4 nP_LEVEL1_R
GND 12 2 2 5 GND
1 1
OUT_SOL_P_GATE 13 6 SOL_A
24V 14 7 SOL_B
VCC 15
DGND 16
HCI sub PCA
SENS_P_LIMIT2 17 (JC92-02792A)
HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI) 1201

Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2
motors, and shift motor (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the cover open sensor, cassette
installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and shift motor (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-22 Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors,
and shift motor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
Cover open sensor

with harness 9 24V
10
24V
1 2 3 4 Pickup/lift 1 motor Cassette installation
(JC31-00009C) sensor
5V
(0604-001393)
Feed motor 15 16 17
(JC31-00177A)
24V
5 6 7 8
JC39-02279A Lift 2 motor Shift motor
(JC31-00109A) (JC31-00125A)
1 2
24V
JC39-02282A
24V 4 5
CN601 CN901
B_PICK_LIFT1 1 3.3V 1
nB_PICK_LIFT1 2 SENS_P_EMPTY_SUB 2
nA_PICK_LIFT1 3 24V SENS_P_SUB_HOME 3
A_PICK_LIFT1 4 SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN2 4
B_FEED 5 SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN1 5 JC39-02286A
nB_FEED 6 SENS_P_SUB_END 6
nA_FEED 7 24V SENS_KNOCKUP_HOME 7
A_FEED 8 HCI PCA SENS_P_EMPTY2 8
DGND 9 (JC92-02738E) HCF_TRAY_OPEN 9
nSIDE_C_OPEN_IN 10 24V SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB2 10
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB1 11
CN902 GND 12
LIMIT_SW_OUT 1 24V OUT_SOL_P_GATE 13
OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2 2 24V 14
NC 3 VCC 15
5V
OUT_DCMOT_SHIFT1 4 24V DGND 16
OUT_DCMOT_SHIFT2 5 SENS_P_LIMIT2 17
NC 6
Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and shift motor (DCF/HCI)
1203
Limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor, main limit and empty sensors (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed
sensor, main limit and empty sensors (DCF/HCI).
Figure 4-23 Limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor, main limit and empty sensors electrical-
mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
10
11
13 5V 12
14
Limit switch Feed sensor
with harness (0604-001490)
5V Prefeed sensor
(0604-001381) 7 8 9
5V
Main limit sensor

4 5 6
(0604-001393)
5V
5V
1 2 3 Empty main sensor
(0604-001393)
JC39-02281A
HCI PCA (JC92-02738E)

CN502
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
1 14 3 SENS_P_EMPTY_MAIN
2 13
3 12 4 VCC
4 11 5V
5 GND
5 10
6 9 6 SENS_P_MAIN_LIMIT
7 8 JC39-02280A 7 GND
8 7 5V
8 SENS_PREFEED
9 6
10 5 9 VCC
11 4 10 GND
12 3 5V
13 2 11 SENS_PATH
14 1 12 VCC
5V 13 LIMIT_SW_IN
14 LIMIT_SW_OUT

Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the level-1/2 front/rear sensors,
solenoid home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI).
Figure 4-24 Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid electrical-mechanical
relationships (DCF/HCI)
CN6 HCI sub PCA

1 SOL_B (JC92-02792A)
2 NC CN4
24V
3 SOL_A VCC 1
GND 2 3.3V
CN1 nP_LEVEL1_R 3
1 VCC VCC 4
1 6 3.3V 3.3V
2 GND GND 5
2 5
3 4 3 nP_LEVEL1_F nP_LEVEL2_R 6
JC39-02352A
4 3 4 VCC VCC 7
5 2 5 GND GND 8 3.3V
6 1 3.3V
6 nP_LEVEL2_F SOL_HOME 9
JC39-02351A JC39-02355A
1 7
1
2 8
2
4 3 9
3
5 Level1 front 4
6 Level1 rear sensor
sensor 5
(0604-001393) 6
3.3V (0604-001393) Solenoid
24V with harness 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V
(JC33-00031B) Level2 rear
3.3V 1 2 3 Solenoid home sensor
Level2 front sensor sensor (0604-001393)
(0604-001393) (0604-001393)
Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI) 1205
Home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty sensor (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and
empty sensor (DCF/HCI).
Figure 4-25 Home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/
HCI)
HCI sub PCA (JC92-02792A)

CN2 CN 3
1 VCC VCC 1
3.3V 3.3V
2 GND GND 2
3 HOME1 nP_EMPTY_R 3
4 VCC VCC 4
3.3V 3.3V
5 GND GND 5
6 END HOME2 6
NC 7
JC39-02352A
Home 1 sensor JC39-02352A
3.3V 4
(0604-001393) 5
1 2 3 6 3.3V
3.3V Home 2 sensor
4 5 6
Empty sensor (0604-001393)
End sensor (0604-001393)
(0604-001393)
3.3V 1 2 3

Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/
HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor,
prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI).
Figure 4-26 Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor electrical-
mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
Prefeed sensor
5V (0604-001490)
7 8 9
sHCI PCA
13 14 (JC92-02738F)
Limit switch 24V CN502
with harness
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
1 14
2 13 3 SENS_P_EMPTY1
3 12 4 VCC
4 11 5V
5 GND
5 10
6 9 6 SENS_P_LIMIT1
JC39-02290A
7 8 7 GND
8 7 JC39-02289A 8 SENS_PREFEED
9 6 5V
9 VCC
10 5
11 4 10 NC
12 3 11 NC
13 2 12 NC
14 1
13 LIMIT_SW_IN
24V 14 LIMIT_SW_OUT
(0604-001393) 5V 1 2 3
5V 4 5 6
Paper limit 1 sensor
(0604-001393)
Pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and feed motor (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and
feed motor (DCF/HCI).
Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI) 1207
Figure 4-27 Pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and feed motor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
JC39-02291A
CN601 CN701
1 B_PICK_LIFT1 LIMIT_SW_OUT 1
24V 2 nB_PICK_LIFT1 OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2 2 24V
3 nA_PICK_LIFT1 VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT1 3
4 A_PICK_LIFT1 GND 4
5 B_FEED SENS_LCT_HOME_F 5
24V 6 nB_FEED VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT2 6
7 nA_FEED GND 7
8 A_FEED SENS_LCT_HOME_R 8
9 NC
10 NC sHCI PCA
CN701
(JC92-02738F)
JC39-02294A
JC39-02287A
Engine
Controller
Board
(ECB)
5
6
7 Pick/lift 1 motor
8 (JC31-00009B)
24V
Feed motor
(JC31-00163A)
24V
1 2 3 4
1 2 24V
Lift 2 motor
(JC31-00109A)
Upper/lower paper low sensors (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the upper/lower paper low sensors
(DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-28 Upper/lower paper low sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
sHCI PCA (JC92-02738F)
CN501
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
3 SENS_P_LOW_U
4 VCC
5V
5 GND
6 SENS_P_LOW_L
7 NC
8 NC
JC39-02288A
9 NC
4
5
6
1
2 5V
3 5V
Upper paper low sensor
Lower paper (0604-001393)
low sensor
(0604-001393)
Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the front/rear home sensors and tray
open sensor (DCF/HCI).
Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor (DCF/HCI) 1209

Figure 4-29 Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/
HCI)
Tray open sensor

with harness sHCI PCA (JC92-02738F)
1 2 3
3.3V
CN1001
JC39-02346A
1 GND
3.3V 2 LCT_TRAY_OPEN
3 NC
Front home sensor CN701

5V (0604-001393)
1 LIMIT_SW_OUT
3
4 2 OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2
5
3 VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT1
5V
JC39-02291A 4 GND
5 SENS_LCT_HOME_F
6 VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT2
7 GND
5V
8 SENS_LCT_HOME_R
Rear home sensor

(0604-001393) 5V
6
7
8
Main PCAs (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the main PCAs (SSBM).

Figure 4-30 Main PCAs electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN10
Bridge Punch Rear upper Safety Staple
CN5 CN11
Front compile Eject
CN4
CN12
Front path
Front lower
Finisher main PCA
CN17 (JC92-02968A)
Engine Controller Cover CN13
SCU
Board (ECB)
CN3
Top door CN14
CN1 CN16 CN15 Stacker
CN2 Engine Log Booklet
Front door
JC39-02308A
CN4
Staple
CN9
Stopper
CN5
Feed Booklet PCA
JC39-02296A (JC92-02790B) CN10
CN6 BLDC
Tamper CN1 CN3 CN7 CN8
Interface Log Paddle Guide
Paper detection sensor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper detection sensor (SSBM).
Paper detection sensor (SSBM) 1211

Figure 4-31 Paper detection sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
3.3V 21 Paper detection sensor

(0604-001415)
Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)

JC39-02318A CN12, Front lower
1 FRONT_T_M_NB
2 FRONT_T_M_B
3 FRONT_T_M_A
4 FRONT_T_M_NA
3.3V 5 VCC(100ohm)
6 GND
7 IN_MANUAL_PAPER_DETECT
8 VCC(100ohm)
9 GND
10 IN_END_FENCE_HOME
11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
13 IN_STAPLER_MOVE_MANUAL_HOME
Entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter
close sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the entrance motors A/B, end fence
motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter close sensor (SSBM).

Figure 4-32 Entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter close sensor
electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A) Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)
CN4, Front path CN5, Front compile
1 3.3V 1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 IN_BM_EXIT_PATH 2 REAR_T_M_B
3 GND 3 REAR_T_M_A
4 3.3V 4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 IN_ENTRANCE_PATH 5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 GND 6 BUFFER_M_B
3.3V 7 VCC(100ohm) 24V 7 BUFFER_M_A
8 GND 8 BUFFER_M_NA
9 IN_DIVERTER_CLOSE 9 PADDLE_M_NB
24V 10 ENT_M_NA 10 PADDLE_M_B
11 ENT_M_A 11 PADDLE_M_A
12 IN_BUFFER_OPEN 12 PADDLE_M_NA
13 GND 13 END_FENCE_M_NB
3.3V
14 VCC(100ohm) 24V 14 END_FENCE_M_B
15 IN_TOP_EXIT_PATH 15 END_FENCE_M_A
16 GND 16 END_FENCE_M_NA
17 VCC(100ohm) 17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
18 GND 18 GND
19 IN_COMPILE_EXIT_PATH 19 VCC(100ohm)
20 3.3V 20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
21 ENT_M_NB 21 GND
24V 22 ENT_M_B 22 VCC(100ohm)
23 TOP_BEAM_IN
24 GND
25 GND
JC39-02313A 26 OP_BUTTON
27 OP_LED_FR_OUT
Entrance motor A 28 OP_LED_YG_OUT

(JC90-01459A) 29 5V
2
1 30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME
24V
31 GND
2
1
32 VCC(100ohm)
24V
Entrance motor B 4
24V
4
(JC90-01459A) 3 3
2 2 24V
3 1 1
2 End fence motor
3.3V
1
Buffer motor
(JC90-01467A) 3 (JC90-01453A)
Diverter 2
close sensor 1 3.3V
(0604-001393) Buffer open sensor
(0604-001393)
Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the top-beam out sensor, stack motor,
and SKU motor (SSBM).
Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor (SSBM) 1213
Figure 4-33 Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor electrical-mechanical relationships
(SSBM)
3.3V
Top beam
out sensor
(0601-003440)
4
24V 3
2
3.3V 3 1 SCU motor
2
1 (JC90-01414A)
JC39-02319A
2 Stack motor Finisher main PCA Finisher main PCA

24V 1 (JC90-01415B) (JC92-02968A) (JC92-02968A)
CN8, Rear upper CN13, SCU
1 EXIT_M_NA 1 SCU_M_NB
JC39-02312A 2 EXIT_M_A 24V 2 SCU_M_B
3 EXIT_M_B 3 SCU_M_A
4 EXIT_M_NB 4 SCU_M_NA
24V 5 STACK_MTR_P 5 GND
6 STACK_MTR_M 6 BOOKLET_BEAM_IN
7 VCC(100ohm) 7 3.3V
3.3V
8 GND 8 BOOKLET_BEAM_OUT
9 IN_STACK_ENCODER 9 VCC(100ohm)
10 3.3V 10 GND
3.3V 11 3.3V 11 IN_STACK_FULL_DETEXT
12 TOP_BEAM_OUT
Curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home sensor, and guide home sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert
home sensor, and guide home sensor (SSBM).

Figure 4-34 Curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home sensor, and guide home sensor electrical-
mechanical relationships (SSBM)
4
3
2
1 24V Booklet PCA
Curl pawl motor (JC93-01153A)
(JC92-02790B)
CN7, Paddle (Booklet)
1 3.3V
2 GND
3 PADDLE_HOME
4 PADDLE_M_NB
5 PADDLE_M_B
Divert home sensor 3 6 PADDLE_M_A
(0604-001415) 2 3.3V
1 7 PADDLE_M_NA
3.3V 8 3.3V
9 GND
10 DIVERT_HOME
11 DIVERT_M_NB
24V 12 DIVERT_M_B
13 DIVERT_M_A
14 DIVERT_M_NA
CN8, Guide (Booklet)

3
2 4 3.3V 1 3.3V
3.3V 1 3
Guide home 2 24V 2 FOLD_EXIT
sensor 1 3 GND
(0604-001393)
Fold motor 4 GND
JC39-02304A
(JC93-01154A) 3.3V
5 GND
6 GUIDE_HOME
7 GUIDE_M_NA
8 GUIDE_M_A
24V 9 GUIDE_M_B
10 GUIDE_M_NB
Fold exit sensor

3
(JC32-00020A)
2
1 3.3V
Feed entrance sensor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the feed entrance sensor (SSBM).
Feed entrance sensor (SSBM) 1215

Figure 4-35 Feed entrance sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Booklet PCA (JC92-02790B)

CN4, Staple (Booklet)
3.3V 1 VCC(100ohm)
2 GND
3 FEED_ENT
4 5V
5 LOW_STAPLE2
6 GND
7 LOW_STAPLE1
8 STAPLE_HOME
JC39-02302A 9 STAPLE_M+
10 STAPLE_M+
11 NA
12 STAPLE_M-
13 STAPLE_M-
3.3V 3 Feed entrance sensor

2
1 (0604-001415)

Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor,
press motor, and feed motor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the press home sensor, tamper home
sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor, and feed motor (SSBM).
Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor, and feed motor (SSBM)
1217
Figure 4-36 Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor,
and feed motor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Booklet PCA (JC92-02790B)
CN5, Feed (Booklet)
1 3.3V
Feed motor 3.3V
Press home sensor
(JC93-01152A) 2 GND
(0604-001393)
3 4 3 PRESS_HOME
2
3
1 3.3V 4 PRESS_M_NB
2
24V
1 24V 5 PRESS_M_B
6 PRESS_M_A
4 7 PRESS_M_NA
3 24V
8 FEED_M_NB
2
1 24V 9 FEED_M_B
Press motor 10 FEED_M_A
(JC93-01155A) 11 FEED_M_NA
CN6, Tamper (Booklet)

JC39-02298A 1 VCC(100ohm)
2 GND
3 KNIFE_HOME
4 VCC(100ohm)
5 GND
3.3V
6 TAMP_HOME
7 TAMP_M_NB
4
Tamper motor 3 24V 24V 8 TAMP_M_B
(JC93-01155A) 2
9 TAMP_M_A
1
10 TAMP_M_NA
11 3.3V
3 12 PAPER_DETECT
Tamper home sensor 3.3V
2 13 GND
(0604-001393) 3.3V
1
Paper detect sensor 3 CN7, Paddle (Booklet)

(JC32-00020A) 2
1 3.3V 1 3.3V
2 GND
3 PADDLE_HOME
4 PADDLE_M_NB
24V 5 PADDLE_M_B
6 PADDLE_M_A
7 PADDLE_M_NA
8 3.3V
Paddle motor (JC93-01001A)
9 GND
4 10 DIVERT_HOME
3
2 JC39-02304A 11 DIVERT_M_NB
24V
1 12 DIVERT_M_B
13 DIVERT_M_A
14 DIVERT_M_NA

Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the top-exit path and compile-exit path
sensors (SSBM).
Figure 4-37 Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Finisher main PCA Finisher main PCA
(JC92-02968A) (JC92-02968A)
CN4, Front path CN5, Front compile
1 3.3V 1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 IN_BM_EXIT_PATH 2 REAR_T_M_B
3 GND 3 REAR_T_M_A
4 3.3V 4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 IN_ENTRANCE_PATH 5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 GND 6 BUFFER_M_B
7 VCC(100ohm) 7 BUFFER_M_A
8 GND 8 BUFFER_M_NA
9 IN_DIVERTER_CLOSE 9 PADDLE_M_NB
10 ENT_M_NA 10 PADDLE_M_B
11 PADDLE_M_A
11 ENT_M_A
12 PADDLE_M_NA
12 IN_BUFFER_OPEN 3.3V
13 END_FENCE_M_NB
13 GND
14 END_FENCE_M_B
14 VCC(100ohm)
15 END_FENCE_M_A
15 IN_TOP_EXIT_PATH 3.3V
3.3V 16 END_FENCE_M_NA
16 GND
17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
17 VCC(100ohm)
18 GND
18 GND
3.3V 19 VCC(100ohm)
19 IN_COMPILE_EXIT_PATH
20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
20 3.3V
21 GND
21 ENT_M_NB
22 VCC(100ohm)
22 ENT_M_B JC39-02322A 3.3V 23 TOP_BEAM_IN
24 GND
25 GND
26 OP_BUTTON
27 OP_LED_FR_OUT
3
28 OP_LED_YG_OUT
2
1 3.3V 29 5V
Top exit
path sensor Compile exit path 30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME
(0604-001393) sensor 31 GND

3
2 3.3V (JC32-00020A) 32 VCC(100ohm)
1
3.3V 2
1
Top beam in sensor
(JC32-00020A)
Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors (SSBM) 1219

Knife motor, stopper home sensor, and stopper solenoid and motor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the knife motor, stopper home sensor,
and stopper solenoid and motor (SSBM).
Figure 4-38 Knife motor, stopper home sensor, and stopper solenoid and motor electrical-mechanical
relationships (SSBM)
Booklet PCA
(JC92-02790B)
CN10, BLDC (Booklet)
1 FOLD_M_DIR_OUT
2 FOLD_M_CLOCK
3 FOLD_M_READY
4 FOLD_M_START_OUT
5 NA
6 FOLD_M_BRAKE_OUT
7 GND
8 GND
9 24V1
10 24V1
11 KNIFE_M_DIR_OUT
Stopper solenoid 12 KNIFE_M_CLOCK
(JC33-00038A)
13 KNIFE_M_READY
2 14 KNIFE_M_START_OUT
1
24V 15 NA
24V
16 KNIFE_M_BRAKE_OUT
17 GND
18 GND
19 24V2
20 24V2
Stopper home JC39-02305A
sensor
Booklet PCA (0604-001393) 3 10
2
(JC92-02790B) 3.3V 1 9
8
CN9, Stopper (Booklet) JC39-02305A 7
24V 1 24V 6
5
STOPPER_SOL_OUT 2 24V 4
3.3V 3 3
2 Knife motor
GND 4 1 (JC31-00144A)
3.3V Stopper 4
STOPPER_HOME 5 motor 3 24V
STOPPER_M_NB 6 (JC93-01155A) 2
1
STOPPER_M_B 7
STOPPER_M_A 8 24V
STOPPER_M_NA 9

Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the top door sensor, fold motor, and
knife home position sensor (SSBM).
Figure 4-39 Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor electrical-mechanical
Finisher main PCA Booklet PCA

(JC92-02968A) (JC92-02790B)
CN3, Cover CN10, BLDC (Booklet)
1 TOP_DOOR_IL_IN 1 FOLD_M_DIR_OUT
24V 2 NC 2 FOLD_M_CLOCK
3 NC 3 FOLD_M_READY
4 DOOR_IL_IN 4 FOLD_M_START_OUT
10 24V 5 NA
9
6 FOLD_M_BRAKE_OUT
Top door sensor 8 JC39-02305A
7 7 GND
with harness 6
(JC39-02310A) 5
24V 8 GND
4
24V Fold motor 3 9 24V1
2
(JC31-00144A) 1 10 24V1
11 KNIFE_M_DIR_OUT
12 KNIFE_M_CLOCK
13 KNIFE_M_READY
14 KNIFE_M_START_OUT
15 NA
16 KNIFE_M_BRAKE_OUT
17 GND
18 GND
19 24V2
20 24V2
Knife home sensor 3

2
(0604-001393) 1 3.3V Booklet PCA
(JC92-02790B)
CN6, Tamper (Booklet)
1 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
3.3V
2 GND
JC39-01336A
3 KNIFE_HOME
4 VCC(100ohm)
5 GND
6 TAMP_HOME
7 TAMP_M_NB
8 TAMP_M_B
9 TAMP_M_A
10 TAMP_M_NA
11 3.3V
12 PAPER_DETECT
13 GND
Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor (SSBM) 1221
Operational panel button PCA and entrance path sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the operational panel button PCA and
entrance path sensor (SSBM).
Figure 4-40 Operational panel button PCA and entrance path sensor electrical-mechanical
Operational panel button PCA

(JC92-02789B)
5
5V 4
3
2
1 3
2
3.3V 1 Entrance path
sensor
(JC32-00020A)
Finisher main PCA JC39-02321A

(JC92-02968A)
CN5, Front compile
1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 REAR_T_M_B
3 REAR_T_M_A
4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 BUFFER_M_B
7 BUFFER_M_A
8 BUFFER_M_NA Finisher main PCA
9 PADDLE_M_NB (JC92-02968A)
10 PADDLE_M_B CN4, Front path
JC39-02345A 11 PADDLE_M_A 1 3.3V
12 PADDLE_M_NA 2 IN_BM_EXIT_PATH
13 END_FENCE_M_NB 3 GND
14 END_FENCE_M_B 4 3.3V
15 END_FENCE_M_A 5 IN_ENTRANCE_PATH
3.3V
16 END_FENCE_M_NA 6 GND
17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME 7 VCC(100ohm)
18 GND 8 GND
19 VCC(100ohm) 9 IN_DIVERTER_CLOSE
20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME 10 ENT_M_NA
21 GND 11 ENT_M_A
22 VCC(100ohm) 12 IN_BUFFER_OPEN
23 TOP_BEAM_IN 13 GND
24 GND 14 VCC(100ohm)
25 GND 15 IN_TOP_EXIT_PATH
26 OP_BUTTON 16 GND
27 OP_LED_FR_OUT 17 VCC(100ohm)
5V
28 OP_LED_YG_OUT 18 GND
29 5V 19 IN_COMPILE_EXIT_PATH
30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME 20 3.3V
31 GND 21 ENT_M_NB
32 VCC(100ohm) 22 ENT_M_B

Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor
(SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the exit cam home sensor, main paddle
home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor (SSBM).
Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor (SSBM) 1223
Figure 4-41 Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor electrical-
mechanical relationships (SSBM)
CN17, Front path
3.3V 1 3.3V
2 GND
3 IN_BM_EXIT_CAM_HOME
4 24V1
Exit cam home
sensor 5 BM_EXIT_MTR_NB
(JC32-00020A) 3 6 BM_EXIT_MTR_B
2
7 BM_EXIT_MTR_A
1 3.3V
8 BM_EXIT_MTR_NA
JC39-02320A
9 IN_BM_EXIT_CAM_DETECT
10 24V1
Finisher main PCA

(JC92-02968A)
CN5, Front compile
1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 REAR_T_M_B
3 REAR_T_M_A
4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 BUFFER_M_B
7 BUFFER_M_A
Paddle motor 8 BUFFER_M_NA
(JC93-01001A) 9 PADDLE_M_NB
4 24V 10 PADDLE_M_B
3 24V 11 PADDLE_M_A
2
1 12 PADDLE_M_NA
13 END_FENCE_M_NB
14 END_FENCE_M_B
JC39-02313A 15 END_FENCE_M_A
16 END_FENCE_M_NA
3 17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
2 Finisher main PCA 18 GND
3.3V
Main paddle 1 (JC92-02968A) 19 VCC(100ohm)
home sensor CN8, Rear upper 20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
(0604-001393)
1 EXIT_M_NA 21 GND
3.3V
JC39-02312A 2 EXIT_M_A 22 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
Exit motor
(JC31-00163B) 24V 3 EXIT_M_B 23 TOP_BEAM_IN
4 EXIT_M_NB 24 GND
4
3 5 STACK_MTR_P 25 GND
2 6 STACK_MTR_M 26 OP_BUTTON
24V
1
7 VCC(100ohm) 27 OP_LED_FR_OUT
8 GND 28 OP_LED_YG_OUT
9 IN_STACK_ENCODER 29 5V
10 3.3V 30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME
11 3.3V 31 GND
12 TOP_BEAM_OUT 32 VCC(100ohm)

Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home
sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the front/rear tamper motors, front/rear
tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor (SSBM).
Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor (SSBM) 1225
Figure 4-42 Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor
Finisher main PCA
4
(JC92-02968A)
3 JC39-02318A CN12, Front lower
24V 2
1
1 FRONT_T_M_NB
2 FRONT_T_M_B
24V 3 FRONT_T_M_A
Front tamper motor 4 FRONT_T_M_NA
(JC93-01001A) 3 5 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
2
6 GND
1
End fence 7 IN_MANUAL_PAPER_DETECT
home sensor 8 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
(0604-001393) 9 GND
3.3V
10 IN_END_FENCE_HOME
11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
13 IN_STAPLER_MOVE_MANUAL_HOME
Finisher main PCA

(JC92-02968A)
CN5, Front compile
3 Front tamper home sensor
2 1 REAR_T_M_NB
3.3V 1 (0604-001393)
24V 2 REAR_T_M_B
3 REAR_T_M_A
4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 BUFFER_M_B
7 BUFFER_M_A
JC39-02313A 8 BUFFER_M_NA
9 PADDLE_M_NB
10 PADDLE_M_B
11 PADDLE_M_A
Rear tamper motor (JC93-01001A) 12 PADDLE_M_NA

13 END_FENCE_M_NB
4 14 END_FENCE_M_B
3
2 15 END_FENCE_M_A
24V 1 16 END_FENCE_M_NA
17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
18 GND
3.3V
19 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
21 GND
22 VCC(100ohm)
23 TOP_BEAM_IN
24 GND
3 25 GND
2
Rear tamper home sensor 1 3.3V 26 OP_BUTTON
(0604-001393) 27 OP_LED_FR_OUT
28 OP_LED_YG_OUT
29 5V
30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME
31 GND
3.3V
32 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V

Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out
sensors (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU
home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors (SSBM).
Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors (SSBM) 1227
Figure 4-43 Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors
3
2 3.3V 3.3V SCU home detect sensor
1 Tray upper home (0604-001393)
rear sensor 3 3
2
(0604-001393) 2
1 1 3.3V
Tray upper front sensor (0604-001393)
3.3V
Stack beam
out sensor
(0603-003440)
3.3V
Stack beam in sensor

Finisher main PCA
(0603-001309)
JC39-02325A
(JC92-02968A)
CN14, Stacker
3.3V 1 3.3V
2 STACK_BEAM_OUT
3 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
4 GND
5 IN_TRAY_UPPER_HOME_REAR
6 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
7 GND
8 IN_SCU_HOME_DETECT
9 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
10 GND
11 IN_TRAY_UPPER_FRONT
3.3V 12 GND
13 STACK_BEAM_IN
14 NC
Bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and bridge guide sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the bridge motor, bridge middle sensor,
and bridge guide sensor (SSBM).

Figure 4-44 Bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and bridge guide sensor electrical-mechanical
Bridge middle sensor

3 (0604-001393)
2
1 3.3V
Bridge guide sensor
(0604-001393) 3 3.3V
2
1
4
3
2
24V 1
JC39-02327A
Bridge motor
(JC31-00163B)

CN6, Bridge
1 BRIDGE_M_NA
2 BRIDGE_M_A
24V 3 BRIDGE_M_B
4 BRIDGE_M_NB
5 3.3V
6 IN_BRIDGE_ENTRANCE_PATH
7 GND
8 IN_BRIDGE_DETECT
9 GND
3.3V
10 IN_BRIDGE_GUIDE
11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
3.3V
13 IN_BRIDGE_MID
Bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the bridge entrance path sensor
(SSBM).
Bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM) 1229

Figure 4-45 Bridge entrance path sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)

CN6, Bridge
1 BRIDGE_M_NA
2 BRIDGE_M_A
3 BRIDGE_M_B
4 BRIDGE_M_NB
5 3.3V
6 IN_BRIDGE_ENTRANCE_PATH
3.3V
7 GND
8 IN_BRIDGE_DETECT
9 GND
10 IN_BRIDGE_GUIDE
JC39-02327A 11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
13 IN_BRIDGE_MID
Bridge entrance
path sensor
(JC32-00020A)
3 3.3V
2
1

5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)
Learn about the stapler/stacker and booklet maker.
Product specification and description

Learn about product specifications and descriptions.
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view

Learn about the front view and rear view of the stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
Figure 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher - front view
C1
C4
C3
C2
Figure 5-2 Booklet finisher - front view
C3’
C5
Table 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - front view
Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)
C1 Front door JC90-01444B
C2 Caster cover JC63-04985B (*)
Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) 1231

Table 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - front view (continued)
C3 Left lower cover (Stapler/stacker) JC63-05001B (*)
C3' Left lower cover (Booklet) JC90-01417B (*)
C4 Left upper cover JC90-01475B (*)
C5 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B, JC63-04978B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.
Figure 5-3 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view
C6
2
C7
C8
Table 5-2 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view
C6 Top Output tray JC63-04996B
JC63-05003B (*)
C7 Main output tray JC63-05002B
C8 Rear cover JC63-04988B (*)

Figure 5-4 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - top view
C9
C10
1232 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-3 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - top view
C9 Top cover JC90-01446B
C10 Top door JC90-01445B (*)

Figure 5-5 Booklet finisher – front-right view
C11
C14 C12
C13
Table 5-4 booklet finisher - front-right view
C11 Right upper cover JC90-01448B (*)
C12 Front cover JC63-04986B
C13 Front lower cover JC63-04987B
C14 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B

Detailed Specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker.
Stapler-stacker finisher
Table 5-5 Stapler-stacker finisher detailed specifications
Item Stapler-stacker finisher Booklet maker
Speed PPM 18.3~70,(70ppm) 18.3~70,(70ppm)
Stack Capacity Main 3,000 sheets 2,000 sheets

(A4/Letter 80gsm)
Top 250 sheets 250 sheets
Detailed Specifications 1233

Table 5-5 Stapler-stacker finisher detailed specifications (continued)
Item Stapler-stacker finisher Booklet maker
Paper Size Main Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457 Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457
Top 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200) 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200)
Paper Weight Main 52 ~ 350 gsm 52 ~ 350 gsm
Top 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm
Offset (Non Staple) 15mm(minimum) 15mm(minimum)
※Exception SRA3 and larger size.
Staple Clinching position ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat) ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat)
● Dual ● Dual
Paper weight 52~256 gsm 52~256 gsm
Capacity 65 sheets (90gsm) 65 sheets (90gsm)
Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge 5,000 clinching/cartridge
Offline Yes Yes
Hole Punch Paper weight 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm
available unit (Auto NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish

change)
Booklet maker
Table 5-6 Booklet maker specifications
Item Description
Set Speed PPM 18.3~70(70ppm)
See Footnote: 1
Paper size B5 SEF ~ 12'' x 18''
Paper weight 60 ~ 120 gsm
Staple + Fold Capacity(80gsm) 25 sheets
Fold Capacity(80gsm) 5 sheets
Tray Capacity 5 sets / 25 sheets
Staple Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge

Table 5-6 Booklet maker specifications (continued)
Item Description
C - Folding 3 sheets
Letter SEF, A4 SEF (52~90gsm)

1 The output speed of booklet making is the same as the device's printing speed, which varies depending on paper size, printing
mode, etc. Depending on specific usage conditions, such as the paper size used and the number of copies, the output speed
may decrease by up to 90% of the product's maximum output speed.
Physical
Table 5-7 Physical
Module Option Size Module Weight Packed Weight
(Reference) W X D X H [mm] [Kg] [Kg]
Stapler-stacker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 40 62
Booklet maker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 62 84.5
Hole punch 80 x 485 x 235 2.8 4.1
Paper size
Table 5-8 Paper size specification
Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker
mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H
52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t
A5 210 8.3X5. LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

X14 8
8
State 216 8.5X5. LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

ment X14 5
0
Letter 279 11X8.5 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21
6
A4 297 8.3X11. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21 7
0
B5(JIS) 257 10.1×7.2 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

X18
2
B5(ISO 250 9.8×6.9 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

) X17
6

Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)
on Maker
2/4H h 4H
52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t
Execut 267 10.5X7. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

ive X18 3
4
No 9 98X 3.9X8. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env 225 9
Monar 98.4 3.9×7.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

ch Env ×19
0.5
Postca 101. 4.0×6.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

rd 6×1
52.4
4x6
A6 105 4.1X5.8 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

X14
8
No 10 105 4.1×9.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env ×241
DL Env 110× 4.3×8.7 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

220
C6 Env 114× 4.5×6.4 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

162
B6 128 5.0x7.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

x18
2
State 140 5.5X8. SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

ment X21 5
6
A5 148 5.8X8. SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

X21 3
0
C5 Env 162 6.4×9.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×22
9
B5(ISO 176× 6.9×9.8 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O X X

) 250
B5(JIS) 182 7.2X10.1 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

X25
7
Execut 184 7.3X10. SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

ive X26 5
7

on Maker
2/4H h 4H
52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t
16k 195 7.7X10. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X27 6
0
A4 210 8.3X11. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X29 7
7
Legal 216 8.5X14 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X35
6
Letter 216 8.5X11 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X27
9
Folio 216 8.5X13 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X33
0
Oficio 215. 8.5×13. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

9×3 5
42.9
C4 Env 229 9.1X12. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×32 8
4
Tabloid 254 10 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O O X

X37 X14.7
4
B4 257 10X14. SEF O O O F/R X O O O X O O O X

X36 3
4
8K 270 10.6X1 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X39 5.4
0
Ledger 279 11X17 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X43
2
A3 297 11.7X16. SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X42 5
0
Tabloid 304. 12×18 SEF O X O X X X X X X X X O X

8×4
Extra 57.2
SRA3 320 12.6×17. SEF O X O X X X X X X X X X X

×45 7
0

on Maker
2/4H h 4H
52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t
13"x19. 330 13x19.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

2" x48
7
Custo W9 W3.86- - X NA O NA NA NA N N N N NA NA NA
m 8-32 12.59 A A A A
0
L5.5-18
L13
9.7-
457.
2
* “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.
Media performance
Table 5-9 Media performance
Paper Type Function
Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM
Cover Content C-Fold
Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O
Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O O X X
Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O O X X
Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 O O O O O X X

g/m²)
Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 O O O O O X X

g/m2)
Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 O O X O O X X

g/m2)
Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)
Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O O O O
Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O X X X X X
Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O
Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O
Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Table 5-9 Media performance (continued)
Paper Type Function
Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM
Cover Content C-Fold
Bond O O O O O O X
Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O O O X
Letterhead O O O O O O X
Pre-Punched O O O X X X X
Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O X X X
Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X X X X
Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X X X X
Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 O O X X X X X

g/m²)
Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)
Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O O X X
Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X O X X
Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O O O X O X X
Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X X X X
Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) X O X X X X X
Transparency (138~146 gsm) O O X X X X X
Labels (120~150 gsm) X O X X X X X
Tab O O X O X X X
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system

Learn about the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system.
Overview
Learn about the overview of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
Work flow
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher work flow
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system 1239

Figure 5-6 Work flow overview
6. Top output tray
14. Paper holding 5. Top exit
4. Tray diverter
13. Main output tray
3. Punch
2. Entrance
7. Main exit 1. Bridge
8. Paddle
10. Tamper
12. Ejector
9. End fence 15. Buffer
11. Stapler
16. Booklet entrance

19. Booklet presser
24. Booklet exit
23. Booklet diverter 21. Booklet stapler
17. Booklet paddle
22. Booklet fold
20. Booklet tamper
25. Booklet output tray
18. Booklet end fence
Table 5-10 work flow overview
Item Unit Description
1 Bridge unit Moves paper from the printer to the finisher.
2 Entrance unit Allows paper to move into the finisher.
3 Punch unit(optional) Holes in a specific location on paper sheet.
4 Tray diverter unit Changes the paper direction whether it is main output tray or top output tray.
5 Top exit unit Moves paper from the diverter to the top output tray.
6 Top output tray unit Stacks paper that completed its printing job.
7 Main exit unit Moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit with forward direction or to the
buffer unit with backward direction.
8 Paddle unit Pushes to the end fence to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.
9 End fence unit Sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the
paper.
10 Tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper.
11 Stapler unit Staples a bundle of an aligned documents.
12 Ejector unit Transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the output tray.
13 Main output tray unit Stacks paper that completed its printing job.

Table 5-10 work flow overview (continued)
14 Paper holding unit Keeps paper static and controls the output tray movement.
15 Buffer unit Maintains paper inside the unit for a while or moves it to the booklet maker.
16 Booklet entrance unit Receives the paper into the booklet maker.
17 Booklet paddle unit Pushes to the booklet end fence.
18 Booklet end fence unit Supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper to the
designated position for folding and stapling.
19 Booklet presser unit Presses paper that enters to the booklet tamper unit to prevent paper shuffled.
20 Booklet tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper to make booklet.
21 Booklet stapler unit Staples a bundle of aligned documents to make a booklet.
22 Booklet fold unit Fold a bundle of aligned documents as a booklet.
23 Booklet diverter unit Changes the paper direction to the booklet exit unit or the location to make c-fold.
24 Booklet exit unit Moves paper to the booklet output tray.
25 Booklet output tray unit Stacks the bundle of booklet.
Sensor
Figure 5-7 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1
S12
S11 S1
S10 S2
S9
S3
S8 S4
S5
S7
S6
Table 5-11 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description
S1 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2070 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the bridge entrance unit.
S2 Bridge door 0604-001393 (*) 113-2180 Photo Checks whether the bridge door is
sensor interrupter opened.
Overview 1241
Table 5-11 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1 (continued)
S3 Bridge exit 0604-001393 (*) 113-2071 Photo Checks whether paper comes into
sensor interrupter the bridge exit unit.
S4 Tray diverter 0604-001415 (*) 113-2020 Photo Checks whether the tray diverter
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.
S5 Main exit cam 0604-001393 (*) 113-2000 Photo Check whether the main exit CAM
S6 Front tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2120 Photo Checks whether the front tamper
S7 End fence home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2050 Photo Checks whether the end fence
sensor interrupter locates at the home position.
S8 Paddle home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2060 Photo Checks whether the paddle
sensor interrupter locates at the home position.
S9 Rear tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2130 Photo Checks whether the rear tamper
S10 Main exit JC32-00020A (*) 113-2090 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the main exit unit.
S11 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2091 Photo Checks whether paper comes into
interrupter the top exit unit.
S12 Entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2080 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the entrance unit.
Figure 5-8 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2
S35 S13
S34
S14
S33
S15
S32 S16
S31
S17
S30 S18
S29
S19
S28 S20
S21
S27
S26 S22
S23
S25
S24

Table 5-12 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2
S13 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2100 Paper sensor Checks whether paper exits out of
the buffer unit
S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2170 Paper sensor Checks whether paper is on the
ejector or not.
S15 Top output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2145 LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the top output
paper full tray is full or not.
sensor
S16 Buffer home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2210 Photo Checks whether the buffer roller
sensor interrupter and the idle roller whether
attached or detached.
S17 Front Paper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2141 Photo Checks whether the location of
holding sensor interrupter the paper holding actuator for
controlling the position of the main
output tray.
S18 Front door JC39-02309A 113-2182 Switch Check whether the front door is
switch open.
S19 Manual staple 0604-001415 (*) 113-2160 Photo Check whether the paper comes
sensor interrupter into the manual staple position.
S2 Main output JC82-01039A (*) 113-2140 LED IR, Photo TR Check whether the main output
0 tray top of stack tray reaches the top of stack.
sensor
S21 Stapler front 0604-001393 (*) 113-2113 Photo Makes the stapler positioned
sensor interrupter in accordance with the manual
stapling position.
S2 Paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2010 Photo Checks whether the paper holding
2 home sensor interrupter actuator locates at the home
position.
S2 Ejector2 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2041 Photo Checks whether the ejector2
3 sensor interrupter motor is operational.
S24 Stapler mid 0604-001393 (*) 113-2112 Photo Make the stapler positioned at the
front sensor interrupter exact stapling position.
S2 Stapler mid rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2111 Photo Make the stapler positioned at the
5 sensor interrupter exact stapling position.
S2 Main output 0604-001415 (*) 113-2144 Photo Checks whether the lower limit of
6 tray lower limit interrupter the output tray (=output tray is full).
sensor
S27 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2032 Photo Checks whether the ejector1
sensor interrupter motor is operational.
S2 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 (*) 113-2030 Photo Checks whether the ejector1
8 sensor interrupter locates at the end position.
S2 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2031 Photo Checks whether the ejector1
9 sensor interrupter locates at the home position.
S3 Stapler rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2110 Photo Checks whether the stapler
0 sensor interrupter locates at the home(rear) position.
S31 Rear paper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2142 Photo Checks whether the location of
holding sensor interrupter the paper holding actuator for
controlling the position of the main
output tray.
Overview 1243
Table 5-12 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2 (continued)
S3 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2040 Photo Checks whether the ejector2
2 sensor interrupter locates at the home position.
S3 Main output 0604-001393 (*) 113-2143 Photo Checks whether the Main output
3 tray motor interrupter tray motor is operational.
sensor
S3 Main output JC39-02316A 113-2190 Switch Checks whether the main output
4 tray top of stack tray reaches at the top of stack.
switch
S3 Top door switch JC39-02310A 113-2181 Switch Checks whether the top door is
5 open.
Figure 5-9 Sensor – Booklet finisher
S46
S36 S37
S45
S44 S38
S39
S43 S40
S41
S42
Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher
S36 Booklet 0604-001415 (*) 113-3100 Photo Checks whether paper comes
entrance interrupter into the bridge entrance unit.
sensor
S37 Booklet 0604-001393 (*) 113-3130 Photo Checks whether the booklet
presser home interrupter presser locates at the home
sensor position.
S38 Booklet tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-3080 Photo Checks whether the booklet
home sensor interrupter tamper locates at the home
position.
S39 Booklet c-fold 0604-001393 (*) 113-3050 Photo Checks whether the booklet c-
blade home interrupter fold blade locates at the home
sensor position.

Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher (continued)
S40 Booklet 0604-001415 (*) 113-3060 Photo Checks whether the booklet
diverter home interrupter diverter locates at the home
sensor position.
S41 Booklet paddle 0604-001393 (*) 113-3090 Photo Checks whether the booklet
home sensor interrupter paddle locates at the home
position.
S42 Booklet end 0604-001393 (*) 113-3000 Photo Checks whether the booklet
fence home interrupter end fence locates at the home
sensor position.
S43 Booklet output JC82-01039A (*) 113-2150 LED IR, Photo Checks whether paper goes out
tray sensor TR on the booklet output tray.
S44 Booklet exit JC32-00020A (*) 113-3120 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes
sensor into the booklet exit unit.
S45 Booklet blade 0604-001393 (*) 113-3040 Photo Checks whether the booklet blade
Overview 1245
Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher (continued)
S46 Booklet tamper JC32-00020A (*) 113-3110 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes
sensor into the booklet tamper unit.
Figure 5-10 Sensor – Paper path
S15 S11 S10 S4
S12
S1
S13 S3
S20
S36
S26
S43
S46
S44
S43

Motor and solenoid
Figure 5-11 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher
M13 M14
M12
M11
M10 M1
SL1
M9 M2
M3
M8
M7 M4
M5
M6
Table 5-14 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher
M1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Step motor Rotates the paddle and moves the
paddle pusher up and downward
at the same time.
M2 Main exit cam JC93-01155A (*) 113-2500 Step motor Rotates the main exit cam to
motor detach the exit roller from the exit
idle roller.
M3 End fence JC93-01001A (*) 113-2590 Step motor Moves front and rear end fence
motor depending on paper size(width) so
that paper is well arranged at the
end fence.
M4 Front tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-2630 Step motor Moves the front tamper unit.
motor
M5 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-2540 DC motor Moves the ejector2 and grabs
paper.
M6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 113-2530 DC motor Moves the ejector1 forward and
backward
M7 Paper holding JC93-01156A (*) 113-2510 Step motor Moves paper holding actuator
motor up when paper goes out to the
output tray
M8 Stapler position JC31-00163A (*) 113-2620 Hybrid Step Moves the stapler.
motor motor
M9 Rear tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-2640 Step motor Moves the rear tamper unit.
motor
SL1 Buffer Solenoid JC33-00038A (*) 113-2670 Solenoid Holds paper not to fall out to the
booklet maker during buffering
task.
Overview 1247
Table 5-14 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher (continued)
M10 Buffer motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-2660 Step motor Moves paper to the buffer space
or the booklet maker.
M11 Main output JC31-00178B (*) 113-2610 DC motor Moves the main output tray up
tray motor and down.
M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Hybrid Step Operates the entrance roller,
motor middle roller, and top middle roller
when driving in the forward and
moves the diverter cam when
driving in the backward.
M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Hybrid Step Rotates the main exit roller and
motor the top exit roller.
M14 Bridge motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2560 Hybrid Step Rotates the bridge entrance roller,
motor the bridge middle roller and the
bridge exit roller.
Figure 5-12 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher
M23 M15
M16
M22
M17
M21
M18
M19
M20 SL2 71
Table 5-15 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher
M15 Booklet JC93-01152A (*) 113-3500 Step motor Rotates the booklet entrance
entrance motor roller.
M16 Booklet JC93-01155A (*) 113-3570 Step motor Operates the booklet presser.
presser motor
M17 Booklet C-fold JC93-01154A (*) 113-3590 Step motor Drives the booklet c-fold blade
blade motor and the moving guide.
M18 Booklet JC93-01153A (*) 113-3560 Step motor Drives the booklet diverter
diverter motor

Table 5-15 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher (continued)
M19 Booklet paddle JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Step motor Rotates the booklet paddle.
motor
M20 Booklet end JC93-01155A (*) 113-3530 Step motor Moves the booklet end fence up
fence motor and down.
M21 Booklet Fold JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 BLDC motor Rotates the booklet fold roller,
motor the booklet c-fold roller, and the
booklet exit roller.
M22 Booklet blade JC31-00144A (*) 113-3550 BLDC motor Drives the booklet blade.
motor
M23 Booklet tamper JC93-01155A (*) 113-3540 Step motor Moves the booklet tamper unit.
motor
SL2 Booklet end JC33-00038A (*) 113-3520 Solenoid Operates the gripper of the
fence solenoid booklet end fence to grip paper
that comes in the booklet end
fence.
NOTE: The motor sensor which is mounted near the driving motor detects whether the motor is
operating or not. If a motor doesn’t work properly, an event code only for the motor will occur. On the
other hand, the home position sensor is installed for the purpose of checking the reference position or
location when the specific unit is operating.
Figure 5-13 Motor sensor in the ejector unit
Motor sensor
Motor
Figure 5-14 Home sensor in the stapler unit
Home sensor
Overview 1249
Roller
Figure 5-15 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher
R9
R1
R2
R8
R3
R7
R4
R6 R5
Table 5-16 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description
R1 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
bridge unit.
R2 Bridge middle JC66-04732A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit.
R3 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit
R4 Entrance roller JC66-04722A (*) Entrance Moves paper from the entrance unit to
motor the exit unit
R5 Middle roller JC66-04724A (*) Entrance Moves paper from the entrance unit to
motor the exit unit
R6 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Buffer motor Moves paper to the booklet maker, and
makes the gap between the buffer roller
and the idle roller so that paper stays
for the buffering.
R7 Main exit roller JC66-04726A (*) Exit motor Moves paper to the ejector unit or the
Main exit cam buffer unit and makes the gap between
motor the main exit roller and the idle roller so
that paper stays for the buffering.
R8 Top middle roller JC66-04725A (*) Entrance Moves paper to the top output tray.
motor

Table 5-16 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher (continued)
R9 Top exit roller JC66-04727A (*) Exit motor Moves paper to the top output tray.
Figure 5-16 Roller – Booklet finisher
R10
R13
R11
R12
Table 5-17 Roller – Booklet finisher
R10 Booklet entrance JC66-04717A Booklet Moves paper from the machine to the
roller entrance bridge unit.
motor
R11 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Booklet fold Presses a stack of paper to fold
motor completely.
R12 Booklet c-fold JC66-04744A (*) Booklet fold In case of c-fold, presses a stack of
roller motor paper to fold completely.
Overview 1251
Table 5-17 Roller – Booklet finisher (continued)
R13 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A (*) Booklet fold Moves paper to the booklet output tray
motor unit
PCA
Figure 5-17 PCA
P1
P3
P2
Table 5-18 PCA
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Description
P1 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B This PCA shows the manual stapling condition
and accepts the button input for manual staple.
P2 Booklet maker PCA JC92-02789B (*) This PCA controls the booklet maker module
and consists of the micro-controller and driver
ICs.
P3 Finisher main PCA JC92-02968A (*) This PCA controls the finisher modules and
consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

Table 5-18 PCA (continued)
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Description
Not Hole punch PCA - This PCA controls the hole punch module and
shown consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
Bridge unit
The Bridge Unit is the asset to transfer paper from the printer to the finisher. The bridge entrance sensor
(S1) detects paper entering the bridge unit from the printer. In the same way, the bridge exit sensor (S3)
checks that the paper leaves from the bridge unit to the finisher. The bridge motor (M14) drive the bridge
entrance roller, bridge middle roller, and bridge exit roller. It makes paper moves through the bridge unit.
The jam removal door locating at the front side of the unit helps user to remove the jammed paper.
Figure 5-18 Bridge unit overview
R1
R2
M14 R3
S1
S2
S3
Figure 5-19 Bridge unit detail view
R3 R2 R1
M14
S2
S1
U1
S3
Bridge unit 1253

Table 5-19 Bridge unit parts information
No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description
U1 Bridge unit JC90-01772B (*) Moves paper from the printer to the
finisher.
S2 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2180 Detects if the bridge door is open.
S1 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2070 Checks whether paper comes into the
sensor bridge entrance unit.
S3 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2071 Checks whether paper move out of the
bridge unit.
M14 Bridge motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2560 Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the
bridge middle roller and the bridge exit
roller.
R3 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A (*) Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit.
R2 Bridge middle JC66-04732A (*) Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit.
R1 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A (*) Moves paper from the bridge unit to the
finisher entrance unit.
Entrance unit
Entrance unit moves paper from the bridge unit to the inside of the finisher.The Entrance sensor (S12)
installed at the right side of the unit senses that the paper is entering the unit. The Entrance motor (M12)
rotates forward to drive the entrance roller and the middle roller to move paper to the exit unit.
Figure 5-20 Entrance unit overview
M12 S12
R4
R5

Figure 5-21 Entrance unit detail view - front
R4
R5
R3
R4
Figure 5-22 Entrance unit detail view - rear
M12
Figure 5-23 Entrance unit detail view - right
S12
Table 5-20 Entrance unit parts information
S12 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2080 Detects whether paper enters at the
entrance unit.
Entrance unit 1255

Table 5-20 Entrance unit parts information (continued)
M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Operates the entrance roller and middle
roller when driving forward.
R4 Entrance roller JC66-04722A (*) Moves paper from the entrance unit to
the exit unit.
R5 Middle roller JC66-04724A (*) Moves paper from the entrance unit to
the exit unit.
Punch unit (optional)

Learn about the punch unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is
positioned right after the entrance unit.
● HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory —Y1G10A
● HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory — Y1G11A
● HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory — Y1G12A
NOTE: Puncher types are various depending on the country.
In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
forward, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make the
holes on the paper. When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the backward direction and the inner gear
rotates to the left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the hole-punches are detected
and controlled by the 3 punch position sensors.
Figure 5-24 Punch unit overview

Figure 5-25 Punch unit detail view
5 6 1 2
5 4 3
Table 5-21 Punch unit parts information
Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description
U1 Punch unit
2-3 hole Y1G10A (*)
2-4 hole Y1G11A (*)
Swedish hole Y1G12A (*)
1 Punch scan home 113-4000 Detects the home position of

sensor the punch unit
3 Punch scan edge 113-4010 Check the paper width to make

sensor hole on the right position of
113-4011 paper.
113-4012
113-4013
2 Punch scan motor 113-4500 Transmits the force to move

the punch unit in the horizontal
direction.
4 Punch position sensor 113-4020 Detects the travel distance and

position of the hole-punches.
113-4030
113-4031
5 Punch motor sensor 113-4040 Checks whether the punch

motor is operational
6 Punch motor 113-4510 Transmits the force to make

holes on the paper
(*) This part is in system.
Punch unit operation

1. A paper enters into the punch unit, and it is aligned to drill holes.
2. The motor rotates forward or backward, then the punch rail in the punch unit moves in order to move
the punch hole makers (callout 1).
Punch unit (optional) 1257

2
3. The punch position sensors determine the punch rail location (callout 2). It drives the punch hole
makers up and down to make holes (callout 3).
4. In some paper size, paper might be jammed in a place where punch hole maker is located. Therefore,
the punch unit moves left and right (callout 4).

Tray diverter unit
Learn about the Tray diverter unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The tray diverter unit is responsible for determining the paper feed direction so that paper can be
ejected to the main output tray or top output tray.
The entrance motor (M12) rotates this unit. When the entrance motor rotates backward, the phase of the
divertor cam (callout1) changes so that the paper path direction changes. The tray diverter home sensor
(S4) checks whether the tray diverter is located at the home position or not. (callout2).
Figure 5-26 Tray diverter unit overview
M12 1
S4
Tray diverter unit 1259

Figure 5-27 Tray diverter unit detail view – front-top
Figure 5-28 Tray diverter unit detail view – rear
S4
Table 5-22 Tray diverter unit parts information
1 Tray diverter JC61-07205A Selects the paper path of either

the main output tray or the top
output tray
2 Tray diverter cam JC66-04560A 113-2520 Changes the paper path
S4 Tray diverter home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2020 Checks whether home position
sensor of the tray diverter
M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) Operates the tray diverter cam
when driving in the backward
direction.
Tray diverter unit operation

1. When printing or copying documents, the entrance motor operates backward so that the diverter
cam (Callout 2) can be rotate.

2. The direction of the tray diverter(callout1) is changed to the main output tray or the top output tray
by the tray diverter cam(callout2).
2
7RSRXWSXWWUD\GLUHFWLRQ 0DLQRXWSXWWUD\GLUHFWLRQ
Top exit unit

Learn about the Top exit unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The top exit unit sends paper from the tray diverter unit to the top output tray unit.
The top exit sensor(S11) detects paper entry into the top exit unit. The entrance motor(M12) drives the top
middle roller, and the exit motor(M13) transmit the force to rotate the top exit roller so that paper moves
to the top output tray unit.
Figure 5-29 Top exit unit overview
M13 M12
S11
R8
R9
Top exit unit 1261

Figure 5-30 Top exit unit detail view – front-top
S11
R9
Table 5-23 Top exit unit parts information
S11 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2091 Checks whether paper has
entered at the top exit unit
M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Rotates the top middle roller
when driving in the forward
direction.
M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Rotates the top exit roller
R8 Top middle roller JC66-04725A (*) Moves paper to the top output
tray
R9 Top exit roller JC66-04727A (*) Moves paper to the top output
tray
Top output tray unit

Learn about the Top output tray unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The top output tray unit loads discharged paper from the finisher.
It has the paper pull sensor(S15) to detect whether the tray is full with paper.

Figure 5-31 Top output tray unit overview
S15
Figure 5-32 Top output tray unit detail view – front-left
S15
Table 5-24 Top output tray unit parts information
1 Top output tray JC63-04996B Loads ejected paper
JC63-05003B (*)
S15 Top output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2145 Detects whether paper
paper full sensor is fully staked on the
(receiver, led) output tray.
Main exit unit

Learn about the Main exit unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The main exit unit delivers paper from the tray diverter unit to the ejector unit or buffer unit.
Main exit unit 1263

The main exit sensor (S10) detects whether paper comes in from main exit unit. The exit motor (M13)
drives the main exit roller to send the paper to the ejector unit or buffer unit.
Figure 5-33 Main exit unit overview
M13
S5
M2
R7
S10
Figure 5-34 Main exit unit detail view – (front-rear)
M13
R7
S5
M2

Table 5-25 Main exit unit parts information
S10 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2090 Detects whether paper entered
at the main exit unit
M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Rotates the main exit roller
R7 Main exit roller JC66-04726A (*) Moves paper to the ejector unit
or the buffer unit
1 Main exit cam Adjusts the gap between the

main exit roller and the idle
roller for the buffering. (*Please
refer to ‘buffer unit’)
S5 Main exit cam home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2000 Detects the home position of
sensor the main exit cam
M2 Main exit cam motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-2500 Rotates the main exit cam.
Main exit unit operation

1. The exit motor(M13) drives forward so that paper will moves towards the ejector unit.
2. On the other hand, if the exit motor rotates backwards paper moves towards the buffer unit.
Main exit unit 1265

Paddle unit
Learn about the Paddle unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The paddle unit rotates the rubber paddles mounted on the shaft to move paper to the end fence unit,
allowing paper to be arranged well for the next job. The paddle presser is mounted behind the rubber
paddles and presses the end of paper to help paper be stacked well at the end fence unit. The Paddle
home sensor (S8) checks the home position to drive the paddles. And the paddle motor(M1) drives the
paddle and paddle presser.
Figure 5-35 Paddle unit overview

Figure 5-36 Paddle unit detail view - front
Figure 5-37 Paddle unit detail view - left
Table 5-26 Paddle unit parts information
1 Paddle JC90-01480A Moves paper into the end fence

unit
2 Paddle presser JC61-07206A Presses the end of bent paper

helps paper to be loaded well at
the end fence unit
S8 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2060 Detect the home position of the
paddle
M1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2600 Rotates the paddle, and moves
the paddle presser up and
downward at the same time
Paddle unit operation

1. A paper falls downward by exit unit.
2. The paddles rotate to make a paper moves into the end fence unit. (callout 1)
Paddle unit 1267

3. The paddle presser presses the end of a paper so as not to be scattered. (callout 2).
End fence unit

Learn about the End fence unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The paddle unit moves paper to the end fence unit. The end fence unit sets the standard position of the
paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.
End fence motor(M3) operates the two end fences and adjust width of them in order to stack paper
correctly. The end fence home sensor(S7) detects the home position of the end fence.
Figure 5-38 End fence unit overview

Figure 5-39 End fence unit detail view – front
Figure 5-40 End fence unit detail view - left
Table 5-27 End fence unit parts information
1 End fence Aligns top and bottom side of

paper.
S7 End fence home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2050 Detects the home position of
sensor the end fence
M3 End fence motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2590 Moves front and rear end fence
depending on paper size(width)
so that paper arranged well at
the end fence
End fence unit operation

1. The end fence motor(M3) moves the front and rear end fences in the arrow direction (callout 1)
depending on paper width.
End fence unit 1269

2. Paper goes into the end fence unit by the paddle unit. (callout 2)
3. At the same time the end fence unit aligns paper to the direction of yellow line. (callout 3)
Tamper unit
Learn about the Tamper unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper. When a certain amount
of paper is collected after printing, the tamper unit hits the left and right ends of the paper to align the
paper correctly.
Each tamper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move. The tamper home sensors
are mounted on the back side of the unit to check the home position of the tamper unit.

Figure 5-41 Tamper unit overview
2 S9
M4
S6 1
Figure 5-42 Tamper unit detail view - left
Figure 5-43 Tamper unit detail view - left-right

M9
2 1
S9
S6 M4
Tamper unit 1271

Table 5-28 tamper unit parts information
1 Front tamper JC82-00901A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper.
S6 Front tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2120 Detects the home position of
sensor the tamper unit.
M4 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2630 Moves the front tamper unit.
2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper.
S9 Rear tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2130 Detects the home position of
sensor the tamper unit.
M9 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2640 Moves the front tamper unit.
Tamper unit operation

1. A stack of paper is arranged at the end fence unit.
2. The left and right tampers arrange them.
3. In case of offset printing, the tamper unit arranges the next bundle to be shifted. (callout 3)

Stapler unit
Learn about the Stapler unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
Stapler unitis a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents.
Documents are collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then
stapler assembly staples the bundle. There are 6 options to make a bundle.
Figure 5-44 Stapling options
The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor(M8) installed inside. The one home sensor (rear sensor,
S30) and two position sensors (mid-front,S24 and mid-rear sensor,S25) are mounted so that the stapler
can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on the left, the right, or at the center
of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler assembly.
In addition, manual staple feature is available on the front-upper side of the finisher. The manual staple
sensor(S19) detects whether a stack of paper comes into the manual staple location or not. The front
sensor (stapler front sensor, S21) makes the stapler moves at the manual staple location.
Stapler unit 1273

Figure 5-45 Stapler unit overview
Figure 5-46 Stapler unit detail view - front
Figure 5-47 Stapler unit detail view

M8
S21
S30 S25 S24
Table 5-29 Stapler unit parts information
1 Stapler unit JC82-00894A (*) Staples a bundle of paper
2 Staple cartridge JC81-09882B (*) 113-2115 Staple cartridge
113-2116
S21 Stapler front sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2113 Detect the stapler at the
manual stapling position

Table 5-29 Stapler unit parts information (continued)
S24 Stapler mid-front 0604-001393 (*) 113-2112 Detect the stapler location
sensor
S25 Stapler mid-rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2111 Detect the stapler location
sensor
S30 Stapler rear sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2110 Detect the home position of the
stapler
S19 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2160 Detect paper when manual
stapling
M8 Stapler position motor JC31-00163A (*) 113-2620 Moves the stapler

Stapler unit operation

1. The stapler position motor drives the stapler assembly to direction 1.
2. The stapler assembly moves through the rail using three stapler position sensors (callout2) and
staples a stack of paper.
3. In case of staple cartridge replacement, the stapler moves to direction 3.
Stapler unit 1275

4. For manual stapling, the stapler moves in direction 4.
Ejector unit
Learn about the ejector unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The ejector unit ejects a bundle of paper out to the main output tray. The ejector unit consists of ejector1
and ejector2.
The ejector1 moves a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit. During this
process, the ejector1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And ejector1 motor sensor
checks the ejector1 motor operation. And the ejector1 home sensor detects the home position of the
ejector1. The ejector1 end sensor detects the end position of the ejector1.
When the paper arrives at the ejector2 unit, the ejector2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the
main output tray. The ejector2 motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector2 motor sensor
helps it to be controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2 home sensor checks the location of the
ejector2.
Figure 5-48 Ejector unit overview
1
2
M5
S23
S32
M6
S27

Figure 5-49 Ejector unit detail view - left
S32
S23
S27 M6 M5
Table 5-30 Ejector unit parts information
Ejector unit JC90-01409A (*)
S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2170 Detects whether paper

is on the ejector or not.
1 Ejector1 Moves the stack of

paper from the end
fence to the ejector2
S29 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2031 Detects the home

sensor position of the ejector1
S28 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 (*) 113-2030 Detects the end

S27 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2032 Detects whether the

sensor Ejector1 motor rotates
M6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 113-2530 Moves the ejector1

forward and backward
2 Ejector2 Moves paper from the

ejector1 to the main
output tray
S32 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2040 Detects the home

S23 Ejector2 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2041 Detects the ejector2

sensor motor rotation
Ejector unit 1277

Table 5-30 Ejector unit parts information (continued)
M5 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-2540 Moves the ejector2 and

grabs paper
Ejector unit operation

1. The ejector1(callout1) pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector2 unit(callout2).
S28
1
S29 S14
S27
M6
2. The ejector2(callout2) picks up paper, then moves forward to the main output tray direction.
S23
S32
M5

Main output tray unit
Learn about the Main output tray unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
Printouts are stacked on the main output tray (C7). The main output tray moves up and down along the
rails inside the finisher, and the main output tray motor (M11) controls those movements according to the
signals of the front & rear paper holding sensor. Main output tray motor sensor (S33) checks whether
the main output tray motor rotates properly.
When main output tray hits the lower limit sensor of the main output tray (S26), the machine detects that
paper tray is full. The main output tray top of stack sensor(S20) detects that the main output tray is on
the top.
Figure 5-50 Main output tray unit overview
M11
S34
S33
S20
C7
S26
Main output tray unit 1279

Figure 5-51 Main output tray unit detail view - left
S20
C7
S26
Figure 5-52 Main output tray unit detail view - rear
S33
M11
Table 5-31 Main output tray unit parts information
C7 Main output tray JC63-05002B Stacking plate for ejected paper
S20 Main output tray top of JC82-01039A (*) 113-2140 Checks the upper limit of main
stack sensor (receiver, output tray
led)

Table 5-31 Main output tray unit parts information (continued)
S6 Main output tray lower 0604-001415 (*) 113-2144 Detects the lowest position of
limit sensor the output tray
S33 Main output tray motor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2143 Detects whether the main
sensor output tray motor rotates
M11 Main output tray motor JC31-00178B (*) 113-2610 Moves the main output tray up
and down
JC90-01415B (*)
S34 Main output tray top of JC39-02316A 113-2190 Checks the upper limit of main
stack switch output tray so that detects
abnormal movement of output
tray
Paper holding unit

Learn about the Paper holding unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The paper holding unit holds printouts on the main output tray. It has a sensor that detects the height of
stacked paper so that the output tray moves up and down to stack paper in a stable manner.
The paper holding motor(M7) lifts the paper holding actuator when printouts come out to the main
output tray. The paper holding home sensor(S22) detects the location of paper holding actuator at the
home position. The front & rear paper holding sensor (S17, S31) checks the volume of printouts on the
main output tray and makes the main output tray move downward
Figure 5-53 Paper holding unit overview
S31
S17
M7 S22
Paper holding unit 1281

Figure 5-54 Paper holding unit detail view - left
1
S17 S31
S22
Figure 5-55 Paper holding unit detail view - left
M7
Table 5-32 paper holding unit parts information
1 Paper holding actuator Control the height of the main

output tray and hold printouts
so as not to be scattered
S17 Front paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2141 Detects stacked paper position
sensor
S31 Rear paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2142 Detects stacked paper position
sensor
S22 Paper holding home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2010 Detects the home position of
sensor paper holding actuator
M7 Paper holding motor JC90-01414A (*) 113-2510 Lift paper holding actuator up
when printouts delivered to the
main output tray

Table 5-32 paper holding unit parts information (continued)
2 Left upper cover JC90-01475B

paper holding unit operation

1. When printouts are delivered to the main output tray, a paper holding motor moves paper holding
actuator upward to create a paper path to prevent jam (callout1).
2. When printouts are stacked on top of the main output tray, the paper holding actuator goes down to
hold them(callout2).
3. As paper stacks up on the main output tray, the paper holding actuator is lifted by papers. The front
& rear paper holding sensors make the main output tray moves downward to store more printouts.
(callout3)
Paper holding unit 1283

4. As printouts are stacked on the main output tray, the tray goes down. When it reaches at the end of
its moving range (callout 4), the main output tray touches the lower limit sensor. The sensor detects
that the main output tray is full of printouts.
Buffer unit
Learn about the diverter unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The buffer unit keeps paper inside the unit or moves them to the booklet maker.
The buffer diverter creates a paper path so that paper can move to the buffer unit, and the buffer
sensor detects whether paper moved out from the buffer unit. The buffer motor controls buffer roller,
and buffer home sensors checks the location of buffer rollers. The buffer solenoid holds papers so that
they do not fall into the booklet maker while buffering.
NOTE: buffering: It is to maintain print speed when users print multiple copies continuously.
The 1st page of a print job stays in the buffer unit for a moment while the previous job is being ejected.
After the previous print job was ejected, the 1st and 2nd page of the job move to the ejector unit
together.

Figure 5-56 Buffer unit overview
SL1
M10
R6
S13
S16
Figure 5-57 Buffer unit detail view - front
S16
R6
Figure 5-58 Buffer unit detail view - rear
M10
Buffer unit 1285

Figure 5-59 Buffer unitdetail view - top
SL1
Table 5-33 Buffer unit parts information
1 Buffer diverter JC61-07204A Makes the way to the buffer

space
S13 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2100 Detects whether paper has
moved out from the buffer unit
S16 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2210 Detects the home position of
the buffer roller.
M10 Buffer motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-2660 Moves paper to the buffer
space or the booklet maker
SL1 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A (*) 113-2670 Holds paper to prevent them
from falling out to the booklet
maker during buffering
R6 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Moves paper to the booklet

maker or makes the gap so that
paper stays in this space.
Buffer unit operation

1. When the buffer motor rotates backward to move the cam, the buffer roller(R6) can have gap and
then paper can stay inside the buffer unit
a. When the exit motor rotates backward to drive the main exit roller(R7), paper moves to the buffer
unit through the buffer diverter(callout1).

b. The main exit cam motor moves the main exit cam so that the main exit roller(R7) is separated
with the idle roller to have a gap, and then paper can stay in this place for a while.
c. When the next sheet comes to the main exit unit, the main exit motor turns the man exit cam so
that the main exit roller is attached to the idle roller.
d. he exit motor rotates forward and operates the main exit roller. It makes 2 paper moves to the
ejector together.
Buffer unit 1287

2. In case of booklet job, the buffer unit moves paper to the booklet maker.
a. The buffer motor rotates, the buffer roller(R6) is attached to the idle roller.
b. When paper arrives at the main exit unit, the exit motor rotates backward and moves the main
exit roller(R7) so that paper moves to the buffer unit through the buffer diverter.
c. The buffer motor rotates the buffer roller to move paper to the booklet maker.
Booklet entrance unit

Learn about the Booklet entrance unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet entrance unit receives paper into the booklet maker. The entrance sensor(S36) detects
whether the paper enters the entrance unit. The entrance motor(M15) drives the booklet entrance
roller(R10) to move the paper.

Figure 5-60 Booklet entrance unit overview
Figure 5-61 Booklet entrance unit detail view
Table 5-34 Entrance unit parts information
S36 Booklet entrance 0604-001415 (*) 113-3100 Detects whether paper has
sensor come into the booklet entrance
unit
M15 Booklet entrance JC93-01152A (*) 113-3500 Drives the booklet entrance
motor roller
R10 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper into the booklet
maker
Booklet paddle unit

Learn about the Booklet paddle unit of the booklet finisher.
Booklet paddle unit 1289

The booklet paddle unit pushes paper to the booklet end fence by rotating the rubber paddles. The
booklet paddle motor (M19) rotates two booklet paddles, and the booklet paddle home sensor(S41)
connected to the lower booklet paddle checks the home position of the booklet paddle.
Figure 5-62 Booklet paddle unit overview
Figure 5-63 Booklet paddle unit detail view
Table 5-35 booklet paddle unit parts information
1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A Moves paper to the booklet end

fence unit

Table 5-35 booklet paddle unit parts information (continued)
1 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A Moves paper to the booklet end

fence unit
JC61-07225A (*)
JC66-04719A (*)
S41 Booklet paddle home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2590 Check the home position of the
sensor booklet paddle
M19 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Drives two booklet paddles
Booklet end fence unit

Learn about the Booklet end fence unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet end fence unit supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper
to the designated position for folding and stapling. The Booklet end fence motor (M20) moves the
booklet end fence up and down. The booklet end fence home sensor (S42) checks the home position of
the booklet end fence. The booklet end fence solenoid (SL2) drives the clamp to hold paper that comes
into the booklet end fence.
Figure 5-64 Booklet end fence unit overview
Booklet end fence unit 1291

Figure 5-65 Booklet end fence unit detail view - left
Figure 5-66 Booklet end fence unit detail view - right
Table 5-36 booklet end fence unit parts information
1 Booklet end fence JC90-01432A Supports paper, then moves it

to the designated location to
fold or staple
S42 Booklet end fence 0604-001393 (*) 113-3000 Checks the home position of
home sensor the booklet end fence
M18 Booklet end fence JC93-01155A (*) 113-3530 Moves the booklet end fence up
motor and down
Sl2 Booklet end fence JC33-00038A (*) 113-3520 drives the clamp to hold paper
solenoid that comes into the booklet end
fence
Booklet end fence unit operation

1. The booklet end fence is located at the home position (callout1). When the booklet maker starts its
job, the end fence goes to the direction 2.

2. The booklet end fence unit supports paper comes from the booklet paddle unit and holds paper so
as not to be scattered(callout3). Then it moves to the certain location to fold or staple it (callout 4).
Booklet presser unit

Learn about the Booklet presser unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet presser unit sort print pages that enter to the booklet maker in order.The Booklet presser
motor (M16) moves the booklet presser, and the booklet presser home sensor (S37) checks whether the
booklet presser is at the home position.
Booklet presser unit 1293

Figure 5-67 Booklet presser unit overview
Figure 5-68 Booklet presser unit detail view
Table 5-37 Booklet presser unit parts information
1 Booklet presser JC61-07237A Accumulates paper from the

entrance unit not to be shuffled
S37 Booklet presser home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3130 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet presser

Table 5-37 Booklet presser unit parts information (continued)
M16 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3570 Drives the booklet presser
Booklet presser unit operation

1. Paper comes into the booklet presser unit (callout1). At this time the presser is located on the left
side of the finisher (callout 2).
2. After paper exits the entrance roller, the booklet presser hits the end of paper. (callout 3).
3. When a next sheet arrives at the unit, it will fall on the left side of the previous sheet pushed by the
booklet presser (callout 4).

Booklet tamper unit
Learn about the Booklet tamper unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet tamper unit aligns the left and right side of documents for stapling or folding.
The booklet tamper motor(M23) adjusts the booklet tampers’ width according to paper size. The booklet
tamper home sensor(S38) checks the home position of the booklet tamper.
Figure 5-69 Booklet tamper unit overview

Figure 5-70 Booklet tamper unit detail view
Table 5-38 Booklet tamper unit parts information
1 Booklet tamper JC90-01431A Aligns documents for stapling

or folding.
S38 Booklet tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3080 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet tamper
M23 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3540 Drives the booklet tamper
S46 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-3110

Booklet tamper unit operation

■ When a certain amount of paper is collected, the booklet tamper unit hits the left and right sides of
the paper to align the paper correctly.
Booklet tamper unit 1297

Booklet stapler unit
Learn about the Booklet stapler unit of the booklet finisher.
Booklet stapler unitis a device installed inside the booklet maker that staples a bundle of aligned
documents as a booklet.
There is only 1 option to make a bundle. If the user selects the option, this unit staples at the two location
in the middle of stacks.
Figure 5-71 Booklet staple option

Figure 5-72 Booklet stapler unit overview
Figure 5-73 Booklet stapler unit detail view
Table 5-39 Booklet stapler unitparts information
1 Booklet stapler JC81-08274B
2 Booklet stapler JC81-09881B (*) 113-3020

cartridge
113-3030
Booklet stapler unit operation

1. When a stack of sheets is collected in booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout2)
changes its location to be stapled.
Booklet stapler unit 1299

2. The booklet stapler(callout1) staples at the middle of stacks.
Booklet fold unit

Learn about the Booklet fold unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet fold unit is a device installed inside the booklet maker that folds a bundle of aligned
documents as a This unit consists of 2 types of blades: blade and c-fold blade. So, it creates two types of
output.
Figure 5-74 Fold options
The booklet blade motor (M22) drives the booklet blades and lightly folds the stack of paper. The folded
paper passes through the booklet fold rollers to be fully folded. The booklet blade home sensor (S45)
checks the home position of the booklet blade, and the booklet fold motor (M21) drives the rollers that
enable folding.
In case of c-fold, the booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade and lightly folds the
stack of paper once more. The folded paper passes through the booklet c-fold roller to be fully folded.
The booklet c-fold blade home sensor(S39) checks the home position of the c-fold blade.

Figure 5-75 Booklet fold unit overview – right-rear
Figure 5-76 Booklet fold unit overview – left-front
Booklet fold unit 1301

Figure 5-77 Booklet fold unit detail view - right
Figure 5-78 Booklet fold unit detail view – left
Figure 5-79 Booklet fold unit detail view – left-front

Table 5-40 Booklet fold unit parts information
1 Booklet blade JC93-01163A Pushes a stack of paper to fold.
S45 Booklet blade home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3040 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet blade.
M22 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3550 Drives the booklet blade
M21 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 Drives the booklet roller and c-
fold blade
R11 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to be

fully folded
2 Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Pushes a stack of paper to fold

for the c-fold task
S39 Booklet c-fold blade 0604-001393 (*) 113-3050 Checks the home position of
home sensor the booklet c-fold blade
M17 Booklet c-fold blade JC93-01154A (*) 113-3590 Drives the booklet c-fold blade
motor
R12 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A (*) In case of c-fold, presses

a stack of paper to fold
completely.
Booklet fold unit operation

1. In case of v-fold.
a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout1)
moves to a designated location.
b. The booklet blade motor(M22) drives the booklet blade(callout2) to push the center of paper.
c. Paper enters between the booklet fold rollers(R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely
folded between the rollers.
Booklet fold unit 1303

d. The folded paper stack is discharged to the booklet output tray via the booklet exit roller(R13).
2. In case of c-fold
a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout1) is
moved to a designated location.
b. The booklet blade motor(M22) drives the booklet blade(callout2) to push one-third of paper.
c. he paper enters between the booklet fold rollers(R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely
folded between the rollers.
d. The folded sheets move to s location where they will be c-folded by a booklet diverter.
e. The booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade(callout3), pokes two-thirds of
paper.
f. Paper enters between the booklet c-fold roller(R12) and the booklet fold roller by the booklet
c-fold blade and it is completely folded between the rollers.
Booklet diverter unit

Learn about the Booklet diverter unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet diverter unit determines a paper path to allow the stack of folded paper to exit to the booklet
output tray during the v-fold. In case of c-fold, it makes another paper path so folded sheets can move
to a location that can be c-folded. The booklet diverter motor(M18) drives the booklet diverter, and the
booklet diverter home sensor(S40) checks whether the booklet diverter is at the home position

Figure 5-80 Booklet diverter unit overview
M18
S40
Figure 5-81 Booklet diverter unit detail view – left-front
M18
S40
Booklet diverter unit 1305

Table 5-41 Booklet diverter unit parts information
1 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Determines the paper path for

either the booklet exit unit or
the location for c-fold
S40 Booklet diverter home 0604-001415 (*) 113-3060 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet diverter
M18 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A (*) 113-3560 Drives the booklet diverter
Booklet diverter unit operation

1. In case of v-fold, the booklet diverter(callout1) determines the paper path so that the folded sheets
exit to the booklet exit unit and into the booklet output tray.
2. On the other hand, in c-fold, it makes another paper path to fold it by c-fold blade(callout2).
Booklet exit unit

Learn about the Booklet exit unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet exit unit ejects a stack of v-fold paper to the booklet output tray unit. The booklet exit
sensor(S44) detects paper entry into the booklet exit unit, and the booklet fold motor(M19) drives the
booklet exit roller(R4) to discharge paper.

Figure 5-82 Booklet exit unit overview – front-right
Figure 5-83 Booklet exit unit detail view
Table 5-42 Booklet exit unit parts information
S44 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-3120 Check whether paper has come
into the booklet unit
M21 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 Drives the booklet exit roller
R13 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A (*) Moves paper to the booklet
output tray unit
Booklet output tray unit

Learn about the Booklet output tray unit of the booklet finisher.
Booklet output tray unit 1307

The booklet output tray unit is the place where the ejected paper is stacked. The booklet output tray
sensor(S43) detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray or not.
Figure 5-84 Booklet output tray unit overview
Figure 5-85 Booklet output tray unit detail view

Table 5-43 Booklet output tray unit parts information
1 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B (*) Stores paper stacks from the
booklet exit unit
JC63-04978B (*)
S43 Booklet output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2150 Detects whether paper is on the
sensor booklet output tray.pa
How to print large number of booklets

Y1G07A Booklet finisher is support available to print a large number of booklets.
1. Remove the booklet output tray (Callout 1).
2. Install the booklet sub tray at the booklet output (Callout 2).
NOTE:
● The booklet sub tray is included in the Booklet finisher product box. If a user misses the part,
order and use the new part.
● Booklet sub tray part number : JC61-07088A
Booklet output tray unit 1309

3. Install a box to store printouts(Callout 3).
PCA connection information

Learn about the PCA connection information.

Figure 5-86 Stapler / Stacker finisher system - PCA connection information
Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information
Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics
CN1 MainPCA
interface
CN2 Front door switch(S35) 113-2181
CN3 Top door switch(S18) 113-2182
CN4 Entrance 113-2570 Buffer sensor(S13) 113-2100

motor(M12)
Entrance sensor(S12) 113-2080
Tray diverter home 113-2020

sensor(S4)
Buffer home 113-2210

sensor(S16)
Top exit sensor(S11) 113-2091
Main exit sensor(S10) 113-2090
PCA connection information 1311

Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)
CN5 Rear tamper 113-2640 Front tamper home 113-2120 Manual staple
motor(M9) sensor(S6) PCA(P3)
Buffer 113-2660 Paddle home sensor(S8) 113-2060

motor(M10)
Paddle 113-2600 Top output tray paper 113-2145

motor(M1) full sensor(S15)
End fence 113-2590 Rear tamper home 113-2130

motor(M3) sensor(S9)
CN6 Bridge 113-2560 Bridge entrance 113-2070

Bridge door sensor(S2) 113-2180
Bridge exit sensor(S3) 113-2143
CN7 Punch unit
CN8 Exit motor(M13) 113-2580 Main output tray motor 113-2143

sensor(S33)
Main output 113-2610 Top output tray paper 113-2145

tray motor(M11) full sensor(S15)
CN9 Main output tray top of 113-2190

stack switch(S34)
CN10 Staple clinch Staple home sensor

motor
Stapler 113-2620 Staple ready sensor

position motor
(M8)
Staple low sensor
Stapler rear 113-2110

sensor(S30)
Stapler mid front 113-2112

sensor(S24)
Stapler mid rear 113-2111

sensor(S25)
CN11 Ejector2 113-2540 Ejector2 motor 113-2041

Ejector1 113-2530 Ejector1 motor 113-2032

Ejector2 home 113-2040

sensor(S32)
Ejector sensor(S14) 113-2170
Ejector1 end 113-2030

sensor(S28)
Ejector1 home 113-2031

sensor(S29)

Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)
CN12 Front tamper 113-2630 Manual staple 113-2160

End fence home 113-2050

sensor(S7)
Stapler front 113-2113

sensor(S21)
CN13 Paper holding 113-2510 Booklet output tray 113-2150

CN14 Main output top of stack 113-2140

sensor(S20)
Rear paper holding 113-2142

sensor(S31)
Front paper holding 113-2141

sensor(S17)
Paper holding home 113-2010

sensor(S22)
Main output top of stack 113-2140

sensor(S20)
CN15 Booklet
interface
CN16 Log
CN17 Main exit cam 113-2500 Main exit cam home 113-2000
Buffer 113-2670
solenoid(SL1)
Figure 5-87 Booklet finisher system - PCA connection information

Table 5-45 Booklet finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information
Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor Diagnostics Switch, Solenoid, Diagnostics

PCA
CN1 Stapler/
Stacker
interface
CN4 Booklet staple Booklet entrance 113-3100

motor sensor(S36)
Booklet staple low

sensor
Booklet staple home

sensor
CN5 Booklet presser 113-2580 Booklet presser 113-3130

motor(M16) home sensor(S37)
Booklet entrance 113-2100

motor(S13)
CN6 Booklet tamper 113-3540 Booklet blade home 113-3040

Booklet tamper 113-3080

home sensor(S38)
Booklet tamper 113-3110

sensor(S46)
CN7 Booklet paddle 113-3580 Booklet paddle 113-3090

Booklet diverter 113-3560 Booklet diverter 113-3060

CN8 Booklet c-fold blade 113-3590 Booklet exit 113-3120

Booklet c-fold blade 113-3050

home sensor(S39)
CN9 Booklet end fence 113-3530 Booklet end fence 113-3000 Booklet end fence
motor(M20) home sensor(S42) solenoid(SL2)
CN10 Booklet fold 113-3510 113-3520

motor(M21)
Booklet blade 113-3550

motor(M22)
Service approach
Learn about the service approach of the inner finisher.
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach
under the weight of the product.




touching a PCA.
Precautions when replacing parts 1315

latched.
Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
touching a PCA.

Learn about releasing plastic latches.
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them
carefully. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

● Remove all paper from the product.
● Turn off the power using the power button.
● Remove the toner cartridges.
● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.
ESD precautions

issues.
Before performing service 1317

Post-service test
Print-quality test
quality defects.

Ordering
Table 5-46 Ordering
Orderable parts
is orderable.
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and

booklet finishers)
Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)

Learn about parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)
Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker) 1319

Cover & hanress
Cover & hanress

Parts diagram and parts list for the cover and hanress.
Figure 5-88 cover
2 21
18
12
17
6
19 16
7 13
5
13
9 14
20 22
8 24
3 14
23
15-1
15-2
Table 5-47 cover
Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable
2 Finisher mount bracket JC90-01442A 1 (*)
3 Caster cover JC63-04985B 1 (*)
4 Front cover JC63-04986B 1 (*)
5 Front lower cover JC63-04987B 1 (*)
6 Rear cover JC63-04988B 1 (*)

Table 5-47 cover (continued)
7 Top output tray upper JC63-04996B 1 (*)
8 Main output tray JC63-05002B 1 (*)
9 Top output tray lower JC63-05003B 1 (*)
12 Bridge unit JC90-01772B 1 (*)
13 Booklet maker JC82-00905A 1 (*)
14 Left lower cover (Stacker-stapler) JC90-01771B 1 (*)
14 Left lower cover (Booklet) JC90-01417B 1 (*)
15-1 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B 1 (*)
15-2 Booklet output tray cover JC63-04978B 1 (*)
16 Front door JC90-01444B 1 (*)
17 Top door JC90-01445B 1 (*)
18 Top cover JC90-01446B 1 (*)
19 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)
20 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B 1 (*)
21 Right upper cover JC90-01448B 1 (*)
22 Hinge JC66-04767A 1 (*)
23 Caster JC61-07452A 4 (*)
24 Caster fix nut JC61-07444A 4 (*)
Table 5-48 harness
Not shown Harness, finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher rear upper JC39-02312A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front upper JC39-02313A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher punch relay JC39-02314A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher staple relay JC39-02315A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher eject relay JC39-02317A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front lower JC39-02318A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher stack relay JC39-02319A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3k finisher exit path JC39-02322A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Sub JC39-02327A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Pa JC39-02328A 1 (*)
Not shown Stack full harness JC39-02331A 1 (*)
Cover & hanress 1321


Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the front door, top door, top cover, right upper cover.
Figure 5-89 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover
16
17
16-1
18 21
18-1
18-2
18-3
18-4
Table 5-49 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover
16 Front door JC90-01444B 1 (*)
16-1 Cover link JC63-05004A 1 (*)
17 Top door JC90-01445B 1 (*)
18 Top cover JC90-01446B 1 (*)
18-1 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B 1 (*)
18-2 Magnet JC81-08263A 1 (*)
18-3 Manual staple button LED JC64-00996A 1 (*)
18-4 Manual staple button JC64-00995A 1 (*)
21 Right upper cover JC90-01448B 1 (*)
Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover 1323
Bridge unit
Upper bridge
Parts diagram and parts list for the bridge unit, upper bridge.
Figure 5-90 Bridge unit, Upper bridge
2-2
2-1
3
2-3
Table 5-50 Bridge unit, Upper bridge
1 Bridge unit JC90-01772B 1 (*)
2 Upper bridge unit JC90-01406B 1
2-1 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
2-2 Spring JC61-07431A 4 (*)
2-3 Spring JC61-07430A 2 (*)
3 Lower bridge unit JC90-01401B 1

Upper bridge 1325

Lower bridge
Parts diagram and parts list for the bridge unit, lower bridge.
Figure 5-91 Bridge unit, Lower bridge

3-2
3-1
3-3
3-4 3-6
3 3-5
3-7
Table 5-51 Bridge unit, Lower bridge
3 Lower bridge unit JC90-01401B 1
3-1 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A 1
3-2 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A 1 (*)
3-3 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A 4 (*)
3-4 Bridge exit actuator JC66-04569A 2 (*)
3-5 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 1
3-6 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
3-7 Bridge motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

Lower bridge 1327

Entrance unit
Entrance unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the entrance unit.
Figure 5-92 Entrance unit

4
7
9
5
10
3
1
11
6
Table 5-52 Entrance unit
1 Entrance unit JC90-01449A 1 (*)
2 Entrance roller JC66-04722A 1 (*)
3 Middle roller JC66-04724A 1 (*)
4 Entrance motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)
5 Gear JC66-04656A 3

Table 5-52 Entrance unit (continued)
6 Gear JC66-04546A 1
7 Belt 6602-003646 1
8 Belt 6602-003647 1 (*)
9 Belt 6602-003645 1 (*)
10 Bushing 6601-001478 2 (*)
11 Bushing 6601-002584 2 (*)
Entrance unit 1329

Entrance unit, Entrance motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the entrance unit, entrance motor.
Figure 5-93 Entrance unit, Entrance motor
4 4-1
1
1-1
1-2
Table 5-53 Entrance unit, Entrance motor
1 Entrance unit JC90-01449A 1 (*)
1-1 Spring JC61-07408A 2 (*)
1-2 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
4 Entrance motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)
4-1 Entrance motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

Tray diverter unit
Tray diverter unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the tray diverter unit.
Figure 5-94 Tray diverter unit

6
8
1
4
3 9
5
2
Table 5-54 Tray diverter unit
1 Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A 1 (*)
Tray diverter unit 1331

Table 5-54 Tray diverter unit (continued)
2 Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3 Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A 1 (*)
4 Bushing JC61-00423A 1 (*)
5 Belt 6602-003639 1 (*)
6 Top door switch JC39-02310A 1 (*)
7 Frame mount JC61-06663A 1 (*)
8 Frame mount side bracket JC90-01442A 1 (*)
9 Clutch JC90-01474A 1 (*)

Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM
Parts diagram and parts list for the tray jam cover, tray diverter CAM.
Figure 5-95 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM
1-6
1-4
1-5
1-1
1
1-7
1-2
1-3
Table 5-55 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM
1 Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A 1 (*)
1-1 Seal JC62-01328A 1 (*)
1-2 Spring JC61-07417A 1 (*)
1-3 Spring JC61-07415A 1 (*)
1-4 Spring JC61-07410A 1 (*)
1-5 Spring JC61-07409A 1 (*)
1-6 Tray diverter JC61-07205A 1 (*)
1-7 Tray jam cover JC61-07196A 1 (*)
3 Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A 1 (*)
3-1 Pin JC70-40360A 1 (*)
Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM 1333

Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the top output tray unit, top exit unit, main exit unit.
Figure 5-96 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
1
6 3
4
13
8
12
5
9
14
12
10 7
11
Table 5-56 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
1 Top output tray JC63-04995B 1 (*)
2 Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A 1 (*)
3 Top exit roller JC66-04727A 1 (*)
4 Top middle roller JC66-04725A 1 (*)
5 Main output tray motor assembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)

Table 5-56 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit (continued)
6 Exit motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)
7 Main exit CAM motor assembly JC90-01453A 1 (*)
8 Gear JC66-04657A 2
9 Clutch JC90-01404A 1 (*)
10 Gear JC66-04602A 1 (*)
11 Front door switch JC39-02310A 1 (*)
12 Top output tray paper full sensor JC82-01039A 1 (*)
13 Top-brush exit JC67-00818A 1 (*)
14 Belt 6602-003649 1 (*)
Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit 1335
Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the top lower cover, exit motor, main exit CAM motor.
Figure 5-97 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
2-4
2-2
2-1
2-3
6
6-1 7
7-1
7-2
Table 5-57 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
2 Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A 1 (*)
2-1 Top exit actuator JC66-04525A 1 (*)
2-2 Spring JC61-07411A 1 (*)
2-3 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
2-4 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
6 Exit motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)
6-1 Exit motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)
7 Main exit CAM motor assembly JC90-01453A 1 (*)

Table 5-57 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor (continued)
7-1 Main exit CAM motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)
7-2 Main exit CAM home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor 1337
Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit
Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the main exit unit, paddle unit, end fence unit.
Figure 5-98 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit
23
2 1
3
4
18
19
16
17
14
11
15
5
12 13
6
7
8
20
10 9
22
21
Table 5-58 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit
1 Main exit CAM guide JC90-01451A 1 (*)
2 Main exit CAM JC66-04561A 3
3 Main exit CAM shaft JC66-04715A 1
4 Pin JC70-40360A 3 (*)
5 Main exit roller JC66-04726A 1 (*)
6 Paddle pesser JC61-07206A 1 (*)

Table 5-58 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit (continued)
7 Paddle JC90-01480A 1 (*)
7-1 Paddle wing JC90-01463A 2 (*)
7-2 Paddle mid JC90-01462A 1 (*)
8 Brush JC67-00819A 1 (*)
9 Brush JC67-00820A 1 (*)
10 Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A 1 (*)
11 Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A 1 (*)
11-1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)
11-2 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
12 Paddle home gear JC66-04558A 1
13 End fence motor JC90-01467A 1 (*)
14 Belt 6602-003270 1 (*)
15 Belt 6602-003640 1 (*)
16 CAM JC66-04562A 1
17 CAM guide JC66-04526A 1 (*)
18 End fence JC90-01466A 1 (*)
19 Spring JC61-07414A 2 (*)
20 Main output tray top of stack switch guide JC61-07189A 1 (*)
21 Main output tray top of stack switch lower JC61-07192A 1 (*)

guide
22 Ground JC63-04984A 1 (*)
23 Brush JC67-00817A 1 (*)
Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit 1339

Paddle, Paddle motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the paddle, paddle motor.
Figure 5-99 Paddle, Paddle motor
11
11-1
7-1
7-2 11-2
Table 5-59 Paddle, Paddle motor
7 Paddle JC90-01480A 1 (*)
7-1 Paddle wing JC90-01463A 2 (*)
7-2 Paddle mid JC90-01462A 1 (*)
11 Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A 1 (*)
11-1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)
11-2 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA
Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

Parts diagram and parts list for the tamper unit, ejector unit, stapler unit, main PCA.
Figure 5-100 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA
6 5
Table 5-60 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA
1 Front tamper unit JC82-00901A 1 (*)
2 Rear tamper unit JC82-00898A 1 (*)
3 Ejector unit JC90-01409A 1 (*)
4 Stapler unit JC82-00894A 1 (*)
5 Stapler cartridge JC81-09882B 1 (*)
6 Finisher main PCA JC92-02968A 1 (*)
7 Roller JC66-04523A 1 (*)
Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA 1341

Tamper unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the tamper unit.
Figure 5-101 Tamper unit

1-2
1-3
1-4
1-1
2-2
2-3
2-1
Table 5-61 Tamper unit
1 Front tamper unit JC82-00901A 1 (*)
1-1 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-2 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)
1-3 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-4 Belt 6602-003644 1 (*)
2 Rear tamper unit JC82-00898A 1 (*)
2-1 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
2-2 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)
2-3 Belt 6602-003644 1 (*)

Tamper unit 1343

Ejector unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the ejector unit.
Figure 5-102 Ejector unit

3
3-5
3-1 3-2
3-7
3-3
3-9
3-6
3-4
3-10
3-8
Table 5-62 Ejector unit
3 Ejector unit JC90-01409A 1 (*)
3-1 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
3-2 Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3-3 Ejector1 end sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3-4 Ejector1 motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3-5 Ejector1 motor assembly JC90-01411A 1 (*)
3-6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 1 (*)
3-7 Ejector2 home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3-8 Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3-9 Ejector2 motor assembly JC90-01410A 1 (*)
3-10 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 1 (*)

Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit
Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the paper holding unit, main output tray unit.
Figure 5-103 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit
11
4 10
8
9
12
3 6
2 1
Table 5-63 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit
2 Left lower cover(Booklet finisher) JC90-01417B 1 (*)
2 Left lower cover(Stapler-stacker finisher) JC90-01771B 1 (*)
3 Main output tray JC63-05002B 1 (*)
4 Main output tray motor aseembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)
Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit 1345

Table 5-63 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit (continued)
5 Paper holding motor JC90-01414A 1 (*)
6 Belt 6602-003652 2 (*)
7 Gear JC66-04663A 4
8 Gear JC66-04605A 1
9 Gear JC61-07305A 1
10 Spring JC61-07429A 1
11 Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A 1 (*)
12 Main output tray support JC61-06668A 2 (*)

Left upper cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the left upper cover.
Figure 5-104 Left upper cover
1-3
1-5 1-2

1-1
1-6 1-4
1-7
1-7
Table 5-64 Left upper cover
1-1 Paper holding home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-2 Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-3 Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-4 Left upper cover JC63-04999B 1 (*)
1-5 Spring JC61-07428A 1 (*)
1-6 Spring JC61-07427A 1 (*)
1-7 Main output tray top of stack sensor JC82-01039A 1 (*)
Left upper cover 1347

Left lower cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the left lower cover.
Figure 5-105 Left lower cover

2 2
stapler-stacker booklet ﬁnisher
2-3
2-1 2-3
2-2 2-1
2-2
2-5
2-4
Table 5-65 Left lower cover
2 Left lower cover (Booklet finisher) JC90-01417B 1 (*)
2 Left lower cover (Stapler-stacker finisher) JC90-01771B 1 (*)
2-1 Main output tray lower limit switch 0604-001415 1 (*)
2-2 Main output tray lower limit actuator JC81-07930A 1 (*)
2-3 Spring JC81-09396A 1 (*)
2-4 Spring (Booklet finisher) JC61-07407A 1 (*)
2-5 Booklet output tray sensor (Booklet finisher) JC82-01039A 1 (*)

Main output tray motor, Paper holding motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the main output tray motor, paper holding motor.
Figure 5-106 Main output tray motor, paper holding motor

5
4
4-1
4-5 5-1
4-4
4-2
4-3
5-2
Table 5-66 Main output tray motor, paper holding motor
4 Main output tray motor assembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)
4-1 Pin JC70-40542A 1 (*)
4-2 Gear JC81-07637A 1 (*)
4-3 Main output tray motor JC31-00178B 1 (*)
4-4 Bearing 6601-001478 1 (*)
4-5 Main output tray motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
5 Paper holding motor assembly JC90-01414A 1 (*)
5-1 Paper holding motor JC93-01156A 1 (*)
5-2 Gear JC66-04604A 1 (*)
Main output tray motor, Paper holding motor 1349

Cover & hanress
Buffer unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the buffer unit.
Figure 5-107 Buffer unit
3-1
6
7
4
10
9
Table 5-67 Buffer unit
1 Buffer diverter assembly JC90-01674A 1 (*)
2 Front jam cover assembly JC90-01457A 1 (*)
3 Budder roller assembly JC90-01672A 1 (*)

Table 5-67 Buffer unit (continued)
3-1 Buffer roller JC66-05161A 1
4 Buffer solenoid JC90-01675A 1 (*)
5 Buffer motor JC93-01152A 1 (*)
6 Gear JC66-04582A 1 (*)
7 Belt 6602-003641 1
8 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
9 Manual staple actuator JC66-04528A 1 (*)
10 Buffer jam cover JC90-01450A 1 (*)
Buffer unit 1351

Buffer diverter, Front jam cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the buffer diverter, front jam cover.
Figure 5-108 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover
2-2
1
1-4
2-1
1-2 2
1-5
1-3 1-1
Table 5-68 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover
1 Buffer diverter assembly JC90-01674A 1 (*)
1-1 Spring JC61-07413A 2 (*)
1-2 Spring JC61-07409A 2 (*)
1-3 Bufer diverter JC61-07204A 1 (*)
1-4 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-5 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
2 Front jam cover assembly JC90-01457A 1 (*)
2-1 Magnet JC81-08263A 1 (*)
2-2 Spring JC61-07418A 1 (*)

Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher)
Learn about parts, diagrams (booklet finisher)
Booklet maker
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet maker.
Figure 5-109 Booklet maker
2
4
5
3
Table 5-69 Booklet maker
1 Booklet maker JC82-00905A 1 (*)
2 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B 1 (*)
3 Booklet maker PCA JC92-02790B 1 (*)
Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher) 1353

Table 5-69 Booklet maker (continued)
4 Rail 6102-003369 2 (*)
5 Harness guide JC90-01477A 1 (*)

Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit
Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet entrance unit, booklet presser unit.
Figure 5-110 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

1
Table 5-70 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit
1 Booklet entrance unit JC90-01424A 1
2 Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A 1 (*)
3 Booklet entrace roller JC66-04717A 1 (*)
4 Booklet presser unit JC61-07237A 1
Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit 1355

Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet entrance, booklet entrance-presser motor.
Figure 5-111 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor

1
2-3 2-1
1-2
1-5 1-1
1-4
2-2
1-3
Table 5-71 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor
1 Booklet entrance unit JC90-01424A 1
1-1 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
1-2 Booklet entrance actuator JC66-04520A 1 (*)
1-3 Booklet presser guide JC61-07331A 1
1-4 Booklet presser guide actuator JC66-04644A 1 (*)
1-5 Bushing JC61-02372A 2 (*)
2 Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A 1 (*)
2-1 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A 1 (*)
2-2 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)
2-3 Booklet presser home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet stapler unit.
Figure 5-112 Booklet stapler unit
1
2
Table 5-72 Booklet stapler unit
1 Booklet stapler unit JC81-08274B 1 (*)
2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881B 2 (*)
3 Spring JC61-07398A 1 (*)
4 Spring JC61-07397A 2 (*)
Booklet stapler unit 1357

Booklet tamper unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet tamper unit.
Figure 5-113 Booklet tamper unit
1-3
1-1
1-4 1-2
Table 5-73 Booklet tamper unit
1 Booklet tamper unit JC90-01431A 1
1-1 Booklet tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-2 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)
1-3 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
1-4 Bushing JC61-00423A 2 (*)

Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit
Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet fold unit, booklet diverter unit, booklet exit unit.
Figure 5-114 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit
12
10
6
5
11
4
3
Table 5-74 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit
1 Booklet c-fold blade assembly JC90-01438A 1 (*)
2 Booklet exit unit JC90-01400A 1 (*)
3 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A 1 (*)
4 Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A 1 (*)
5 Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A 1 (*)
6 Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A 1 (*)
7 Gear JC66-04573A 1 (*)
8 Bushing 6601-003037 3
9 Bushing JC61-00426A 1 (*)
10 Bushing JC61-00423A 2 (*)
11 Bushing JC61-02372A 1 (*)
Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit 1359
Table 5-74 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit (continued)
12 Gear JC90-01479A 1 (*)

Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet c-fold blade, booklet exit, booklet diverter.
Figure 5-115 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter
1-1
1-2-1
1-3
1-2
2
3
2-2
2-3
2-4
3-1
2-1
Table 5-75 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter
1 Booklet c-fold blade assembly JC90-01438A 1 (*)
1-1 Booklet sub exit roller assembly JC90-01395A 1 (*)
1-2 Booklet c-fold blade JC90-01394A 1 (*)
1-2-1 Spring JC61-07391A 2 (*)
1-3 Jam guide sheet JC63-05044A 3 (*)
2 Booklet exit unit JC90-01400A 1 (*)
2-1 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A 1
2-2 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A 1 (*)
2-3 Bushing JC61-00426A 4 (*)
Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter 1361

Table 5-75 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter (continued)
2-4 E-ring 6044-000129 2 (*)
3 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A 1 (*)
3-1 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet diverter motor, booklet c-fold motor, booklet fold motor.
Figure 5-116 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor
6
6-3
6-1
6-2
5-1
5-3
5-2
4-1
4-2
Table 5-76 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor
4 Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A 1 (*)
4-1 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A 1 (*)
Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor 1363
Table 5-76 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor (continued)
4-2 Booklet diverter home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
5 Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A 1 (*)
5-1 Booklet c-fold blade motor JC93-01154A 1 (*)
5-2 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
5-3 Gear JC66-04579A 1 (*)
6 Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A 1 (*)
6-1 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A 1 (*)
6-2 Gear JC66-04592A 1 (*)
6-3 Gear JC66-04593A 1 (*)

Booklet fold roller
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet fold roller.
Figure 5-117 Booklet fold roller
2-1
2
Table 5-77 Booklet fold roller
1 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A 2 (*)
2 Booklet fold exit JC90-01399A 1 (*)
2-1 C-ring 6044-000159 1 (*)
Booklet fold roller 1365


Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet blade motor, booklet blade.
Figure 5-118 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade
1 1
1-3
1-2
1-1
2-1 2
2-2
2-3
Table 5-78 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade
1 Booklet blade motor assembly JC90-01435A 1 (*)
1-1 Gear JC66-04595A 1 (*)
1-2 Gear JC66-04594A 1 (*)
1-3 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A 1 (*)
Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade 1367

Table 5-78 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade (continued)
2 Booklet blade assembly JC90-01437A 1 (*)
2-1 Gear JC66-04591A 1 (*)
2-2 Bushing JC61-00423A 1 (*)
2-3 Bushing JC61-00426A 2 (*)

Booklet paddle unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet paddle unit.
Figure 5-119 Booklet paddle unit
4
2
4-1
2
4
2-2
2-1
Table 5-79 Booklet paddle unit
1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A 1 (*)
2 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A 1 (*)
2-1 Lower booklet paddle wing JC61-07225A 1 (*)
2-2 Lower booklet paddle mid JC66-04719A 1 (*)
3 Booklet paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
4 Booklet paddle motor assembly JC90-01430A 1 (*)
4-1 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)
Booklet paddle unit 1369

Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet end fence unit.
Figure 5-120 Booklet end fence unit
1-5 1-2
1 1-3 1-4
1-6
1-7
1-1
Table 5-80 Booklet end fence unit
1 Booklet end fence unit JC90-01432A 1
1-1 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)
1-2 Spring JC61-07403A 1 (*)
1-3 Spring JC61-07401A 1 (*)
1-4 Solenoid JC33-00038A 1 (*)
1-5 Booklet end fence home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-6 Spring JC61-07400A 1 (*)
1-7 Gear JC66-04583A 1 (*)


Booklet maker base
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet maker base.
Figure 5-121 Booklet maker base
1-1
1-2
2
2

Table 5-81 Booklet maker base
1 Booklet maker base JC90-01476A 1 (*)
1-1 Spring JC61-07392A 1 (*)
1-2 Booklet maker base support JC61-07279A 1 (*)
2 Booklet output jam cover JC90-01433A 1 (*)
Bridge unit
Removal and replacement: Bridge entrance sensor (S1)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge entrance sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge entrance sensor on the
finisher.

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
https://parts.hp.com.
JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor
Bridge unit 1373

Required tools

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.
1. Open the front door (callout 1)

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)
Figure 5-123 Pull the locker out
3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)
Figure 5-124 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors
Remove the bridge from the machine 1375

4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer
Figure 5-125 Pull out the bridge unit
2. Remove the bridge rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the bridge rear cover.
■ Remove four screws(callout 1) and the bridge rear cover.
Figure 5-126 Remove the bridge rear cover
3. Remove the bridge door

Follow these steps to remove the bridge door.

1. Remove four screws(callout 1) and remove the metal holders each side then disconnect one
connector(callout 2)
Figure 5-127 Remove the screws and a connector
2. Lift the bridge door up(callout 1) and then remove the bridge door(callout 2)
Figure 5-128 Remove the bridge door
4. Remove the bridge paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the bridge paper guide.
Remove the bridge paper guide 1377

■ Remove thirteen screws(callout 1~3) and remove the bridge paper guide(callout 4) from the bridge
door
Figure 5-129 Remove the bridge paper guide
5. Remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1).
1. Unplug one connector (callout 1)
Figure 5-130 Unplug one connector

2. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1, callout 1)
Figure 5-131 Remove the bridge entrance sensor

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Bridge motor (M14)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC31-00163B Bridge motor
Required tools

Post service test




2. Remove the bridge rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the bridge rear cover.

■ Remove four screws(callout 1) and the bridge rear cover.
Figure 5-136 Remove the bridge rear cover
3. Remove the bridge motor (M14)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge motor (M14).
1. Remove three screws(callout 1)
2. Disconnect one connector(callout 1)
NOTE: It located on the bottom of the bridge
Remove the bridge motor (M14) 1383

3. Remove the belt (callout 1)
Figure 5-139 Remove the belt

4. Remove the Bridge motor (M14, callout1)
Figure 5-140 Remove the Bridge motor

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Bridge exit sensor (S3)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge exit sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge exit sensor on the finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor
Required tools

Post service test




2. Remove the bridge exit sensor (S3)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge exit sensor (S3).
1. Unplug one connector
NOTE: Bridge exit sensor(callout 1) located on the bottom of the bridge

Remove the bridge exit sensor (S3) 1389

2. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge exit sensor(S3, callout1)
Figure 5-147 Remove the bridge exit sensor

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor (S2)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge door sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge door sensor on the finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Bridge door sensor
Required tools

Post service test




2. Remove the bridge door sensor (S2)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge door sensor (S2).
Remove the bridge door sensor (S2) 1393

1. Bridge door sensor(callout 1) located on the bottom of the bridge
Figure 5-152 Location of the bridge door sensor
2. Open the bridge door to remove the bridge door sensor (S2)
Figure 5-153 Open the bridge door

3. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge door sensor(S2, callout 1)
Figure 5-154 Remove the bridge door sensor

printer.
pads.

Covers
Removal and replacement: Right upper cover

Learn how to remove and replace the right upper cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right upper cover on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01448B Right upper cover
Required tools


Post service test
1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).
■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-155 Remove the right upper cover

printer.
Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1397

pads.
Removal and replacement: Top cover

Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top cover of the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01446B Top cover
Required tools


Post service test


2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Figure 5-159 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Front door

Learn how to remove and replace the front door.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front door for the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01444B Front door
Required tools
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

Post service test




Remove the top cover (finisher) 1403

(callout 2).
3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-164 Lift the top hinge pin
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-165 Remove the top hinge pin
Remove the front door (finisher) 1405

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.
Figure 5-166 Release the lower hinge pin
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-167 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

Figure 5-168 Remove the front door

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the rear cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear cover for the finisher.

display is blank).
JC63-04988B Rear cover
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).
3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Figure 5-174 Remove the rear cover


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Front cover

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front cover for the finisher.

display is blank).

JC63-04986B Front cover
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
Figure 5-184 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Front lower cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front lower cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front lower cover for the finisher.

display is blank).

JC63-04987B Front lower cover
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.



5. Remove the front lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front lower cover (finisher).
■ Remove three machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front lower cover.
Remove the front lower cover (finisher) 1427

Figure 5-199 Remove the front lower cover

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Caster cover

Learn how to remove and replace the caster cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the caster cover on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC63-04985B Caster cover
Required tools

Post service test

1. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.
Remove the booklet output tray 1429

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.
Figure 5-200 Remove the booklet output tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly
Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-201 Install the booklet output tray
2. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.
TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Figure 5-203 Remove the caster cover


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Left lower cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left lower cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left lower cover on the finisher.

display is blank).

JC90-01771B Left lower cover (for stapler/stacker finisher)
JC90-01417B Left lower cover (for booklet finisher)
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.




Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1439



remove it.
instructions.


Remove the caster cover 1441

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.
TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-223 Release the lower shield
Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1443

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Figure 5-224 Disconnect two connectors
4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-225 Remove the left lower cover


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left upper cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left upper cover on the finisher.

display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover 1445

JC90-01475B Left upper cover
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.


Remove the front cover (finisher) 1451





remove it.
instructions.





shield.

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).
Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1457

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 5-248 Lower the output tray
2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).
3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).
shield.
TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-250 Release the shield
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
Figure 5-252 Remove the left upper cover

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher front cover
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet front cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet front cover on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01478B Booklet front cover
Required tools

Post service test

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher front cover 1461

1. Remove the booklet front cover
Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.
■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.
Figure 5-253 Remove five screws and the cover

printer.
pads.

Entrance unit
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor (M12)

Learn how to remove and replace the feed entrance motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the entrance motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01459A Entrance motor assembly
JC31-00163B Entrance motor
Required tools

Entrance unit 1463

Post service test




(callout 2).



4. Remove the entrance motor (M12)

Follow these steps to remove the entrance motor (M12).
■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the entrance motor.
TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.
Figure 5-260 Remove the entrance motor

Remove the entrance motor (M12) 1467

printer.
pads.
Punch unit
Removal and replacement: Dummy feed guide

Learn how to remove and replace the dummy feed guide.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the dummy feed guide on the finisher.

display is blank).

JC93-01161A Dummy feed guide
Y1G10-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory
Y1G11-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory
Y1G12-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).


4. Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the dummy feed guide (finisher).

■ At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the dummy feed guide
(callout 2).
Figure 5-267 Remove two screws and the feed guide

printer.
pads.

Tray diverter unit
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top jam access cover
Learn how to remove and replace the top jam cover assembly.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top jam cover assembly for the
finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly
Required tools


Post service test




(callout 2).




the front door.





6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.
the motor.
Figure 5-282 Remove the exit motor
7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
2. Remove the top jam access cover.
Figure 5-284 Remove the top jam access cover


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter

Learn how to remove and replace the tray diverter.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the tray diverter on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC61-07205A Tray diverter

Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).



4. Remove the tray diverter

Follow these steps to remove the tray diverter.
1. Remove two screws(callout 1) to take out the exit motor (callout 2)
Figure 5-291 Take out the exit motor

2. Remove two screws (callout 1)
3. Pull the top jam cover assembly out.
Figure 5-293 Pull the top jam cover assembly out
Remove the tray diverter 1489

4. Remove the tray diverter (callout 1) from top jam cover assembly.
Figure 5-294 Remove the tray diverter

printer.

pads.
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor (S4)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray diverter home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the tray diverter home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor
Required tools
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor (S4) 1491

Post service test




(callout 2).




the front door.



5. Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4)

Follow these steps to remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4).
1. Disconnect one connector(callout 1)

2. Remove the green handle (callout 1)
Figure 5-308 Remove the green handle
3. Remove the belt (callout 1)
Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4) 1499

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) and remove the bracket (callout 2) to reach out the tray diverter home
sensor
Figure 5-310 Remove two screws and remove the bracket
5. Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4, callout 1)
Figure 5-311 Remove the tray diverter home sensor


printer.
pads.
Top exit unit
Removal and replacement: Top lower feed assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly for the
finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly
Top exit unit 1501

Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).




the front door.






the motor.

Remove the exit motor (M13) 1509

8. Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).

1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and
then tilt the motor aside to access the screws under it.
2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 2).
Figure 5-330 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector
Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1511

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).
4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.
Figure 5-332 Remove the top lower feed assembly
5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector
(callout 2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement
part.

Figure 5-333 Locate sensors and connector

printer.
pads.

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top exit sensor (S11)
Learn how to remove and replace the top exit sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top exit sensor for the finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Top exit sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.







the motor.





part.
9. Remove the top exit sensor(S11)

Follow these steps to remove the top exit sensor(S11).
Remove the top exit sensor(S11) 1525

1. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the top lower feed assembly.
Figure 5-356 Remove one screw and then top lower feed assembly
2. Remove harness(callout 1) and top exit sensor(S11, callout 2)
Figure 5-357 Remove harness and then top exit sensor

printer.
pads.

Top output tray unit
Removal and replacement: Top output tray

Learn how to remove and replace the top output tray.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output tray on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC63-04995B Top output tray
Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

Top output tray unit 1527

Post service test

1. Remove the top output tray

Follow these steps to remove the top output tray.
■ Raise the end of the top output tray (callout 1), and then lift it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.
Figure 5-358 Remove the top output tray

printer.

pads.

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Top output tray paper full sensor (S15)
Learn how to remove and replace the top output tray paper full sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output tray paper full sensor for
the finisher.

display is blank).
JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor
Required tools

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-E87660du, E72525-

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Top output tray paper full sensor (S15) 1529
Post service test




(callout 2).




the front door.





6. Remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15)

Follow these steps to remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove screw (callout 1), disconnect the connector (callout 2) and then
remove the sensor assembly (callout 3)
Figure 5-373 Remove screw and connector and sensor assy
Remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15) 1537

2. Remove top output tray paper full sensor- detector (callout 1).
Figure 5-374 Remove top output tray paper full sensor
3. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws (callout 1).

4. Remove screw (callout 1), disconnect the connector (callout 2), and then remove the sensor
assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-376 Remove screw and connector and sensor assy
5. Remove top output tray paper full sensor- emitter (callout 1).
Figure 5-377 Remove top output tray paper full sensor

printer.

pads.
Main exit unit
Removal and replacement: Main exit sensor (S10)

Learn how to remove and replace the main exit sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main exit sensor for the finisher.

display is blank).
JC32-00020A Main exit sensor
Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).




the front door.






the motor.





part.

9. Remove the main exit sensor(S10)

Follow these steps to remove the main exit sensor(S10).
■ Remove one screw (callout 1) and main exit sensor (S10; callout 2) at the top lower feed assembly.
Figure 5-400 Remove the main exit sensor

printer.

pads.
Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M13)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01459A Exit motor assembly
Required tools

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M13) 1553

Post service test




(callout 2).




the motor.


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor (M2)

Learn how to remove and replace the main exit cam motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main exit cam motor on the finisher.

display is blank).

JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



4. Remove the Main exit cam motor (M2)

Follow these steps to remove the Main exit cam motor (M2).
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-415 Disconnect two connectors and then two screws
Remove the Main exit cam motor (M2) 1563

2. If you are replacing the gear, slide it off of the shaft
Figure 5-416 Slide the gear off of the shaft
3. If you are replacing the sensor (callout 1), remove it from the motor housing.
4. If you are replacing the motor, do the following.

a. Remove two screws (callout 1)
b. Lower the motor (callout 1) and then pull it away from the housing (callout 2) to remove it.


printer.
pads.
Paddle unit
Removal and replacement: Paddle

Learn how to remove and replace the paddle.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle for the finisher.

display is blank).

JC90-01462A Paddle mid
JC90-01463A Paddle wing
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.





6. Remove the paddle (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle (finisher).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

3. Do not remove the frame (callout 1) but pull it one side.
Figure 5-434 Pull it one side
Remove the paddle (finisher) 1575

4. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1)
5. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws (callout 1).

6. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver or tweezers on the clutch
(callout 1) and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released
position and lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.(S11)
Figure 5-437 Pressing to the right to release the clutch
Remove the paddle (finisher) 1577

8. Remove two screws (callout 1)
9. Take supporter of top output bin (callout 1) forward and put it down.
Figure 5-440 Take supporter of top output bin forward and put it down.

10. Remove three paddles (callout 1) from shaft
Figure 5-441 Remove the paddle

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor (S8)
Learn how to remove and replace the paddle home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle home sensor for the finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Paddle home sensor
Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).



the front door.



5. Remove the paddle home sensor (S8)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle home sensor (S8).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2)
Figure 5-454 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors
2. Disconnect connector from paddle home sensor
Figure 5-455 Disconnect connector from paddle home sensor
Remove the paddle home sensor (S8) 1587

3. Remove paddle home sensor (S8; callout1)
Figure 5-456 Remove paddle home sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor (M1)
Learn how to remove and replace the paddle motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle motor for the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly
JC93-01001A Paddle motor
Required tools

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor (M1) 1589

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.



5. Remove the paddle motor (M1)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle motor (M1).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2)
Figure 5-469 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors

2. Remove two screws (callout 1) and then remove paddle motor (M1; callout 2)
Figure 5-470 Remove the paddle motor

printer.
pads.

End fence unit
Removal and replacement: End fence home sensor (S7)

Learn how to remove and replace the end fence home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the end fence home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 End fence home sensor
Required tools


Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.






remove it.
instructions.





shield.




shield.

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.
Figure 5-498 Move the staple unit to the center
2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1613

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).
4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
Figure 5-502 Rotate the sensor

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.
Figure 5-504 Remove the front tamper shaft
8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).
Figure 5-505 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.
Figure 5-507 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.
Figure 5-512 Lift the edges of the tampers
16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.
Figure 5-513 Remove the ejector unit
instructions.
Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).
b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).
11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.
Remove the front tamper unit 1621

■ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it
Figure 5-514 Remove the front tamper
12. Remove the end of fence home sensor(S7)

Follow these steps to remove the end of fence home sensor(S7).
■ At the front tamper, disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove end fence home sensor(S7,
callout 2)
Figure 5-515 Remove end fence home sensor


printer.
pads.

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the end fence motor for the finisher.

display is blank).

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3) 1623
JC90-01467A End fence motor
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.



5. Remove the end fence motor(M3)

Follow these steps to remove the end fence motor(M3).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect connector(callout 2)
Figure 5-528 Remove two screws and disconnect connector

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and end fence motor (M3, callout 1)
Figure 5-529 Remove end fence motor

printer.
pads.

Tamper unit
Front tamper

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Front tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper unit on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC82-00901A Front tamper
Required tools


Post service test




(callout 2).




the front door.






remove it.
instructions.





shield.




shield.






(callout 2).



(callout 1).

sheet metal frame.
instructions.


Remove the front tamper unit 1655


printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S6)
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor
Required tools

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S6) 1657

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.






remove it.
instructions.





shield.




shield.






(callout 2).



(callout 1).

sheet metal frame.
instructions.



12. Remove the front tamper home sensor(S6)

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper home sensor(S6).
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at front tamper.
Remove the front tamper home sensor(S6) 1681

2. Remove one screw (callout 1)
3. Remove front tamper home sensor(S6, callout 1)
Figure 5-620 Remove front tamper home sensor


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M4)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M4) 1683

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.






remove it.
instructions.





shield.




shield.






(callout 2).



(callout 1).

sheet metal frame.
instructions.



12. Remove the front tamper motor (M4)

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper motor (M4).
2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the front tamper motor.
TIP: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.
Remove the front tamper motor (M4) 1707

Figure 5-666 Release the belt and remove the motor

printer.
pads.
Rear tamper

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper unit on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC82-00898A Rear tamper
Required tools

Post service test

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper unit 1709



(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.



shield.







(callout 2).


(callout 1).


sheet metal frame.
instructions.

11. Remove the rear tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.
■ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it
NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-710 Remove therear tamper


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S9)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S9) 1733

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.



shield.







(callout 2).


(callout 1).


sheet metal frame.
instructions.


12. Remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9)

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9).
Remove the rear tamper unit 1757

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the rear tamper.
2. Remove one screw in front side(callout 1)

3. Remove rear tamper home sensor(S9, callout 1)
Figure 5-757 Remove rear tamper home sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M9)
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor
Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.



shield.







(callout 2).


(callout 1).


sheet metal frame.
instructions.


12. Remove the rear tamper motor (M9)

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper motor (M9).
Remove the rear tamper unit 1783

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the rear tamper motor.
TIP: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.
Figure 5-803 Release the belt and remove the motor


printer.
pads.
Stapler unit
Removal and replacement: Stapler unit

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler unit on the finisher.

display is blank).
Stapler unit 1785

JC82-00894A Stapler unit
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.





6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.
Remove the stapler unit 1793

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.
Figure 5-818 Move the staple unit to the front
2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).
Figure 5-819 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).
Figure 5-820 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws
4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).
5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-822 Remove the staple unit

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Stapler front sensor (S21)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler front sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler front sensor on the finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Stapler front sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.








(callout 2).

7. Remove the stapler front sensor(S21)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler front sensor(S21).
■ Remove stapler front sensor from staple unit.
Figure 5-842 Remove the stapler front sensor

Remove the stapler front sensor(S21) 1807

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front sensor (S24)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler mid-front sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler mid-front sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).

0604-001393 Stapler mid-front sensor
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.








(callout 2).
7. Remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24).

1. Turn over staple unit and disconnect the connector(callout 1)
Figure 5-862 Disconnect the connector
2. Remove stapler mid-rear sensor(S24, callout 1) from staple unit.
Figure 5-863 Remove stapler mid-rear sensor


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-rear sensor (S25)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler mid-rear sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler mid-rear sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).

0604-001393 Stapler mid-rear sensor
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.








(callout 2).
7. Remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25).

1. Turn over staple unit and disconnect the connector(callout 1)
2. Remove stapler mid-rear sensor(S24, callout 1) from staple unit.
Figure 5-884 Remove stapler mid-rear sensor


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Stapler rear sensor (S30)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler rear sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler rear sensor on the finisher.

display is blank).

0604-001393 Stapler rear sensor
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.








(callout 2).
7. Remove the stapler rear sensor(S30)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler rear sensor(S30).

1. Remove stapler rear sensor(callout 1, S30) from staple unit.
Figure 5-904 Remove stapler rear sensor from staple unit.
2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from stapler rear sensor.
Figure 5-905 Disconnect the connector from stapler rear sensor.


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor (S19)

Learn how to remove and replace the manual staple sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the manual staple sensor for the
finisher.

display is blank).

0604-001415 Manual staple sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.



5. Remove the manual staple sensor(S19)

Follow these steps to remove the manual staple sensor(S19).
Remove the manual staple sensor(S19) 1851

■ At the front of the finisher, disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove manual staple sensor(S19,
callout 2).
Figure 5-918 Remove the manual staple sensor


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M8)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler position motor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
JC31-00163A Stapler position motor
Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M8) 1853

Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).




the front door.








(callout 2).
7. Remove the stapler position motor(M8)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position motor(M8).
Remove the stapler position motor(M8) 1863

1. Remove two screws(callout 1)
2. Remove stapler position motor(M8, callout1) from staple unit.
Figure 5-939 Remove stapler position motor


printer.
pads.
Ejector unit
Removal and replacement: Ejector unit

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector unit on the finisher.

display is blank).
Ejector unit 1865

JC90-01409A Ejector unit
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.



shield.







(callout 2).


(callout 1).


sheet metal frame.
instructions.


printer.
pads.

Ejector1
Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor sensor (S27)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector1 motor sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector1 motor sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001415 Ejector1 motor enor
Required tools


Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.






remove it.
instructions.





shield.




shield.






(callout 2).



(callout 1).

sheet metal frame.
instructions.

11. Remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27).
Remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27) 1913

1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector1 motor(callout 2, M6) of ejector unit.
2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

3. Remove the ejector1 motor from ejector unit, disconnect the connector(callout 1), and then remove
the ejector1 motor sensor(S27, callout 2)
Figure 5-1028 Remove the ejector1 motor sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor (M6)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector1 motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector1 motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC93-01168A Ejector1 motor
Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.



shield.







(callout 2).


(callout 1).


sheet metal frame.
instructions.

11. Remove the ejector1 motor(M6)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector1 motor(M6).
1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector1 motor(M6, callout 2) of ejector unit.
Remove the ejector1 motor(M6) 1939

3. Remove the ejector1 motor from ejector unit and remove two screws(callout 1)
Figure 5-1074 Remove the ejector1 motor


printer.
pads.
Ejector2 unit
Removal and replacement: Ejector2 home sensor (S32)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
Ejector2 unit 1941

0604-001415 Ejector2 home sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.



shield.







(callout 2).


(callout 1).


sheet metal frame.
instructions.

11. Remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32).
1. Remove sensor(callout 1, S32) using tweezers from the ejector unit.
Figure 5-1118 Remove sensor
Remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32) 1965

2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 home sensor.
Figure 5-1119 Disconnect the connector from ejector2 home sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor sensor (S23)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 motor sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 motor sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor
Required tools

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor sensor (S23) 1967

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.






remove it.
instructions.





shield.




shield.






(callout 2).



(callout 1).

sheet metal frame.
instructions.

11. Remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23).

Remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23) 1991

3. Remove the ejector2 motor from ejector unit, disconnect the connector(callout 1), and then remove
the ejector2 motor sensor(S23, callout 2)
Figure 5-1165 Remove the ejector2 motor sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor (M5)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC93-01168A Ejector2 motor
Required tools

Post service test

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor (M5) 1993



(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.



shield.







(callout 2).


(callout 1).


sheet metal frame.
instructions.

11. Remove the ejector2 motor(M5)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 motor(M5).

3. Remove the ejector2 motor from ejector unit and remove two screws(callout 1)
Figure 5-1211 Remove the ejector2 motor


printer.
pads.
Main output tray unit
Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack sensor (S20)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack sensor
on the finisher.

display is blank).

JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.






remove it.
instructions.





shield.




shield.

10. Remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20).

■ Remove detector and emitter sensor(S20, callout 1)
Figure 5-1239 Remove detector and emitter sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch (S34)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack switch.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack switch
on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch
Required tools


Post service test




(callout 2).




the front door.





6. Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).
3. Do not remove the frame(callout 1) but pull it one side.
Figure 5-1256 Pull it one side
Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 2043

4. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1)
5. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws(callout 1).

6. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver or tweezers on the clutch
(callout 1) and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released
position and lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position
Figure 5-1259 Pressing to the right to release the clutch
Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 2045

9. Separate two parts (callout 1,callout 2)
Figure 5-1262 Separate two parts

10. Separate two parts (callout 1,callout 2)
Figure 5-1263 Separate two parts
11. Disconnect the connector (callout 1) And switch(callout 2, S34)


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor (S26)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray lower limit sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray lower limit sensor
on the finisher.

display is blank).

0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.

9. Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26).

■ Disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove the sensor(S26, callout 2) from the lower shield
assembly.
Figure 5-1287 Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor (S33)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray motor sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray motor sensor on
the finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor
Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).


4. Remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33).
Remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33) 2065

1. Disconnect the connector (callout 1)
2. Remove the tape using tweezers and remove the sensor (S33, callout 1).


printer.
pads.

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor
(M11)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray motor on the
finisher.

display is blank).

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor (M11) 2067
JC90-01415B Main output tray motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).



4. Remove the main output tray motor (M11)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray motor (M11).
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position
Figure 5-1302 Lower theoutput tray
Remove the main output tray motor (M11) 2071

2. Open two retainers (callout 1), and then release the green wires (callout 2).
Figure 5-1303 Open two retainers
3. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then thread the cable up through the opening in the top of
the bracket.
5. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor assembly.
Figure 5-1306 Remove four screws and the motor assembly
Remove the main output tray motor (M11) 2073

6. Carefully pull the motor assembly away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-1307 Remove the motor assembly
instructions.
Special installation instructions: Main tray moving motor (M11)
a. Before installing the motor assembly, slide the bushing (callout 1) off of the shaft.

b. Align the flat edges on the bushing with the flat edges on the opening in the motor assembly
bracket, and then install the bushing.
c. Position the bushing over the shaft, and then install the motor assembly.


printer.
pads.
Paper holding unit
Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor (S22)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper holding home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).

0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).




the front door.






remove it.
instructions.





shield.




shield.

10. Remove the paper holding home sensor(S22)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding home sensor(S22).

■ Disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove the sensor(S22, callout 2) from the upper shield
assembly.
Figure 5-1335 Remove the paper holding home sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding front sensor (S17)
Learn how to remove and replace the front paper holding sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front paper holding sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor
Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.

9. Remove the paper holding sensor (S17)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding sensor (S17).
Remove the paper holding sensor (S17) 2103

■ Remove the sensor(callout 1, S17) from the upper shield assembly.
Figure 5-1358 Remove the paper holding sensor

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Paper holding rear sensor (S31)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear paper holding sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear paper holding sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.

9. Remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31)

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31).

■ Remove the sensor(S31, callout 1) from the upper shield assembly.
Figure 5-1381 Remove the rear paper holding sensor

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Paper holding Motor (M7)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding Motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper holding Motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01414A Paper holding motor assembly
JC93-01156A Paper holding motor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).



the front door.







remove it.
instructions.





shield.

9. Remove the paper holding Motor (M7)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding Motor (M7).
Remove the paper holding Motor (M7) 2129

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor and bracket.

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor.
Figure 5-1406 Remove two screws and the motor
instructions.
Special installation instructions: paper holding Motor (M10)

When installing the motor and bracket, align the tab and slot on the motor bracket with the tab and
slot in the printer.
Figure 5-1407 Install the motor and bracket


printer.
pads.
Buffer unit
Removal and replacement: Buffer motor (M10)

Learn how to remove and replace the buffer motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer motor on the finisher.

display is blank).

JC93-01152A Buffer motor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).


4. Remove the main exit cam motor(M10)

Follow these steps to remove the main exit cam motor(M10).

2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1)


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Buffer solenoid (SL1)

Learn how to remove and replace the buffer solenoid.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer solenoid on the finisher.

display is blank).

JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).



4. Remove the buffer solenoid(SL1)

Follow these steps to remove the buffer solenoid(SL1).
1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

3. Remove top jam cover assembly (Callout 1)
Figure 5-1424 Remove top jam cover assembly
Remove the buffer solenoid(SL1) 2143

5. Disconnect the connector(Callout 1) and remove the buffer solenoid(Callout 2)
Figure 5-1426 Remove the buffer solenoid


printer.
pads.
Booklet maker
Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet maker.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet maker on the finisher.

display is blank).
Booklet maker 2145

JC82-00905A Booklet maker
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).



4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.
1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.
Figure 5-1433 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher
Remove the booklet maker 2149

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 5-1435 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.
5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.
Figure 5-1437 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.
7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1439 Remove the booklet maker
instructions.
Special installation instructions: booklet maker
When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1440 Position the hooks
9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.
Figure 5-1441 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.
11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.
Figure 5-1443 Extend the right rail


printer.
pads.
Booklet entrance unit
Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance motor (M15)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet entrance motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet entrance motor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
Booklet entrance unit 2155

JC93-01152A Booklet entrance motor
Required tools

Post service test



2. Remove the booklet entrance motor (M15)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance motor (M15).
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2). Lift the motor away
from the booklet maker and release the belt (callout 3) from the back of the motor.
Figure 5-1445 Remove the booklet entrance motor

printer.
pads.
Remove the booklet entrance motor (M15) 2157

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor (S36)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet entrance sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet entrance sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001415 Booklet entrance sensor
Required tools


Post service test




(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.

finisher rail.
5. Remove the booklet entrance unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance unit.
Remove the booklet entrance unit 2167

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) then remove the black cover (callout 2)
Figure 5-1463 Remove two screws then remove the black cover
2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect one connector(callout 2)
Figure 5-1464 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit (callout2)
Figure 5-1466 Remove two screws to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit

5. Remove the booklet entrance unit (callout 1)
Figure 5-1467 Remove the booklet entrance unit
6. Remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36).
1. Entrance unit (callout 1)
Figure 5-1468 Entrance unit

3. Use a tweezer to remove the entrance sensor (S36, callout1)
Figure 5-1470 Remove the entrance sensor


printer.
pads.
Booklet paddle unit
Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor (M19)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet paddle motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet paddle motor on the finisher.

display is blank).

JC93-01001A Booklet paddle motor
JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test


Remove the booklet front cover 2173

2. Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle motor (M19).

2. Remove the booklelt paddle motor (M19, callout1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1473 Remove the booklelt paddle motor and unplug one connector

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor (S41)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet paddle home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet paddle home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Booklet paddle home sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).




5. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.
1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).
3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.
Figure 5-1483 Remove the right lower shield
6. Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle motor (M19).
Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19) 2181

2. Remove the booklelt paddle motor (M19, callout1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1485 Remove the booklelt paddle motor and unplug one connector
7. Remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41).

1. Remove one e-clip on top of the white washer and then remove the white washer(callout 1)
Figure 5-1486 Remove white washer
2. Remove two belts (callout 1)
Figure 5-1487 Remove two belts
3. Remove the black actuator (callout 1)
Figure 5-1488 Remove the black actuator
Remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41) 2183

5. Use a tweezer to remove the Booklet paddle home sensor (S41, callout 1) from the left side
Figure 5-1490 Use a tweezer to remove the Booklet paddle home sensor

printer.

pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence unit

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01432A Booklet end fence unit

Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).







6. Remove the fold stopper unit

Follow these steps to remove the fold stopper unit.
1. On the left side of the booklet maker, remove two screws through access openings in the jam
access cover (callout 1).
Remove the fold stopper unit 2191

2. Raise the jam access cover.
Figure 5-1502 Raise the jam access cover
3. Raise the booklet width guide.
Figure 5-1503 Raise the booklet width guide.

4. On the right side of the booklet maker, open two retainers (callout 1), and then disconnect three
connectors (callout 2).

6. Release the tab (callout 1) on the guide arm, and then slide the guide off of the shaft (callout 2) to
remove it.
Figure 5-1506 Release the guide arm
7. Lower the width guide to the lowest position.
Figure 5-1507 Lower the width guide

8. On the right side of the booklet maker, remove one screw (callout 1).
9. Lift the right lower corner (callout 1) to clear the cable guide, and then slide the assembly to the
right (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-1509 Remove the fold stopper unit
instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse theremoval steps to finishinstalling theassembly.
Special installation instructions: Fold stopper unit

Loosen the two alignment screws (callout 1) and move the fold unit side to side to until the alignment
gauge is positioned on the center line. Tighten the screws and run a folded job through the finisher

and verify that the fold is correct. If the fold is not correct, loosen the screws, adjust the alignment,
and run another fold job. Continue this process until the fold is correct.
Figure 5-1510 Adjust the alignment gauge

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence motor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
JC93-01155A Booklet end fence motor
Required tools

Post service test

Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3) 2197



3. Remove the booklet end fence motor (M20)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet end fence motor (M20).
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet end
fence motor.
Remove the booklet end fence motor (M20) 2199

Figure 5-1515 Remove the booklet end fence motor

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence home sensor (S42)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence home sensor on
the finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Booklet end fence home sensor
Required tools

Post service test





3. Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42)

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42).
Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42) 2203

1. Unplug one connector(callout 1) at the left of the booklet make
2. Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42, callout 1) at the right of the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1521 Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor


printer.
pads.
Booklet presser unit
Removal and replacement: Booklet presser

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser on the finisher.

display is blank).

JC61-07237A Booklet presser
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.

finisher rail.
5. Remove the booklet entrance unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance unit.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) then remove the black cover (callout 2)
Figure 5-1539 Remove two screws then remove the black cover
2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect one connector(callout 2)

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit (callout2)
Figure 5-1542 Remove two screws to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit

5. Remove the booklet entrance unit (callout 1)
Figure 5-1543 Remove the booklet entrance unit
6. Remove the booklet presser

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser.
1. Remove three screws (callout 1)
Remove the booklet presser 2217

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and remove the motor unit (callout 2)
Figure 5-1545 Disconnect one connector and remove the motor unit
3. Remove one e-clip on top of the white gear then remove the white gear (callout 1)
Figure 5-1546 Remove one e-clip on top of the white gear then remove the white gear

4. Remove one e-clip on top of the bush then remove the bush (callout 1)
Figure 5-1547 Remove one e-clip on top of the bush then remove the bush
5. Band (callout2) the booklet presser (callout 1) out to make it easy to pull out (callout 3)
Figure 5-1548 Band the booklet presser out to make it easy to pull out


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).

0604-001393 Booklet presser home sensor
Required tools

Post service test



2. Remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37) .
2. Use a tweezer to remove booklet presser home sensor (S37, callout 1)
Figure 5-1551 Remove booklet presser home sensor


printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser motor (M16)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser motor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
JC93-01155A Booklet presser motor
Required tools

Post service test


2. Remove the booklet presser motor (M16)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser motor (M16).
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
presser motor.

Figure 5-1554 Remove the booklet presser motor

printer.
pads.
Booklet tamper unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper unit on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01431A Booklet tamper unit
Required tools

Post service test

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper unit 2227



(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.
finisher rail.




Remove the booklet right lower shield 2237

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.
Figure 5-1576 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1577 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker
8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.
1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)
Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2239

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.
Figure 5-1579 Remove the board cover
4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).
9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.
1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).
Figure 5-1583 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker
Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2241

2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).
Figure 5-1584 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

10. Remove the booklet tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.
1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)
2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)

Remove the booklet tamper unit 2243

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).

0604-001393 Booklet tamper home sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.
finisher rail.














11. Remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)
2. Use a tweezer to remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38, callout 1)
Figure 5-1626 Remove booklet tamper home sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor (M23)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC93-01155A Booklet tamper motor
Required tools

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor (M23) 2263

Post service test




(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.

finisher rail.














11. Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper motor (M23).
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1662 Remove two screws and unplug one connector

2. Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23, callout 1)
Figure 5-1663 Remove the booklet tamper motor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler unit
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet stapler unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet stapler unit on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC81-08274B Booklet stapler unit
Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.
finisher rail.


6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker
2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.
Figure 5-1683 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1684 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker
4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1685 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker
Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2293

5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1686 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker
7. Remove the booklet stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet stapler unit.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

2. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.
3. Remove the metal frame (callout 1)
Figure 5-1689 Remove the metal frame
4. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to remove the board cover (callout 2)
Remove the booklet stapler unit 2295

5. Remove four screws (callout 1) and unplug the connector (callout 2) at the rear of the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1691 Remove four screws and unplug the connector

7. Remove the connector cover (callout 1).
Figure 5-1693 Remove the connector cover
Remove the booklet stapler unit 2297

10. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker and pull the metal bracket (callout 2)
out each side.
11. Remove one screw(callout 1) and remove one screw(callout 2) (Remove two screws each side)
Figure 5-1697 Remove two screws each side
12. Remove two screws (callout 1) and remove the black cover (callout 2) and pull the stapler unit
(callout 3) out
Figure 5-1698 Pull the stapler unit

printer.
pads.
Booklet fold unit
Removal and replacement: Booklet blade

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet blade.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade on the finisher.

display is blank).

JC93-01163A Booklet blade
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.
finisher rail.






Remove the booklet maker middle right shield 2311







10. Remove the booklet blade

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect one connector (callout 2)
2. Remove 7 screws (callout 1) and remove the booklet blade (callout 2)
Figure 5-1733 Remove 7 screws and remove the booklet blade
NOTE: Be sure to make the scale when you reassemble with the new blade

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet blade home sensor (S45)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet blade home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Booklet blade home sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.
finisher rail.






Remove the booklet maker middle right shield 2329







10. Remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45).
■ Disconnect one connector(callout 1) and remove the Booklet blade home sensor (S45, callout 2)
Figure 5-1767 Disconnect one connector and remove the Booklet blade home sensor

printer.

pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor (M22)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet blade motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01435A Booklet blade motor assembly
JC31-00144A Booklet blade motor
Required tools

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor (M22) 2335

Post service test





3. Remove the booklet blade motor (M22)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade motor (M22).
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
blade motor.
Figure 5-1772 Remove the booklet blade motor


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor (M21)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet fold motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet fold motor on the finisher.

display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor (M21) 2339

JC90-01436A Booklet fold motor assembly
JC31-00144A Booklet fold motor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).


4. Remove the booklet fold motor (M21)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet fold motor (M21).
Remove the booklet fold motor (M21) 2343

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the folding
roller motor.
Figure 5-1779 Remove the booklet fold motor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC61-07366A Booklet c-fold blade
Required tools

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade 2345

Post service test




(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.

finisher rail.





7. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade.
Remove the Booklet c-fold blade 2357

■ Remove four screws(callout 1) to remove the booklet c-fold blade
Figure 5-1803 Remove four screws to remove the booklet c-fold blade
NOTE:
● Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
● Make sure the metal located on the home position when you reassemble the unit.
You can make it by rotating the gear to the left direction.
TIP: Rotate the white gear (callout 1) to the left direction to make the metal (callout 2) to the home
postion.

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade home sensor on
the finisher.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor
Required tools

Post service test




(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.
finisher rail.






7. Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39).
1. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1827 Remove three screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Take motor unit (callout 1) out from the booklet maker and unplug one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1828 Take motor unit out from the booklet maker and unplug one connector
3. Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39, callout 1)
Figure 5-1829 Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor (M17)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade motor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
https://parts.hp.com..
JC93-01154A Booklet c-fold blade motor
JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Required tools

Post service test


2. Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17).

1. Note the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1).
These arrows must be aligned in these positions when the motor is reinstalled.
Figure 5-1831 Check arrow alignment
2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-1833 Remove four screws (callout 1).
4. Remove one e-clip (callout 1) on top of the white gear. Remove the white gear (callout 2) and release
the belt (callout 3).
Figure 5-1834 Remove one e-clip, gear, and belt
5. Remove the bracket and motor from the booklet maker.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft
might become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet
maker PCA shield and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.
Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17) 2377

Figure 5-1835 Remove the bracket and motor
6. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the C fold motor.
instructions.
Special installation instructions: C fold motor

a. When installing the motor, install one screw (callout 1) to hold the bracket in place while
installing the gear and belt.
b. Check the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor
(callout 1).
Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17) 2379

c. If the arrows are not aligned, slightly pull up on the belt to create some slack around the gear
(callout 1), and then rotate the gear (callout 2) until the arrows align.

printer.
pads.

Booklet diverter unit
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC90-01398A Booklet diverter
Required tools

Booklet diverter unit 2381

Post service test



(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.

finisher rail.





7. Remove the booklet diverter

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter.
Remove the booklet diverter 2393

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover (callout
2).
Figure 5-1860 Remove two screws at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover
2. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to make it easy to disconnect the
connector.

3. Pull the connector cover (callout 1) and disconnect the one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1862 Pull the connector cover and disconnect the one connector

5. Remove the white bush
Figure 5-1864 Remove the white bush
6. Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator and make
sure not to lose the pin(callout 2) when you pull out the black actuator.
Figure 5-1865 Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black
actuator

7. Remove the white bush (callout 1).
8. Pull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1867 ull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor (S40)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter home sensor on the
finisher.

display is blank).

0604-001415 Booklet diverter home sensor
Required tools

Post service test



2. Remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40).
2. Unplug one connector (callout 1) and remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40, callout 2)
Figure 5-1870 Remove the booklet diverter home sensor


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor (M18)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter motor on the
finisher.

display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor (M18) 2401

JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly
JC93-01153A Booklet diverter motor
Required tools

Post service test



2. Remove the booklet diverter motor (M18)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter motor (M18).
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor.
Figure 5-1872 Remove the separate pawl motor

Remove the booklet diverter motor (M18) 2403

printer.
pads.
Booklet exit unit
Removal and replacement: Booklet exit sensor (S44)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet exit sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet exit sensor on the finisher.

display is blank).

JC32-00020A Booklet exit sensor
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.
finisher rail.






7. Remove the booklet diverter

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover (callout
2).
Figure 5-1896 Remove two screws at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover

2. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to make it easy to disconnect the
connector.
3. Pull the connector cover (callout 1) and disconnect the one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1898 Pull the connector cover and disconnect the one connector

5. Remove the white bush

6. Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator and make
sure not to lose the pin(callout 2) when you pull out the black actuator.
Figure 5-1901 Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black
actuator
7. Remove the white bush (callout 1).

8. Pull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1903 ull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker
8. Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet exit sensor (S44).
Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44) 2421

3. Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44, callout 1)
Figure 5-1906 Remove the booklet exit sensor

printer.
pads.
Booklet output tray unit
Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet output tray.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet output tray on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC61-07253B Booklet output tray
JC63-04978B Booklet output tray cover
Required tools

Post service test



remove it.
instructions.



printer.
pads.
PCA
Removal and replacement: Main PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the main PCA.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main PCA on the finisher.

display is blank).
PCA 2425
JC92-02968A Finisher mainPCA
Required tools

Post service test





(callout 2).


4. Remove the controller PCA

Follow these steps to remove the controller PCA.
Remove the controller PCA 2429

■ Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the controller PCA.
TIP: Refer to the figure below for correct positioning and connection of the cables.
Figure 5-1915 Remove the controller PCA

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet maker PCA.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet maker PCA on the finisher.

display is blank).
JC92-02789B Booklet finisher PCA
Required tools

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher PCA 2431

Post service test




(callout 2).







instructions.
maker.

finisher rail.

finisher rail.
5. Remove the booklet maker PCA

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker PCA.

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the metal cover.
Figure 5-1934 Remove one screw and the metal cover
3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet
maker PCA.
Remove the booklet maker PCA 2441

Figure 5-1935 Remove four screws and the PCA

printer.
pads.

Problem solving
Control panel message document (CPMD)

Learn about the control panel message document (CPMD).
Refer to Error codes (types and structure) on page 966 for more details.
Clear paper jams

Learn about clearing paper jams.
Clear paper jams in the Booklet maker

Learn how to clear paper jams in the Booklet maker.
Clear jams in the top output area

Learn how to clear jams in the top output area.
1. Open the top cover.
Problem solving 2443

2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.
Clear jams in the booklet maker paper path

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker paper path.
1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Release the lever.
3. Turn the knob.
4. Remove the jammed paper.
Clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area.
Clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area 2445

2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

3. Turn the knob to advance the jammed paper.
4. Remove the jammed paper/booklet from the output area.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper area

Learn how to clear paper jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper-area.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper area 2447

3. Open the vertical tray by pulling outward on the green tab.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left middle area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left-middle-area.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left middle area 2449
3. Pull the green tab.
5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left lower area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left-lower area.

3. Open the roller door.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left lower area 2451
5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.
Clear jams in the IPTU

Learn how to clear jams in the IPTU.
1. Lift the IPTU cover and clear any jammed paper inside the IPTU.
2. Close the IPTU cover.
Clear jams in the inner finisher (IF)

Learn how to clear jams in the inner finisher (IF).

1. Open the staple cartridge access door.
2. Rotate the lever to the left to release the hooks that secure the inner finisher (they hold the IF in
place).
3. Slide the inner finisher partially out.
Clear jams in the inner finisher (IF) 2453

4. Release the lever to open the right cover on the inner finisher.
5. Lift the inner finisher jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper inside the rear of the
inner finisher.
6. Close the inner finisher jam access cover.
7. Close the inner finisher right cover.

8. Open the output side jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper.
9. Close the output side jam access cover.
10. Slide the inner finisher in until it clicks into place.
11. Close the staple cartridge access door.
Clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher

Learn how to clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher.
Clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher 2455

2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.
Finisher system diagram

Learn about the finisher system diagram.
Finisher system consists of the FINISHER PCA, BOOKLET MAKER PCA, SWITCH PCA, and HOLE PUNCH
PCA.
Figure 5-1936 Finisher system diagram
PCA function
● FINISHER PCA
This PCA controls the finisher modules and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

● SWITCH PCA
This PCA shows the manual stapling condition and accepts the button input for manual staple
operation.
● BOOKLET MAKER PCA
This PCA controls the booklet maker module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
● HOLE PUNCH PCA
This PCA controls the hole punch module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
Finisher system diagram 2457

6 Inner finisher
Learn more about the inner finisher.
Product specification and description

Learn about product specifications and descriptions.
Inner finisher view

Learn about the front view and rear view of the inner finisher.
Front & rear view

Figure 6-1 Inner finisher system - front view
Figure 6-2 Inner finisher system - rear view
2458 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-1 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information
C1 Front cover JC90-01321B (*)
C2 Top cover JC90-01323B (*)
C3 Middle cover JC90-01322B (*)
C4 Punch cover JC90-01343B (*)
C5 Output tray JC90-01337B (*)
C6 PCA cover JC63-04792B (*)
C7 Left cover JC90-01324B (*)
C8 Rear cover JC63-04750B (*)
1 Lock release handle JC66-04233A (*)
2 Main interface harness JC39-02169A (*)
Not shown Exit bin full JC90-01546A (*)

NOTE: Exit bin full is included in the box
Detailed specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the inner finisher.
Table 6-2 General specifications
Item Description
Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm
Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open
Media Sizes ● Main: 98mm - 320mm x 139.7mm - 457.2mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.5in - 18in)
● Top: 98mm - 320mm x 148.0mm - 430.0mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.83in - 16.93in)
Media types Plain/Thick/Heavy weight/Thin/Cotton/Colored/Recycled/Bond/Archive/Pre-Punched/Cardstock/

Glossy/Envelope
Media Weight ● Main: 52-256 gsm (13.9-68.3 lb.)
● Top: 52-325 gsm (13.9-86.7 lb.)
Detailed specifications 2459

Item Description
Number of Bin 2 (Main/Top)
Dimension (W X D X H) 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18.0 X 19.3 X 6.8 inch)
Weight Net weight: 15 kg (33 lb.)
Packing weight: 18.39 kg (40.53 lb.)
Tray 1 Finishing 50 Sheets @ 80gsm

Capacity
Tray 1 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Dual)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)
Tray 2 Finishing 500 Sheets @ 80 gsm

Capacity
Table 6-3 Paper Size Specification
Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position
mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL
52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat
A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF O O O X F/R1 O
Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF O O O X F/R1 O
Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
B5(JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
B5(ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X O X X X
Monarch Env 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X O X X X
PostCard 4X6 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X O X X X
A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X O X X X
No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X O X X X
DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X O X X X
C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X O X X X
B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X O X X X
Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X O X X X
A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X X X
C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X 0 X X X
B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

Table 6-3 Paper Size Specification (continued)
Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position
mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL
52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat
Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

342.9
C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X O X X X
Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF O X X X X X

457.2
SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF O X X X X X
Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — O X O X X X
L 140-1200 L 5.5-47.2 (W 98-297 ~
L 140-1200)
1 “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.
Table 6-4 Punch specifications
Name Paper size Orientation Punch
mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
2H 3H 2H 4H 4H
A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF 0 X O X O
Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF 0 X O X O
Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O O O
A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O O O
B5 (JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O X O
B5 (ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O X O
Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O O O
Detailed specifications 2461

Table 6-4 Punch specifications (continued)
Name Paper size Orientation Punch
mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
2H 3H 2H 4H 4H
No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X X X X
Monarch 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X X X X

Env
PostCard 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X X X X

4X6
A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X X X X
No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X X X X
DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X X X X
C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X X X X
B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X X X X
Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X X X X
A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X O
C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X X X X
B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O
B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O
Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O X O X O
16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O X O X O
A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O X O X O
Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O X O X O
Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O X O X O
Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O X O X O
Oficio 215.9 x 342.9 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O X O X O
C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X X X X
Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O X O
B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O X O
8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O O
Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O O O
A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O O O
Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 457.2 12 x 18 SEF X X X X X
SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF X X X X X
Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — X X X X X
L 140-1200 L 5.5-47

Table 6-5 Media performance
Paper Type Function
Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch
Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O
Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O
Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O
Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 g/m²) O O O O
Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 g/m2) O O O O
Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 g/m2) X O X X
Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 g/m2) X O X X
Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O
Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O
Bond O O O O
Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O
LetterHead O O O O
Pre-Punched O O O X
Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O
Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X
Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X
Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 g/m²) X O X X
Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 g/m2) X O X X
Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O
Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X
Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O X X X
Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X
Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) O X X X
Tab O X X O
Inner finisher system

Learn about the inner finisher system.
Inner finisher system 2463

Overview
Learn about the overview of the inner finisher.
Work flow
Figure 6-3 Inner finisher system - work flow overview
Table 6-6 Inner finisher system - work flow overview
1 Punch unit holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper
2 Entrance unit allows paper to move into the finisher
3 Diverter unit holds paper so that the newly printed paper can stay out for seconds while the
stapled bundle of paper moves to the output tray
4 Exit unit moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit
5 Paper support unit prevents paper from being fallen down or bent when the long length paper such as
A3 is ejected from the exit unit
6 Main paddle unit moves paper to the sub paddle
7 Sub paddle unit moves paper to the end fence
8 End fence unit sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the
paper
9 Tamper unit aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper
10 Stapler unit performs stapling to a bundle of aligned documents
11 Ejector 1 unit transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit
12 Ejector 2 unit grips a stack of paper up and ejects it onto the output tray
13 Output tray unit stacks the job ended paper
14 Paper holding unit controls the output tray movement

Sensor
Figure 6-4 Inner finisher system - sensor
Table 6-7 Inner finisher system - sensor
S1 Entrance 0604-001381 (*) 113-0350 Photo emitter, Checks paper comes into the
sensor detector entrance unit
S2 Stapler position 0604-001393 113-0491 Photo Makes the stapler be positioned in

sensor interrupter the exact stapling position
113-0492
S3 Front cover JC39-01610A 113-0410 Cover open Checks whether the front cover is
switch switch closed or opened
S4 Main paddle 0604-001393 113-0370 Photo Checks the main paddle locates at
home sensor interrupter the home position
S5 Front tamper 0604-001393 113-0390 Photo Checks the front tamper locates at
S6 Output tray 0604-001393 113-0473 Photo Checks the output tray motor is
motor sensor interrupter operational
S7 Output tray JC90-01320A (*) 113-0472 Lower limit Checks the lower limit (=Output
lower limit switch tray is full) of the output tray
switch assembly
S8 Output tray top 0603-001309 (*) 113-0471 Photo TR Checks the upper limit of output
of stack sensor tray
(receiver)
S9 Paper holding 0604-001393 113-0470 Photo Checks the location of the paper
sensor interrupter holding actuator
S10 Ejector 2 home 0604-001393 113-0462 Photo Checks the ejector 2 locates at the
sensor interrupter home position.
Overview 2465
Table 6-7 Inner finisher system - sensor (continued)
S11 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001393 113-0463 Photo Checks the ejector 2 motor is
sensor interrupter operational
S12 Paper support 0604-001393 113-0481 Photo Checks the paper support locates
home sensor interrupter at the home position
S13 Output tray top 0601-003440 113-0471 LED IR Checks the upper limit of output
of stack sensor tray
(led)
S14 Rear tamper 0604-001393 113-0380 Photo Checks the rear tamper locates at
S15 Top cover JC39-01610A (*) 113-0420 Cover open Checks whether the top cover is
switch switch closed or opened
S16 Ejector 1 home 0604-001393 113-0461 Photo Checks the ejector 1 locates at the
sensor interrupter home position
S17 End fence 0604-001381 (*) 113-0361 Photo emitter, Check paper comes into the end
sensor detector fence unit
S18 Punch waste 0604-001393 113-0620 Photo Detects the punch waste box is
box sensor interrupter installed
S19 Punch waste 0604-001381 (*) 113-0621 Photo emitter, Checks the punch waste box is full
full sensor detector
S2 Finisher 0604-001393 113-0000 Photo Checks the finisher is installed

0 docking sensor interrupter
S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-0360 Photo Checks paper comes into the exit
interrupter unit
Figure 6-5 Inner finisher system - Photo interrupter (0604-001393)

Figure 6-6 Inner finisher system - Photo emitter, detector (0604-001381)
Motor and solenoid

Figure 6-7 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid
Table 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostic Type Motor Description

s sensor
M1 Stapler JC93-00999A (*) 113-0581 Step motor Drives the stapler unit
position
motor
M2 Exit motor JC31-00169B (*) 113-0502 Step motor Drives the exit roller and the
sub paddle unit
M3 Main paddle JC93-01001A (*) 113-0510 Step motor Home Drives the main paddle unit
motor
assembly
M4 Output tray JC90-01334B (*) 113-0570 DC Motor Encoder Drives the output tray unit
motor
assembly
Overview 2467
Table 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid (continued)
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostic Type Motor Description

s sensor
M5 Rear tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-0520 Step motor Home Drives the rear tamper unit
motor
assembly
M6 Ejector2 JC93-01168A 113-0562 DC Motor Home, Drives the ejector 2 unit

motor encoder
assembly
M7 Ejector1 JC93-00998A 113-0561 Step Motor Home Drives the ejector 1 unit
motor
assembly
M8 Paper JC93-00802B 113-0571 Step Motor Home Drives paper support unit
support
motor
assembly
M9 Front tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-0530 Step Motor Home Drives the front tamper unit
motor
assembly
M10 Entrance JC90-01344A (*) 113-0501 Step Motor Drives the entrance roller and
motor the middle roller
assembly
SL1 Paper holding JC33-00037A (*) 113-0591 Solenoid Drives paper holding unit
solenoid
The sensor mounted at the driving motor detects motor operation. If a motor doesn’t work properly, an
event code only for the motor will pop up.
Figure 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor sensor
The home position sensor is installed for the purpose of checking the reference point when the specific
unit is operating.

Figure 6-9 Inner finisher system - home sensor
Roller
Figure 6-10 Inner finisher system - roller
Table 6-9 Inner finisher system - roller
R1 Entrance roller JC66-04243A (*) Roller Moves paper forward
R2 Middle roller JC66-04243A (*) Roller Moves paper forward
Overview 2469
Table 6-9 Inner finisher system - roller (continued)
R3 Exit roller JC66-04244A (*) Roller Moves paper forward

PCA
Figure 6-11 Inner finisher system - PCA
Table 6-10 Inner finisher system - roller
1 Main PCA JC92-02774B (*)
2 Rear joint PCA JC92-02780A (*) Joint PCA between main PCA
and several parts punch, stapler,
entrance, and front door
Punch unit (optional)

Learn about the punch unit of the inner finisher.
The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is
located immediately before the entrance unit and punches holes onto a paper.
● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole2/3 Punch : Y1G02-67901
● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole2/4 Punch : Y1G03-67901
● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch : Y1G04-67901
NOTE: Puncher types vary depending on the country/region.

In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
clockwise, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make holes.
When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the inner gear rotates to
the left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the motor are detected and controlled by the
hole punch home sensor and the hole punch motor sensor.
Figure 6-12 Inner finisher system - punched hole location and pair
For more information, go to the HP WISE support portal and search for HP LaserJet Managed MFP - How
to use the hole punch (c05450959).
Figure 6-13 Inner finisher system - punch unit overview
Punch unit (optional) 2471

Figure 6-14 Inner finisher system - punch unit detail view
Table 6-11 Inner finisher system - punch unit parts information
- Hole 2/3 Punch Y1G02-67901 (*) Punch unit assembly for hole
2/3
Hole 2/4 Punch Y1G03-67901
Punch unit assembly for hole
Swedish Punch Y1G04-67901 2/4
Punch cover JC90-01343B Punch unit assembly for

Swedish
Punch cover (for the finisher

punch is not installed)
1 Punch motor - 113-0610 Drives the entrance roller

connected by a belt
2 Punch motor sensor - 113-0600 Detects punch motor operation
3 Punch home sensor - 113-0612 Detects punchers’ home

position
Not Punch PBA 2-4 hole SS465-67001 (*)

show
n
Not Punch PBA 2-3 hole SS467-67001 (*)

show
n

Table 6-11 Inner finisher system - punch unit parts information (continued)
Not Punch PBA Swedish SS466-67001 (*)

show
n
(*) This part is in system.
Figure 6-15 Inner finisher system - punch unit operation (3 holes)
Figure 6-16 Inner finisher system - punch unit operation (2 holes)
Entrance unit
Learn about the entrance unit of the inner finisher.
The entrance unit is located right after the punch unit. This unit is driven by entrance motor which is
installed on the rear of the finisher. This motor is connected to the entrance roller by a belt, which
transfers driving force to move paper from the printer to the finisher inside. If an error such as paper
jam occurs in the entrance unit, the entrance sensor detects the error and generates an event code
(13.60.xx).
Entrance unit 2473

Figure 6-17 Inner finisher system - entrance unit overview
Figure 6-18 Inner finisher system - entrance unit detail view
Table 6-12 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information
S1 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0350 Detects paper if it comes into

the entrance unit
M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-0501 Drives the entrance roller
assembly connected by a belt
- Entrance motor JC31-00169B (*)
R1 Entrance roller JC66-04243A (*) Moves paper forward

Diverter unit
Learn about the diverter unit of the inner finisher.
The diverter unit holds paper so that the newly printed paper can wait for a few seconds until the stapled
bundle moves to the output tray. The diverter unit is used to change paper path, which is done by a
spring mounted on the diverter unit. When paper exit from the unit, it goes through the upper path of
the diverter. When the paper rolls back, it passes the lower paper path created by the diverter. Here, the
paper sits for a while until the next paper is ready to come out together.

Figure 6-19 Inner finisher system - diverter unit overview
Figure 6-20 Inner finisher system - diverter unit detail view
Table 6-13 Inner finisher system - diverter unit parts information
M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-501 Drives the feed roller connected
assembly by a belt
Entrance motor JC31-00169B (*)
R2 Middle roller JC66-04243A (*) Drives paper forward installed

in front of the diverter
1 Diverter JC61-06392A Changes paper path when

paper goes backward
Diverter unit 2475

Table 6-13 Inner finisher system - diverter unit parts information (continued)
2 Diverter spring JC61-07269A Pulls the diverter to upward so

that it makes paper path to the
lower of the diverter
Diverter unit operation

1. Paper goes forward to the output tray.
2. Exit roller stops after paper passes by the diverter unit.
3. Paper goes backward under the diverter unit.

Exit unit
Learn about the exit unit of the inner finisher.
The exit unit is the part that moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit. The exit unit
is powered by an exit motor installed on the front of the finisher. The motor and the exit roller are
connected by a single belt. The exit motor rotates in both the forward and reverse directions, since it
serves to return paper to a new paper path created by the diverter unit. The exit sensor is installed right
in front of exit roller. It generates an event code when a paper jam occurred.
Figure 6-21 Inner finisher system - exit unit overview
Exit unit 2477

Figure 6-22 Inner finisher system - exit unit detail view
Table 6-14 Inner finisher system - exit unit parts information
1 Rear compile guide JC61-07450A (*) Guides to help paper move

through the paper path
2 Front compile guide JC61-07449A (*) Guides to help paper move

through the paper path
3 Exit sensor actuator JC66-04199A (*) 113-0360 Makes the sensor on and off by
checking paper
S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-0360 Detects paper if it passes

through the exit unit
M2 Exit motor assembly JC90-01331A 113-0502 Drives the exit roller connected
by a belt
Exit motor JC31-00169B (*)
R3 Exit roller JC66-04244A (*) Moves paper to the ejector unit

Exit unit operation

1. When rotating the exit motor counter clockwise, paper goes forward to the output tray.

2. When rotating the exit motor clockwise, paper goes backward to the end fence unit.
Paper support unit

Learn about the paper support unit of the inner finisher.
Paper support unit works to prevent the paper from falling out or being folded. Also, the newly printed
paper will not scatter papers already sitting on the output tray. Paper guides are installed on each front
and rear side of the finisher, these guides move towards the output tray when the paper exits, then the
guides return to the original position after the support operation is completed. The paper support home
sensor confirms the original position of the guide.
Paper support unit 2479

Figure 6-23 Inner finisher system - paper support unit overview
Figure 6-24 Inner finisher system - paper support unit detail view
Table 6-15 Inner finisher system - paper support unit parts information
1 Rear paper support JC90-01311A (*) Supports paper not to be

bended
2 Front paper support JC90-01310A (*) Supports paper not to be

bended
S12 Paper support home 0604-001393 113-0481 Detects the paper support
sensor guides locate at the home
position
M8 Paper support motor JC93-00802B 113-0571 Drives paper support guides

assembly from the home position to the
forward direction

Table 6-15 Inner finisher system - paper support unit parts information (continued)
Paper support motor JC31-00149A

Paper support unit operation

Paper support unit is extended to the arrow direction to help paper is bent of fallen to the output tray.
Figure 6-25 Inner finisher system - paper support unit operation
Paddle unit
Learn about the paddle unit of the inner finisher.
The paddle unit consists of two paddle systems, a main paddle and a sub paddle. First, when paper is
discharged from the exit unit, the main paddle unit moves paper to the sub paddle. Then the sub paddle
unit moves paper to the end fence unit so that it can be ready to be stapled.
The main paddle unit is operated by the main paddle motor. The main paddle sensor detects the main
paddle position. The sub paddle unit rotates by the exit motor.
Paddle unit 2481

Figure 6-26 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system overview (main paddle unit)
Figure 6-27 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system overview (sub paddle unit)
Figure 6-28 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system detail view (1/2)

Figure 6-29 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system detail view (2/2)
Table 6-16 Inner finisher system - paddle unit parts information
1 Main paddle JC90-01327A (*) Moves paper to the sub paddle

unit
1-a Main paddle kit JC82-01038A (*)
1-b Main paddle A JC63-04957A (*)
1-c Main paddle B JC63-04958A (*)
1-d Main paddle holder JC81-07560A (*)
2 Sub paddle JC90-01336A (*) Gets paper move to the end

fence and arrange them to be
stapled correctly
S4 Main paddle home 0604-001393 113-0370 Detects the home position of

sensor the main paddle
M3 Main paddle motor JC90-01331A (*) 113-0510 Drives the main paddle unit
assembly connected by a belt
Main paddle motor JC31-00149A
M2 Exit motor JC31-00169B (*) 113-0502 Drives the sub paddle unit
connected by a belt
Paddle unit operation

1. Main paddles get paper moves to the sub paddle unit.
Paddle unit 2483

2. Sub paddle unit gets paper goes to the end fence unit.
Tamper unit
Learn about the tamper unit of the inner finisher.
The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper in order to staple it to the
correct position. When a certain amount of paper for stapling is collected after printing, the tamper unit
hits the left and right ends of the paper to align the paper correctly.
Each temper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move. The temper unit sensors
are mounted on the back side of the unit, to check the position of the temper unit.

Figure 6-30 Inner finisher system - tamper unit overview
Figure 6-31 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (1/3)
Figure 6-32 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (rear) (2/3)
Tamper unit 2485

Figure 6-33 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (front) (3/3)
Table 6-17 Inner finisher system - tamper unit parts information
1 Front tamper JC82-00899A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper
2 Rear tamper JC82-00900A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper
M5 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-0520 Drives the rear temper unit
assembly
Rear tamper motor JC31-00149A
S14 Rear tamper home 0604-001393 113-0380 Detects the reference position
sensor of the tamper unit
M9 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-0530 Drives the front tamper unit
assembly
Front tamper motor JC31-00149A
S5 Front tamper home 0604-001393 113-0390 Detects the reference position

sensor of the tamper unit
Tamper unit operation

1. Paper is arranged at the end of the end fence unit.

2. The left and right tampers arrange a stack of paper.
End fence unit

Learn about the end fence unit of the inner finisher.
The paddle unit moves paper to the end fence unit. The end fence unit sets the standard position of the
paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper. The end fence is fixed onto the finisher, and the
end fence sensor can sense any paper entering the end fence unit.
End fence unit 2487

Figure 6-34 Inner finisher system - end fence unit overview
Figure 6-35 Inner finisher system - end fence unit detail view
Table 6-18 Inner finisher system - end fence unit parts information
1 End fence JC61-06428A Aligns paper toward top and

bottom direction
2 End fence sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0361 Detects paper whether paper
exists in the end fence unit
End fence unit operation

1. Paper goes into the end fence unit through the main paddle unit and sub paddle unit. At the same
time the end fence unit is aligned paper to the direction of yellow line.

2. The end fence sensor is checking whether paper goes into the end fence sensor.
Stapler unit
Learn about the stapler unit of the inner finisher.
Stapler unit is a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents.
Documents are collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then
stapler assembly staples the bundle. There are 6 options to make a bundle.
Figure 6-36 Inner finisher system - stapling options
The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor installed inside. The four stapler position sensors are
mounted so that the stapler can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on
the left, the right, or at the center of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler
assembly.
Stapler unit 2489

Figure 6-37 Inner finisher system - stapler unit overview
Figure 6-38 Inner finisher system - stapler unit detail view (1/2)
Figure 6-39 Inner finisher system - stapler unit detail view (2/2)

Table 6-19 Inner finisher system - stapler unit parts information
1 Stapler assembly JC59-00040A (*) Staples a bundle of paper
1-a Staple cartridge JC81-07408B (*) Staple cartridge
S2 Stapler position sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0491 Detects and moves the staple
assembly position to make a
113-0492 bundle of paper at the exact
location
M1 Stapler position motor JC93-00999A (*) 113-0581 Gets the staple assembly move
toward top and down direction
of paper
Stapler unit operation

1. The stapler position motor delivers the stapler assembly to the horizontal direction (yellow line).
2. The stapler assembly checks front and rear home position and moves where the stapler position
sensors are located depending on stapling types.
Stapler unit 2491

Ejector unit
Learn about the ejector unit of the inner finisher.
The ejector unit moves a bundle of stapled paper out. The ejector unit consists of ejector1 and ejector2.
The Ejector1 transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit. During this
process, the ejector1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And the ejector1 home
position sensor controls the movement of the ejector1. When the paper arrives at the ejector2 unit, the
ejector2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the output tray. The ejector2 motor is responsible for
this process, and the ejector2 motor sensor helps it to be controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2
home position sensor is mounted to check the location of the ejector2.
Figure 6-40 Inner finisher system - ejector unit overview

Figure 6-41 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (1/3)
Table 6-20 Inner finisher system - ejector unit parts information
NA Ejector SS456-61001 (*)
1 Ejector2 Not applicable Moves paper from the ejector 1

to the output tray
2 Ejector1 Not applicable Moves the stack of paper from

the end fence to the ejector2
S10 Ejector2 home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0462 Detects the home position of
the ejector2
Ejector unit 2493

Table 6-20 Inner finisher system - ejector unit parts information (continued)
S16 Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0461 Detects the home position of
the ejector1
3 Ejector motor JC90-01309A Moves the ejector1 and ejector2

assembly
M6 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A (*) 113-0562 Moves the ejector2 forward and
assembly backward
Ejector2 motor JC31-00175A Detects the ejector2 motor

rotation
S11 Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0463
M7 Ejector1 motor JC93-00998A (*) 113-0561 Grabs a stack of paper, then

assembly move it to the output tray
Ejector1 motor JC31-00009C

Ejector unit operation

1. Ejector 1 pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector 2 unit.
2. Ejector 2 grabs paper, then moves forward to the output tray unit direction.

3. Ejector2 draws off paper on the output tray.
Output tray & paper holding unit

Learn about the output tray & paper holding unit of the inner finisher.
The output tray moves up and down along the rails inside the finisher, and the output tray motor controls
those movement according to the signals sent from the paper holding sensor. As paper stacks up on
the output tray, the paper holding unit is lifted by papers. When the paper holding sensor is touched, the
output tray moves downward.
The machine detects when the output tray is full as the output tray hits the lower limit switch. The output
tray top of stack sensor is mounted on both left and right sides for the case that the paper holding
sensor breaks down.
Output tray & paper holding unit 2495

The paper holding solenoid lifts the paper holding actuator up when a new bundle of paper come to the
output tray.
Figure 6-44 Inner finisher system - output tray unit overview
Figure 6-45 Inner finisher system - output tray unit detail view (1/2)
Figure 6-46 Inner finisher system - output tray unit detail view (2/2)
Table 6-21 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information
1 Output tray JC90-01337B (*) Stacking plate for ejected paper

Table 6-21 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information (continued)
M4 Output tray motor JC90-01334B (*) 113-0570 Moves the output tray up and
assembly down
Output tray motor JC31-00178B (*)
S6 Output tray motor 0604-001393 113-0473 Detects if the output tray motor
sensor is operational
2 Output tray frame JC90-01319A (*)
S7 Output tray lower limit JC90-01320A (*) 113-0472 Detects the lowest position of
switch the output tray
3 Output tray lower JC66-04200A (*) 113-0472 Detects the lowest position of
actuator the output tray
4 Output tray top of JC82-01039A (*) 113-0471 Detects abnormal movement of

stack sensor kit output tray (Output tray top of
stack sensor receiver + led)
S8 Output tray top of 0603-001309 (*)

stack sensor (receiver)
S13 Output tray top of 0601-003440

stack sensor (led)
Figure 6-47 Inner finisher system - paper holding unit overview

Figure 6-48 Inner finisher system - paper holding unit detail view
Table 6-22 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information
1 Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A (*) Controls the output tray height,
and grabs stacked paper not to
be scattered
2 Paper holding kit JC90-01314A (*) Paper holding solenoid + Paper

holding sensor
SL1 Paper holding solenoid JC33-00037A (*) 113-0591 Moves paper holding actuator
up when paper goes out to the
output tray
S9 Paper holding sensor 0604-001393 113-0470 Detects stacked paper position

Inner finisher system - output tray & paper holding unit operation
1. Paper holding unit helps paper stores stable on the output tray. Besides it detects amount of
stacked paper and get the output tray moves downward.

2. When paper goes out to the output tray, paper holding solenoid forcibly make paper holding
actuator goes upward to create the paper passage not to be jammed by the paper holding actuator.
3. As the paper accumulates, output tray moves downward. When it reaches at the end of the moving
range, output tray lower limit switch is pressed. The switch detects paper stacks full on the output
tray.
4. In case of fatal error in the output tray unit and paper holding unit, output tray top of stack sensor
makes the machine emergency stop so that output tray unit does not move upward.

PCA connection information
Learn about the PCA connection information.
Figure 6-49 Inner finisher system - PCA connection information

Table 6-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information
CN No. Connector name Motor Sensor Switch & Solenoid
(Diagnostics) (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics)
CN1 Rear sensor ● Punch waste box

sensor (113-0620)
● Finisher docking
sensor (113-0000)
● Entrance sensor
(113-0350)
CN2 Rear ● Rear tamper motor ● Rear tamper home ● Top cover switch
(113-0520) sensor (113-0380) (113-0420)
● Paper support motor ● Output tray top

(113-0571) of stack sensor
(113-0471)
● Exit sensor
(113-0360)
● End fence sensor

(113-0361)
● Paper support home

sensor (113-0481)
CN3 Rear joint ● Stapler motor ● Stapler low ● Front cover switch
(113-0550) sensor(113-0440) (113-0420)
● Stapler position ● Stapler ready sensor

motor (113-0581) (113-0451)
● Entrance motor ● Stapler home

(113-0501) sensor(113-0430)
● Punch motor ● Stapler position

(113-0610) sensor (front home)
(113-0491)
● Stapler position
sensor (rear home)
(113-0492)
● Punch waste full

sensor (113-0621)
● Punch motor
sensor(113-0600)
● Punch home sensor

(113-0612)
CN4 Ejector ● Ejector2 motor ● Ejector2 motor

(113-0562) sensor (113-0463)
● Ejector1 motor ● Ejector2 home

(113-0561) sensor (113-0462)
● Ejector1 home
sensor (113-0461)
CN5 Main (to the main PBA)

Table 6-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)
CN No. Connector name Motor Sensor Switch & Solenoid
(Diagnostics) (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics)
CN6 Output tray lower limit ● Output tray lower

switch limit switch (113-0472)
CN7 Front ● Exit motor (113-0502) ● Output tray motor

sensor (113-0473)
● Main paddle motor
(113-0510) ● Main paddle home
sensor (113-0370)
● Output tray motor
(113-0570) ● Front tamper home
sensor (113-0390)
● Front tamper motor
(113-0530) ● Paper holding
sensor (113-0470)
● Output tray top

of stack sensor
(113-0471)
CN9 Paper holding solenoid ● Paper holding

solenoid (113-0591)
CN10 Stapler position sensor ● Stapler position

sensor (mid front) (-)
● Stapler position
sensor (mid rear) (-)
Service approach
Learn about the service approach of the inner finisher.
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach
under the weight of the product.





touching a PCA.

latched.
Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
Precautions when handling PCA 2503

touching a PCA.

Learn about releasing plastic latches.
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them
carefully. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

● Remove all paper from the product.
● Turn off the power using the power button.

● Remove the toner cartridges.
● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.
ESD precautions

issues.
Post-service test
Print-quality test
quality defects.

Ordering
ESD precautions 2505

Table 6-24 Ordering
Orderable parts
is orderable.
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)

Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)

Parts and diagrams (inner finisher)
View inner finisher exploded diagrams and parts lists.
Inner finisher (main)

Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (main).
Figure 6-50 Inner finisher (main)
6-1
6-2
Table 6-25 Inner finisher (main)
Ref Part number Description Qty
Complete Y1G00-67901 Inner finisher whole unit 1
1 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1
2 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1
3 JC82-00899A Front tamper unit assembly 1
4 JC82-00900A Rear tamper unit assembly 1
Parts and diagrams (inner finisher) 2507

Table 6-25 Inner finisher (main) (continued)
5 SS456-61001 Ejector 1
6 JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly 1
6-1 JC31-00178B Output tray motor 1
6-2 0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor 1
7 JC90-01336A Sub paddle unit 1
8 JC90-01337B Output tray 1
10 JC81-07408B Staple cartridge 1
11 JC90-01343B Punch cover 1
13 6102-003354 Slide pack 2
14 JC61-07713A Wavy roller retainer 1
Not shown JC39-02169A Main interface harness 1

Inner finisher (covers)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (covers)
Figure 6-51 Inner finisher (covers)
Table 6-26 Inner finisher (covers)
1 JC90-01321B Front cover 1
2 JC90-01322B Middle cover 1
3 JC90-01323B Top cover 1
4 JC90-01324B Left cover 1
4-1 JC82-01039A Output tray top of stack sensor kit 1
5 JC63-04750B Rear cover 1
6 JC63-04792B PCA cover 1
7 JC90-01546A Exit bin full 1
Inner finisher (covers) 2509

Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding
unit, and output tray unit).
Figure 6-52 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray
unit)
23-1
23
23-2
8-1
8-2
25 20
15-2
15-1
24
Table 6-27 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
1 0604-001393 Main paddle home sensor 2
2 JC92-02774B Main PCA 1
4 6602-003644 Entrance motor timing belt 1
5 JC82-01038A Paddle kit 1
5-1 JC63-04957A Paddle A 2
5-2 JC63-04958A Paddle B 2
5-3 JC81-07560A Paddle holder 4
8-1 JC66-04243A Entrance roller 1
8-2 JC66-04243A Middle roller 1

Table 6-27 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
(continued)
10 JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly 1
13 JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator 1
14 JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator 1
15 JC90-01314A Paper holding kit 1
15-1 JC33-00037A Paper holding solenoid 1
15-2 0604-001393 Paper holding sensor 1
16 JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch 1
16-3 JC66-04200A Output tray lower limit switch actuator 1
17 JC93-01001A Main paddle motor assembly 1
17-1 JC31-00149A Main paddle motor 1
19-1 JC66-04244A Exit roller 1
19-2 JC61-07449A Front compile guide 1
19-3 JC61-07450A Rear compile guide 1
20 JC90-01331A Exit motor assembly 1
20-1 JC31-00169B Exit motor 1
21 JC90-01319A Output tray frame 1
22 JC92-02780A Rear joint PCA 1
23 shown JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly 1
23-1 JC31-00178B Output tray motor 1
23-2 0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor 1
24 0604-001415 Exit sensor 1
25 JC61-06391A Middle lower guide 1
Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit) 2511
Inner finisher (paper support unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (paper support unit).
Figure 6-53 Inner finisher (paper support unit)
2-2
2-1
1 2
Table 6-28 Inner finisher (paper support unit)
1 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1
2 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1
2-1 0604-001393 Paper support home sensor 1
2-2 JC93-00802B Paper support motor assembly 1

Inner finisher (tamper unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (tamper unit).
Figure 6-54 Inner finisher (tamper unit)
2 2-1
2-2
1-1
1-2
Table 6-29 Inner finisher (tamper unit)
1 JC82-00900A Rear tamper unit 1
1-1 0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor 1
1-2 JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor assembly 1
2 JC82-00899A Front tamper unit 1
2-1 0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor 1
2-2 JC93-01001A Front tamper motor assembly 1
Inner finisher (tamper unit) 2513

Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit).
Figure 6-55 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)
7
6
8
2
Table 6-30 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)
1 0604-001381 End fence sensor 1
2 0604-001393 Stapler position sensor 1
3 JC93-00999A Stapler position motor 1
4 0604-001381 Punch waste full sensor 1
5 JC39-01610A Top cover switch 1
6 0604-001393 Finisher docking sensor 1

Table 6-30 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit) (continued)
7 0604-001393 Punch waste box sensor 1
8 JC39-01610A Compile cover switch 1
Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit) 2515

Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit).
Figure 6-56 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)
Table 6-31 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)
1 JC59-00040A Stapler assembly 1
1-1 JC81-07408B Staple cartridge 1
2 JC90-01343B Punch cover 1
2-1 0604-001381 Entrance sensor 1
Not shown SS465-67001 Punch PBA 2-4 hole 1
Not shown SS467-67001 Punch PBA 2-3 hole 1
Not shown SS466-67001 Punch PBA Swedish 1

Inner finisher (ejector unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (ejector unit).
Figure 6-57 Inner finisher (ejector unit)
5 7
2
6
Table 6-32 Inner finisher (ejector unit)
1 SS456-61001 Ejector 1
2 0604-001393 Ejector2 home sensor 1
3 0604-001393 Ejector1 home sensor 1
4 JC90-01309A Ejector motor assembly 1
5 JC93-01168A Ejector2 motor assembly 1
6 0604-001393 Ejector2 motor sensor 1
7 JC93-00998A Ejector1 motor assembly 1
Covers
Inner finisher (ejector unit) 2517

Removal and replacement: Front cover (C1)
To view tear down and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.
View a tear down video of the inner finisher.
View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .
JC90-01321B Front cover
Required tools

● Connect the power cable.
● Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test


1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.
2. Remove three screws in the front.
3. Remove the lever.
5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

printer.

pads.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (C8)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear cover.
To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.
View a teardown video of the inner finisher.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC63-04750B Rear cover
Required tools

Post service test

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
Figure 6-59 Open the top cover
3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Remove the rear cover 2521

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Middle cover (C3)

Learn how to remove and replace the middle cover.
Service level:

power cable.

display is blank).
JC90-01322B Middle cover
Required tools

Post service test



2. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.
1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.
Figure 6-63 Open the front door and punch cover

2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-64 Remove the middle cover

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Top cover (C2)

Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.

Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01323B Top cover
Required tools

Post service test



2. Remove the top cover

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.
Remove the top cover 2527

Figure 6-67 Remove the top cover
■ Remove one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the top cover by lifting off the
hinge pins at the front.

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: PCA cover (C6)

Learn how to remove and replace the PCA cover.

Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC63-04792B PCA cover
Required tools

Post service test

1. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.
Remove the PCA cover 2529

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.
Figure 6-68 Remove the PCA cover

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Left cover (C7)
Learn how to remove and replace the left cover.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01324B Left cover
Required tools

Post service test

Removal and replacement: Left cover (C7) 2531

front cover.


3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.
Remove the output tray 2533

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.
Figure 6-73 Remove the output tray.
4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.
1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.
Figure 6-74 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.
Figure 6-75 Remove the output tray frame
TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.
Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.
View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.
a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.
b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.
Remove the output tray frame 2535

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.
d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.
e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.



2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.
3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.
Figure 6-79 Unplug two connectors
TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

printer.
pads.
Entrance unit
Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor (S1)

Learn how to remove and replace the entrance sensor.

Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001381 Entrance sensor
Required tools

Post service test



2. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.
Remove the punch cover 2541

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.
Figure 6-82 Remove the slide shaft
2. Open the punch cover.
Figure 6-83 Open the punch cover

3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.
Figure 6-84 Remove the punch cover
3. Remove the entrance sensor

Follow these steps to remove the entrance sensor.
Remove the entrance sensor 2543

1. Loosen the adhesive tape around, and then remove four screws. And then remove the punch cover.
2. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the entrance sensor bracket.
Figure 6-86 Remove the entrance sensor bracket

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 6-87 Remove the entrance sensor

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor (M10)

Learn how to remove and replace the entrance motor.

Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.





finisher.

punch cover.
5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.
1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.
Figure 6-96 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).
Figure 6-97 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring
3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.
Figure 6-98 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller
6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.
Remove the middle paper guide 2551

1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 6-99 Open the middle paper guide
NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.
2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.
Figure 6-100 Remove the middle paper guide
7. Remove the entrance motor

Follow these steps to remove the entrance motor.

2. Open the clamps, and then unplug the connector.
Figure 6-102 Unplug the connector
Remove the entrance motor 2553

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.
Figure 6-103 Remove the entrance motor

printer.
pads.
Exit unit

Removal and replacement: Exit roller (R3)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit roller.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC66-04244A Exit roller
JC61-07449A Front compile guide
JC61-07450A Rear compile guide
Required tools

Removal and replacement: Exit roller (R3) 2555

Post service test

front cover.


3. Remove the sub paddle unit

Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.
1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.
Remove the sub paddle unit 2557

2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.
Figure 6-108 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing
3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.
Figure 6-109 Remove the sub paddle unit
4. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.
Figure 6-110 Remove the guide
2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.
Figure 6-111 Release the timing belt
Remove the exit roller 2559

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.
4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.
Figure 6-113 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.
Figure 6-114 Remove the exit roller

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Exit sensor (S21)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit sensor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001415 Exit sensor
Required tools

Post service test


front cover.





finisher.

punch cover.


from view).


7. Remove the exit sensor

Follow these steps to remove the exit sensor.

■ Remove the exit sensor from the middle paper guide.
Figure 6-128 Remove the exit sensor

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M2)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC31-00169B Exit motor
Required tools


Post service test


front cover.
2. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

■ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.
Figure 6-130 Remove the exit motor bracket
3. Remove the exit motor

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor.
■ Remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor from the bracket.


printer.
pads.
Paper support unit
Removal and replacement: Front paper support

Learn how to remove and replace the front paper support.
Service level:

power cable.
Paper support unit 2573

display is blank).
JC90-01310A Front paper support
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.
1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.
Figure 6-143 Remove the front harness guide
8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.
■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.
Figure 6-144 Remove the output tray motor assembly
Remove the output tray motor assembly 2583

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.
■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.
Figure 6-145 Remove the output tray lower limit switch
10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.
1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.
Figure 6-146 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.
Figure 6-147 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing
NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.
3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.
Figure 6-148 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator
Remove the paper holding 2585


bushing.



the bushing.

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.
14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.
NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.
Remove the rear tamper 2591

2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.
Figure 6-160 Remove the rear tamper
15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.
1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.
Figure 6-162 Disconnect two connector
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.
Figure 6-163 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly
16. Remove the front paper support

Follow these steps to remove the front paper support.
Remove the front paper support 2593

1. Remove the e-ring and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.
Figure 6-164 Remove the drive shaft
TIP: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position(against the stops).
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front paper support.
Figure 6-165 Remove the front paper support


printer.
pads.
Rear paper support
Removal and replacement: Rear paper support

Learn how to remove and replace the rear paper support.
Service level:

power cable.
Rear paper support 2595

display is blank).
JC90-01311A Rear paper support
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.







16. Remove the rear paper support

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper support.
Remove the rear paper support 2615

2. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

3. Remove the rear paper support with attention for pinion.
Figure 6-200 Remove the rear paper support

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor (S12)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper support home sensor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001393 Paper support home sensor
Required tools

Post service test


front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.







16. Remove the rear paper support

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper support.
Remove the rear paper support 2637

2. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

3. Remove the rear paper support with attention for pinion.
Figure 6-235 Remove the rear paper support
17. Remove the paper support home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the paper support home sensor.
■ Remove the sensor from the rear paper support.
Figure 6-236 Remove the paper support home sensor

Remove the paper support home sensor 2639

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Paper support motor (M8)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper support motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).

JC93-00802B (not orderable) Paper support motor assembly
JC31-00149A (not orderable) Paper support motor
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.
Remove the front harness guide 2649




Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2651

remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.


Remove the front tamper 2657




Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2659

16. Remove the paper support motor

Follow these steps to remove the paper support motor.

■ Remove two screws, disconnect one connect, and then remove the paper support motor.
Figure 6-269 Remove the paper support motor

printer.
pads.
Paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Main paddle
Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01327A Main paddle
JC82-01038A Main paddle kit
JC63-04957A Main paddle A
JC63-04958A Main paddle B
JC81-07560A Main paddle holder
Required tools


Post service test

1. Remove the main paddle

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle.
2. Rotate the main paddle shaft to see the lower side of the main paddle.
Figure 6-270 Rotate the main paddle shaft
Remove the main paddle 2663

3. Remove the main paddle by pushing both sides.
Figure 6-271 Remove the main paddle
TIP: When reassembling the main paddle, check the pin position of the paddle and the hole
position of the shaft, and then assemble them.


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor (S4)

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle home sensor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor (S4) 2665

0604-001393 Main paddle home sensor
Required tools

Post service test


front cover.
2. Remove the main paddle home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle home sensor.

1. Remove one screw. Open the clamp and unplug one connector, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor bracket.
Figure 6-273 Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket
2. Remove the main paddle home sensor from the bracket.
Figure 6-274 Remove the main paddle home sensor


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor (M3)

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).

JC93-01001A Main paddle motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test


front cover.

2. Remove the main paddle motor
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle motor.
1. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the main paddle motor bracket.
Figure 6-276 Remove the main paddle motor bracket
2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor from the bracket.
Figure 6-277 Remove the main paddle motor


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle assembly.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly 2671

JC90-01327A (not orderable) Main paddle assembly
Required tools

Post service test


front cover.

3. Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle home sensor bracket.

■ Remove one screw. Open the clamp and unplug one connector, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor bracket.
Figure 6-281 Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket
4. Remove the main paddle motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle motor bracket.
■ Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the main paddle motor bracket.
Figure 6-282 Remove the main paddle motor bracket
5. Remove the main paddle

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle.

2. Rotate the main paddle shaft to see the lower side of the main paddle.
Figure 6-283 Rotate the main paddle shaft
3. Remove the main paddle by pushing both sides.
Figure 6-284 Remove the main paddle
TIP: When reassembling the main paddle, check the pin position of the paddle and the hole
position of the shaft, and then assemble them.
Remove the main paddle 2675

6. Remove the main paddle assembly
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle assembly.
1. Remove the belt in the front.

2. Remove the e-ring and the main paddle CAM in the rear. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.
Figure 6-286 Remove the e-ring, cam, and bushing
3. Push the shaft to remove the main paddle shaft.
Figure 6-287 Remove the main paddle shaft

printer.

pads.
Removal and replacement: Sub paddle unit

Learn how to remove and replace the sub paddle unit.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01336A Sub paddle unit

Required tools

Post service test





bushing.


printer.
pads.
Tamper unit
Front tamper
Removal and replacement: Front tamper

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper.
Service level:

power cable.

display is blank).
JC82-00899A Front tamper
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.




printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S5)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor.

Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.



14. Remove the front tamper home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper home sensor.
■ Unplug the connector, and then remove the front tamper home sensor.
Figure 6-347 Remove the front tamper home sensor


printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M9)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M9) 2719

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test


front cover.





the output tray.

actuator.
tray frame.






harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.



14. Remove the front tamper motor

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper motor.
■ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.
Figure 6-375 Remove the front tamper motor


printer.
pads.
Rear tamper
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper.
Service level:

power cable.
Rear tamper 2737

display is blank).
JC82-00900A Rear tamper
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.




printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S14)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor.

Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.



14. Remove the rear tamper home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper home sensor.
■ Unplug the connector, and then remove the rear tamper home sensor.
Figure 6-430 Remove the rear tamper home sensor

Remove the rear tamper home sensor 2773

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M5)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test


front cover.





the output tray.

actuator.
tray frame.






harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.



14. Remove the rear tamper motor

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper motor.
■ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.
Figure 6-458 Remove the rear tamper motor

Remove the rear tamper motor 2791

printer.
pads.
Stapler unit
Removal and replacement: Stapler

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler.
Service level:

power cable.

display is blank).
JC90-01342A Stapler assembly
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.



4. Remove the stapler

Follow these steps to remove the stapler.
Remove the exit motor bracket 2795

1. Push the stapler from the rear-side to the front-side.
Figure 6-463 Push the stapler
2. Remove one screw, unplug two connectors, and then remove the stapler assembly.
Figure 6-464 Remove the stapler assembly

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the stapler.
Figure 6-465 Remove the stapler

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Stapler position sensor (S2)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position sensor.

Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001393 Stapler position sensor
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.





finisher.

punch cover.


from view).




8. Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor bracket.
1. Remove three screws at the front of the inner finisher, and then remove the bracket.
Figure 6-480 Remove the bracket
Remove the end fence sensor bracket 2805

2. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.
3. Remove two screws at the rear of the inner finisher.
4. Loosen three cable clamps. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the end fence
sensor bracket.
Figure 6-483 Remove the end fence sensor bracket

9. Remove the stapler position sensor
Follow these steps to remove the stapler position sensor.
1. Remove one screw from the front of the inner finisher.
2. Remove one screw from the rear of the inner finisher.
Remove the stapler position sensor 2807

3. Unplug four photo-sensor connectors. Open the six cable clamps.
Figure 6-486 Unplug connectors
4. Remove the assembly, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 6-487 Remove the stapler position sensor

printer.

pads.
Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M1)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position motor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC93-00999A Stapler position motor
Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M1) 2809

Required tools

Post service test


front cover.



Remove the middle cover 2811


finisher.

punch cover.

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2813

from view).



7. Remove the stapler position motor

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position motor.
1. Remove three screws, unplug the motor connector, and then remove the stapler position motor
bracket.
Figure 6-501 Remove the stapler position motor bracket

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor from the bracket.
Figure 6-502 Remove the stapler position motor
TIP: Use the following steps when reinstalling the stapler position motor.
1. Release the spring tension screw.
2. Apply tension to the spring by pulling the belt, and then tighten the spring tension screw.
Tightening the screw puts maximum slack in the belt.
3. Lower the stapler position motor while placing the belt on the motor pulley, and then secure
the bracket with three screws.
Remove the stapler position motor 2817

4. Release the spring tension screw to allow the spring to apply tension to the belt, and then
tighten it again

printer.
pads.
Ejector unit
Removal and replacement: Ejector & paper support assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector & paper support assembly.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
SS456-61001 Ejector
JC90-01310A Front paper support
JC90-01311A Rear paper support
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.









printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Ejector motor assembly (S11/ M6/ M7)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector motor assembly.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
Removal and replacement: Ejector motor assembly (S11/ M6/ M7) 2839
JC90-01309A (not orderable) Ejector motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test


front cover.






the output tray.

actuator.
tray frame.






harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.







16. Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support and the rear paper support.

■ Remove two screws, and then pull the paper support assembly out of ejector assembly.
Figure 6-567 Remove paper support assembly
17. Remove the ejector motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector motor assembly.
1. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two timing belts, and then remove one screw.
Figure 6-568 Remove e-ring, washer, belt, and screw
Remove the ejector motor assembly 2859

2. Remove the timing belt, and then remove one screw.
Figure 6-569 Remove the belt, screw
3. Remove the cable from clamp, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor
connector.
Figure 6-570 Disconnect the motor and sensor connectors

4. Remove the ejector motor assembly.
Figure 6-571 Remove the ejector motor assembly

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Ejector assembly (include end fence, S10/ S16)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector assembly.

View videos on how to remove and reassemble the inner finisher below:
View a teardown video of the inner finisher .
View a reassembling video of the inner finisher .
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
SS456-61001 Ejector
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.







16. Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support and the rear paper support.
Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support 2881
■ Remove two screws, and then pull the paper support assembly out of ejector assembly.
Figure 6-604 Remove paper support assembly
17. Remove the ejector motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector motor assembly.
1. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two timing belts, and then remove one screw.
Figure 6-605 Remove e-ring, washer, belt, and screw

2. Remove the timing belt, and then remove one screw.
Figure 6-606 Remove the belt, screw
3. Remove the cable from clamp, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor
connector.
Figure 6-607 Disconnect the motor and sensor connectors
Remove the ejector motor assembly 2883

4. Remove the ejector motor assembly.
Figure 6-608 Remove the ejector motor assembly
18. Remove the ejector assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector assembly.

2. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the ejector assembly.
Figure 6-610 Remove the ejector assembly

printer.
pads.
End fence unit

Removal and replacement: End fence sensor (S17)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence sensor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001381 End fence sensor
Required tools

Post service test


front cover.





finisher.

punch cover.


from view).




8. Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor bracket.
1. Remove three screws at the front of the inner finisher, and then remove the bracket.
Figure 6-625 Remove the bracket
Remove the end fence sensor bracket 2893

3. Remove two screws at the rear of the inner finisher.
4. Loosen three cable clamps. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the end fence
sensor bracket.
Figure 6-628 Remove the end fence sensor bracket

9. Remove the end fence sensor
Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor.
■ Remove one screw, and then remove the end fence sensor.
Figure 6-629 Remove the end fence sensor

printer.
pads.
Output tray unit
Remove the end fence sensor 2895

Removal and replacement: Output tray
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray.
To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the links below.
To view a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray, click the link below.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01337B Output tray
Required tools


Post service test

front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Output tray top of stack sensor (S8)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray top of stack sensor.
Service level:

power cable.

display is blank).
JC82-01039A output tray top of stack sensor
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




7. Remove the output tray top of stack sensor
Follow these steps to Remove the output tray top of stack sensor.
■ Remove two screws from both sides of the left cover. Remove the bracket, and then remove the
sensor.
Figure 6-648 Remove the output tray top of stack sensor

printer.
Remove the output tray top of stack sensor 2911

pads.
Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch (S7)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray lower limit switch.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch

Required tools

Post service test


front cover.






the output tray.

actuator.
tray frame.






harness guide.




printer.
pads.
Output tray motor assembly

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly (M4)
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor assembly.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly (M4) 2923

front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.



printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Output tray motor sensor (S6)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor sensor.
Service level:

power cable.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.



9. Remove the output tray motor sensor
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor sensor.
■ Remove one screw, remove the shaft, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 6-688 Remove the output tray motor sensor

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Output tray motor

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor.

Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC31-00178B Output tray motor
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.



9. Remove the output tray motor
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor.
■ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the output tray motor.
Figure 6-702 Remove the output tray motor

printer.
pads.
Remove the output tray motor 2955

Paper holding unit
Removal and replacement: Paper holding

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator
Required tools

Post service test


front cover.






the output tray.

actuator.
tray frame.






harness guide.





remove the bushing.

printer.
pads.
Removal and replacement: Paper holding sensor (S9)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding sensor.
Service level:

power cable.

display is blank).
0604-001393 Paper holding sensor
Required tools

Post service test



front cover.






the output tray.
actuator.

tray frame.




harness guide.





remove the bushing.

11. Remove the paper holding sensor
Follow these steps to remove the paper holding sensor.
1. Unplug the connector.
2. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.
3. Remove the paper holding sensor.
Figure 6-737 Remove the paper holding sensor

printer.
pads.
Remove the paper holding sensor 2981

Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid (SL1)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding solenoid.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC33-00037A Paper holding solenoid
Required tools


Post service test


front cover.






the output tray.

actuator.
tray frame.






harness guide.





remove the bushing.


bushing.



the bushing.



14. Remove the paper holding solenoid

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding solenoid.
Remove the paper holding solenoid 2999

3. Disconnect two connectors and remove the solenoid assembly.
Figure 6-767 Remove the solenoid assembly

4. Remove two screws, and then release the solenoid from the bracket.
Figure 6-768 Remove the paper holding solenoid

printer.
pads.
Punch unit
Removal and replacement: Punch cover

Learn how to remove and replace the punch cover.

Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
JC90-01343B Punch cover
Required tools

Post service test





finisher.

punch cover.

printer.
pads.

Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor (S19)

Learn how to remove and replace the punch waste full sensor.
Service level:

power cable.
display is blank).
0604-001381 Punch waste full sensor
Required tools


Post service test


front cover.





finisher.

punch cover.


from view).
Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 3011



7. Remove the punch waste full sensor

Follow these steps to remove the punch waste full sensor.
1. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the punch waste full sensor bracket.
Figure 6-787 Remove the punch waste full sensor bracket
Remove the punch waste full sensor 3013

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the punch waste full sensor from the bracket.
Figure 6-788 Remove the punch waste full sensor

printer.
pads.
Problem solving
Control panel message document (CPMD)

Learn about the control panel message document (CPMD).

Refer to Error codes (types and structure) on page 966 for more details.
Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher)
Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher) 3015

Punch waste full sensor
Figure 6-789 Punch waste full sensor
Punch waste full sensor (0604-001381)
5V
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B )
CN3, Rear joint I/F
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
JC39-02173A 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
15 FRONT COVER OPEN
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V
22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
5V 24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor
Figure 6-790 Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN1, Rear sensor
5V 1 PUNCH WASTE BOX SENSOR 5V
2 DGND
3 PUNCH WASTE BOX SENSOR
4 FINISHER DOCKING SENSOR 5V
5 DGND
5V
6 FINISHER DOCKING SENSOR
7 DGND
JC39-02174A 8 ENTRANCE SENSOR
9 5V
Punch waste 10 OUT_PATH
box sensor 11 nDETECT_FAN
(0604-00139) 12 DGND
5V
5V
Finisher docking
sensor
(0604-00139)
Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor 3017

Entrance motor
Figure 6-791 Entrance motor
24V
Entrance motor (JC31-00169B)
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B )

Inner
CN3,Finisher PCA
Rear joint I/F
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
JC39-02173A 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
14 DGND
15 FRONT COVER OPEN
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
24V 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
21 STAPLER PCA 5V
22 DGND
24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

Exit sensor
Figure 6-792 Exit sensor
5V
Exit sensor Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
( 0604-001415 )
CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A
5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

JC39-02176A
6 DGND
7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR
8 DGND
9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C
12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V
15 DGND
5V 16 EXIT SENSOR
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
21 DGND
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A
Exit sensor 3019

Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and
paper holding solenoid
Figure 6-793 Exit motor, paddle motor&sensor, output tray lower limit sensor, and paper holding solenoid
Inner Finisher PCA

( JC92-02774B )
Exit motor CN7, Front

(JC31-00169B)
1 EXIT MOTOR B
24V 24V 2 EXIT MOTOR A
3 EXIT MOTOR nB
24V EXIT MOTOR nA
Main paddle 4
5 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR
motor
JC39-02168A 6 DGND
(JC93-01001A) 7 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR
8 MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR, 5V
5V 9 DGND
5V 10 MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR
Main paddle 11 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B

home sensor 12 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Nb
24V 13 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Na
(0604-001393) 14 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A
15 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1

16 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2
17 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B
18 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Nb
19 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Na
24V 20 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A
21 FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR, 5V
Paper holding 22
24V 5V DGND
sensor 23 FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR
(0604-001393) 24 PAPER HOLDING SENSOR, 5V
25 DGND
Output tray lower 5V 26 PAPER HOLDING SENSOR
Paper holding solenoid
limit switch
with harness (JC33-00037A) 27 DGND
with harness 28 OUTPUT TRAY
(JC39-02178A) TOP OF STACK SENSOR
CN6, Stacker limit switch

1 DGND
2 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER LIMIT SW NO/NC
24V 3 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER LIMIT SW NC
CN9, Paper holding solenoid

1 GND
24V 2 PAPER HOLDING SOLENOID

Paper support motor & home sensor
Figure 6-794 Paper support sensor and motor
Paper support motor ( JC93-00802B)
Paper support home

sensor (0604-001393)
24V
5V

CN2, Rear
REAR TAMPER MOTOR B 1
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB 2
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA 3
REAR TAMPER MOTOR A 4
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 5

DGND 6
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 7
DGND 8
TOP COVER 9
TOP COVER SWITCH 10
JC39-02176A
N.C 11
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 12

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED 13
EXIT SENSOR 5V 14
DGND 15
EXIT SENSOR 16
DGND 17
END FENCE SENSOR 18
END FENCE SENSOR 5V 19
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V 20
DGND 21 5V
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 22
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B 23
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB 24
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA 25 24V
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A 26
Paper support motor & home sensor 3021

Front tamper motor and home sensor
Figure 6-795 Front tamper sensor and motor
CN7, Front
EXIT MOTOR B 1
EXIT MOTOR A 2
EXIT MOTOR nB 3
EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5
DGND 6
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nB 12
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nA 13
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15

Front tamper home sensor
(0604-001393)
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17 5V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nB 18 24V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nA 19
20 Front tamper motor
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A JC39-02168A
21 (JC93-01001A)
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V
DGND 22 24V
5V
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
DGND 25
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26
DGND 27
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER

Rear tamper motor and home sensor
Figure 6-796 Rear tamper sensor and motor

CN2, Rear
24V 2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB

6 DGND
5V 7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR
8 DGND
JC39-02176A 9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

Rear tamper 14 EXIT SENSOR 5V

home sensor 15 DGND
(0604-001393) 16 EXIT SENSOR
5V
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
24V
Rear tamper motor 21 DGND
(JC93-01001A) 22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
Rear tamper motor and home sensor 3023

End fence sensor
Figure 6-797 End fence sensor
End fence sensor (0604-001381)
5V Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB

6 DGND
JC39-02176A 7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR
8 DGND
9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

14 EXIT SENSOR 5V
15 DGND
16 EXIT SENSOR
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
5V 19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
21 DGND
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME

Stapler position motor and sensor
Figure 6-798 Stapler position sensor and motor
Inner Finisher PCA

(JC92-02774B)
CN3, Rear joint I/F

5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
24V 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
1.7v /
1.7v or 3.3v or 3.3v /
Stapler position home 12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
5v Vcc (pull up) 5v
rear sensor (0604-001393) 13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
1.7v / 14 DGND
3.3v / 15 FRONT COVER OPEN
5V Stapler position middle front 5v 16 FRONT COVER SWITH
sensor (0604-001393) 17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
5V 18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
Stapler position middle sensor (0604-001393) 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
Stapler position home 21 STAPLER PCA 5V
1.7v or front sensor
3.3v or (0604-001393) 22 DGND
5v Vcc (pull up) 23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
24V 25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
Stapler position motor 28 DGND
(JC93-00999A) 29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
JC39-02173A 38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU
CN10, Traverse sensor
5V 1 STAPLER POSITION MID FRONT 5V

2 DGND
3 STAPLER POSITION MID FRONT
5V 4 STAPLER POSITION MID REAR 5V

5 DGND
6 STAPLER POSITION MID REAR
Stapler position motor and sensor 3025

Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor
Figure 6-799 Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor
Ejector1 home sensor (0604-001393)
5V
Ejector2 motor Ejector1 motor

(JC93-00998A) Ejector2 home sensor
24V (JC93-01168A) (0604-001393)
24V
5V
Ejector2 motor sensor
(0604-001393)
5V
JC39-02165A
CN4, Ejector
24V 1 EJECTOR2 MOTOR OUT2
2 EJECTOR2 MOTOR OUT1
3 EJECTOR1 MOTOR B
4 EJECTOR1 MOTOR nB
24V 5 EJECTOR1 MOTOR nA
6 EJECTOR1 MOTOR A
5V 7 EJECTOR2 MOTOR SENSOR 5V

8 DGND
9 EJECTOR2 MOTOR SENSOR
5V 10 EJECTOR2 HOME SENSOR 5V
11 DGND
12 EJECTOR2 HOME SENSOR
5V 13 EJECTOR1 HOME 5V
14 DGND
15 EJECTOR1 HOME

Output tray motor and sensor
Figure 6-800 Output tray motor and sensor

CN7, Front
24V
EXIT MOTOR B 1
EXIT MOTOR A 2
EXIT MOTOR nB 3
EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5 5V
DGND 6
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9 JC39-02168A
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11

Output tray motor
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Nb 12
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Na 13 (JC31-00178B)
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14

24V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Nb 18
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Na 19
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A 20 5V
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 21
Output tray motor sensor
DGND 22
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23 (0604-001393)
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
DGND 25
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26
DGND 27
SENSOR RECEIVER
Output tray motor and sensor 3027

Output tray top of stack sensor
Figure 6-801 Output tray top of stack sensor
Output tray top of

stack sensor receiver
(0603-001309)
Output tray top of
stack sensor LED 3.3V
(0601-003440)
3.3V
JC39-02168A
JC39-02176A
CN2, Rear CN7, Front

1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B EXIT MOTOR B 1
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB EXIT MOTOR A 2
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA EXIT MOTOR nB 3
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5
5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V DGND 6
6 DGND OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9
8 DGND
9 TOP COVER 24V
10 TOP COVER SWITCH MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11
11 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nB 12
N.C
3.3V MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nA 13
12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 3.3V MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
15 DGND
16 EXIT SENSOR FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17
17 DGND FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nB 18
18 END FENCE SENSOR FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nA 19
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A 20
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 21
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V DGND 22
21 DGND FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B DGND 25
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26
DGND 27
SENSOR RECEIVER 3.3V 3.3V

Top cover switch
Figure 6-802 Top cover switch
Top cover switch (JC39-01610A)
24V

CN2, Rear
REAR TAMPER MOTOR B 1
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB 2
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA 3
REAR TAMPER MOTOR A 4
JC39-02176A
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 5
DGND 6
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 7
DGND 8
TOP COVER 24V 9
TOP COVER SWITCH 10 24V
N.C 11
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 12

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED 13
EXIT SENSOR 5V 14
DGND 15
EXIT SENSOR 16
DGND 17
END FENCE SENSOR 18
END FENCE SENSOR 5V 19
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V 20
DGND 21
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 22
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B 23
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB 24
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA 25
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A 26
Top cover switch 3029

Front cover switch
Figure 6-803 Frame front
Stapler motor JC39-02177A Staple joint PCA

(JC59-00040A) 24V (JC41-00900A)
CN3, Rear joint I/F
JC39-02164A
Rear joint PCA 24V 4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
(JC41-00905A) 5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
JC39-02173A 10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
14 DGND
24V
15 FRONT COVER OPEN 24V
24V
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
Front cover switch 18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
(JC39-01610A) 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
21 STAPLER PCA 5V
22 DGND
24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

A Certificate of Volatility
Review the certificates of volatility for the printer.
Certificate of Volatility
Learn about the product certificate of volatility.
Certificate of Volatility 3031

Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility (E82540/50/60; 1 of 3)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP LaserJet Managed MFP Managed Hewlett Packard Company
E825XXdn X3A69A= E82540dn 5CM59A = E82540du 11311 Chinden Blvd
X3A72A= E82550dn 5CM60A = E82550du Boise, ID 83714
HP LaserJet Managed Flow 5CM61A = E82560du
MFP E825XXz
X3A75A= E82560dn
X3A68A= E82540z
HP LaserJet Managed MFP X3A71A= E82550z
E825XXdu X3A74A= E82560z
Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP Formatter Yes No Operation system and When the printer is powered off
DDR3 - DRAM 3GB- Obsidian print/scan buffer the memory is erased.
1 GB –Accel
board
4 GB - Main
Formatter
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No
Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data There are no steps to clear this
for backup/restore data.
HP side: SPI Flash
4MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear this
factory product data
configuration data required
for the device to function.
User modifications are
limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.
Samsung MSOK : Yes No TPM NVRAM - stores HP- Drive lock password can be
MSOK – TPM NVRAM 2 KB signed immutable ID changed through the device
MSOK - EEProm 32 KB certificate and associated embedded web server
MSOK – CRUM 32 KB RSA key pair in locked interface.
memory. No other data stored on the
EEProm - stores device MSOK can be cleared.
lifecycle data (e.g. device
page counts), copy of
device speed license, and
SED (self-encrypting drive)
drive lock password.
CRUM - stores device page
counts, consumables
information, device speed
information, and product
serial number.
3032 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
2 – Hard Drives (1 – HP 320GB/ea Yes No Stores customer data, OS, 1. Secure Storage Erase –
formatter & 1 – Main board) applications, digitally Areas temporary files and job
signed firmware images, data by overwriting information
persistent data, and overwriting information one or
temporary data used for three times.
processing and system 2. Secure Disk Erase – Erases
functions. files when jobs finish
processing by overwriting them
one or three times.
3. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish
processing by overwriting them
one or three times.
Optional Mass Storage

Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Optional Formatter HDD 500 500GB Yes No Stores customer data, 1. Erase and Unlock Encrypted
GB FIPS Encrypted HDD OS, applications, Disk – This changes the
digitally signed firmware Encryption keys rendering all
images, persistent data, data unreadable.
and temporary data 2. Secure Storage Erase –
used for processing and Areas temporary files and job
system functions. data by overwriting information
overwriting information one or
three times.
3. Secure Disk Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.
4. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:
Certificate of Volatility 3033

Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: WiFi Direct Print
Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5GHz Bandwidth: 2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected
channel in 2.4GHz band.
5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz
band.
Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n
Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Device Beaconing, Secure Print Apps
Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth: 2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected
channel.
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant
Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:
Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
John Mast Technical Marketing Engineer [email protected] IPG
Robert Mejia System Engineer [email protected] IPG
Date Prepared: 9/14/2018
3034 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Index
Symbols/Numerics parts and diagrams - pickup Booklet exit unit 1306, 2404
LX 718 booklet finisher
2000-sheet HCI
ADF pickup roller 771 booklet blade 2299
parts and diagrams -
ADF reverse roller 790 booklet blade home
cassette 927
ADF sGX sensor 2317
parts and diagrams - drive 912
PCA-ADF sGX (dn models booklet blade motor 2335
only) 829 booklet c-fold blade 2345
frame 928
after-service checklist 141, 143, booklet c-fold blade home
parts and diagrams - main 911
145, 1231, 1314, 1317, 2458, 2502, sensor 2360
2505 booklet c-fold blade
pickup 934
APS sensor 860 motor 2374
3000-sheet sHCI (department;
authorized service providers, booklet diverter 2381
E82540/50/60 and
parts 142, 1318, 2505 booklet diverter home
E87640/50/60 only)
sensor 2398
B booklet diverter motor 2401
frame 964
booklet end fence 2185
parts and diagrams - main backup error
booklet end fence home
1 935 32.WX.YZ error 966
sensor 2200
parts and diagrams - main reset error 966
booklet end fence motor 2197
3 944 restore error 966
booklet entrance motor 2155
parts and diagrams - main booklet blade
booklet entrance sensor 2158
5 960 parts and diagrams 1367
booklet exit sensor 2404
parts and diagrams - main booklet blade motor
booklet fold motor 2339
6 961 parts and diagrams 1367
booklet front cover 1461
parts and diagrams - pickup booklet c-fold blade
booklet maker 2145
cover unit 962 parts and diagrams 1361
booklet maker PCA 2431
76.00.24 968 booklet c-fold motor
booklet output tray 2422
parts and diagrams 1363
booklet paddle home
A booklet diverter
sensor 2175
accelerator board booklet paddle motor 2172
booklet diverter motor
remove the accelerator booklet presser 2205
board 431 booklet presser home
booklet diverter unit
accelerator board (GX ADF sensor 2220
only) 431 booklet presser motor 2224
Booklet diverter unit 1304, 2381
accessories booklet stapler unit 2282
booklet end fence unit
dimensions 1, 6, 14 booklet tamper home
weight 1, 6, 14 sensor 2244
Booklet end fence unit 1291, 2185
acoustic specifications 1, 6, 15 booklet tamper motor 2263
booklet entrance
ADF booklet tamper unit 2227
parts and diagrams - exterior bridge door sensor 1390
booklet entrance unit
LX 718 bridge entrance sensor 1373
parts and diagrams - lower bridge exit sensor 1385
Booklet entrance unit 1288, 2155
image scanner 855 bridge motor 1379
booklet entrance-presser motor
parts and diagrams - LX buffer motor 2132
models 687, 718, 729 buffer solenoid 2138
booklet exit
parts and diagrams - main caster cover 1428
frame assembly LX 729 dummy feed guide 1468
booklet exit unit
ejector assembly 1318
Index 3035
ejector motor 1318 rear paper holding booklet presser unit
ejector unit 1865 sensor 2104 parts and diagrams 1355
ejector1 1916 rear paper support 1318 Booklet presser unit 1293, 2205
ejector1 motor sensor 1890 rear tamper home booklet stapler unit
ejector2 home sensor 1941 sensor 1733 parts and diagrams 1357
ejector2 motor 1993 rear tamper motor 1760 Booklet stapler unit 1298
ejector2 motor sensor 1967 rear tamper unit 1709 booklet tamper unit
end fence home 1318 right upper cover 1396 parts and diagrams 1358
end fence home sensor 1598 sensor 1318 Booklet tamper unit 1296, 2226
end fence motor 1623 stacker lower limit switch 1318 bookletr finisher
entrance motor 1318 stacker motor 1318 exit motor 1318
entrance sensor 1318 stapler 1318 bottom high-capacity input tray
exir roller 1318 stapler front sensor 1796 (HCI) unit
exit motor 1553 stapler mid-front sensor 1808 bottom high-capacity input tray
exit sensor 1318 stapler mid-rear sensor 1820 feed motor 913
feed entrance motor 1463 stapler position motor 1853 bottom high-capacity input tray
front cover 1412 stapler position sensor 1318 lift-up motor 919
front door 1401 stapler rear sensor 1832 bottom high-capacity input tray
front lower cover 1420 stapler unit 1785 pickup motor 917
front paper holding switch 1318 bottom high-capacity input tray
sensor 2092 top cover 1398 feed motor 913
front paper support 1318 top exit sensor 1513 bottom high-capacity input tray lift-
front tamper home top jam cover assembly 1474 up motor 919
sensor 1657 top lower feed assembly 1501 bottom high-capacity input tray
front tamper motor 1683 top output tray 1527 pickup motor 917
front tamper unit 1632 top output tray paper full bridge entrance path sensor
left lower cover 1432 sensor 1529 (SSBM)
left upper cover 1445 tray diverter 1484 electrical-mechanical
main exit cam motor 1558 tray diverter home relationships diagram 1229
main exit sensor 1540 sensor 1491 bridge motor, bridge middle
main output tray lower limit booklet finisher diagrams 1318, sensor, and bridge guide sensor
sensor 2048 1353 (SSBM)
main output tray motor 2067 booklet finisher parts 1318, 1353 electrical-mechanical
main output tray motor booklet finisher remove and relationships diagram 1228
sensor 2062 replace 1318 bridge unit 449
main output tray top of stack booklet finisher view 1231 parts and diagrams 1324, 1326
sensor 2018 booklet fold motor remove the bridge unit 449
main output tray top of stack parts and diagrams 1363 Bridge unit 1324, 1373
switch 2034 booklet fold roller buffer diverter
main paddle 1318 parts and diagrams 1365 parts and diagrams 1352
main PCA 2425 booklet fold unit buffer unit
manual staple sensor 1844 parts and diagrams 1359 parts and diagrams 1350
motor 1318 Booklet fold unit 1300, 2299 Buffer unit 1284, 2132
paddle 1566 booklet maker BYOD table
paddle home sensor 1580 detailed specifications 1233 card reader 411
paddle motor 1589 parts and diagrams 1353 NFC kit 411
paper holding home Booklet maker 2145
sensor 2076 booklet maker baset C
paper holding Motor 2117 parts and diagrams 1372
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
paper holding solenoid 1318 Booklet output tray unit 1307,
panel 966, 982, 1003, 1092
paper support 1318 2422
card reader 411
paper support home booklet paddle unit
install 411
sensor 1318 parts and diagrams 1369
cartridge
punch waste full 1318 Booklet paddle unit 1289, 2172
dynamic security 63
rear cover 1407
3036 Index
cassette 1, 44, 50 Scan menu (MFP only) 966, DCF 1, 128
cassette lift drive 1, 69 982, 1003 DCF frame
Cassettes Tray 2/3 Settings menu 966, 982, 1003, parts and diagrams -
parts and diagrams 507 1005 cassette 897
caution vi Supplies menu 966, 982, 1003, DCF rear frame
caution for moving the scanner 1, 1088 parts and diagrams 903
76, 85 Trays menu 966, 982, 1003, DCF second pickup
CCDM PCA 1, 101, 127 1089 parts and diagrams - drive 910
certificate of volatility 3031 troubleshooting menu 966, decoding
CoV E82540/50/60 3031 982, 1003, 1089 message 966
Channel partners USB Firmware Upgrade defeating
WISE 141 menu 966, 982, 1003, 1092, interlocks 966, 971, 979, 980
Channel partners support 1094 definitions and terms
HP Channel Services Network control panel diagnostic glossary
(CSN) 141 flowcharts 966, 971, 974 determine problem source 966,
checklists control panel menus 966, 982, 971
after-service 141, 143, 145, 1231, 1003 developer unit 1, 57, 58, 60, 201
1314, 1317, 2458, 2502, 2505 control panel messages 966 diagnostics
preservice 141, 143, 145, 1231, conventions used vi adjustment 966, 1100, 1108,
1314, 1317, 2458, 2502, 2504 Copy menu (MFP only), control 1129
cleaning page 966, 982, 1003, panel 966, 982, 1003, 1046 component 966, 971, 979, 981
1092 copy specifications 1, 6, 23 engine 966, 971, 979, 980, 1100,
cleaning the paper dust stick 141, CoV 1108
146 certificate of volatility 3031 fax 966, 1100, 1108, 1120
cleaning the scan glass 141, 146 cover image management 966, 1100,
clear paper jams 1231, 2443, 3014 parts and diagrams 1320 1108, 1136
component test cover open sensor, cassette LED 966, 971, 979
special mode test 966, 971, installation sensor, feed motor, print test patterns 966, 1100,
979, 981 pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, 1108, 1137
components and shift motor (DCF/HCI) scanner 966, 1100, 1108, 1125
diagnostic tests 966, 971, 979, electrical-mechanical diagram
981 relationships diagram 1202 fuser 1167
scanning system 1, 76, 79 Covers 1396, 2517 HVPS/LVPS/FDB 1174
connection, electrical-mechanical parts and diagrams 152 laser scanner assembly 1169
diagrams 1167 CPMD 966 OPC 1172
connector error CPMP scanner 1168
65.WX.YZ error 966, 967 WISE 968 side/MP/feed/registration/
control panel 440 CRUM connector 455 pickup 1170
Backup/Restore menu 966, CST lock diagram 1172 diagram, electrical-mechanical
982, 1003, 1092 CTD unit relationships
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 966, electrical-mechanical bridge entrance path sensor
982, 1003, 1092 relationships diagram 1180 (SSBM) 1229
Copy menu (MFP only) 966, curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert bridge motor, bridge middle
982, 1003, 1046 home sensor, and guide home sensor, and bridge guide
CPMD 966 sensor (SSBM) sensor (SSBM) 1228
Fax menu (fax models electrical-mechanical cover open sensor, cassette
only) 966, 982, 1003, 1084 relationships diagram 1214 installation sensor, feed
Print menu 966, 982, 1003, current settings pages 966, 982 motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2
1088 motors, and shift motor
remove the control panel 440 D (DCF/HCI) 1202
remove the control panel CTD unit 1180
DC controller communication error
bezel 440 curl pawl motor, fold motor,
55.WX.YZ error 966, 967
Reports menu 966, 982, 1003 divert home sensor, and
DC controller firmware error
Scan menu 1055 guide home sensor
70.WX.YZ error 966, 968
(SSBM) 1214
Index 3037
entrance motors A/B, end fence pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and 2000-sheet HCI drive 912
motor, buffer motor and feed motor (DCF/HCI) 1207 2000-sheet HCI frame 928
sensor, and diverter close pickup drive 1185 2000-sheet HCI main 911
sensor (SSBM) 1212 pickup lift motors, feed motor, 2000-sheet HCI pickup 934
exit cam home sensor, main and cover open sensor (DCF/ 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
paddle home sensor, paddle HCI) 1196 E82540/50/60 and
motor, and exit motor pickup unit 1176 E87640/50/60 only)
(SSBM) 1223 press home sensor, tamper frame 964
exit unit 1181 home sensor, paper detect 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
feed drive 1184 sensor, tamper motor, press E82540/50/60 and
feed entrance sensor motor, and feed motor E87640/50/60 only) main
(SSBM) 1215 (SSBM) 1217 1 935
front unit 1194 rear unit 1180 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
front/rear home sensors and registration drive 1183 E82540/50/60 and
tray open sensor (DCF/ registration unit 1176 E87640/50/60 only) main
HCI) 1209 right door guide 1190 3 944
front/rear tamper motors, front/ right door output 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
rear tamper home sensors, takeaway 1192 E82540/50/60 and
and end-fence home sensor side unit 1178, 1188 E87640/50/60 only) main
(SSBM) 1225 toner supply drive 1174 5 960
fuser exit drive 1183 top door sensor, fold motor, and 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA knife home position sensor E82540/50/60 and
(HCI) 1200 (SSBM) 1221 E87640/50/60 only) main
home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, top-beam out sensor, stack 6 961
and empty sensor (DCF/ motor, and SKU motor 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
HCI) 1206 (SSBM) 1213 E82540/50/60 and
knife motor, stopper home top-exit path and compile-exit E87640/50/60 only) pickup
sensor, and stopper solenoid path sensors (SSBM) 1219 cover unit 962
and motor (SSBM) 1220 tray upper front/rear sensors, ADF (LX models) 687
level-1/2 front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, ADF exterior and ADF pickup(LX
solenoid home sensor, and and stack beam in/out models) 718
solenoid (DCF/HCI) 1205 sensors (SSBM) 1227 ADF lower image scanner 855
limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, upper/lower paper low sensors ADF main frame assembly (LX
prefeed sensor, and paper (DCF/HCI) 1208 models) 729
empty-1 sensor (DCF/ diagrams booklet blade 1367
HCI) 1207 connection, electrical- booklet blade motor 1367
limit switch, prefeed sensor, mechanical 1167 booklet c-fold blade 1361
feed sensor, main limit and covers-inner finisher 2509 booklet c-fold motor 1363
empty sensors (DCF/ ejector unit-inner finisher 2517 booklet diverter 1361
HCI) 1204 electrical-mechanical 1167 booklet diverter motor 1363
main PCAs (SSBM) 1210 finisher system 1231, 2456 booklet diverter unit 1359
MP unit 1186 inner finisher 2507 booklet end fence unit 1370
operational panel button PCA paper support unit-inner booklet entrance 1356
and entrance path sensor finisher 2512 booklet entrance unit 1355
(SSBM) 1222 relationships, electrical- booklet entrance-presser
paper detection sensor mechanical 1174 motor 1356
(SSBM) 1211 sensor, motor, and roller-inner booklet exit 1361
paper empty , path, limit-1, and finisher 2510 booklet exit unit 1359
path sensors (DCF/ stapler unit-inner finisher 2516 booklet fold motor 1363
HCI) 1199 tamper unit-inner booklet fold roller 1365
paper empty and limit-2 sensors finisher 2513, 2514 booklet fold unit 1359
(DCF/HCI) 1198 use parts lists and booklet maker 1353
paper size sensors (DCF/ diagrams 143 booklet maker base 1372
HCI) 1199 Diagrams booklet paddle unit 1369
2000-sheet HCI cassette 927 booklet presser unit 1355
3038 Index
booklet stapler unit 1357 right door exit 670 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
booklet tamper unit 1358 right door guide 667 motor 881
bridge unit 1324, 1326 right door takeaway 670 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
buffer diverter 1352 right upper cover 1323 PCA 899
buffer unit 1350 stapler unit 1341 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
cassettes tray 2/3 507 tamper unit 1341, 1342 motor 884
cover 1320 top cover 1323 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
covers 152 top door 1323 units 887
DCF frame 897 top exit unit 1334 dual cassette feeder (DCF) right
DCF rear frame 903 top lower cover 1336 door 874
DCF second pickup 910 top output tray unit 1334 dual cassette feeder (DCF) unit
drive system 569 tray 1 652 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Dual cassette feeder DCF 873 Tray diverter CAM 1333 motor 881, 884
ejector unit 1341, 1344 tray diverter unit 1331 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
end fence unit 1338 tray jam cover 1333 PCA 899
entrance motor 1330 upper bridge 1324 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
entrance unit 1328, 1330 digital sending error (firmware) pickup units 887
exit assemblies 495 44.WX.YZ error 966, 967 dual cassette feeder (DCF) right
exit motor 1336 dimensions door 874
flow ADF (GX/sGX) 743 accessories 1, 6, 14 Dual cassette feeder DCF)
flow ADF image scanner (GX/ printer 1, 6, 14 parts and diagrams - Dual
sGX) 840 diverter unit 2474 cassette feeder DCF 873
flow ADF main frame (GX/ document feeder duplex 1 sensor 355
sGX) 788 document feeder input tray duplexer error
flow ADF open cover (GX/ (LX) 697 69.WX.YZ error 966, 967
sGX) 761 document feeder (LX) reverse dynamic security
flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) 778 roller 731 toner cartridge 63
flow ADF upper pickup (GX/ document feeder error
sGX) 770 31.WX.YZ error 966 E
front door 1323 document feeder pick roller
each unit functions
front jam cover 1352 (LX 723
finisher system 1231, 2458
hanress 1320 document feeder pickup 771
ejector home sensor 3026
left lower cover 1348 document feeder skew (LX du
ejector motor 3026
left upper cover 1347 models) 966
ejector unit 2492
lower bridge 1326 documentation, printer error
parts and diagrams 1341, 1344
main assembly 1 187 codes and messages
Ejector unit 1276, 1865, 2818
main assembly 2 396 WISE 968
Ejector1 1890
main exit CAM motor 1336 drive system 1, 69
ejector2 unit 1941
main exit unit 1334, 1338 cassette lift drive 1, 69
electrical parts layout
main frame assembly 510 drive motors 1, 69, 73
finisher system layout 1231,
main frame pickup 592 exit drive 1, 69, 72
2458
main frame pickup 1 572 feed drive 1, 69, 70
electrical specifications 1, 6, 15
main frame pickup 2 572 fuser release drive 1, 69, 72
electrical-mechanical
main output tray motor 1349 main drive unit motor 1, 69, 75
diagrams 1167
main output tray unit 1345 pickup drive 1, 69
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 141,
main PCA 1341 registration drive 1, 69, 71
143, 1231, 1314, 1317, 2458, 2502,
opt feed drive 909 toner reservoir drive 1, 76
2505
paddle 1340 toner reservoir drive [E876
Embedded Jetdirect error
paddle motor 1340 models only) 69
80.WX.YZ error 966, 968
paddle unit 1338 toner supply drive 1, 69, 76
end fence sensor 3024
paper holding motor 1349 Drive system
end fence unit 2487
paper holding unit 1345 parts and diagrams 569
PTB transfer 673 drivers, supported 1, 6
End fence unit 1268, 1598, 2885
reservoir 680 dual cassette feeder 1, 128
right door 600
Index 3039
engine exploded parts views, use parts finisher system paper path 1239,
diagnostics 966, 971, 979, 980 lists and diagrams 143 2463
engine error (LaserJet) finisher system PBA
46.WX.YZ error 966, 967 F connection 1239, 2463
63.WX.YZ error 966, 967 finisher system sectional
fan error
engine error (PageWide) view 1239, 2463
58.WX.YZ error 966, 967
61.WX.YZ error 966, 967 firmware communication error
Fax menu (fax models only), control
entrance motor 3018 49.WX.YZ error 966, 967
panel 966, 982, 1003, 1084
parts and diagrams 1330 firmware install error
feed drive 1, 69, 70
entrance motors A/B, end fence 99.WX.YZ error 966, 968
motor, buffer motor and sensor, hard disk error 966, 968
relationships diagram 1184
and diverter close sensor remote firmware upgrade
feed drive unit 293
(SSBM) error 966, 968
feed entrance sensor, and guide
electrical-mechanical flatbed scanner system
home sensor (SSBM)
relationships diagram 1212 overview 1, 76, 77
entrance unit 2473 flow ADF
parts and diagrams 1328, contact image sensor
feed roller
1330 (CIS) 795
multipurpose 406
Entrance unit 1328, 1463, 2539 contact image sensor (CIS)
Tray 1 406
eraser PCA 1, 101, 123 fan 819
feed sensor 621
error document feeder PCA fan 812
feeding system 1, 44
fault 966 document feeder white
cassette 1, 44, 50
ESD electrostatic discharge backing 226
main components and
(ESD) 141, 143, 1231, 1314, 1317, front motor 816
functions 1, 44, 45
2458, 2502, 2505 input tray 779
MP feeder assembly 1, 44, 52
event log 966, 982, 985 jam access cover 762
overview 1, 44
clear using touchscreen control rear motors 803
pickup assembly 51
panel 966, 982, 985 scan in lower assembly 823
pickup unit 1, 44
event log error (firmware) ultrasonic sensor with
registration unit 1, 44, 51
42.WX.YZ error 966, 967 PCA 751
rollers 1, 44, 45
exit 1 bin full sensor 381 Flow ADF (GX/sGX)
sensor, motor, and solenoid 1,
Exit assemblies parts and diagrams 743
44, 45, 47
parts and diagrams 495 Flow ADF image scanner (GX/sGX)
feeding system information 1, 44
exit cam home sensor, main parts and diagrams 840
FIH
paddle home sensor, paddle Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)
HP Foreign interface harness
motor, and exit motor (SSBM) parts and diagrams 788
(FIH) solution, install 410
electrical-mechanical Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)
finisher docking sensor 3017
relationships diagram 1223 parts and diagrams 761
finisher sectional view 1231, 2458
exit cover 175 flow ADF PCA 1, 101
finisher system 1231, 1239, 2458,
exit drive 1, 69, 72 flow ADF skew (LX du
2463
exit drive unit 300 models) 966
diagrams 1231, 2456
exit gate solenoid/motors/ Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)
each unit functions 1231, 2458
sensor 496 parts and diagrams 778
electrical parts layout 1231,
exit motor Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)
2458
parts and diagrams 1336 parts and diagrams 770
finisher sectional view 1231,
exit sensor 3019 flow document feeder
2458
exit unit 229, 2477 document feeder whole
paper path 1231, 2458
duplex 1 sensor 355 unit 745
PCA connection
electrical-mechanical flow document feeder PCA 125
information 1231, 2458
relationships diagram 1181 formatter 421
finisher system diagram 1239,
exit gate solenoid/motors/ locating 1, 2
2463
sensor 496 remove the formatter PCA 421
finisher system electrical
output 1 bin full sensor 381 remove the formatter PCA (du
parts 1239, 2463
return sensor 345 models) 418
Exit unit 2554 formatter (du models) 418
3040 Index
formatter hard disk drive 437 temperature control 1, 53, 55 high voltage power supply PCA 1,
remove the hard disk fuser unit drive 1, 53, 55 101, 121
drive 437 fuser unit temperature control 1, high voltage rear frame
formatter hard disk drive (du 53, 55 assembly 481
models) 434 home button is
remove the hard disk drive (du G unresponsive 966, 971, 974,
models) 434 977
General Settings menu, control
formatter lights 966, 971, 979 home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and
panel 966, 982, 1003, 1005
front cover empty sensor (DCF/HCI)
general specifications 1, 6, 15
open sensor 560 electrical-mechanical
glossary
front cover open sensor 560 relationships diagram 1206
terms and definitions
front cover switch 3030 HP Channel Services Network
front door H (CSN)
parts and diagrams 1323 Channel partners support 141
front jam cover hanress HP Foreign interface harness (FIH),
parts and diagrams 1352 parts and diagrams 1320 install 410
front power cover 154 hard disk drive (HDD) 198 HP internal users
front power switch 451 hard disk partition error WISE 141
Front tamper 1632, 2682 98.WX.YZ error 966, 968 HP Jetdirect print server
front tamper motor 3022 hardware configuration 1, 101 lights 966, 971, 979
front tamper sensor 3022 CCDM PCA 1, 101, 127 HVPS PCA 1, 101, 121
front top inner cover 183 eraser PCA 1, 101, 123 HVPS/LVPS/FDB diagram 1174
front unit flow ADF PCA 1, 101
electrical-mechanical flow document feeder I
relationships diagram 1194 PCA 125
image creation 1, 57
front view 2458 fuser drive assembly 1, 101,
imaging unit 1, 57, 58
front/rear home sensors and tray 120
overview 1, 57
open sensor (DCF/HCI) fuser PCA 1, 101, 124
paper transfer belt unit 1, 57,
electrical-mechanical high voltage power supply
58, 63
relationships diagram 1209 PCA 1, 101, 121
toner cartridge 1, 57, 58, 61
front/rear tamper motors, front/ low voltage power supply PCA
image quality
rear tamper home sensors, and (Type 3R) 1, 101, 116
black lines, vertical 966, 1140,
end-fence home sensor (SSBM) low voltage power supply PCA
1145
electrical-mechanical (Type 4) 1, 101, 118
blurred image 966, 1140, 1149
relationships diagram 1225 low voltage power supply PCA
flow ADF or ADF skew (LX du
fuser diagram 1167 (Type 5H) 1, 101, 114
models) 966
fuser drive assembly 1, 101, 120 LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 1, 101, 116
foggy image 966, 1140, 1150
fuser drive board 308 LVPS PCA (Type 4) 1, 101, 118
jagged characters, unclear
fuser drive unit 300 LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 1, 101, 114
characters, or blurred
fuser error main controller 1, 101, 103
text 1157
41.WX.YZ error 966, 967 master system operation
jitter image 966, 1140, 1152
laser scanner error 966, 967 key 1, 101, 103, 110
light image 966, 1140, 1151
paper path error 966, 967 scan joint PCA 1, 101, 126
light lines, vertical 966, 1140,
fuser error (LaserJet) WLED IF PCA 1, 101, 127
1146
50.WX.YZ error 966, 967 WLED PCA 1, 101, 128
periodic black dots,
fuser exit drive hardware integration pocket (HIP)
horizontal 966, 1140, 1148
electrical-mechanical is not functioning 966, 971,
periodic black lines,
relationships diagram 1183 974, 978
horizontal 966, 1140, 1148
fuser fan 319 HCI 1, 133
periodic light/dark dots,
fuser out sensor 616 HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)
horizontal 966, 1140, 1148
fuser PCA 1, 101, 124 electrical-mechanical
periodic light/dark lines,
fuser release drive 1, 69, 72 relationships diagram 1200
horizontal 966, 1140, 1148
fuser unit 1, 53, 237 high capacity input tray 1, 133
poor fusing 966, 1140, 1154
fuser unit drive 1, 53, 55 high voltage power supply (HVPS)
skewed image 966, 1140, 1153
overview 1, 53 board 191
Index 3041
stain on back side 966, 1140, output tray 2896 inner finisher PCA 2500
1155 output tray lower limit inner finisher remove and
standard tone, setting 966, switch 2912 replace 2506
1140, 1156 output tray motor 2944 input accessory error
uneven pitch 966, 1140, 1152 output tray motor 67.WX.YZ error 966, 967
white lines, vertical 966, 1140, assembly 2923 input/output error
1146 output tray motor 40.WX.YZ error 966, 967
image scanner assembly 210 sensor 2933 install
imaging drum unit 399 output tray top of stack HP Foreign interface harness
imaging unit 1, 57, 58 sensor 2902 (FIH) solution 410
developer unit 1, 57, 58, 60 paper holding 2956 interlocks
overview 1, 57, 58 paper holding sensor 2968 defeating 966, 971, 979, 980
individual component paper holding solenoid 2506, internal diagnostics error
diagnostics 966, 971, 979 2982 90.WX.YZ error 966, 968
inductor unit 467 paper support 2506 video display error 966, 968
information paper support home interpret control-panel messages
general 966, 1100, 1105 sensor 2506, 2618 and event log entries 1231,
print reports 966, 1100, 1105, paper support motor 2640 2443, 2458, 3014
1106 parts and diagrams 2507 IOD 429
software version 966, 1100, parts and diagrams - IOD (du models) 426
1105, 1106 covers 2509 island of data 429
supply status 966, 1100, 1105, parts and diagrams - ejector remove the island of data 429
1106 unit 2517 island of data (du models) 426
inner cover 160 parts and diagrams - paper remove the island of data (du
inner finisher support unit 2512 models) 426
block diagram 2458 parts and diagrams - sensor,
detailed specifications 2459 motor, and roller 2510 J
ejector & paper support parts and diagrams - stapler
jam error (LaserJet)
assembly 2818 unit 2516
13.WX.YZ error 966
ejector assembly 2506, 2861 parts and diagrams - tamper
jam error (PageWide)
ejector motor 2506 unit 2513, 2514
13.WX.YZ error 966
ejector motor assembly 2839 PCA cover 2528
jams
end fence home 2506 punch cover 3001
locations 966, 1094
end fence sensor 2886 punch waste full 2506
Jetdirect print server
entrance motor 2506, 2545 punch waste full sensor 3006
lights 966, 971, 979
entrance sensor 2506, 2539 rear cover 2520
job accounting error (firmware)
exir roller 2506 rear paper support 2506,
48.WX.YZ error 966, 967
exit motor 2506, 2570 2595
job management error
exit roller 2555 rear tamper 2737, 2755
(firmware) 966, 967
exit sensor 2506, 2562 rear tamper motor 2774
job pipeline error
front cover 2518 sensor 2506
(firmware) 966, 967
front paper support 2506, stacker lower limit
job parser error (firmware)
2573 switch 2506
47.WX.YZ error 966, 967
front tamper 2682 stacker motor 2506
printer calibration error 966,
front tamper home stapler 2506, 2792
967
sensor 2700 stapler position motor 2809
front tamper motor 2719 stapler position sensor 2506, K
left cover 2531 2797
main paddle 2506, 2662 sub paddle unit 2678 keyboard (z bundles) 444
main paddle assembly 2671 switch 2506 remove the keyboard 444
main paddle home top cover 2525 knife motor, stopper home sensor,
sensor 2665 inner finisher detailed and stopper solenoid and motor
main paddle motor 2668 specifications 2459 (SSBM)
middle cover 2522 inner finisher diagrams 2506 electrical-mechanical
motor 2506 inner finisher parts 2506 relationships diagram 1220
3042 Index
L low voltage power supply PCA main output tray unit
(Type 4) 1, 101, 118 parts and diagrams 1345
laser scanner assembly 1, 194
low voltage power supply PCA Main output tray unit 1279, 2018
laser scanning optical path 1,
(Type 5H) 1, 101, 114 main parts 152
67
lower bridge main PCA
overview 1
parts and diagrams 1326 parts and diagrams 1341
laser scanner assembly
lower rear cover 169 main PCAs (SSBM)
diagram 1169
LVPS board 1 312 electrical-mechanical
laser scanner error (LaserJet)
LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 1, 101, 116 relationships diagram 1210
51.WX.YZ error 966, 967
LVPS PCA (Type 4) 1, 101, 118 maintenance 141, 146
52.WX.YZ error 966, 967
LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 1, 101, 114 machine cleaning for
laser scanner unit 66
LVPS Type 4 402 maintenance 141, 146
laser scanning optical path 66
LVPS type 5H 315 preventive maintenance 146
overview 66
maintenance counts
LED lamp module 844
M part replacement count 966,
LEDs
1100, 1107
See lights machine cleaning for
maintenance parts 1, 6, 26
left cover 181 maintenance 141, 146
master system operation key 1,
left lower cover cleaning the ADF) 146
101, 103, 110
parts and diagrams 1348 cleaning the flow ADF white bar
memory error
left upper cover and CIS (GX ADF) 141
82.WX.YZ error 966, 968
parts and diagrams 1347 cleaning the flow ADF white bar
EMMC error 966, 968
level-1/2 front/rear sensors, and CIS (LX/du model) 141
hard disk error 966, 968
solenoid home sensor, and cleaning the paper dust
menu map 966, 982
solenoid (DCF/HCI) stick 141, 146
menus, control panel
electrical-mechanical cleaning the scan glass 141,
Calibrate/Cleaning 966, 982,
relationships diagram 1205 146
1003, 1092
lights Main assembly 1
Copy (MFP only) 966, 982,
formatter 966, 971, 979 parts and diagrams 187
1003, 1046
troubleshooting with 966, 971, main assembly 2
Fax (fax models only) 966,
979 parts and diagrams 396
982, 1003, 1084
limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, main board 337
General Settings 966, 982,
prefeed sensor, and paper main controller
1003, 1005
empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI) hardware configuration 1, 101,
Manage Trays 966, 982, 1003,
electrical-mechanical 103
1089
relationships diagram 1207 new model (IR/UI) 1, 101, 103,
Print 966, 982, 1003, 1088
limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed 106
Reports 966, 982, 1003
sensor, main limit and empty previous model 1, 101, 103
Scan 1055
sensors (DCF/HCI) main drive unit 273
Scan (MFP only) 966, 982,
electrical-mechanical main exit CAM motor
1003
relationships diagram 1204 parts and diagrams 1336
Supplies 966, 982, 1003, 1088
low voltage power supply (LVPS) main exit unit
motor error (LaserJet)
fans 463 parts and diagrams 1334,
59.WX.YZ error 966, 967
low voltage power supply (LVPS) 1338
MP solenoid 653
type 3 Main exit unit 1263, 1540
MP unit
LVPS type 3 312 Main frame assembly
low voltage power supply (LVPS) parts and diagrams 510
Type 4 Main frame pickup
MSOK 1, 101, 103, 110
LVPS Type 4 402 parts and diagrams 592
multipurpose feeder assembly 1,
low voltage power supply (LVPS) Main frame pickup 1
44, 52
type 5H parts and diagrams 572
LVPS type 5H 315 Main frame pickup 2
N
low voltage power supply PCA parts and diagrams 572
(Type 3R) 1, 101, 116 main output tray motor Near Field Communication error
parts and diagrams 1349 81.WX.YZ error 966, 968
Index 3043
Bluetooth error 966, 968 OXPd/Web kit error transfer belt drive 1, 57, 58, 63,
external I/O card error 966, 45.WX.YZ error 966, 967 65
968 parts 142, 1318, 2505
internal EIO error 966, 968 P use parts lists and
wireless error 966, 968 diagrams 143
paddle
network and software Parts
specifications 1, 6, 33 2000-sheet HCI cassette 927
paddle motor
network interface 1, 6, 33 2000-sheet HCI drive 912
NFC kit 411 2000-sheet HCI frame 928
paddle unit 2481
install 411 2000-sheet HCI main 911
no control panel sound 966, 971, 2000-sheet HCI pickup 934
Paddle unit 1266, 1566, 2661
974, 976 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
page error
note vi E82540/50/60 and
21.WX.YZ error 966
E87640/50/60 only)
paper detection sensor (SSBM)
O frame 964
OPC diagram 1172 relationships diagram 1211
E82540/50/60 and
OPE diagram 1169 paper dust brush 207
E87640/50/60 only) main
operating systems, supported 1, paper empty , path, limit-1, and path
1 935
6 sensors (DCF/HCI)
operating-environment range electrical-mechanical
E82540/50/60 and
printer 15 relationships diagram 1199
E87640/50/60 only) main
operational panel button PCA and paper empty and limit-2 sensors
3 944
entrance path sensor (SSBM) (DCF/HCI)
electrical-mechanical electrical-mechanical
E82540/50/60 and
relationships diagram 1222 relationships diagram 1198
E87640/50/60 only) main
Opt feed drive paper handling error (LaserJet)
5 960
parts and diagrams - 56.WX.YZ error 966, 967
drive 909 paper handling specifications 1,
E82540/50/60 and
option specifications 1, 6, 37, 40 6, 29
E87640/50/60 only) main
optional configurations 1, 6, 37 paper holding motor
6 961
options list 1, 6, 37, 38 parts and diagrams 1349
orderable parts 143, 1318, 2506 paper holding unit 2495
E82540/50/60 and
ordering 1231, 1314, 2458, 2502 parts and diagrams 1345
E87640/50/60 only) pickup
other errors Paper holding unit 1281, 2076,
cover unit 962
drive unit 966, 1140 2956
ADF (LX models) 687
electrical circuit 966, 1140 paper jams
ADF exterior and ADF pickup(LX
feeding system 966, 1140 locations 966, 1094
models) 718
flow ADF 966, 1140 paper path
ADF lower image scanner 855
fuser 966, 1140 finisher system 1231, 2458
ADF main frame assembly (LX
image system 966, 1140 paper size sensor 904
models) 729
laser scanner assembly 966, Paper size sensor 479
booklet blade 1367
1140 paper size sensors (DCF/HCI)
booklet blade motor 1367
scanner 966, 1140 electrical-mechanical
booklet c-fold blade 1361
output accessory error relationships diagram 1199
booklet c-fold motor 1363
66.WX.YZ error 966, 967 paper support motor 3021
booklet diverter 1361
output tray 2495 paper support sensor 3021
booklet diverter motor 1363
output tray motor 3027 paper support unit 2479
booklet diverter unit 1359
Output tray motor Paper support unit 2573
booklet end fence unit 1370
assembly 2922 paper transfer belt 674
booklet entrance 1356
output tray motor sensor 3027 paper transfer belt unit 1, 57, 58,
booklet entrance unit 1355
Output tray top of stack 63
booklet entrance-presser
sensor 3028 cleaning blade 1, 57, 58, 63, 65
motor 1356
Output tray unit 2895 overview 1, 57, 58, 63
booklet exit 1361
booklet exit unit 1359
3044 Index
booklet fold motor 1363 main PCA 1341 pick/feed separation roller 594
booklet fold roller 1365 opt feed drive 909 pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and
booklet fold unit 1359 paddle 1340 feed motor (DCF/HCI)
booklet maker 1353 paddle motor 1340 electrical-mechanical
booklet maker base 1372 paddle unit 1338 relationships diagram 1207
booklet paddle unit 1369 paper holding motor 1349 pickup assembly 51
booklet presser unit 1355 paper holding unit 1345 pickup drive 1, 69
booklet stapler unit 1357 paper support unit-inner electrical-mechanical
booklet tamper unit 1358 finisher 2512 relationships diagram 1185
bridge unit 1324, 1326 PTB transfer 673 pickup drive Tray 3 or motor 270
buffer diverter 1352 reservoir 680 pickup drive unit 1 266
buffer unit 1350 right door 600 pickup lift motors, feed motor, and
cassettes tray 2/3 507 right door exit 670 cover open sensor (DCF/HCI)
cover 1320 right door guide 667 electrical-mechanical
covers 152 right door takeaway 670 relationships diagram 1196
covers-inner finisher 2509 right upper cover 1323 pickup lifting and empty
DCF frame 897 ssensor, motor, and roller-inner sensor 573, 582
DCF rear frame 903 finisher 2510 pickup roller
DCF second pickup 910 stapler unit 1341 ADF 771
drive system 569 stapler unit-inner finisher 2516 pickup unit 1, 44
Dual cassette feeder DCF 873 tamper unit 1341, 1342 electrical-mechanical
ejector unit 1341, 1344 tamper unit-inner relationships diagram 1176
ejector unit-inner finisher 2517 finisher 2513, 2514 pickup unit 1 245
end fence unit 1338 top cover 1323 pickup lifting and empty
entrance motor 1330 top door 1323 sensor 573
entrance unit 1328, 1330 top exit unit 1334 prefeed sensor 1 371
exit assemblies 495 top lower cover 1336 pickup unit 2 254
exit motor 1336 top output tray unit 1334 pickup lifting and empty
flow ADF (GX/sGX) 743 tray 1 652 sensor 582
flow ADF image scanner (GX/ Tray diverter CAM 1333 prefeed sensor 2 364
sGX) 840 tray diverter unit 1331 plastic latches information 1231,
flow ADF main frame (GX/ tray jam cover 1333 1314, 1316, 2502, 2504
sGX) 788 upper bridge 1324 post-service tests 141, 143, 145,
flow ADF open cover (GX/ parts and accessories 1231, 1314, 1231, 1314, 1318, 2458, 2502, 2505
sGX) 761 2458, 2502 power
flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) 778 parts and diagrams 141 consumption 1, 6, 15
flow ADF upper pickup (GX/ parts and diagrams, using 143 power subsystem 966, 971
sGX) 770 parts list and diagrams, how to power supply
front door 1323 use 143 troubleshooting 966, 971, 972
front jam cover 1352 parts, main 152 power-on troubleshooting
hanress 1320 parts, order by authorized service overview 966, 971, 972
inner finisher 2507 providers 142, 1318, 2505 pre-boot menu options 966, 982,
left lower cover 1348 parts, orderable 143, 1318, 2506 985
left upper cover 1347 parts, ordering 142, 1318, 2505 precations
lower bridge 1326 PCA 2425 information 1231, 1314, 2502
main assembly 1 187 PCA connection information 1310 precautions
main assembly 2 396 finisher system 1231, 2458 replacing parts 143, 1315, 2502
main exit CAM motor 1336 PCA precautions 1231, 1314, 1316, prefeed sensor 1 371
main exit unit 1334, 1338 2502, 2503 prefeed sensor 2 364
main frame assembly 510 PCA-ADF sGX (dn models preservice checklist 141, 143, 145,
main frame pickup 592 only) 829 1231, 1314, 1317, 2458, 2502, 2504
main frame pickup 1 572 pick roller press home sensor, tamper home
main frame pickup 2 572 document feeder (LX) 723 sensor, paper detect sensor,
main output tray motor 1349 multipurpose 406
main output tray unit 1345 Tray 1 406
Index 3045
tamper motor, press motor, and registration pickup diagram 1170 high voltage rear frame
feed motor (SSBM) registration sensor assembly assembly 481
electrical-mechanical and/or cable 521 inductor unit 467
relationships diagram 1217 registration unit 1, 44, 51 inner cover 160
print bar error (PageWide) electrical-mechanical laser scanner assembly 194
62.WX.YZ error 966, 967 relationships diagram 1176 left cover 181
print drivers, supported 1, 6 relationships, electrical- low voltage power supply (LVPS)
Print menu, control panel 966, mechanical fans 463
982, 1003, 1088 diagrams 1174 lower rear cover 169
print quality removal and replacement 141 main board 337
test 141, 143, 145, 1231, 1314, removal and replacement booklet main drive unit 273
1318, 2458, 2502, 2505 finisher 1318 paper dust brush 207
print quality troubleshooting 966, removal and replacement inner pickup drive Tray 3 or
1140 finisher 2506 motor 270
flow ADF skew adjust 966 removal and replacement pickup drive unit 1 266
image quality 966, 1140 precautions 1231, 1314, 2502 pickup unit 1 245
other errors 966, 1140 removal order pickup unit 2 254
print specifications 1, 6, 18 removing order 141, 143, 145, registration assembly 511
Print Test Page 966, 982, 1003, 146, 1318, 2505 registration drive
1005 removing parts assembly 289
printer checklists 141, 143, 145, 1231, registration sensor assembly
dimensions 1, 6, 14 1314, 1317, 2458, 2502, 2504 and/or cable 521
operating-environment replacement of maintenance parts reservoir 681
range 15 developer unit 201 reservoir unit 326
weight 1, 6, 14 flow ADF pickup roller right door 262
printer memory error assembly 771 right door dampener 543
20.WX.YZ error 966 flow ADF separation roller right door switch
Process Cleaning Page 966, 982, assembly 790 assembly 472
1003, 1092 fuser unit 237 right rear cover 166
product number image scanner assembly 210 toner collection unit 205
locating 1, 2 imaging drum unit 399 toner collection unit (TCU)
PTB transfer paper transfer belt 674 sensors 536
parts and diagrams 673 pick/feed separation toner supply drive 280
punch unit 1256, 2470 roller 594 Tray 1 drive unit 293
Punch unit 1468, 3001 Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed tray closing unit 532
punch waste box sensor 3017 roller 406 upper left cover 178
Punch waste full sensor 3016 replacing parts upper rear cover 171
precautions 143, 1315, 2502 upper right door cover 612
R replacing the main SVC part Reports menu, control panel 966,
bridge unit 449 982, 1003
real-time clock error
CRUM connector 455 Reservoir
11.WX.YZ error 966
exit cover 175 parts and diagrams 680
Rear paper support 2595
exit drive unit 300 reservoir assembly 681
Rear tamper 1708, 2737
exit unit 229 reservoir unit 326
rear tamper motor 3023
feed drive unit 293 return sensor 345
rear tamper sensor 3023
feed sensor 621 reverse roller
rear unit
front power cover 154 ADF 790
front power switch 451 document feeder (LX) 731
front top inner cover 183 multipurpose 406
rear view 2458
fuser drive board 308 Tray 1 406
registration assembly 511
fuser drive unit 300 revision history iii
registration drive 1, 69, 71
fuser fan 319 right door 262
hard disk drive (HDD) 198 fuser out sensor 616
high voltage power supply Tray 1 door 602
registration drive assembly 289
(HVPS) board 191 Tray 1 empty sensor 629
3046 Index
Tray 1 paper length service approach 141, 143, 1231, software and solutions 1, 6, 33,
sensor 639 1314, 2458, 2502 35
Tray 1 solenoid 653 precautions 143, 1315, 2502 software specifications 1, 6,
Right door service functions 33
parts and diagrams 600 capture log 966, 1100, 1137 supplies 1, 6, 25
right door dampener 543 debug log 966, 1100, 1137 stacker finisher 1231
Right door exit envelope rotate 966, 1100, Stacker finisher 1239
parts and diagrams 670 1137, 1139 standard (du bundles) document
right door guide main memory clear 966, 1100, feeder
electrical-mechanical 1137 document feeder white
relationships diagram 1190 transfer assembly backing 223
Right door guide control 966, 1100, 1137, 1138 standard (LX models) document
parts and diagrams 667 service mode 966, 1100 feeder
right door output takeaway diagnostics 966, 1100, 1108 document feeder whole
electrical-mechanical entering service mode 966, unit 688
relationships diagram 1192 1100 standard (LX) document feeder
right door switch assembly 472 information 966, 1100, 1105 document feeder (ADF)
Right door takeaway maintenance counts 966, PCA 719
parts and diagrams 670 1100, 1107 document feeder feed
right rear cover 166 mode menu tree 966, 1100, motor 738
right upper cover 1101 standard (LX) document feeder
parts and diagrams 1323 service functions 966, 1100, (ADF)
1137 contact image sensor
S sHCI 1, 137 (CIS) 701
side high capacity input (sHCI) document feeder (ADF) jam
scan glass 842
feed motor 949 access cover (LX) 693
scan joint PCA 1, 101, 126
lift-up motor 953 standard (LX/du model) document
Scan menu (MFP only), control
pickup motor 945 feeder
panel 966, 982, 1003
rear cover 936 document feeder main
Scan menu, control panel 1055
sHCI PCA 939 motor 711
scan specifications 1, 6, 21
side high capacity input tray 1, stapler finisher 1231
scanner
137 Stapler finisher 1239
caution for moving 1, 76, 85
side unit stapler position motor 3025
CDD and lens 857
electrical-mechanical stapler position sensor 3025
scanner glass 842
relationships diagram 1178, stapler unit 2489
scanner assembly - CDD and
1188 parts and diagrams 1341
lens 857
size sensor 479, 904 Stapler unit 1785, 2792
scanner diagram 1168
software and solutions 1, 6, 33, 35 Stapler unit (booklet) 2281
scanner error
solve problems stapler-stacker finisher
30.WX.YZ error 966
control panel messages 966 detailed specifications 1233
scanning system
CPMD 966 stapler-stacker finisher and
components 1, 76, 79
specifications 1, 6 booklet maker
scanning system components 1,
copy specifications 1, 6, 23 detailed specifications 1233
76, 79
electrical and acoustic 1, 6, 15 stapler/stacker diagrams 1319
security error
general specifications 1, 6, 15 stapler/stacker parts 1319
33.WX.YZ error 966, 967
maintenance parts 1, 6, 26 static, precautions for 141, 143,
sensor error
network interface 1, 6, 33 1231, 1314, 1317, 2458, 2502, 2505
54.WX.YZ error 966, 967
network specifications 1, 6, 33 supplies 1231, 1314, 2458, 2502
58.WX.YZ error 966, 967
options 1, 6, 37 supplies error (LaserJet)
serial number
options list 1, 6, 37, 38 10.WX.YZ error 966
locating 1, 2
paper handling supplies error (PageWide)
service and support
specifications 1, 6, 29 17.WX.YZ error 966
WISE 141
print specifications 1, 6, 18 Supplies menu, control
service and support information
scan specifications 1, 6, 21 panel 966, 982, 1003, 1088
WISE and CSN 141
Index 3047
system error (LaserJet) touchscreen blank, white, or dim unit, bridge 449
62.WX.YZ error 966, 967 (no image) 966, 971, 974, 975 upper bridge
system requirements touchscreen has an unresponsive parts and diagrams 1324
minimum 1, 6 zone 966, 971, 974, 975 upper left cover 178
Tray 1 upper rear cover 171
T jams, clearing 966, 1094 upper right door cover 612
parts and diagrams 652 upper/lower paper low sensors
tamper unit 2484
Tray 1 door 602 (DCF/HCI)
parts and diagrams 1341, 1342
Tray 1 drive unit 293 electrical-mechanical
Tamper unit 1270, 1273, 1632,
Tray 1 empty sensor 629 relationships diagram 1208
2682
Tray 1 paper length sensor 639 USB diagram 1169
terms and definitions
Tray 2 Use Requested Tray 966, 982,
glossary
jams, clearing 966, 1094 1003, 1005
tests
Tray 3
post-service 141, 143, 145, 1231,
jams, clearing 966, 1094 W
1314, 1318, 2458, 2502, 2505
tray closing unit 532
print-quality 141, 143, 145, 1231, warning vi
Tray diverter CAM
1314, 1318, 2458, 2502, 2505 Web-based Interactive Search
tip vi Engine
tray diverter unit
toner cartridge 1, 57, 58, 61 WISE 141
dynamic security 63 Web-based Interactive Search
Tray diverter unit 1259, 1331, 1474
toner collection unit 205 Engine (WISE)
tray jam cover
toner collection unit (TCU) HP internal users and Channel
sensors 536 partners 141
tray motor error (LaserJet)
toner supply drive weight
60.WX.YZ error 966, 967
electrical-mechanical accessories 1, 6, 14
tray selection - use requested
relationships diagram 1174 printer 1, 6, 14
tray 966, 982, 1003, 1005
toner supply drive unit 280 WISE
tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU
top cover CPMD 968
home detect sensor, and stack
parts and diagrams 1323 HP internal users and Channel
beam in/out sensors (SSBM)
top cover switch 3029 partners 141
top door Web-based Interactive Search
parts and diagrams 1323 Engine 141
trays
top door sensor, fold motor, and WLED IF PCA 1, 101, 127
jams, clearing 966, 1094
knife home position sensor WLED PCA 1, 101, 128
Trays menu, control panel 966,
(SSBM) working table
982, 1003, 1089
electrical-mechanical card reader 411
troubleshooting
relationships diagram 1221 NFC kit 411
checklist 966, 982
top exit unit WTB diagram 1172
control panel checks 966, 971,
974
Top exit unit 1261, 1501
lights, using 966, 971, 979
top lower cover
power 966, 971, 972
process 966, 971
Top output tray unit 1262, 1527
troubleshooting tools
top output tray unitr
control panel messages 966
CPMD 966
top-beam out sensor, stack motor,
and SKU motor (SSBM)
U
relationships diagram 1213 understand lights on the formatter
top-exit path and compile-exit path formatter lights 966, 971, 979
sensors (SSBM) understand the lights on the
electrical-mechanical formatter
relationships diagram 1219 HP Jetdirect LEDs 966, 971,
979
3048 Index

Manual 82560 XXXX en US 6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual 82560 XXXX en US 6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual 82560 XXXX en US 6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540 Series

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82550 Series

© Copyright 2022 HP Development

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation

The information contained herein is subject

The only warranties for HP products and

Edition 21.3, 9/2023

View a list of document revisions.

Table Revision History

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

21.3 September, 2023 Add footnote to Booklet Maker speed.

13.0 April, 2021 Part number updates and general edits.

12.0 May, 2020 Part number updates and general edits.

11.0 April, 2020 SRM migration to SDL Tridion Docs.

Part number updates and general edits.

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Added electrical-mechanical diagrams content. See Electrical-mechanical relationships

5.0 September, 2018 Added/updated E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series content.

Added or updated repair topics for the E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series:

● Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX) on page 688

● Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS) on page 701

● Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner (LX) on page 719

● Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX) on page 223

● Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD) on page 426

● HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540du-E82560du - Removal and replacement:

Minor content edits (including graphics)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

3.0 November, 2017 Added formatter cabling content

Added Scan in Low remove and replace procedure

Updated code data for Diagnostics and Service Functions

Updated R&R TOC level to 1.

Replaced references to SAW with WISE and removed QR codes.

Replaced Samsung Paper Jam content with the UG content

Moved specifications out of the appendix to the Product Specifications chapter

Replaced the glossary with the updated glossary from Topaz

Removed the Samsung precaution sections

Updated variable list items to refer only to Diamond

Updated part numbers, part descriptions, diagrams, and photos

2.0 July, 2017 Updated TOC to only consist of 3 levels

Add error code and CPMD overview

Added “How to search for documentation” section.

Updated toner average yield data

Remove all occurrences of ITB

Changed all occurrences of #2 Phillips to #2 JIS

1.0 April, 2017 Service manual initial release

Learn about the conventions used in this publication.

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

vi Conventions used in this guide

1 Product specifications and description............................................................................................................................................................................... 1

2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement................................................................................................................................................................. 141

5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) ............................................................................................................................................................. 1231

6 Inner finisher ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2458

Appendix A Certificate of Volatility....................................................................................................................................................................................3031

Glossary of terms ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0

You will learn more about the following sub sections:

Printer front view

Figure 1-1 Printer front view

1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)